Table of Contents

AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON March 23, 2016

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

Form 20-F

 

 

(Mark One)

 

¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2015

or

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

for the transition period from            to             

or

 

¨ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report

Commission file number 1-16055

 

 

PEARSON PLC

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

England and Wales

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

80 Strand

London, England WC2R 0RL

(Address of principal executive offices)

Stephen Jones

Telephone: +44 20 7010 2000

Fax: +44 20 7010 6060

80 Strand

London, England WC2R 0RL

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile Number and Address of Company Contact Person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of Class

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered

*Ordinary Shares, 25p par value   New York Stock Exchange
American Depositary Shares, each   New York Stock Exchange
Representing One Ordinary Share, 25p per Ordinary Share  

 

 

 

* Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of American Depositary Shares, pursuant to the requirements of the SEC.

 

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

 

 

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

None

 

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock at the close of the period covered by the annual report:

 

Ordinary Shares, 25p par value

     821,068,559   

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.    Yes   x     No   ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes   ¨     No   x

Note — Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports) and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes   ¨     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated file” and “large accelerated filer”, in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

x   Large accelerated filer                          ¨   Accelerated filer                              ¨   Non-accelerated filer

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing

 

¨   US GAAP

  

x   International financial Reporting Standards as Issued

by the International Accounting Standards Board

  ¨   Other

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the Registrant has elected to follow:    Item 17   ¨     Item 18   ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act):    Yes   ¨     No   x

 

 

 


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

          Page  
   Introduction      3   
   Forward-Looking Statements      4   
   PART I   

Item 1.

   Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers      5   

Item 2.

   Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable      5   

Item 3.

   Key Information      5   
   Selected Consolidated Financial Data      5   
   Dividend Information      6   
   Exchange Rate Information      7   
   Risk Factors      8   

Item 4.

   Information on the Company      14   
   Pearson plc      14   
   Overview      14   
   Recent Developments      14   
   Our Strategy      15   
   Operating Divisions      16   
   Operating Cycles      19   
   Competition      20   
   Intellectual Property      20   
   Raw Materials      20   
   Government Regulation      20   
   Licenses, Patents and Contracts      20   
   Legal Proceedings      21   
   Organizational Structure      21   
   Property, Plant and Equipment      21   
   Capital Expenditures      22   

Item 4A.

   Unresolved Staff Comments      22   

Item 5.

   Operating and Financial Review and Prospects      23   
   General Overview      23   
   Results of Operations      27   
   Liquidity and Capital Resources      45   
   Accounting Principles      48   

Item 6.

   Directors, Senior Management and Employees      49   
   Directors and Senior Management      49   
   Compensation of Senior Management      53   
   Share Options of Senior Management      61   
   Share Ownership of Senior Management      61   
   Employee Share Ownership Plans      62   
   Board Practices      63   
   Employees      64   

Item 7.

   Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions      64   

Item 8.

   Financial Information      65   

Item 9.

   The Offer and Listing      65   

Item 10.

   Additional Information      66   
   Articles of Association      66   
   Material Contracts      72   
   Exchange Controls      72   
   Tax Considerations      73   
   Documents on Display      75   

 

1


Table of Contents
          Page  

Item 11.

   Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk      76   
   Introduction      76   
   Interest Rates      76   
   Currency Exchange Rates      77   
   Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts      77   
   Derivatives      78   
   Quantitative Information about Market Risk      78   

Item 12.

   Description of Securities Other Than Equity Securities      78   
   American Depositary Shares      78   
   Fees paid by ADR holders      78   
   Fees incurred in past annual period and fees to be paid in the future      79   

PART II

  

Item 13.

   Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies      81   

Item 14.

   Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds      81   

Item 15.

   Controls and Procedures      81   
   Disclosure Controls and Procedures      81   
   Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting      81   
   Change in Internal Control over Financial Reporting      81   

Item 16A.

   Audit Committee Financial Expert      81   

Item 16B.

   Code of Ethics      82   

Item 16C.

   Principal Accountant Fees and Services      82   

Item 16D.

   Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees      82   

Item 16E.

   Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchases      83   

Item 16F.

   Change in Registrant’s Certifying Auditor      83   

Item 16G.

   Corporate Governance      83   

Item 16H.

   Mine Safety Disclosure      83   
PART III   

Item 17.

   Financial Statements      84   

Item 18.

   Financial Statements      84   

Item 19.

   Exhibits      84   

 

2


Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION

In this Annual Report on Form 20-F (the “Annual Report”) references to “Pearson”, the “Company” or the “Group” are references to Pearson plc, its predecessors and its consolidated subsidiaries, except as the context otherwise requires. “Ordinary Shares” refer to the ordinary share capital of Pearson of par value 25p each. “ADSs” refer to American Depositary Shares which are Ordinary Shares deposited pursuant to the Second Amended and Restated Deposit Agreement dated August 15, 2014, amended and restated as of August 8, 2000 among Pearson, The Bank of New York Mellon as depositary (the “Depositary”) and owners and holders of ADSs (the “Deposit Agreement”). ADSs are represented by American Depositary Receipts (“ADRs”) delivered by the Depositary under the terms of the Deposit Agreement.

We have prepared the financial information contained in this Annual Report in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) which in respect of the accounting standards applicable to the Group do not differ from IFRS as adopted by the European Union (“EU”). Unless we indicate otherwise, any reference in this Annual Report to our consolidated financial statements is to the consolidated financial statements and the related notes, included elsewhere in this Annual Report.

We publish our consolidated financial statements in sterling. We have included, however, references to other currencies. In this Annual Report:

 

   

references to “sterling”, “pounds”, “pence” or “£” are to the lawful currency of the United Kingdom,

 

   

references to “euro” or “€” are to the euro, the lawful currency of the participating Member States in the Third Stage of the European Economic and Monetary Union of the Treaty Establishing the European Commission, and

 

   

references to “US dollars”, “dollars”, “cents” or “$” are to the lawful currency of the United States.

For convenience and except where we specify otherwise, we have translated some sterling figures into US dollars at the rate of £1.00 = $1.47, the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers and foreign currencies as certified by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for customs purposes on December 31, 2015. We do not make any representation that the amounts of sterling have been, could have been or could be converted into dollars at the rates indicated. On February 29, 2016 the noon buying rate for sterling was £1.00 = $1.39.

The Group currently consists of its education business, plus a 47% interest in the consumer publishing business Penguin Random House. See “Item 4. Information on the Company — Overview of operating divisions”.

 

3


Table of Contents

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

You should not rely unduly on forward-looking statements in this Annual Report. This Annual Report, including the sections entitled “Item 3. Key Information — Risk Factors”, “Item 4. Information on the Company” and “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects”, contains forward-looking statements that relate to future events or our future financial performance. In some cases, you can identify forward-looking statements by terms such as “may”, “will”, “should”, “expect”, “intend”, “plan”, “anticipate”, “believe”, “estimate”, “predict”, “potential”, “continue” or the negative of these terms or other comparable terminology. Examples of these forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, statements regarding the following:

 

   

operations and prospects,

 

   

growth strategy,

 

   

funding needs and financing resources,

 

   

expected financial position,

 

   

market risk,

 

   

currency risk,

 

   

US federal and state spending patterns,

 

   

debt levels, and

 

   

general market and economic conditions.

These forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause our or our industry’s actual results, levels of activity, performance or achievements to be materially different from any future results, levels of activity, performance or achievements expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements. In evaluating them, you should consider various factors, including the risks outlined under “Item 3. Key Information — Risk Factors”, which may cause actual events or our industry’s results to differ materially from those expressed or implied by any forward-looking statement. Although we believe that the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot guarantee future results, levels of activity, performance or achievements.

 

4


Table of Contents

PART I

 

ITEM 1. IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 2. OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 3. KEY INFORMATION

Selected consolidated financial data

The table below shows selected consolidated financial data under IFRS as issued by the IASB. The selected consolidated income statement data for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013 and the selected consolidated balance sheet data as at December 31, 2015 and 2014 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included in “Item 18. Financial Statements” in this Annual Report.

On July 23, 2015, Pearson announced the sale of The Financial Times to Nikkei Inc. The transaction completed on November 30, 2015 and from that point Pearson no longer consolidated The Financial Times’ results or net assets. The results of The Financial Times have been included in discontinued operations for all years through to 2014 and for the 11 months to November 30, 2015.

On August 11, 2015, Pearson announced the sale of its 50% stake in The Economist Group. The transaction substantially completed on October 16, 2015 and from that point Pearson no longer had significant influence over The Economist Group. The share of profit after tax from the associate interest in the Economist Group has been included in discontinued operations for all years through to 2014 and for the period until October 16, 2015.

On November 29, 2013, Pearson announced the sale of the Mergermarket group which completed on February 4, 2014. The anticipated loss of control as at December 31, 2013 resulted in the Mergermarket business being classified as held for sale on the Pearson balance sheet at December 31, 2013. The results of the Mergermarket business have been included in discontinued operations for all the years through to 2014.

In October 2012, Pearson and Bertelsmann entered into an agreement to create a new consumer publishing business by combining Penguin and Random House. The transaction completed on July 1, 2013 and from that point, Pearson no longer controlled the Penguin Group of companies. Pearson accounts for its 47% associate interest in Penguin Random House on an equity basis. The loss of control resulted in the Penguin business being classified as held for sale on the Pearson balance sheet at December 31, 2012. The results of Penguin have been included in discontinued operations for all years through to 2012 and the first six months of 2013. The share of profit after tax from our associate interest in Penguin Random House from July 1, 2013 is included in operating profit from continuing operations.

The selected consolidated financial information should be read in conjunction with “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes appearing elsewhere in this Annual Report. The information provided below is not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected from future operations.

 

5


Table of Contents

For convenience, we have translated the 2015 amounts into US dollars at the rate of £1.00 = $1.47, the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers and foreign currencies as certified by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for customs purposes on December 31, 2015.

 

    Year Ended December 31  
    2015     2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
    $     £     £     £     £     £  
    (In millions, except for per share amounts)  

Consolidated Income Statement data

           

Sales operating

    6,568        4,468        4,540        4,728        4,615        4,390   

(Loss)/profit

    (594     (404     348        431        469        638   

(Loss)/profit after taxation from continuing operations

    (517     (352     199        270        237        423   

Profit for the financial year

    1,210        823        470        539        314        945   

Consolidated Earnings data per share

           

Basic earnings per equity share(1)

    148.8        101.2p        58.1p        66.6p        38.7p        118.2p   

Diluted earnings per equity share(2)

    148.8        101.2p        58.0p        66.5p        38.6p        118.0p   

Basic earnings from continuing operations per equity share(1)

    (0.64     (43.3 )p      24.7p        33.3p        29.1p        53.0p   

Diluted earnings from continuing operations per equity share(2)

    (0.64     (43.3 )p      24.6p        33.3p        29.0p        52.9p   

Dividends per ordinary share

    0.76        52.0p        51.0p        48.0p        45.0p        42.0p   

Consolidated Balance Sheet data at period end

           

Total assets (non-current assets plus current assets)

    17,103        11,635        11,397        10,931        11,348        11,244   

Net assets

    9,434        6,418        5,985        5,706        5,710        5,962   

Long-term obligations(3)

    (4,866     (3,310     (3,225     (2,829     (3,175     (3,192

Capital stock

    301        205        205        205        204        204   

Number of equity shares outstanding (millions of ordinary shares)

    821        821        820        819        817        816   

 

Notes:

(1) Basic earnings per equity share is based on profit for the financial period and the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period.
(2) Diluted earnings per equity share is based on diluted earnings for the financial period and the diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period. Diluted earnings comprise earnings adjusted for the tax benefit on the conversion of share options by employees and the weighted average number of ordinary shares adjusted for the dilutive effect of share options. There is no dilution in 2015 due to there being a loss from continuing operations.
(3) Long-term obligations comprise any liabilities with a maturity of more than one year, including medium and long-term borrowings, derivative financial instruments, pension obligations and deferred income tax liabilities.

Dividend information

We pay dividends to holders of ordinary shares on dates that are fixed in accordance with the guidelines of the London Stock Exchange. Our board of directors normally declares an interim dividend in July or August of each year to be paid in September or October. Our board of directors normally recommends a final dividend following the end of the fiscal year to which it relates, to be paid in the following May or June, subject to shareholders’ approval at our annual general meeting. At our annual general meeting on April 29, 2016 our shareholders will be asked to approve a final dividend of 34.0p per ordinary share for the year ended December 31, 2015.

 

6


Table of Contents

The table below sets forth the amounts of interim, final and total dividends paid in respect of each fiscal year indicated, and is translated into cents per ordinary share at the noon buying rate in The City of New York on each of the respective payment dates for interim and final dividends. The final dividend for the 2015 fiscal year will be paid on May 1, 2016 (subject to shareholder approval),

 

Fiscal year

   Interim      Final      Total      Interim      Final     Total  
     (Pence per ordinary share)      (Cents per ordinary share)  

2015

     18.0         34.0         52.0         27.8         52.0     79.8

2014

     17.0         34.0         51.0         27.6         51.5        79.1   

2013

     16.0         32.0         48.0         25.4         54.0        79.4   

2012

     15.0         30.0         45.0         24.3         46.7        71.0   

2011

     14.0         28.0         42.0         22.1         45.2        67.3   

 

* As the 2015 final dividend had not been paid by the filing date, the dividend has been translated into cents using the noon buying rate for sterling at December 31, 2015.

Future dividends will be dependent on our future earnings, financial condition and cash flow, as well as other factors affecting the Group.

Exchange rate information

The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, information concerning the noon buying rate for sterling, expressed in dollars per pound sterling. The average rate is calculated by using the average of the noon buying rates in The City of New York on each day during a monthly period and on the last day of each month during an annual period. On December 31, 2015 the noon buying rate for cable transfers and foreign currencies as certified by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for customs purposes for sterling was £1.00 = $1.47. On February 29, 2016 the noon buying rate for sterling was £1.00 = $1.39.

 

Month

   High      Low  

February 2016

   $ 1.46       $ 1.39   

January 2016

   $ 1.47       $ 1.42   

December 2015

   $ 1.52       $ 1.47   

November 2015

   $ 1.54       $ 1.50   

October 2015

   $ 1.55       $ 1.52   

September 2015

   $ 1.56       $ 1.51   

 

Year Ended December 31

   Average rate  

2015

   $ 1.53   

2014

   $ 1.65   

2013

   $ 1.57   

2012

   $ 1.59   

2011

   $ 1.61   

 

7


Table of Contents

Risk factors

You should carefully consider the risk factors described below, as well as the other information included in the rest of this document. Our business, financial condition or results from operations could be materially adversely affected by any or all of these risks, or by other risks that we presently cannot identify.

The pace and scope of our business transformation initiatives increase the execution risk that benefits may not be fully realised, costs of these changes may increase, or that our business as usual activities do not perform in line with expectations.

We are currently engaged in restructuring the business. The pace and scope of change increases the risk that not all these changes will deliver within anticipated timeframes, or that the costs of these changes may increase. In addition, as a result of the increased pressure of transformational change, our business as usual activities may not perform in line with our plans or our level of customer service may not meet expectations. In parallel with the business transformation as we respond to the digital revolution and shift from a product to a services business, we will continue to look at opportunities to develop business models and further refine organisation structures.

Risk related to data quality and integrity may lead to noncompliance with legal and other requirements which could damage our business.

Unavailability of timely, complete and accurate data limits informed decision-making and increases risk of non-compliance with legal, regulatory and reporting requirements. Business change and transformation success is dependent on migration of a significant number of datasets.

Global economy and cyclical market factors may adversely impact our financial performance.

With the continued pressure and uncertainty in the worldwide economies, there remains a risk of a weakening in trading conditions, which could adversely impact our future financial performance. The effect of continued deterioration or lack of recovery in the global economy will vary across our different businesses and will depend on the depth, length and severity of any economic downturn. The education market can be affected by cyclical factors, which may lead to a reduction in demand for our products and service.

Failure to successfully invest in and deliver the right products and services and respond to competitive threats could result in lower than expected revenues and profits.

A common trend facing all our businesses is the digitization of content and proliferation of distribution channels, either over the internet, or via other electronic means, replacing traditional print formats. The digital migration brings the need for change in product and content distribution, consumers’ perception of value and the publisher’s position between consumers, retailers and authors.

This is a highly competitive market that is subject to rapid change. We face competitive threats both from large media players and from smaller businesses, online and mobile portals and operators in the digital arena that provide alternative sources of content. New distribution channels, e.g. digital format, the internet, online retailers, growing delivery platforms (e.g., e-readers or tablets), pose both threats and opportunities to our traditional publishing business models, potentially impacting both sales volumes and pricing.

Students are seeking cheaper sources of content, e.g. online discounters, file sharing, use of pirated copies, and rentals, along with open source. This change in behavior puts downward pressure on textbook prices in our major markets, and this could adversely impact our results.

If we do not adapt rapidly to these changes we may lose business to ‘faster’ and more ‘agile’ competitors, who increasingly are non-traditional competitors, making their identification all the more difficult. We may be required to invest significant resources to further adapt to the changing competitive environment.

 

8


Table of Contents

Changes in government policy and/or regulations have the potential to impact our business model and/or decisions across all markets.

Our educational services and assessment businesses may be adversely affected by changes in government funding resulting from either trends that are beyond our direct control, such as general economic conditions, changes in government educational funding, programs, policy decisions, legislation and/or changes in the procurement process, or our failure to successfully deliver previous contracts.

The results and growth of our US educational services and assessment businesses are dependent on the level of federal and state educational funding, which in turn is dependent on the robustness of state finances and the level of funding allocated to educational programs. State, local and municipal education funding pressures remain, competition from low price and disruptive new business models continues and open source is promoted as a way to keep costs down for our customers. The current challenging environment could impact our ability to collect on education-related debt.

State and local government leadership changes and resultant shifts in education policy can also affect the funding available for educational expenditure, which include the impact of educational reform. Similarly, changes in the government procurement process for textbooks, learning material and student tests, and vocational training programs can also affect our markets. Political pressure on testing, changes in curricula, delays in the timing of the adoptions and changes in the student testing process can all affect these programs and therefore the size of our market in any given year. For our UK examination and assessment businesses, changes in UK government policy have had, and could continue to have, a significant impact on our present business.

There are multiple competing demands for educational funds and there is no guarantee that new textbooks or testing or training programs will be funded, or that we will win or retain this business.

Failure to comply with anti-trust and competition legislation could result in costly legal proceeding and/or adversely impact our reputation.

We are subject to global and local anti-trust and competition law and although we are committed to conducting business in compliance with local and international laws, there is a risk that our management, employees or representatives may act in a way that violates applicable anti-trust or competition laws. As a result, there is a risk of litigation and regulatory proceedings in the countries in which we operate. These legal proceedings could result in greater scrutiny of our operations in other countries for anti-competitive behavior and, in the worst case, incur a substantial financial cost. This would also have an adverse impact on our reputation.

If we do not adequately protect our intellectual property and proprietary rights our competitive position and results may be adversely affected and limit our ability to grow.

Our products and services largely comprise intellectual property delivered through a variety of print and digital media, online software applications and platforms. We rely on trademark, patent, copyright and other intellectual property laws to establish and protect our proprietary rights in these products and services.

Our intellectual property rights (IPR) in countries such as the US and the UK, jurisdictions covering the largest proportion of our operations, are generally well established with the exception of patents, for which we only have a nascent portfolio based largely in the US. However, we also conduct business in other countries where our protection efforts have been limited or inconsistent and the extent of effective legal protection for intellectual property rights is uncertain, and this uncertainty could affect our future growth. Where we have registered or otherwise established our IPR, we cannot guarantee that our such rights will provide competitive advantages to due to: the challenges and costs of monitoring and enforcement in jurisdictions where competition may be intense; the limited and/or ineffective IPR protection and enforcement mechanisms available

 

9


Table of Contents

to us in many countries; the potential that our IPR may lapse, be invalidated, circumvented, challenged, or abandoned, or that we may otherwise lose the ability to assert our intellectual property rights against others. Moreover, despite trademark, brand and copyright protection, third parties may copy, infringe or otherwise profit from our proprietary rights without our authorization. The loss or diminution in value of these proprietary rights or our intellectual property could have a material adverse effect on our business and financial performance.

A control breakdown or service failure in our school assessment and qualification business could result in financial loss and reputational damage.

Our professional services and assessment businesses involve complex contractual relationships with both government agencies and commercial customers for the provision of various testing services. Our financial results, growth prospects and/or reputation may be adversely affected if these contracts and relationships are poorly managed or face increased competitive pressures.

There are inherent risks associated with our assessment and qualification businesses, both in the US and the UK. A service failure caused by a breakdown in our testing and assessment processes could lead to a mis-grading of student tests and/or late delivery of test results to students and their schools. In either event we may be subject to legal claims, penalty charges under our contracts, non-renewal of contracts and/or the suspension or withdrawal of our accreditation to conduct tests. It is also possible that such events would result in adverse publicity, which may affect our ability to retain existing contracts and/or obtain new customers.

Our investment into inherently riskier emerging markets may deliver returns that are lower than anticipated.

To take advantage of international growth opportunities and to reduce our reliance on our US and UK markets we have invested in a number of emerging markets, some of which are inherently more risky than our traditional markets. Political, regulatory, economic and legal systems in emerging markets may be less predictable than in countries with more developed institutional structures. Political, regulatory, economic, currency, reputational and corporate governance and compliance risks (including fraud, bribery and corruption) as well as unmanaged expansion are all factors which could limit our returns on investments made in these markets.

Failure to effectively manage risks associated with compliance to global and local anti-bribery and corruption (ABC) legislation could result in costly legal investigations and/or adversely impact our reputation.

Although we are committed to conducting business in a legal and ethical manner in compliance with local and international statutory requirements and standards applicable to our business, there is a risk that our management, employees or representatives may take actions that violate applicable laws and regulations prohibiting the making of improper payments for the purposes of obtaining or keeping business, including laws such as the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act or the UK Bribery Act. Responding to investigations is costly and requires a significant amount of management’s time and attention. In addition, investigations may adversely impact our reputation, or lead to litigation and financial impacts.

Failure to generate anticipated revenue growth, synergies and/or cost savings from acquisitions, mergers and other business combinations, could lead to goodwill and intangible asset impairments.

We continually acquire and dispose of businesses to achieve our strategic objectives and we will continue to consider both as means to pursue our strategic priorities, although we do not plan to make any significant acquisitions in the short term. We for instance hold a 47% equity interest in Penguin Random House, the world’s leading consumer publishing company. This investment and associated return are subject to the continuing success of this venture, in a competitive global market. In 2015, we divested the Financial Times and our equity interest in The Economist in order to increase our focus on the opportunities we see in global education.

 

10


Table of Contents

We operate in markets that are dependent on Information Technology (IT) systems and technological change. Failure to maintain and support customer facing services, systems, and platforms, including addressing quality issues and execution on time of new products and enhancements, could negatively impact our revenues and reputation.

All our businesses, to a greater or lesser extent, are dependent on information technology. We either provide software and/or internet services to our customers or we use complex IT systems and products to support our businesses activities, including customer-facing systems, back-office processing and infrastructure. We face several technological risks associated with software product development and service delivery, information technology security (including virus and cyber-attacks), e-commerce, enterprise resource planning system implementation and upgrades. Although plans and procedures are in place to reduce such risks, from time to time we have experienced verifiable attacks on our system by unauthorized parties. To date, such attacks have not resulted in any material damage to us, but our businesses could be adversely affected if our systems and infrastructure experience a significant failure or interruption.

Failure to comply with data privacy regulations could result in an incident or other issue potentially causing reputational damage to our brands and financial loss.

Across our businesses we hold large volumes of personally identifiable information including that of employees, customers, students and citizens. Any perceived or actual unauthorized disclosure of personally identifiable information, whether through breach of our network by an unauthorized party, employee theft, misuse or error or otherwise, could harm our reputation, impair our ability to attract and retain our customers, or subject us to claims or litigation arising from damages suffered by individuals, and thereby harm our business and operation results. Failure to adequately protect personally identifiable information could potentially lead to penalties, significant remediation costs, reputational damage, cancellation of some existing contracts and difficulty in competing for future business. In addition, we could incur significant costs in complying with the relevant laws and regulations regarding the unauthorized disclosure of personal information. Changes to data privacy legislation must also be monitored and acted upon to ensure we remain in compliance across different markets.

Failure to prevent or detect a malicious attack on our systems could result in a breach of confidentiality, integrity and/or availability of sensitive information.

Across our businesses we hold large volumes of personally identifiable information including that of employees, customers, students and citizens. Despite our implementation of security measures, individuals may try to gain unauthorized access to our data in order to misappropriate such information for potentially fraudulent purposes. A significant breach can result in a devastating impact on Pearson’s reputation, finance and student experience. Inability to prove due diligence can result in severe penalties and loss of business (existing and future).

Our reported earnings and cash flows may be adversely affected by changes in our pension costs and funding requirements.

We operate a number of pension plans throughout the world, the principal ones being in the UK and the US. The major plans are self-administered with the plans’ assets held independently of the Group. Regular valuations, conducted by independent qualified actuaries, are used to determine pension costs and funding requirements. As these assets are invested in the capital markets, which are often volatile, the plans may require additional funding from us, which could have an adverse impact on results.

It is our policy to ensure that each pension plan is adequately funded, over time, to meet its ongoing and future liabilities. Our earnings and cash flows may be adversely affected by the need to provide additional funding to eliminate pension fund deficits in our defined benefit plans. Our greatest exposure relates to our UK

 

11


Table of Contents

defined benefit pension plan, which is valued every three years. Pension fund deficits may arise because of inadequate investment returns, increased member life expectancy, changes in actuarial assumptions and changes in pension regulations, including accounting rules and minimum funding requests. As of the end of 2015, the UK defined benefit plan continues to show a surplus on an IAS19 basis and following the latest valuation is expected to be in surplus on a technical provisions basis following funding payments made during 2015. Following discussions with the plan trustee in 2015, we have committed to a funding program with the target of the plan becoming largely independent of Pearson within five years. However the plan’s ability to achieve and maintain this standard remains subject to market conditions, meaning that additional funding could still be required from Pearson in the future.

Operational disruption to our business caused by our third party providers, a major disaster and/or external threats could restrict our ability to supply products and services to our customers.

Across all our businesses, we manage complex operational and logistical arrangements including distribution centers, data centers, and educational and office facilities, as well as relationships with third party print sites. We have also outsourced some support functions, including information technology, warehousing and logistics to third party providers. The failure of third parties to whom we have outsourced business functions could adversely affect our reputation or financial condition. Failure to recover from a major disaster, (e.g. fire, flood, etc.) at a key facility or the disruption of supply from a key third party vendor or partner (e.g. due to bankruptcy) could restrict our ability to service our customers, and meet the terms of our contractual relationships with both government agencies and commercial customers. Penalty clauses and/or the failure to retain these contracts at the end of the contract term could adversely impact our future revenue growth. Similarly external threats, such as flu pandemic, terrorist attacks, strikes, weather etc., could all affect our business and employees, disrupting our daily business activities.

A significant deterioration in Group profitability and/or cash flow caused by prolonged economic instability could reduce our liquidity and/or impair our financial ratios, and trigger a need to raise additional funds from the capital markets and/or renegotiate our banking covenants.

To the extent that worldwide economic conditions materially deteriorate, the Group’s revenues, profitability and cash flows could be significantly reduced as customers would be unable to purchase products and services in the expected quantities and/or pay for them within normal agreed terms. A liquidity shortfall may delay certain development initiatives or may expose the Group to a need to negotiate further funding. The proceeds from the divestments of the FT and the Economist have significantly improved liquidity. While we anticipate that our existing cash and cash equivalents, together with availability under our existing credit facility, commercial paper program, cash balances and cash from operations, will be sufficient to fund our operations for at least the next 12 months, we may need to raise additional capital to fund operations in the future or to finance acquisitions. If we seek to raise additional capital in order to meet various objectives, including developing future technologies and services, increasing working capital, acquiring businesses and responding to competitive pressures, capital may not be available on favorable terms or may not be available at all.

Our access to capital is influenced by, among other factors, the credit ratings assigned to our debt by the credit rating agencies. At the year-end our long-term ratings were Baa1 from Moody’s and BBB+ from Standard & Poor’s. Both ratings were on negative outlook. The short-term ratings were P2 and A2 respectively. In February 2016, Moody’s changed Pearson’s long-term rating to Baa2 (Stable) and in March 2016 Standard & Poor’s changed Pearson’s long-term rating to BBB (Stable). The short term ratings are unchanged at P2 and A2.

We generate a substantial proportion of our revenue in foreign currencies, particularly the US dollar, and foreign exchange rate fluctuations could adversely affect our earnings and the strength of our balance sheet.

As with any international business, our earnings can be materially affected by exchange rate movements. Our main exposure is to movements in the US dollar to sterling exchange rate as approximately 60% of our total revenue is generated in US dollars. We also have exposure to a range of other international currencies including emerging market currencies. Sales for 2015, translated at 2014 average rates, would have been £137m or 3% lower.

 

12


Table of Contents

A lack of sufficient capital resources could adversely impact our ability to operate.

If the global economy weakens further and/or the global financial markets collapse, we may not have access to or could lose our bank deposits or customers may fail to pay us in time or may be unable to pay us. Lack of sufficient capital resources could significantly limit our ability to take advantage of business and strategic opportunities. If replacement funds are not available, we may be required to delay, reduce the scope of, or eliminate material parts of our business strategy, including potential additional acquisitions or development of new products, services and technologies.

Changes in tax law or perceptions on tax planning strategies may lead to higher effective tax rate or negative reputational impact.

Changes in corporate tax rates and/or other relevant tax laws in the UK, US or other jurisdictions could have a material impact on our future reported tax rate and/or our future tax payments. We have been subject to audit by tax authorities. Although we believe our tax provision is reasonable, the final determination of our tax liability could be materially different from our historical income tax provisions, which could have a material effect on our financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

Our tax strategy reflects our business strategy and the locations and financing needs of our operations. In common with many companies, we seek to manage our tax affairs to protect value for our shareholders, in line with our broader fiduciary duties. We are committed to complying with all statutory obligations, to undertake full disclosure to tax authorities and to follow agreed policies and procedures with regard to tax planning and strategy.

If we fail to attract, retain and develop appropriately skilled employees, our business may be harmed.

Our success depends on the skill, experience and dedication of our employees. If we are unable to attract, retain and develop sufficiently experienced and capable personnel, especially in technology, product development, sales and management, our business and financial results may suffer. When talented employees leave, we may have difficulty replacing them, and our business may suffer. There can be no assurance that we will be able to successfully retain and attract the personnel that we need.

Failure to adequately protect learners could result in significant harm to one or more.

Incidents may occur that could cause harm to learners. For example, where we have direct learner contact via online learning, or in our direct delivery businesses where we are operating, either ourselves or in partnership with schools, colleges, universities, testing and assessment centers. These incidents can cause harm to learners, which is something we take extremely seriously, and could also have a negative financial, legal and reputational impact to the business.

Failure to adequately protect the safety and security of people and assets could increase our costs and adversely impact our reputation.

We have implemented policies to safeguard the health, safety, well-being and protection of our employees, learners and stakeholders. However, there may be accidents or incidents that occur due to unforeseen risks, for example due to changing local and global threats, causing injury or harm to individuals and impacting our business operations.

Social, environmental and ethical risks may also adversely impact our business.

We consider social, environmental and ethical (SEE) risks no differently to the way we manage any other business risk. These include ethical business behavior, compliance with UN Global Compact standards, environmental impact, people and data privacy.

 

13


Table of Contents

Our business depends on a strong brand, and any failure to maintain, protect and enhance our brand would hurt our ability to retain or expand our business.

At the start of 2016, we launched a new Pearson brand. Protecting the Pearson brand is critical to expanding our business and will depend largely on our ability to maintain our customers’ trust in our solutions and in the quality and integrity of our products and services. If we do not successfully maintain a strong brand, our business could be harmed. Beyond protection, strengthening the Pearson brand will enable us to more effectively engage governments, administrators, teachers, learners and influencers.

 

ITEM 4. INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

Pearson plc

Pearson plc, (Pearson) is an international education company with its principal operations in the education and consumer publishing markets. We create and manage intellectual property, which we promote and sell to our customers under well-known brand names. We deliver our content in a variety of forms and through a variety of channels, including books and online services. We offer services as well as content, from test creation, administration and processing to teacher development and school software. Though we operate in more than 70 countries around the world, today our largest markets are the US (63% of sales) and Europe (15% of sales) on a continuing basis.

Pearson was incorporated and registered in 1897 under the laws of England and Wales as a limited company and re-registered under the UK Companies Act as a public limited company in 1981. We conduct our operations primarily through our subsidiaries and other affiliates. Our principal executive offices are located at 80 Strand, London WC2R 0RL, United Kingdom (telephone: +44 20 7010 2000).

Overview

Pearson consists of its worldwide education business plus a 47% interest in Penguin Random House.

Pearson education is a leading provider of educational materials and learning technologies. It provides test development, processing and scoring services to governments, educational institutions, corporations and professional bodies around the world. It publishes across the curriculum and provides a range of education services including teacher development, educational software and system-wide solutions, and also owns and operates schools.

From 1 January 2014 the Group has been run as one global education company, organized around three geographical operating segments (North America, Core and Growth), and three lines of business corresponding to the key stages of learning, (schools, higher education and professional, which included the FT Group until the date of disposal in 2015). The lines of business are responsible for the global strategy, investment priorities, product strategy and product portfolio for respective learner age and stage. The geographies are responsible for customer relationships, sales and marketing, and delivery of education products in their markets. Supporting this structure are the global functions which partner with the geographies and lines of business and operate as integrated global functions to achieve scale economies.

Pearson owns a 47% interest in Penguin Random House, which was formed on July 1, 2013, upon the completion of an agreement between Pearson and Bertelsmann to merge their respective publishing companies, Penguin and Random House. Pearson accounts for its interest in Penguin Random House on the equity basis.

Recent developments

In January 2016, Pearson announced that it was embarking on a restructuring program to simplify the business, reduce costs and position the company for growth in its major markets. The majority of the program is

 

14


Table of Contents

expected to be complete by mid-year 2016 and will involve implementation costs in 2016 of approximately £320m, and is expected to generate ongoing annualized benefits of £350m.

Our strategy

Pearson’s goal is to help people make measurable progress in their lives through all kinds of learning. Over the past decade, through a major program of organic investment and acquisitions, Pearson has become one of the leading education companies in the world, with unique geographic reach, product breadth and professional depth.

Pearson’s strategy centers on a significant long-term opportunity: the sustained and growing global demand for greater access, achievement and affordability in education. We can meet this demand by accelerating our shift to digital, to services and to fast-growing economies, and by committing to deliver measurably improved learning outcomes, through our efficacy framework.

In 2016 the strategic growth drivers set out below will guide our work:

 

   

Digital & services: Build on our global strength in educational courseware and assessment with leading digital products and services, where we see the greatest potential for growth, scalability and impact on learner progress. We combine our insights into market need with our global education expertise. This perspective informs the planning and development of all our teaching and learning products and services, driven by technology, and shapes those where we place the greatest investment.

 

   

Market presence: Our strategy to build on our leading presence in developed markets, and the opportunity to meet growing global demand for education. Our leading position in educational courseware and assessment enables us to build our capabilities in fast-growing related services. We use our experience and expertise across the business to develop scalable, successful products and services, always meeting learner needs.

 

   

Measurable outcomes: Our efficacy program is our long term commitment to delivering measurable impact. It informs all strategic decision making across Pearson, including our product and services strategy. We will begin reporting formally on this impact from 2018. We measure and assess the impact of our products and services on learner outcomes. This feeds into our global insights capabilities, enabling us to build a deep understanding of learners’ and customers’ needs, and develop world-class products and services.

Our short term priorities are to deliver transformation, simplify our business, strengthen cash generation and return to growth. Our constant goals are: to generate sustainable returns by delivering long-term growth, extending our global presence and reach, and building on our leading education position; and to deliver measurable impact.

We intend to make Pearson a simpler, better integrated, more cost-efficient company. Our goal is to create single global product organization, combining our three previously separate lines of business. We are integrating our school, clinical and professional assessment operations in North America. We are reducing our exposure to large, direct delivery operations to focus on online, virtual, and blended services in a much more scalable, and profitable way. Each of these changes will help us invest in fewer, bigger opportunities, and ensure that our world-class capabilities can be scaled to customers around the globe.

We are also making productivity improvements across all our enabling functions like Technology, HR and Finance — as our product offering and customer and employee support becomes more digital. We plan to rationalize our property portfolio and consolidate major supplier agreements to drive greater cost efficiency.

As a result of these changes, we expect to reduce Pearson’s global workforce by around 4,000 roles, approximately 10% of our headcount. These are decisions that we never take lightly and we are committed to

 

15


Table of Contents

supporting our colleagues during the transition. We intend to complete these actions by the end of 2016, and will reduce our annual running costs by around £350m. Importantly, they will also create a more focused, integrated business, better able to create and sell products across our markets to improve learning outcomes. This restructuring will give us the improved operational and financial flexibility to invest in growth areas and underpin shareholder returns.

Our plan focuses on operational execution, tight cost management and a sharper strategy to return to growth. We expect to be faster, leaner and more agile as a result of the changes we are making.

Operating divisions

Pearson is one of the leading providers of educational courseware, assessment and digital teaching and learning technologies. We provide test development, processing and scoring services to governments, educational institutions, corporations and professional bodies around the world. We publish across the curriculum and provide a range of education services including teacher development, educational software and system-wide solutions.

We report Pearson’s performance in three segments: North America, Growth, and Core.

North America

Our North American business serves educators and students in the US and Canada from early education through elementary, middle and high schools and into higher education with a wide range of products and services: courseware including curriculum textbooks and other learning materials; assessments including test development and scoring; and services including the provision of online learning services. Pearson has a leading position in each of these areas and a distinctive strategy of connecting those parts to support institutions and personalize learning. Our largest market is North America, and across the US we are working with states, schools and colleges to help make education more effective, accessible and affordable for a diverse community of learners.

Our North America school business offers early learning solutions that help educators and families teach fundamental math and literacy skills; elementary and secondary imprints publish leading school programs in reading, literature, math, science, and social studies; and digital instructional solutions for pre K-12, such as enVisionMATH and Miller-Levine Biology. Nearly 50% of US schools use one of our tools to aid professional development and help teachers and administrators improve their effectiveness. Through our Connections Education business we provide school management services and operate virtual and blended schools.

Testing plays an integral role in determining educator and student success and we are the largest provider of educational assessment services in the US. We mark large-scale school examinations for the US federal government and more than 25 American states, scoring billions of machine-scorable test questions and evaluating more than 111 million essays, portfolios and open-ended test questions every year. Working with educators and education advocates, our experts are helping to lead the development of Next-Generation Assessments that feature technology-enhanced items, performance-based assessments, and adaptive learning to foster problem-solvers and critical thinkers ready to compete in the global economy.

Our solutions include learning assessments to help gauge how students learn, talent assessments to help growing companies develop their workforce, and clinical assessments to help psychologists and speech/language/hearing/occupational and physical therapists diagnose and monitor patients.

Our North America Higher Education business offers learning services for students, colleges and universities in the US. We provide learning tools and technologies, and about three million US college students are currently pursuing their studies online using Pearson Higher Education’s products. Our custom content and

 

16


Table of Contents

curriculum solutions offer educators the opportunity to tailor their programs based on the needs of students. We also offer workforce education products and flexible workforce development solutions to fill the growing skills gap and increased demand for quality certification prep training. College and career readiness is a K-20 issue, and it requires effective strategies employed in both K-12 and higher education. Our solutions are designed to help institutions retain students and prepare them for success in college and beyond.

Nearly 11 million North American college students registered with our higher education digital courseware to pursue their studies. The growing trend provides a wealth of data and analytics to improve the performance of individual students. Our advance capabilities in data, analytics and adaptive learning, and our leading efficacy research, enable us to design a smart learning path for every student.

The demand for online learning is steadily rising and we see this area as one of the fastest growing parts of the market where we can see demand increasing significantly over the next few years, where we’ve already got a good presence and where we think we could deploy our courseware, assessment, and technology capabilities at scale. Pearson On Line Services runs fully online undergraduate and graduate learning programs, such as the programs at Arizona State University Online. Likewise, at school level, Connections Education, our virtual school business serves tens of thousands of students through both virtual and blended school programs. This is one of our fastest growing businesses with demand continuing to increase year on year.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2015 compared to year ended December 31, 2014 — Sales and operating profit by division — Core” for a discussion of developments during 2015 with respect to this segment.

Growth Markets

Our aim is to take educational products and services and apply them at scale in countries such as Brazil, South Africa, China, India and other fast-growing economies. Around one third of our employees now work in these countries. We reach around two million students directly through our English language schools in China, Brazil and elsewhere, our partner schools in Brazil and India, and our higher education institutions in South Africa, as well as millions more with our textbooks and educational software.

In Brazil we are leading primary and secondary education with our ‘sistemas’ or learning systems which include COC, Dom Bosco, Pueri Domus and NAME. In South Africa we run thirteen of our CTI and MGI campuses throughout the country. We have over 11,000 students enrolled in courses ranging from undergraduate degrees in IT and sociology, to business diplomas and Masters courses in psychology. Our campuses prioritize digital learning with over 10,000 of our students accessing their courses through tablet devises, and focus on learning outcomes that prepare students for employment opportunities in their chosen careers.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2015 compared to year ended December 31, 2014 — Sales and operating profit by division — Core” for a discussion of developments during 2015 with respect to this segment.

Core Markets

Our biggest Core markets are the UK, Australia, Germany, France, the Benelux countries and Italy. These are countries where we work closely with educators and policy makers to improve learning through creating curriculum, designing assessments and developing digital learning systems. Additionally we have around 100 other markets, where we do not have scale ourselves, so we collaborate with others who share our values and commitment to efficacy to maximize reach and impact.

In the UK school market, we are the largest awarding organization offering academic and vocational qualifications that are globally recognized and benchmarked, with educational excellence rooted in names like

 

17


Table of Contents

Edexcel, BTEC and LCCI. Learners take our qualifications in more than 80 countries worldwide. We use our online marking technology to mark over 97% of examination papers and our ResultsPlus service provides detailed analysis of every learner’s examination results. We are also driving innovation through digital products such as Bug Club and ActiveLearn, and supporting skills for employability for progression in study, work and life.

Through Pearson College we are the only FTSE 100 company delivering degrees in the UK. Our students get the chance to learn from leading employers as well as experienced academics and subject experts, in the heart of a 21 st Century business.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2015 compared to year ended December 31, 2014 — Sales and operating profit by division — Core” for a discussion of developments during 2015 with respect to this segment.

The details below describe our professional line of business, which is geographically spread over the three above segments. During 2015 Pearson sold its interests in The Financial Times and The Economist Group. The results of The Financial Times and The Economist Group are included in discontinued operations up to the sale completion dates being November 30, 2015 and October 16, 2015 respectively.

Our professional testing business, Pearson VUE (VUE), is a global leader in electronic testing for regulatory and certification boards, providing a full suite of services from test development to test delivery and data management. Pearson VUE offers exams through an extensive network of over 7,200 test centers across 194 countries, delivering the NCLEX exam for the National Council of State Boards of Nursing, the GMAT for the Graduate Management Admissions Council and numerous IT exams such as Cisco and CompTIA. In the UK Pearson VUE works with professional and government bodies including the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA) and the Construction Industry Training Board (CITB).

Pearson VUE also includes Certiport, the world-leader in IT performance-based exams delivered through a global network of academic test centers, and GED Testing Service, a joint venture with the American Council on Education to deliver a leading high school equivalency exam.

Pearson’s English assets make the company the world’s largest English language learning business. More than 1.5 million teachers and 35 million students use our English language learning resources and tools each year. The businesses in Pearson’s English division include: Wall Street English (center-based learning for consumers); ELT (institutional English language publications including brands such as Longman); Pearson English Business Solutions (online business English learning solutions) and Grupo Multi (the leading adult English language training company in Brazil).

In 2014 Pearson English released the Global Scale of English, the world’s first common, global benchmark of English language learning. It measures English language progress on a numeric scale in a way that is consistent, granular and actionable for governments, corporates, academics, institutions and learners. The Scale has been created as the Open Standard for English that meets a global need.

The Financial Times (FT) is one of the world’s leading news organizations, recognized globally for its authority, integrity and accuracy. The FT provides a broad range of essential services, including news, comment, data and analysis, to a growing audience of internationally minded professionals. The FT is comprised of the FT newspaper and FT.com, Financial Publishing, FT Chinese, FT Labs, and Medley Global Advisors. The FT Group included a 50% interest in The Economist Group, a publisher of one of the world’s leading weekly business and current affairs magazines, this interest was substantially disposed of in October 2015. Pearson sold The Financial Times in November 2015.

 

18


Table of Contents

Penguin Random House

For the first six months of 2013, Pearson wholly owned Penguin, one of the most famous brands in book publishing. On July 1, 2013 Penguin Random House was formed, upon the completion of an agreement between Pearson and Bertelsmann to merge their respective publishing companies, Penguin and Random House, with the parent companies owning 47% and 53% respectively.

Penguin Random House comprises the adult and children’s fiction and nonfiction print and digital book publishing businesses of Penguin and Random House in the US, UK, Canada, Australia, New Zealand and India, Penguin’s publishing activity in Asia and South Africa, as well as Dorling Kindersley worldwide, and Random House’s companies in Spain, Mexico, Argentina, Uruguay, Columbia and Chile.

Penguin Random House employs more than 10,000 people globally across almost 250 editorially and creatively independent imprints and publishing houses that collectively publish more than 15,000 new titles annually. Its publishing list include more than 70 Nobel Prize laureates and hundreds of the world’s most widely read authors.

Penguin Random House sells directly to bookshops and through wholesalers. Retail bookshops normally maintain relationships with both publishers and wholesalers and use the channel that best serves the specific requirements of an order. It also sells through online retailers such as Amazon.com, as well as its own websites and direct to the customer via digital sales agents.

In 2015, our share of Penguin Random House profit after tax as of December 31, 2015 was £64m.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2014 compared to year ended December 31, 2013 — Sales and operating profit by division — Consumer Publishing” for a discussion of developments during 2014 with respect to Penguin Random House.

Operating cycles

Pearson determines a normal operating cycle separately for each entity/cash generating unit within the Group with distinct economic characteristics. The “normal operating cycle” for each of the Group’s education businesses is primarily based on the expected period over which the educational programs and titles will generate cash flows, and also takes account of the time it takes to produce the educational programs.

Particularly for the North American businesses, there are well established cycles operating in the market:

 

   

The School market is primarily driven by an adoption cycle in which major state education boards ‘adopt’ programs and provide funding to schools for the purchase of these programs. There is an established and published adoption cycle with new adoptions taking place on average every 5 years for a particular subject. Once adopted, a program will typically sell over the course of the subsequent 5 years. The Company renews its pre-publication assets to meet the market adoption cycles. Therefore the operating cycle naturally follows the market cycle.

 

   

The Higher Education market has a similar pattern, with colleges and professors typically refreshing their courses and selecting revised programs on a regular basis, often in line with the release of new editions or new technology offerings. The Company renews its pre-publication assets to meet the typical demand for new editions of, or revisions to, educational programs. Analysis of historical data shows that the average life cycle of Higher Education content is up to 5 years. Again the operating cycle mirrors the market cycle.

A development phase of typically 12 to 18 months for Higher Education and up to 24 months for School precedes the period during which the Company receives and delivers against orders for the products it has developed for the program.

 

19


Table of Contents

The Core and Growth markets operate in a similar way although often with less formal ‘adoption’ processes.

The operating cycles in respect of our professional line of business are more specialized in nature as they relate to educational or heavy reference products released into smaller markets (e.g. the financial training, IT and travel sectors). Nevertheless, in these markets, there is still a regular cycle of product renewal, in line with demand which management monitor. Typically the life cycle is 5 years for Professional content. Elsewhere in the Group operating cycles are typically less than one year.

Competition

Pearson’s businesses operate in highly competitive environments.

Pearson competes with other publishers and creators of educational materials and services. These companies include publishers such as Cengage Learning, McGraw-Hill and Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, and services companies, such as K-12 Inc and ETS, alongside smaller niche players that specialize in a particular academic discipline or focus on a learning technology. Competition is based on the ability to deliver quality products and services that address the specified curriculum needs and appeal to the school boards, educators and government officials making purchasing decisions.

Intellectual property

Our principal intellectual property assets consist of our 1) trademarks and other rights in our brands (including corporate and business unit brands, imprints, as well as product and service brands), 2) copyrights for our textbook and related educational content and software code, and 3) patents and trade secrets related to the innovative methods deployed in our key technologies. We believe we have taken all reasonable legal steps to protect our key brands in our top markets and copyright in our content and have taken appropriate steps to develop a comprehensive patent program to ensure appropriate protection of emerging inventions that are critical to our new business strategies.

Raw materials

Paper is the principal raw material used by Pearson. We purchase most of our paper through our Global Sourcing department located in the United States. We have not experienced and do not anticipate difficulty in obtaining adequate supplies of paper for our operations, with sourcing available from numerous suppliers. While local prices fluctuate depending upon local market conditions, we have not experienced extensive volatility in fulfilling paper requirements. In the event of a sharp increase in paper prices, we have a number of alternatives to minimize the impact on our operating margins, including modifying the grades of paper used in production.

Government regulation

The manufacture of certain of our products in various markets is subject to governmental regulation relating to the discharge of materials into the environment. Our operations are also subject to the risks and uncertainties attendant to doing business in numerous countries. Some of the countries in which we conduct these operations maintain controls on the repatriation of earnings and capital and restrict the means available to us for hedging potential currency fluctuation risks. The operations that are affected by these controls, however, are not material to us. Accordingly, these controls have not significantly affected our international operations. Regulatory authorities may have enforcement powers that could have an impact on us. We believe, however, that in light of the nature of our business the risk of these sanctions does not represent a material threat to us.

Licenses, patents and contracts

We are not dependent upon any particular licenses, patents or new manufacturing processes that are material to our business or profitability. Likewise, we are not materially dependent upon any contracts with suppliers or

 

20


Table of Contents

customers, including contracts of an industrial, commercial or financial nature. Notwithstanding the foregoing, our Education business is dependent upon licensed rights since most textbooks and digital learning tools include content and/or software that is licensed to us by third parties (or assigned subject to royalty arrangements). In addition, some of our software products in various business lines, particularly those of our Clinical business, rely upon patents licensed from third parties.

Legal proceedings

We and our subsidiaries are from time to time the subject of legal proceedings incidental to the nature of our and their operations. These may include private litigation or arbitrations, governmental proceedings and investigations by regulatory bodies. We do not currently expect that the outcome of pending proceedings or investigations, either individually or in aggregate, will have a significant effect on our financial position or profitability nor have any such proceedings had such effect in the recent past. To our knowledge, there are no material proceedings in which any member of senior management or any of our affiliates is a party adverse to us or any of our subsidiaries or in respect of which any of those persons has a material interest adverse to us or any of our subsidiaries.

Organizational structure

Pearson plc is a holding company which conducts its business primarily through subsidiaries and other affiliates throughout the world. Below is a list of our significant subsidiaries and associates as at December 31, 2015, including name, country of incorporation or residence, proportion of ownership interest and, if different, proportion of voting power held.

 

Name

  

Country of incorporation/residence

   Percentage
interest/voting
power
 

Pearson Education Inc.

   United States (Delaware)      100

Pearson Education Ltd.

   England and Wales      100

NCS Pearson Inc.

   United States (Minnesota)      100

Penguin Random House LLC.

   United States (Delaware)      47

Penguin Random House Ltd.

   England and Wales      47

In February 2014 the Group acquired Grupo Multi, Brazil’s leading adult English language training company. There were no significant acquisitions in 2015 or 2013.

During 2015 the Group disposed of its interest in the FT Group including its 50% share of The Economist. The Financial Times sale was completed on 30 November 2015 and the sale of our 50% share of The Economist Group was substantially completed on 16 October 2015. Also, in July 2015, the Group disposed of its interest in PowerSchool.

During 2014 the Group disposed of its interest in the Mergermarket group of companies and our North America business disposed of its joint venture interests in Safari Books Online and CourseSmart.

During 2013 the Group disposed of its interest in the Penguin group of companies in exchange for a 47% interest in Penguin Random House.

Property, plant and equipment

Our headquarters are located at leasehold premises in London, England. We own or lease approximately 1,000 properties, including approximately 650 testing/teaching centers in over 60 countries worldwide, the majority of which are located in the United Kingdom, the United States and China.

 

21


Table of Contents

The properties owned and leased by us consist mainly of offices, distribution centers and computer testing/teaching centers.

The vast majority of our printing is carried out by third party suppliers. We operate a small digital print operation as part of our Pearson Assessment & Testing businesses which provides short-run and print-on-demand products, typically custom client applications.

We own the following principal properties at December 31, 2015:

 

General use of property

  

Location

   Area in square feet  

Office

   Iowa City, Iowa, USA      312,760   

Warehouse/Office

   Old Tappan, New Jersey, USA      212,041   

Warehouse/Office

   Cedar Rapids, Iowa, USA      205,000   

Office

   Southwark, London, UK      155,000   

Office

   Hadley, Massachusetts, USA      137,070   

Printing

   Owatonna, Minnesota, USA      128,000   

Office

   Manchester, UK      139,680   

We leased the following principal properties at December 31, 2015:

 

General use of property

  

Location

   Area in square feet  

Warehouse/Office

   Lebanon, Indiana, USA      1,091,435   

Warehouse/Office

   Cranbury, New Jersey, USA      886,747   

Warehouse/Office

   Indianapolis, Indiana, USA      737,850   

Office

   Hoboken, New Jersey, USA      216,273   

Office

   New York City, New York, USA      313,285   

Office

   London, UK      282,923   

Warehouse/Office

   Newmarket, Ontario, Canada      278,912   

Office

   San Antonio, Texas, USA      228,285   

Warehouse/Office

   Austin, Texas, USA      226,076   

Office

   Boston, Massachusetts, USA      225,299   

Office

   Noida, India      192,122   

Office

   Glenview, Illinois, USA      187,500   

Office

   Bloomington, Minnesota, USA      167,218   

Warehouse/Office

   Cape Town, South Africa      160,387   

Warehouse/Office

   Uttar Pradesh, India      145,041   

Office

   Harlow, UK      137,857   

Office

   Chandler, Arizona, USA      135,460   

Warehouse

   Sao Paulo, Brazil      132,331   

Warehouse/Office

   Cedar Rapids, Iowa, USA      119,682   

Office

   Centennial, Colorado, USA      117,554   

Teaching Centre

   Pretoria, South Africa      105,241   

Call Center/Office

   Lawrence, Kansas, USA      105,000   

Capital Expenditures

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Liquidity and Capital Resources” for description of the Company’s capital expenditure.

 

ITEM 4A. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

The Company has not received, 180 days or more before the end of the 2015 fiscal year, any written comments from the Securities and Exchange Commission staff regarding its periodic reports under the Exchange Act which remain unresolved.

 

22


Table of Contents
ITEM 5. OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The following discussion and analysis is based on and should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements, including the related notes, appearing elsewhere in this Annual Report. The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB.

Where this discussion refers to constant currency comparisons, these are estimated by re-calculating the current year results using the exchange rates prevailing for the prior period. The increase or reduction in the value calculated is the estimate of impact of exchange rates. We believe this presentation provides a more useful period to period comparison as changes due solely to changes in exchange rates are eliminated.

General overview

Introduction

Pearson’s primary segments for management and reporting are geographical as follows: North America, comprising the School, Higher Education and Professional businesses in US and Canada; Growth, comprising the School, Higher Education and Professional businesses in emerging markets which are investment priorities, including Brazil, China, India and South Africa; and Core, comprising the School, Higher Education and Professional businesses in more mature markets, including the UK, Australia and Italy. In addition Pearson separately reports on an equity basis the results from its Penguin Random House (PRH) associate.

On 16 October 2015, Pearson substantially completed the sale of its 50% interest in the Economist to EXOR and on 30 November 2015 Pearson completed the sale of the Financial Times to Nikkei. The results of the Economist and the Financial Times are included in discontinued operations in 2013 and 2014 and to the date of sale in 2015. Also, in July 2015, the Group disposed of its interest in PowerSchool to Vista Equity Partners for consideration of £222m realizing a pre-tax gain of £30m net of a £70m write down of related software assets. The PowerSchool business was not significant enough to meet the definition of a discontinued business and its results to the date of disposal are included in continuing operations.

On February 4, 2014, Pearson completed the sale of the Mergermarket Group to BC Partners. The Mergermarket business was classified as held for sale on the balance sheet at December 31, 2013. Mergermarket’s results for 2014 to the date of sale and for 2013 have been included in discontinued operations.

In July 2013, Pearson and Bertelsmann completed a transaction to create a new consumer publishing business by combining Penguin and Random House, and from that point, Pearson no longer controlled the Penguin Group of companies. Pearson accounts for its 47% associate interest in the Penguin Random House on the equity basis. The results for Penguin in the first half of 2013 have been included in discontinued operations. The share of results from the associate interest in Penguin Random House arising in the second half of 2013, and in 2014 has been included in operating profits in continuing operations.

Sales from continuing operations declined from £4,540m in 2014 to £4,468m in 2015, a decrease of £72m or 2%. This year on year decline was reduced by currency movements, primarily the strength of the US dollar relative to sterling during the year. In 2015 currency movements increased sales by £137m when compared to the equivalent figures at constant 2014 rates. When measured at 2014 constant exchange rates, our sales declined by 5%. Part of the decrease is due to the absence of sales from businesses sold during the year and also in light of the evolution of our Connections Education business in North America a greater proportion of that revenue is now recognized on a net basis. We estimate that after excluding the impact of acquisitions and disposals and after taking account of the evolution of sales at Connections Education, sales declined by 2% at constant exchange rates. Although there was growth in the Pearson VUE, Connections Education and Wall Street English China businesses, this growth was more than offset by declines in the US Higher Education, UK Qualifications and South Africa businesses.

 

23


Table of Contents

In 2015, Pearson reported an operating loss (from continuing operations) of £404m compared to a corresponding profit of £348m in 2014. The decrease of £752m mainly reflects an increase in intangible charges. Following significant economic and market deterioration in the Group’s operations in emerging markets and ongoing cyclical and policy related pressures in the Group’s mature market operations, management’s expectations of future returns were revised down in the course of 2015 resulting in the impairment of intangible assets in North America of £282m, in Core markets of £37m and in Growth markets of £530m. In 2014 impairments of £77m related to India. Operating profit before these impairments increased by £20m in 2015 compared to 2014. Cost savings in 2015 offset the impact of reduced sales and reduced service fee income from PRH. Cost savings followed restructuring in 2014 and consequent benefits that flowed through in 2015 and were compounded by a reduction in employee incentives in 2015. Currency movements had only a small impact on operating profit when comparing 2015 profit translated at constant 2014 exchange rates.

The loss before taxation in 2015 of £433m compares to a profit before taxation of £255m in 2014. The decrease of £688m mainly reflects the £752m decrease in reported operating profit identified above, offset by a reduction in net finance costs of £64m, from £93m in 2014 to £29m in 2015. The Group’s net interest payable decreased from £64m in 2014 to £46m in 2015, mainly due to the lower level of average net debt in the period following disposals, additional interest receivable on cash balances held overseas and lower interest on tax following agreement of historical tax positions. Also included in net finance costs are finance costs of deferred consideration associated with acquisitions, foreign exchange and other gains and losses. In 2015 the total of these items was a gain of £17m compared to a loss of £29m in 2014. Both the gain in 2015 and the loss in 2014 mainly relate to foreign exchange differences on un-hedged cash and cash equivalents, and other financial instruments.

Net cash generated from operations decreased to £518m in 2015 from £704m in 2014. The decreased cash flow reflected trading conditions across all the businesses including the impact of an increase in US higher education textbook returns and higher pension deficit payments. Our average working capital to sales ratio declined by 3.1 percentage points to 15.4% reflecting disposals of businesses with relatively lower levels of working capital but was also due to higher receivable balances and the absence of incentive accruals. Average working capital comprises the average of the monthly carrying values over the relevant 12 month period for inventory, pre-publication costs, debtors and creditors, including deferred revenue.

Net interest paid at £51m in 2015 was lower than the £73m paid in 2014 and reflects the lower interest charge for the year. Tax paid in 2015 was £232m compared to £163m in 2014. Tax paid in 2015 included the tax on disposals made during the year of approximately £103m. Net capital expenditure on property, plant and equipment after proceeds from sales increased to £84m in 2015 from £66m in 2014 and net capital expenditure on software intangibles rose from £105m in 2014 to £160m in 2015. The increase in both tangible and intangible capital expenditure is largely attributed to the investment in enabling function technology designed to lower administrative costs. The net cash outflow in respect of businesses and investments acquired was £463m in 2014, the majority of which related to the acquisition of Grupo Multi, there were no significant acquisitions in 2015 and expenditure totaled £27m in the year. The net cash inflow in respect of businesses and investments disposed was £1,422m in 2015 compared to £375m in 2014. In 2015 the cash received largely related to the Financial Times, The Economist and PowerSchool disposals and in 2014 related primarily to the Mergermarket sale. Dividends from joint ventures and associates increased from £120m in 2014 to £162m in 2015 due to an increase in the dividend from PRH. Dividends paid of £423m in 2015 compares to £398m in 2014 (including £1m paid to non-controlling interests). Overall the Group’s net borrowings reduced from £1,639m at the end of 2014 to £654m at the end of 2015. The reduction in net debt was due to the factors noted above, principally the receipt of proceeds from disposals, and was slightly offset by an increase in reported net debt due to the strengthening of the US dollar relative to sterling.

Outlook

In North America, our largest market, we anticipate US college enrolments will be flat given the forecast of modest improvements in US employment; a smaller adoption market in K-12 learning services and lower

 

24


Table of Contents

participation rate will be partially offset by growth in Open Territories driven by new products; reduced testing revenues in North America reflecting State and National Assessment contract losses worth approximately £100m announced in 2015; growth in clinical assessments and professional certification.

In our Core markets (which include the UK, Italy and Australia), we expect declines in vocational course registrations in UK schools, ongoing pressure in our various learning services businesses, partially offset by growth in managed services in Australia and the UK. At VUE, we will cease to deliver the contract to administer the UK Driving Theory test for the DVSA in September 2016.

In our Growth markets (which include Brazil, China, India and South Africa), we expect continued pressure in South Africa on government spending on textbooks and lower enrolments in CTI, macro-economic pressures in emerging markets, specifically China and Brazil, offset by growth from new products such as the New Student Experience.

In Penguin Random House, we anticipate that additional benefits from the ongoing integration of the business will be broadly offset by reduced demand for eBooks, following industry-wide changes in terms in 2015.

We completed the sale of PowerSchool on 31 July 2015 for £222m; the sale of The Financial Times on 30 November 2015 for £858m; and substantially completed the sale of our 50% stake in The Economist Group on 16 October 2015 for £469m including the gain on revaluation of the remaining 11% investment to a fair value of £92m. In addition we disposed of Fronter and a number of print textbook lists in the US. Total disposals contributed approximately £90m to 2015 adjusted operating profit which will not recur in 2016.

Group incentive compensation was zero in 2015 reflecting the weakness of performance versus budget. The incentive pool will be reinstated to £110m in 2016 to ensure our work force is incentivized to sustain its strong competitive performance and to implement a significant program of change within the company.

Building on the work we have done over the last three years, we are taking further action to simplify our business and reduce our costs and position us for growth in our major markets. We intend to: create a single courseware product organization; integrate our North American assessment operations; reduce our exposure to large scale direct delivery and focus on more scalable online, virtual, and blended services; implement major efficiency improvements across all our enabling functions — technology, finance, HR; and rationalize our property portfolio and renegotiate and consolidate major supplier agreements. To implement this program, we will incur costs of approximately £320m in 2016 and expect to generate annualized savings of approximately £350m, with approximately £250m of savings in 2016 and a further £100m of savings in 2017. We have already implemented a number of significant associated actions since announcing the program in January 2016.

Sales information by segment

The following table shows sales information for each of the past three years by segment:

 

     Year Ended December 31  
         2015              2014              2013      
     £m      £m      £m  

North America

     2,940         2,906         3,008   

Core

     836         910         1,008   

Growth

     692         724         712   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total continuing operations

     4,468         4,540         4,728   

Discontinued operations

     312         343         962   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     4,780         4,883         5,690   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

25


Table of Contents

Sales information by geographic market supplied

The following table shows sales information for each of the past three years by geographic region:

 

     Year Ended December 31  
     2015      2014      2013  
     £m      £m      £m  

Continuing operations

        

European countries

     667         725         775   

North America

     2,907         2,871         2,980   

Asia Pacific

     590         565         588   

Other countries

     304         379         385   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total continuing operations

     4,468         4,540         4,728   

Discontinued operations

        

European countries

     198         236         386   

North America

     74         69         454   

Asia Pacific

     35         34         110   

Other countries

     5         4         12   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total discontinued operations

     312         343         962   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     4,780         4,883         5,690   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

In the table above sales are allocated based on the country in which the customer is located.

Exchange rate fluctuations

We earn a significant proportion of our sales and profits in overseas currencies, principally the US dollar. Sales and profits are translated into sterling in the consolidated financial statements using average rates. The average rate used for the US dollar was £1:$1.53 in 2015, £1:$1.65 in 2014 and £1:$1.57 in 2013. Fluctuations in exchange rates can have a significant impact on our reported sales and profits. In 2015, Pearson generated 63% of its continuing sales in the US (2014: 61%; 2013: 60%). In 2015 we estimate that a five cent change in the average exchange rate between the US dollar and sterling would have had an impact on our reported earnings per share of 2.0p and a five cent change in the closing exchange rate between the US dollar and sterling would have had an impact on shareholders’ funds of approximately £180m. See “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk” for more information. The year-end US dollar rate for 2015 was £1:$1.47 compared to £1:$1.56 for 2014 and £1:$1.66 for 2013. The total impact on shareholders’ funds of foreign exchange translation was a loss of £69m in 2015 compared to a gain of £175m in 2014. These net movements are principally driven by movements in the US dollar as a significant portion of the Group’s operations are in the US, however, in 2015 the impact of a stronger US dollar compared to sterling was more than offset by sterling’s strength against other currencies.

Critical accounting policies

Our consolidated financial statements, included in “Item 18. Financial Statements”, are prepared based on the accounting policies described in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements.

Certain of our accounting policies require the application of management judgment in selecting assumptions when making significant estimates about matters that are inherently uncertain. Management bases its estimates on historical experience and other assumptions that it believes are reasonable. These policies are described in note 1a(3) in “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

 

26


Table of Contents

Results of operations

Year ended December 31, 2015 compared to year ended December 31, 2014

Consolidated results of operations

Sales

Our total sales from continuing operations decreased by £72m, or 2%, from £4,540m in 2014, to £4,468m in 2015. The 2015 sales benefitted from the impact of currency movements. The 2015 sales, translated at 2014 average exchange rates, would have been £137m less at £4,331m a 5% decrease at constant exchange rates. Part of the decrease is due to the absence of sales from businesses sold during the year and also in light of the evolution of our Connections Education business in North America a greater proportion of that revenue is now recognized on a net basis. We estimate that after excluding the impact of acquisitions and disposals and after taking account of the evolution of sales at Connections Education, sales declined by 2% at constant exchange rates.

North America sales increased by £34m or 1% from £2,906m to £2,940m, due to the strengthening of the US dollar against sterling. We estimate that after excluding the impact of exchange, the contribution from acquisitions and disposals and adjustments made in respect of Connections Education, North America sales declined by 1% in 2015 compared to 2014. Revenue growth in our professional and clinical assessments businesses was offset by contract losses in our State and National assessments businesses. In addition Higher Education and School courseware sales fell as a result of lower college enrolments and a smaller market opportunity in School despite market share gains in both Higher Education and School. North America continued to be the most significant source of our sales and as a proportion of sales contributed 66% in 2015 and 64% in 2014.

Core sales declined by £74m or 8% from £910m in 2014 to £836m in 2015. We estimate that after excluding acquisitions and disposals and the impact of exchange, Core sales declined by 5%. Growth in Pearson Online Services in Australia, Wall Street English in Italy, Clinical Assessment in Germany and the Pearson Test of English in Australia was more than offset by revenue declines in UK qualifications as the business nears the end of a period of policy change. In addition revenue declines at VUE, phasing and market weakness in Australian Higher Education courseware and the focusing of our UK school courseware on products that directly support Pearson Qualifications also contributed to the overall decline.

Growth sales declined by £32m or 4% from £724m in 2014 to £692m in 2015, much of the decline can be attributed to exchange and the strength of sterling against key emerging market currencies. We estimate that after excluding the impact of exchange rates and the incremental contribution from acquisitions made in 2014 sales declined by 1%. In China, revenues grew modestly reflecting strong sales of premium services in our direct delivery English Language Learning businesses offset by list disposals. In Brazil, revenues were stable with good growth in private sistemas and language schools offset by declines in government funded sistemas and language schools. In South Africa, revenues declined significantly due to a smaller textbook adoption cycle and lower enrolments at CTI. In the Middle East, our business was impacted by the withdrawal from contracts in Saudi Arabia.

 

27


Table of Contents

Cost of goods sold and operating expenses

The following table summarizes our cost of sales, net operating expenses and impairment of intangible assets:

 

     Year Ended December 31  
         2015              2014      
     £m      £m  

Cost of goods sold

     1,981         2,021   

Operating expenses

     

Distribution costs

     80         84   

Selling, marketing and product development costs

     895         931   

Administrative and other expenses

     1,195         1,168   

Restructuring costs

     35         64   

Other net gains and losses

     (13      (2

Other income

     (98      (120
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total net operating expenses

     2,094         2,125   

Impairment of intangible assets

     849         77   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total expenses

     4,924         4,223   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cost of goods sold.  Cost of sales consists of costs for raw materials, primarily paper, printing and binding costs, amortization of pre-publication costs, royalty charges, the cost of service provision in the assessment and testing business and the cost of teaching and facilities in direct delivery businesses. Our cost of sales decreased by £40m, or 2%, from £2,021m in 2014, to £1,981m in 2015. The decrease corresponds primarily to the decrease in sales, with cost of sales at 44.3% of sales in 2015 compared to 44.5% in 2014.

Distribution costs.  Distribution costs consist primarily of shipping costs, postage and packing. Distribution costs decreased due to the continuing shift to digital and services products.

Selling, marketing and product development costs.  Our selling, marketing and product development costs decreased by £36m or 4% from £931m in 2014 to £895m in 2015. As a percentage of sales these costs were relatively consistent at 20.0% in 2015 and 20.5% in 2014, reflecting some continuing benefits of restructuring.

Administrative and other expenses.  Our administrative and other expenses increased by £27m or 2% from £1,168m in 2014 to £1,195m in 2015. Increases in intangible amortization and investment in technology offset decreases in employee compensation.

Restructuring costs. Restructuring costs, which include costs for redundancy and property exits, returned to a more normal level in 2015 after a period of transformation in 2013 and 2014. Restructuring costs were £29m lower in 2015 at £35m compared with £64m in 2014.

Other net gains and losses.  Included in other net gains and losses in 2015 is the profit on sale of PowerSchool of £30m net of £70m of write downs on related software assets and small losses on investments and costs relating to prior year disposals totaling £17m. Other gains and losses in 2014 are gains on the sale of joint venture interests in Safari Books Online and CourseSmart totaling £40m and a loss on the disposal of an investment in Nook Media of £38m.

Other income.  Other operating income mainly consists of freight recharges, sub-rights and licensing income and distribution commissions, together with the service fee income from Penguin Random House. Other operating income decreased to £98m in 2015 compared to £120m in 2014 mainly due to a reduction in Penguin Random House service fee income. This income decreased as Penguin Random House reduced its reliance on Pearson systems and processes and the fee of £41m in 2014 compares to a fee of £16m in 2015.

 

28


Table of Contents

Impairment of intangible assets.   Following significant economic and market deterioration in the Group’s operations in emerging markets and ongoing cyclical and policy related pressures in the Group’s mature market operations, management’s expectations of future returns were revised down in the course of 2015, consistent with our outlook for 2018, resulting in the impairment of intangible assets in North America of £282m, in Core markets of £37m and in Growth markets of £530m. In 2014 impairments of £77m related to India.

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

The contribution from our joint ventures and associates increased by £21m to £52m in 2015 from £31m in 2014. The increase is mainly due to Penguin Random House where there was an improved operating performance coupled with a reduced amortization charge.

Operating loss / profit

In 2015 there was an operating loss on a continuing basis of £404m compared to an operating profit on a continuing basis of £348m in 2014. The reduction in profit is entirely due to the impairment of intangible assets outlined above.

Net finance costs

Net finance costs reduced by £64m, from £93m in 2014 to £29m in 2015. Net interest payable in 2015 was £46m, compared to £64m in 2014. The majority of the movement in net interest payable is due to the release of accrued interest following agreement of historical tax positions. For our debt portfolio, our fixed rate policy reduces the impact of changes in market interest rates, however we were still able to benefit from low average US dollar interest rates during the year as the majority of the Group’s debt is US dollar denominated. Year-on-year, average three month US dollar LIBOR rose by 0.1% to 0.3%. This slight increase in floating market interest rates, along with the impact of changes in our debt portfolio, foreign exchange translation and the effect of slightly lower levels of average net debt in the period led to little change in the year-on-year interest charge on debt. Interest receivable on cash balances held overseas was reduced from the prior year due mainly to the weakening of emerging market currencies against sterling. The Group’s average net debt fell by £61m, largely as a result of disposals in the fourth quarter of 2015 offsetting the translation of our predominantly US dollar debt. These combined factors contributed to the overall decrease in the Group’s average net interest payable from 3.6% to 2.7%.

Other net finance costs are finance income and costs on retirement benefits, finance costs on related to deferred consideration associated with acquisitions, foreign exchange and other gains and losses. In 2015, the total of these items was a gain of £17m compared to a loss of £29m in 2014. Both the gain in 2015 and the loss in 2014 mainly relate to foreign exchange differences on unhedged cash and cash equivalents and other financial instruments. For a more detailed discussion of our borrowings and interest expenses see “— Liquidity and Capital Resources — Capital Resources” and “— Borrowings” below and “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk”.

Taxation

The total tax benefit in 2015 of £81m represents 18.7% of pre-tax losses and compares to a charge of £56m or 22.0% of pre-tax profits in 2014. Our overseas profits, which arise mainly in the US, are largely subject to tax at higher rates than that in the UK (which had an effective statutory rate of 20.25% in 2015 and 21.5% in 2014). The reduced rate in 2015 reflects the lack of tax relief on some of our goodwill impairments offset in part by adjustments arising from agreement of historical tax positions. Both these items were more significant in 2015 than they had been in 2014.

Discontinued operations

Profit from discontinued operations in 2015 was £1,175m compared to £271m in 2014 with the difference being due primarily to gains on disposals in the respective years.

 

29


Table of Contents

On 16 October 2015, Pearson substantially completed the sale of its 50% interest in the Economist to EXOR and on 30 November 2015 Pearson completed the sale of the Financial Times to Nikkei. The pre-tax gains on these sales were £473m and £711m respectively. We expect both of these transactions to qualify for substantial shareholder exemption in the UK and therefore there was no tax on the Economist gain and tax on the Financial Times sale amounted to £49m. The gains on these transactions and the results for both 2014 and 2015 to the respective sale dates have been included in discontinued operations.

The sale of Mergermarket to BC partners was completed on 4 February 2014 and resulted in a gain of £244m before tax. The gain on sale and the results for 2014 to the date of sale have been included in discontinued operations. Also included in discontinued operations in 2014 is a gain of £29m relating to adjustments to liabilities arising on the formation of the Penguin Random House group. Although this transaction completed in 2013 there were subsequent adjustments relating to the potential transfer of pension liabilities and tax.

Profit for the year

The profit for the financial year in 2015 was £823m compared to a profit in 2014 of £470m. The 2015 profit includes the gains on the sale of the Financial Times and Economist partly offset by significant impairment charges in the year. The net of these items were more significant than disposal gains and impairment charges had been in 2014.

Earnings per ordinary share

The basic earnings per ordinary share, which is defined as the profit for the financial year divided by the weighted average number of shares in issue, was 101.2p in 2015 compared to 58.1p in 2014 based on a weighted average number of shares in issue of 813.3m in 2015 and 810.9m in 2014. The increase in earnings per share was due to the increase in profit for 2015 described above and was not significantly affected by the movement in the weighted average number of shares.

A diluted earnings per ordinary share was not calculated in 2015 as a result of the loss from continuing operations in 2015. The diluted earnings per share of 58.0p in 2014 was not significantly different from the basic earnings per share in that year as the effect of dilutive share options was again not significant.

Exchange rate fluctuations

Currency movement increased sales by £137m and had only a small impact on operating profit. See “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk” for a discussion regarding our management of exchange rate risks.

Sales and operating profit by segment

The following tables summarize our sales and adjusted operating profit for each of Pearson’s business segments. Adjusted operating profit is a non-GAAP financial measure and is included as it is a key financial measure used by management to evaluate performance and allocate resources to business segments.

In our adjusted operating profit we have excluded other net gains and losses, acquisition costs and amortization and impairment of acquired intangibles. The intangible charges relate to intangible assets acquired through business combinations and acquisition costs are the direct costs of acquiring those businesses. Neither of these charges are considered to be fully reflective of the underlying performance of the Group. Other net gains and losses that represent profits and losses on the sale of subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and other financial assets are also excluded from adjusted operating profit as they distort the performance of the Group.

 

30


Table of Contents

Adjusted operating profit enables management to more easily track the underlying operational performance of the Group. A reconciliation of operating profit to adjusted operating profit for continuing operations is included in the tables below:

 

     Year Ended December 31, 2015  

£m

   North America     Core     Growth     PRH     Continuing     Discontinued     Total  

Sales

     2,940        836        692        —          4,468        312        4,780   
     66     19     15     —          100    

Total operating profit

     113        30        (595     48        (404     1,232        828   
     89     32     (25 %)      4     100    

Add back:

              

Other net gains and losses

     (19     5        —          1        (13     (1,184     (1,197

Acquisition costs

     —          —          —          —          —          —         —     

Intangible charges

     386        79        583        41        1,089        3       1,092   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted operating profit: continuing operations

     480        114        (12     90        672        —         672   

Adjusted operating profit: discontinued operations

     —         —          —          —         —         51        51   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total adjusted operating profit

     480        114        (12     90        672        51        723   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     66     16     (2 %)      13     93     7     100

 

     Year Ended December 31, 2014  

£m

   North America     Core     Growth     PRH     Continuing     Discontinued     Total  

Sales

     2,906        910        724        —          4,540        343        4,883   
     64     20     16     —          100    

Total operating profit

     336        100        (103     15        348        325        673   
     97     29     (30 %)      4     100    

Add back:

              

Other net gains and losses

     (2     —          —          —          (2     (273     (275

Acquisition costs

     2        1        3        —          6        —         6   

Intangible charges

     108        21        132        54        315        3       318   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted operating profit: continuing operations

     444        122        32        69        667        —         667   

Adjusted operating profit: discontinued operations

     —         —         —          —         —         55        55   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total adjusted operating profit

     444        122        32        69        667        55        722   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     61     17     4     10     92     8     100

North America

North America sales increased by £34m or 1% from £2,906m to £2,940m and adjusted operating profit increased by £36m, or 8%, from £444m in 2014 to £480m in 2015. The increase in headline terms was a result of currency movements due to the strengthening of the US dollar against sterling. At constant exchange and after taking account of the contribution from acquisitions and disposals and adjustments made in respect of Connections Education, sales declined by 1% and adjusted profits increased by 1%, mainly reflecting sales declines in US Higher Education partially offset at a profit level by year-on-year cost savings.

In our statutory results in 2015 we recognized an impairment to our US goodwill of £282m following ongoing cyclical and policy related pressures in our main US markets and we also realized a gain on sale of

 

31


Table of Contents

PowerSchool of £30m net of the write down of related software assets. In addition to the gain on PowerSchool there were also small losses on the sale and write down of smaller investments of £11m. In 2014 we recognized a £38m loss on disposal of our 5% stake in Nook Media and a £40m gain on the disposal of our stakes in Safari Books Online and CourseSmart.

Overall adjusted operating margins in the North America business improved in 2015 to 16.3% compared to 15.3% in 2014 as a result of cost savings and the absence of restructuring costs following restructuring in 2014 and the benefit from list sales in 2015.

North America — School

In School, strong enrolment growth in Connections Education, good growth in Clinical Assessments and market share gains in courseware were offset by the impact of a smaller textbook adoptions market and weakness in the open territories in K-12 courseware, and a change in revenue model at Connections Education which records revenue for services charged at cost on a net basis.

Connections Education, our virtual school business served over 68,000 full time equivalent students through full-time virtual and blended school programs in 2015, up 11% from 2014 as a result of underlying growth and a new state-wide school in North Carolina. Connections manages 30 virtual public schools with three new full-time state-wide virtual public schools approved for the 2016-17 school year to serve students in Arkansas, Washington and New Mexico. In its annual Parent Satisfaction Survey 93% of parents of students enrolled in full-time online partner schools “recommend” Connections to other families.

In courseware, revenue declined year on year despite strong market share performance primarily due to a smaller overall adoption market as compared to 2014. Overall market share increased slightly driven by a strong performance in new adoption markets where we won 31% (2014: 25%) of new adoptions competed for, or 29% (2014: 25%) of the total new adoption market of $730m in 2015 (2014: $910m), led by a strong performance in Grades K-6 Social Studies in Texas and Indiana and in Grades K-6 Science in Oklahoma. We expanded iLit, our digital reading intervention program, covering a broader range of students including English Language Learners. Research studies show that students using iLit gain two or more years of reading growth in a year using this tablet based program (http://pear.sn/PErhf). We launched ReadyGEN, a K-6 reading series and enVisionMATH2.0, the newest offering in the highly successful enVisionMATH K-6 math program.

In State and National Assessments, revenues for the full year declined due to contract losses. High-stakes online test volumes grew strongly, up 130% on 2014 to 26.4 million, as customers transitioned to computer based testing. Paper based high stakes test volumes grew 3% to 32.7 million. Pearson successfully delivered English Language Arts and Math PARCC assessments to over 4.8 million students across 11 states and the District of Columbia. ACT Aspire delivered Common Core aligned college and career readiness assessments to 1.3 million students up 67% from 2014 and was chosen for three new state-wide deployments in 2016. The states of Arkansas, Mississippi and Ohio will discontinue PARCC assessments in 2016. We were awarded contracts to deliver the Indiana Statewide Test of Educational Progress (ISTEP); renewed the Puerto Rican Tests of Academic Achievement (PPAA) and parts of the assessments contract awarded by the Texas Education Agency; and extended our contracts to administer the Mississippi Science Test and Mississippi Subject Area Testing Program. We ceased to administer the majority of the current Texas STAAR contract in September 2015. Pearson extended its partnership with the College Board for the SAT assessment with the award of a five-year contract for processing of the redesigned SAT and PSAT assessments. Pearson will continue to provide the essay-scoring component for the SAT until March 2016.

Clinical Assessment grew well benefiting from continued growth of the fifth edition of the Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children (WISC-V), strong growth in Behavior Assessment for Children 3e (BASC) and rapid growth in Q-Interactive, Pearson’s digital solution for Clinical assessment administration with geographic expansion and continued strong growth in active users to over 9,000 from 4,000 in 2014 with test administrations up over 400% to 1.3 million sub-tests.

 

32


Table of Contents

North America — Higher Education

In Higher Education, market share gains in courseware were offset by lower enrolments (total US College enrolments fell 1.7%, with combined two-year public and four-year for-profit enrolments declining 4.4%, affected by a rising employment rate and regulatory change affecting the for-profit and developmental learning sectors), higher textbook returns and list sales. Strong enrolment growth at Pearson Online Services was offset by lower revenues from Learning Studio, a higher education Learning Management System (LMS) that we are retiring, and the impact of a change in revenue model.

Gross courseware revenues fell 1.5% (compared to industry gross revenue declines of 2.7%) due to lower college enrolments offset by market share gains. Net revenues declined 5.7% (compared to industry net declines of 7.5%) reflecting the impact of higher returns. Our market share in courseware benefited from strong performance from key titles including: Hubbard Economics 5e , Hibbeler Engineering Mechanics 14e and Marieb Human Anatomy & Physiology 10e .

Global digital registrations of MyLab and related products grew 3% to nearly 13 million. In North America, digital registrations grew 3% to almost 11 million with good growth in Science, Business & Economics, Statistics, REVEL and skills applications like Pearson Writer, offset by softness in developmental Mathematics. Faculty generated case studies indicate that the use of MyLab programs, as part of a broader course redesign, can support improvements in student test scores and lower institutional cost (http://pear.sn/IZxLE). We launched a suite of features that include Adaptive Practice in our MyLabs to personalize subjects including mathematics and nursing practice, Predictive Analytics Early Alerts in Mastering to help science instructors support at-risk students, gamification features in Business and rich learning analytics dashboards in numerous products that offer deep insight into students’ progress, performance and engagement.

In Pearson Online Services, our Higher Education Online Program Management (OPM) business, course enrolments grew strongly, up 25% to over 265,000, boosted by strong growth in Arizona State University Online where we renewed our partnership at the start of 2015. We extended our collaboration with Maryville University to launch a Bachelor and Master’s in Cybersecurity and a Doctorate in Leadership. Ohio University is partnering with Pearson to launch a Master’s in Financial Economics and Public Relations. University of Nevada Reno is partnering to increase access to the Master of Social Work degree program online. Pearson launched a new managed programs service model with Cincinnati State Technical and Community College, adapting traditional OPM services to the Community College market signing a landmark 10-year agreement to provide marketing, recruiting, admission, and retention services both to online and ground-based programs.

In enterprise solutions, Pearson signed significant large-scale, enterprise adoptions of cross-discipline digital content, where content is purchased via an upfront course fee and integrated with university IT systems, with Jones County College, National University, Algonquin College and the University of Missouri system. We signed an expanded strategic partnership agreement with Southern New Hampshire University’s (SNHU) College of Online and Continuing Education (COCE). Pearson will support curriculum development, online tutoring, enterprise wide content and data integration, eBooks with a print-on-demand option and data and analytics services which will provide greater visibility into students’ achievement of learning outcomes. The Charles A. Dana Center at The University of Texas at Austin is collaborating with Pearson to provide web-based course resources to Community Colleges across Texas that dramatically shorten the time it takes for students to earn college credit in mathematics as part of the New Mathways Project. Three courses were launched in 2015: Foundations Mathematical Reasoning, Statistics Reasoning and Quantitative Reasoning, with more planned in 2016. Pearson was named as the premier US Green Building Council Education Partner and will offer curriculum and course services to universities, associations, training companies, corporations, and workforce education and apprenticeship programs. We are partnering with Broward College to launch new competency-based workforce certification pathways focused on IT and Healthcare. Pearson will support Broward’s strategy by providing 12 industry certifications with existing workforce education courseware, as well as curriculum development services to build new courses towards certification and the Acclaim badging platform.

 

33


Table of Contents

North America — Professional

In Professional, revenues grew strongly at VUE due to higher volumes of professional certification assessments. VUE global test volumes grew 11% year on year to 14.2 million, boosted by continued growth in IT, Professional and GED, with increased volumes from Microsoft Certified Professional (MCP) Program globally, National Council of State Boards of Nursing and US teacher certification programs. VUE renewed the Certiport Microsoft Office Specialists and Microsoft Technology Associate programs for an additional year and extended our partnership with Cisco Systems for three and half years.

Core

Sales in our Core markets decreased by £74m, or 8%, from £910m in 2014 to £836 in 2015 while adjusted operating profit decreased by £8m, or 7%, from £122m in 2014 to £114m in 2015. At constant exchange there was a decline in sales of 5% and a decline in profits of 2%. Acquisitions and disposals were not significant in the Core segment in either 2015 or 2014. Growth in Pearson Online Services in Australia, Wall Street English in Italy, Clinical Assessment in Germany and the Pearson Test of English in Australia was more than offset by revenue declines in UK qualifications as the business nears the end of a period of policy change, revenue declines at VUE, phasing and market weakness in Australian Higher Education courseware and the focusing of our UK school courseware on products that directly support Pearson Qualifications. Adjusted operating profit declines were due to lower revenue offset by tight cost control.

In our statutory results in 2015 we recognized an impairment to our goodwill of £37m mainly related to our English language teaching businesses in Europe.

Core — School

In the UK, qualifications have been impacted by government policy, where changes to accountability measures have led to a further 20% decline in BTEC registrations in 2015. GCSE and GCE entries for summer 2015 grew modestly compared with 2014 resulting from increases in GCSE registrations in Sport, ICT and Business and strength in iGCSE entries. We successfully delivered the National Curriculum Test for 2015, marking 4 million scripts from 1.7 million students and successfully transitioned the marking of the test to an online-only model.

In courseware, UK school revenue fell with growth in primary school more than offset by declines in secondary as the vocational market contracted and our upper secondary revenues were impacted by lower market participation as we focus on products that directly support our qualifications. More than 5,400 UK Schools now subscribe to at least one Bug Club service, our primary school blended reading program, representing growth of nearly 16% in the year. There are over 1.8 million pupils, more than 9,000 schools and 152,000 teachers currently using a service on ActiveLearn Primary. Italy revenues declined slightly with market share gains in primary offset by market weakness and a lower share in upper secondary. Australia revenues declined, with growth and increased market share in primary more than offset by a weaker secondary market.

Clinical assessment grew well with Germany benefiting from strong growth in Kaufman Assessment Battery for Children (K-ABC), partly offset by declines in Australia after a strong year in 2014 driven by the release of Wechsler Primary and Preschool Scale of Intelligence IV .

Core — Higher Education

In courseware, UK revenues declined, primarily due to a weak market. In Australia, revenues declined significantly due to phasing and market weakness. In online services, our Australian University Partnerships business grew strongly with combined course enrolments of nearly 4,000 up 380% from 2014. The growth of our partnership with Monash University was led by the Graduate Diploma in Psychology, which is now one of Monash’s largest postgraduate courses. Our new partnership with Griffith University started very strongly

 

34


Table of Contents

seeing consistent demand for the MBA program and the launch of two further courses. Kings College London partnered with Pearson to launch online postgraduate degree programs in Psychology and Law. Total enrolled students at Pearson College doubled to 232.

Core — Professional

The Pearson Test of English Academic (PTEA) saw strong growth in test volumes and revenues after gaining approval from the Australian Department of Immigration and Border Protection to administer a broad range of language tests linked to visa applications. Wall Street English revenues fell slightly with strong growth in Italy offset by declines in Germany.

Growth

Growth sales decreased by £32m, or 4%, to £692m in 2015 from £724m in 2014. Adjusted operating profit decreased by £44m to a loss of £12m in 2015 from a £32m profit in 2014. At constant exchange there was decline in sales of 1%. In China, revenues grew modestly reflecting strong sales of premium services in our direct delivery English Language Learning businesses offset by list disposals. In Brazil, revenues were stable with good growth in private sistemas and language schools offset by declines in government funded sistemas and language schools. In South Africa, revenues declined significantly due to a smaller textbook adoption cycle and lower enrolments at CTI, due to a reduction in the number of qualified students graduating from high school and tightening consumer credit affecting re-enrolment rates. In the Middle East, our business was impacted by the withdrawal from the Saudi Colleges of Excellence contracts.

Adjusted operating profit decreased due to the strengthening of Sterling against key Emerging Market currencies, revenue declines in South Africa, a contract termination charge arising from the transition of our three Saudi Arabian Colleges of Excellence to new providers, cost inflation and additional investment in China; partially offset by the benefits of restructuring and integration in Brazil.

In our statutory results, reflecting the significant economic and market deterioration in the Group’s operations in emerging markets, we wrote down the balance sheet value of our goodwill and intangibles for businesses in Growth markets by £530m. This represented impairments of £269m for Brazil, £181m for China, £58m for South Africa and £22m for other Growth markets. In 2014 we impaired intangible assets in our Indian business by £77m largely reflecting the reduced value of online tutoring which was primarily focused on the US market.

Growth — School

In South Africa, there was continued pressure on Government spending on textbooks due to budget pressures, which resulted in the value of the textbook market falling 60% from a peak of R2.9bn in 2013 to an estimated R1.15bn in 2015. We continued to perform well competitively and maintained a leading market share.

In Brazil, sistemas revenues grew well with strong growth in private sistemas partly offset by declines in NAME, our public sistema, following the cancellation of a large contract as a result of government spending cuts. Overall sistema enrolments fell 7% to nearly 449,000 with declines in NAME partly offset by growth in our three private sistemas, led by our largest sistema, COC. More than half of COC schools that participated in the High School National Exam (ENEM) ranked among the top 3 schools in their municipalities.

In India, enrolments at our managed schools grew 14% to nearly 27,000 students and we launched a pilot in more than 60 schools of MyPedia, an inside service ‘sistema’ solution for schools comprising print and digital content, assessments and academic support services. Middle East school courseware and professional development revenues grew strongly on improved distribution.

 

35


Table of Contents

Growth — Higher Education

In South Africa, after strong growth over a number of years, student enrolments at CTI universities fell by 16% to 11,300 driven by a 13% decline in qualified graduating high school students and tightening consumer credit affecting re-enrolment rates. In Mexico, our fully accredited online university partnership, UTEL, increased the number of students enrolled by 34% to nearly 12,600. In India, Higher Education courseware revenues grew strongly. Cornell University partnered with Pearson to launch the Cornell-ILR Experienced Managers Program in India, with a blended learning approach combining online and in-person instruction.

In the Middle East, our three-year partnership with Taibah University in Saudi Arabia, to enable its transformation to a fully blended and personalized learning model, is progressing with over 4,000 students enrolled in our solution in 2015. Our partnership with the Preparatory Year Deanship at Um Al Qura University (PYP-UQU) to provide online learning and assessment technology has delivered 13,000 MyMathLab, MyITLab and MasteringPhysics licences. We withdrew from an agreement to run three Saudi Colleges of Excellence, with the colleges transitioning to new providers from 30 June 2015. This resulted in a termination charge.

Growth — Professional

In Pearson English, good growth in direct delivery in China, private expenditure in language schools in Brazil, and English Language Teaching (ELT) was partly offset by the impact of lower public expenditure in language schools in Brazil.

In China, Wall Street English (WSE) achieved strong revenue growth, reflecting success in the premium segment and the growth in VIP branded offerings. Overall enrolments grew modestly to over 67,000 with new enrolments growing strongly. We launched the New Student Experience (NSE) in six pilot centers during December 2015. The NSE delivers a major upgrade to the Wall Street English service with adaptive, personalized learning incorporating Pearson’s Global Scale of English. Global Education achieved moderate revenue growth as the market shifted to more intensive premium courses with smaller class sizes and new products, which resulted in enrolments declining 6.5% to 85,110.

We launched around 30 new MyEnglishLab products including Top Notch 3e and Progress . MyTOEFLLab and the second edition of MyIELTSLab successfully launched in China in WSE and Global Education. Global student registrations for MyEnglishLab and other ELT digital courseware grew 14% to 739,000. Pearson Test of English grew strongly in India.

Grupo Multi in Brazil saw strong revenue growth at Wizard, our consumer facing franchised English language learning business, but this was offset by declines in government orders due to public spending cuts. We opened 40 new school-in-school units for Multi English franchises in K-12 sistemas partner schools.

Penguin Random House

Pearson owns 47% of Penguin Random House the first truly global consumer book publishing company. Our share of Penguin Random House adjusted operating profits were £90m compared to £69m for 2014.

Penguin Random House had a strong performance in 2015, boosted by publication of hundreds of Adult and Children’s bestsellers across its territories, including the fiction mega-successes of Grey and The Girl on the Train , which each sold over 7 million copies.

The U.S. business published 584 New York Times print and e-book bestsellers in 2015 (2014: 760, based on a broader New York Times title count than 2015). The division benefited from the multi-million copy successes of Grey by E L James and the Adult debut novel The Girl on the Train by Paula Hawkins. Children’s authors who extended their outstanding sales in 2015 include Dr. Seuss, John Green, R.J. Palacio, James Dashner, Rick Yancey, Drew Daywalt, and Oliver Jeffers. Additional notable Adult titles include The Life-Changing Magic of Tidying Up by Marie Kondo; Rogue Lawyer by John Grisham; Lost Ocean by Johanna Basford; Between The World and Me by Ta-Nehisi Coates; and the movie tie-in paperback The Martian by Andy Weir.

 

36


Table of Contents

The UK business published 201 titles on the Sunday Times bestseller lists (2014: 206). The division enjoyed outstanding sales for Grey and The Girl on the Train , which each sold more than 2 million copies, and for Harper Lee’s Go Set A Watchman and Jamie Oliver’s Everyday Super Food . Great demand continued for Jeff Kinney’s Diary of a Wimpy Kid and John Green’s titles, and for DK Publishing’s Star Wars publications. Penguin Random House’s promising 2016 publishing lists include new titles from Lisa Brennan-Jobs, Bill Bryson, Lee Child, Harlan Coben, Phil Collins, Janet Evanovich, Ina Garten, John Grisham, Jazz Jennings, Jeff Kinney, Marie Kondo, John le Carré, Jojo Moyes, Jamie Oliver, James Patterson, Nathaniel Philbrick, Pope Francis, Nora Roberts, John Sandford, Danielle Steel and Star Wars.

Penguin Random House completed the sale of Author Solutions, its supported self-publishing services company, to an affiliate of Najafi Companies, an international private-investment firm, on 31 December 2015, and sold its Australian online bookseller Bookworld to online retailer Booktopia in August 2015.

The integration of Penguin and Random House continued to provide net benefits through organizational alignments and systems and warehouse combinations in 2015, as well as for 2016 and thereafter. The North America warehouse consolidation was completed in February 2015, and in December, the UK business announced it will be gradually closing its Rugby distribution center and relocating its inventory to two other locations. The integration in Spain and Latin America of Santillana with Grupo Editorial Penguin Random House remains on course.

Results of operations

Year ended December 31, 2014 compared to year ended December 31, 2013

Consolidated results of operations

Sales

Our total sales from continuing operations decreased by £188m, or 4%, from £4,728m in 2013, to £4,540m in 2014. The overall decrease reflected growth on a constant exchange rate basis of 2% together with additional contributions from acquisitions, which was more than offset by the impact of currency movements. The 2014 sales, translated at 2013 average exchange rates, would have been £269m more at £4,809m.

North America sales declined by £102m or 3% from £3,008m to £2,906m, due to the strengthening of sterling against the US dollar. We estimate that after excluding acquisitions and disposals and the impact of exchange, North America sales growth was 2% in 2014 compared to 2013. North America continued to be the most significant source of our sales and as a proportion of sales contributed 64% in both 2014 and 2013. Revenue growth in Connections Education, VUE, Clinical and Higher Education was partially offset by declines in School courseware and State assessments.

Core sales declined by £98m or 10% from £1,008m in 2013 to £910m in 2014. We estimate that after excluding acquisitions and disposals and the impact of exchange, Core sales declined by 6%. Modest growth in Italy and good growth at VUE was offset by declines in UK assessment revenues, due to the impact of policy changes on our UK school qualifications business and reduction in partner market revenues, due to divestments and a move to distributor models implemented in 2013.

Growth sales increased by £12m or 2% from £712m in 2013 to £724m in 2014, despite the strength of sterling against key emerging market currencies. We estimate that after excluding both the impact of exchange rates sales grew by 12%, benefiting from the acquisition of Grupo Multi, and after excluding the impact of exchange rates and acquisitions and disposals were flat primarily due to the phasing of purchasing and a stronger school textbook adoption in South Africa in 2013. Growing English Language Learning enrolments in China and college enrolments in Saudi Arabia and South Africa were offset by a smaller school textbook market in South Africa, lower revenues in Brazil from sistemas, and ELT and higher education textbooks.

 

37


Table of Contents

Cost of goods sold and operating expenses

The following table summarizes our cost of sales and net operating expenses:

 

     Year Ended December 31  
         2014              2013      
     £m      £m  

Cost of goods sold

     2,021         2,123   

Operating expenses

     

Distribution costs

     84         88   

Selling, marketing and product development costs

     931         995   

Administrative and other expenses

     1,168         1,056   

Restructuring costs

     64         162   

Other net gains and losses

     (2      16   

Other income

     (120      (115
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total net operating expenses

     2,125         2,202   

Impairment of intangible assets

     77         —     

Total expenses

     4,223         4,325   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cost of goods sold.  Cost of sales consists of costs for raw materials, primarily paper, printing and binding costs, amortization of pre-publication costs, royalty charges, the cost of service provision in the assessment and testing business and the cost of teaching and facilities in direct delivery businesses. Our cost of sales decreased by £102m, or 5%, from £2,123m in 2013, to £2,021m in 2014. The decrease corresponds primarily to the decrease in sales, with cost of sales at 44.5% of sales in 2014 compared to 44.9% in 2013.

Distribution costs.  Distribution costs consist primarily of shipping costs, postage and packing. Distribution costs decreased due to the shift to digital and services products.

Selling, marketing and product development costs.  Our selling, marketing and product development costs decreased by £64m or 6% from £995m in 2013 to £931m in 2014. As a percentage of sales these costs were relatively consistent at 20.5% in 2014 and 21.0% in 2013, reflecting some benefits of restructuring and the effect of foreign exchange.

Administrative and other expenses.  Our administrative and other expenses increased by £112m or 11% from £1,056m in 2013 to £1,168m in 2014 due to increased intangible amortization and increased IT costs.

Restructuring costs. Restructuring costs decreased to £64m in 2014 compared with £162m in 2013. In 2013 the Group began a significant transformation and restructuring program which incurred significant upfront costs primarily related to redundancies and property rationalization. These costs decreased in 2014 as the program reached completion.

Other net gains and losses.  Included in other net gains and losses in 2014 are gains on the sale of joint venture interests in Safari Books Online and CourseSmart totaling £40m and a loss on the disposal of an investment in Nook Media of £38m. Included in 2013 is a loss on the disposal of the Japanese school and local publishing assets.

Other income.  Other operating income mainly consists of freight recharges, sub-rights and licensing income and distribution commissions, together with the service fee income from Penguin Random House. Other operating income increased to £120m in 2014 compared to £115m in 2013 due to a full year of Penguin Random House service fee income of £41m in 2014 compared with a half year of income of £28m in 2013, offset by a decrease in gains on minor asset disposals in 2014 compared with 2013.

 

38


Table of Contents

Impairment. In 2014 we impaired intangible assets in our Indian business by £77m largely reflecting the reduced value of online tutoring which was primarily focused on the US market.

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

The contribution from our joint ventures and associates increased by £3m to £31m in 2014 from £28m in 2013. The increase is due to a full year contribution from Penguin Random House partly offset by intangible amortization.

Operating profit

Operating profit decreased by £83m or 19% from £431m in 2013 to £348m in 2014. In 2014 our operating profit included a £77m write down of the balance sheet value of intangibles in our Indian business, a £38m loss on disposal of our stake in Nook Media and a £40m gain on the disposal of our stake in Safari Books Online and CourseSmart. Currency movements adversely affected operating profit, and we estimate that operating profit would have been approximately £49m higher if translated at constant 2013 exchange rates.

Net finance costs

Net finance costs increased from £73m in 2013 to £93m in 2014. Net interest payable decreased from £71m in 2013 to £64m in 2014. Although our fixed rate policy reduces the impact of changes in market interest rates, we were still able to benefit from low average US dollar and sterling interest rates during the year. Year-on-year, average three month LIBOR (weighted for the Group’s net borrowings in US dollars and sterling at each year end) fell by 0.1% to 0.2%. This decrease in floating market interest rates, along with the impact of foreign exchange translation and additional interest receivable on cash balances held overseas, more than offset the effect of higher levels of average net debt in the period. These factors contributed to the overall decrease in the Group’s average net interest payable from 4.8% to 3.6%. The Group’s average net debt rose by £260m, largely as a result of net acquisition activity and the translation of our predominantly US dollar debt.

Other net finance costs are finance income and costs on retirement benefits, finance costs on put options and deferred consideration associated with acquisitions, foreign exchange and other gains and losses. In 2014 the total of these items was a loss of £29m compared to a loss of £2m in 2013. Both the losses in 2014 and 2013 mainly relate to foreign exchange differences on un-hedged cash and cash equivalents and other financial instruments. For a more detailed discussion of our borrowings and interest expenses see “— Liquidity and Capital Resources — Capital Resources” and “— Borrowings” below and “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk”.

Taxation

The total tax charge in 2014 of £56m represents 22.0% of pre-tax profits compared to a charge of £88m or 24.6% of pre-tax profits in 2013. Our overseas profits, which arise mainly in the US, are largely subject to tax at higher rates than that in the UK (which had an effective statutory rate of 21.5% in 2014 and 23.25% in 2013). The decrease in the tax rate is mainly due to tax benefits arising on the increase in intangible charges partly offset by adjustment arising from settlements with tax authorities.

Discontinued operations

In October 2012, Pearson and Bertelsmann announced an agreement to create a new consumer publishing business by combining Penguin and Random House. The transaction completed on July 1, 2013 and from that point, Pearson no longer controlled the Penguin Group of companies and has equity accounted for its 47% associate interest in Penguin Random House.

 

39


Table of Contents

The loss of control resulted in the Penguin business being classified as held for sale on the Pearson balance sheet June 30, 2013 and a subsequent gain on sale of £202m was reported in the second half of 2013. Included in the gain reported in 2013 was a provision for amounts payable to Bertelsmann upon settlement of the transfer of pension liabilities to Penguin Random House. During 2014 it was decided that this transfer would not go ahead as planned and the costs have been credited back in the £29m gain reported against the disposal in 2014.

The results for Penguin in the first half of 2013 and the gains reported in both 2013 and 2014 have been included in discontinued operations. The share of results from the associate interest in Penguin Random House arising in the second half of 2013 and in 2014 has been included in operating profit in continuing operations.

On November 29, 2013 we announced the sale of the Mergermarket Group to BC Partners. The sale was completed on February 4, 2014 and resulted in a gain of £198m after tax. The gain on sale and the results for the Mergermarket business for 2013 and 2014 have been included in discontinued operations.

On 16 October 2015, Pearson substantially completed the sale of its 50% interest in the Economist to EXOR and on 30 November 2015 Pearson completed the sale of the Financial Times to Nikkei. The results of the Economist and the Financial Times are included in discontinued operations in 2013 and 2014.

Profit for the year

The profit for the financial year in 2014 was £470m compared to a profit in 2013 of £539m. The 2014 profit includes a gain on sale of Mergermarket of £198m and the 2013 profit includes a gain on the sale of Penguin of £202m, as described above.

Earnings per ordinary share

The basic earnings per ordinary share, which is defined as the profit for the financial year divided by the weighted average number of shares in issue, was 58.1p in 2014 compared to 66.6p in 2013 based on a weighted average number of shares in issue of 810.9m in 2014 and 807.8m in 2013. The decrease in earnings per share was due to the decrease in profit for 2014 described above and was not significantly affected by the movement in the weighted average number of shares.

The diluted earnings per ordinary share of 58.0p in 2014 and 66.5p in 2013 was not significantly different from the basic earnings per share in those years as the effect of dilutive share options was again not significant.

Exchange rate fluctuations

Currency movement reduced sales by £269m and reduced operating profit by £49m. See “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk” for a discussion regarding our management of exchange rate risks.

Sales and operating profit by segment

The following tables summarize our sales and adjusted operating profit for each of Pearson’s business segments. Adjusted operating profit is a non-GAAP financial measure and is included as it is a key financial measure used by management to evaluate performance and allocate resources to business segments.

In our adjusted operating profit we have excluded other net gains and losses, acquisition costs and amortization and impairment of acquired intangibles. The intangible charges relate to intangible assets acquired through business combinations and acquisition costs are the direct costs of acquiring those businesses. Neither of these charges are considered to be fully reflective of the underlying performance of the Group. Other net gains and losses that represent profits and losses on the sale of subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and other financial assets are also excluded from adjusted operating profit as they distort the performance of the Group.

 

40


Table of Contents

Adjusted operating profit enables management to more easily track the underlying operational performance of the Group. A reconciliation of operating profit to adjusted operating profit for continuing operations is included in the tables below:

 

    Year Ended December 31, 2014  

£m

  North America     Core     Growth     PRH     Continuing     Discontinued     Total  

Sales

    2,906        910        724        —         4,540        343        4,883   
    64     20     16     —         100    

Total operating profit

    336        100        (103     15        348        325        673   
    97     29     (30 %)      4     100    

Add back:

             

Other net gains and losses

    (2     —         —         —         (2     (273 )     (275

Acquisition costs

    2        1        3        —         6        —         6   

Intangible charges

    108        21        132        54        315        3       318   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted operating profit: continuing operations

    444        122        32        69        667        —         667   

Adjusted operating profit: discontinued operations

    —         —         —         —         —         55        55   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total adjusted operating profit

    444        122        32        69        667        55        722   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
    61     17     4     10     92     8     100

 

    Year Ended December 31, 2013  

£m

  North America     Core     Growth     PRH     Continuing     Discontinued     Total  

Sales

    3,008        1,008        712        —         4,728        962        5,690   
    64     21     15     —         100    

Total operating profit

    358        58        (5     20        431        79        510   
    83     13     (1 %)      5     100    

Add back:

             

Other net gains and losses

    —          16        —         —         16        —         16   

Acquisition costs

    2        3        7        —         12        —         12   

Intangible charges

    104        26        33        30        193        5        198   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted operating profit: continuing operations

              —      

Adjusted operating profit: discontinued operations

    —         —         —         —         —         84        84   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total adjusted operating profit

    464        103        35        50        652        84        736   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
    63     14     5     7     89     11     100

North America

North America sales declined by £102m, or 3%, from £3,008m in 2013, to £2,906m in 2014 and adjusted operating profit decreased by £20m, or 4%, from £464m in 2013 to £444m in 2014. The decline in headline terms was a result of currency movements due to the strengthening of sterling against the US dollar. At constant exchange and after taking account of the contribution from acquisitions, sales grew by 2% and adjusted profits by 3% reflecting revenue mix, lower returns provision, reduced US pension costs and lower restructuring charges.

In our statutory results, we recognized a £38m loss on disposal of our 5% stake in Nook Media and a £40m gain on the disposal of our stakes in Safari Books Online and CourseSmart.

 

41


Table of Contents

Overall adjusted operating margins in the North America business were consistent in 2014 at 15.3% compared to 15.4% in 2013.

North America — School

In school, good growth in Connections Education, our virtual schools business, was offset by declines in our State Assessments business due to the impact of legislative change in Texas and California, and in courseware due to some loss of market share, revenue deferral on blended programs and softness in the Open Territories.

Connections Education served over 62,000 Full Time Equivalent students in 2014 through full-time virtual and blended programs, up more than 15% from 2013. Three new full-time virtual public schools were launched in 2014 and an additional one will launch in 2015. At full-time virtual schools supported by Connections Education, virtual students consistently outperform their virtual school peers on state standardized tests. Students at College Park Academy, a blended school in Maryland using the Connections Education curriculum, scored significantly higher than their in-state peers in reading and math in the Maryland School Assessment (MSA) for 6th and 7th Grades.

In State and National Assessments, high stakes online test volumes grew strongly, up 40% on 2013 to 11 million, as customers transitioned to computer-based testing. Paper-based high stakes test volumes declined 17% to 32 million, in part due to the growth of computer-based testing, but also the impact of legislative changes in Texas and California. We were awarded contract to administer Partnership for Assessment of Readiness for College and Careers (PARCC) assessments in 11 states and extended our contracts to administer Virginia Standards of Learning (SOL) Assessments and the Maryland High School Assessment. We will continue to administer the Florida Comprehensive Assessment Test (FCAT) until summer 2016.

Clinical Assessment grew strongly, benefiting from the launch of the fifth edition of the Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children (WISC-V) and strong growth in Q-Interactive, where early studies are showing good improvements in mental health professional productivity and student engagement levels.

Courseware revenues declined due to the impact of revenue deferrals from blended digital programs and a loss of market share, with a weaker performance in Grades 6-8 Science and Math in Texas, and Grades 6-12 Literature and Grades 6-8 Math in Florida only partly offset by a stronger performance in K-6 Math in Texas, Grades 6-12 Social Studies in Tennessee and Grades K-6 Math in California. We won an estimated 25% of the total new adoptions market (of $910m in 2014). enVisionMATH, which now has the largest installed base of elementary students in the US, continues to drive significant improvements in student computation and problem solving.

North America — Higher Education

In Higher Education, total college enrolments fell by 1.3%. Career enrolments in two-year public (community) and four-year-for-profit colleges declined 3%, with rising employment rates and regulatory change affecting the for-profit and developmental learning sectors.

Courseware grew modestly, primarily due to market share gains, continued growth in digital courseware registrations, a stronger new edition cycle and less pronounced seasonality. MyLab registrations in North America grew 3% to almost 11 million. Lecturer generated case studies indicate that the use of MyLab programs, as part of a broader course redesign, can support improvements in student test scores. We launched REVEL, which combines trusted content with interactive videos, quizzes, a mobile user interface, study tools, assignment calendar and performance dashboard for 17 humanities and social sciences subjects. The launch of REVEL is the first of numerous product lines taking advantage of our new cloud-based mobile-ready, and data analytics capabilities. New editions launched in 2014 included Tro, The Structures and Properties of Chemistry ; Acemoglu, Laibson and List, Economics ; and Pearson Writer , an application built for mobile devices that helps

 

42


Table of Contents

students in developing writing skills. We published a range of digital titles for The Boy Scouts of America and implemented a new digital curriculum incorporating enhanced Merit Badge programs in subjects including Robotics, Digital Technology and First Aid for the organization’s 2.7 million youth members.

Pearson On Line Services, where we run fully online undergraduate and graduate learning programs and earn certain revenues based on the success of the students and the institution, grew course enrolments by 22% during the year with continued strong growth in programs at Arizona State University Online and University of Florida Online. We signed new programs with Bradley University, to create five online graduate degree programs in nursing and counselling, and University of Texas at Austin, Dana Center where we are partnering for the web delivery of math courses for its New Mathways Project (NMP), which will become part of a state-wide reform initiative in a collaboration between Dana Center and the Texas Association of Community Colleges. We expanded our collaboration with the American Health Information Management Association (AHIMA) to administer its online education business, which serves AHIMA’s 71,000 members including 10,000 higher education students each year. We now provide our learning management system hosting 100 courses based on AHIMA content; technical support; a next generation Virtual Lab Product; and are launching a Coding Basics course combining AHIMA and Pearson content.

North America — Professional

At VUE, global test volumes grew 9% year-on-year to almost 13 million boosted by continued growth in IT, State Regulatory and Professional certifications. New contracts include a deal to administer the Microsoft Certified Professional (MCP) Program globally, which significantly expands our existing partnership with Microsoft through Certiport’s Microsoft Office Specialist (MOS) and Microsoft Technology Associate (MTA) exams.

Core

Sales in our Core markets decreased by £98m, or 10%, from £1,008m in 2013 to £910m in 2014 while adjusted operating profit increased by £19m, or 19%, from £103m in 2013 to £122m in 2014. At constant exchange and after taking account of the contribution from acquisitions there was decline in sales of 6%. At constant exchange and after taking account of the contribution from acquisitions there was growth in profits of 24% driven by the benefits of restructuring actions taken over the last two years in all markets. Overall adjusted operating margins in the Core markets increased from 10.2% in 2013 to 13.4% in 2014.

Core — School

In the UK, qualifications have been impacted by government policy, where changes to accountability measures and a shift to end of course assessments in GCSE have led to a 21% decline in BTECs and 11% decline in General Qualifications in the year. We marked almost four million National Curriculum Tests (NCT), up 24% on 2013. Our contract to administer the NCT was extended to 2017. More than 4,600 schools, with almost 850,000 children, now subscribe to at least one of the Bug Club services, our primary school blended reading program.

In Australia, we benefited from a stronger adoption year and the launch of the locally standardized version of the Wechsler Pre and Primary Scales of Intelligence (fourth edition). In Italy, we gained share in both primary and secondary with new titles combined with professional development and online cross-curricula support. In primary, we developed Top Secret and adapted Our Discovery Island English Language Learning programs. In secondary, we extended our market leadership in the Humanities.

Revenues declined significantly in our partner markets due to challenging market conditions in Africa and Scandinavia and with the move to a distributor model in certain markets. We disposed of our local schools lists in the Caribbean as we continue to focus on our largest global geographic opportunities.

 

43


Table of Contents

Core — Higher Education

In the UK, our courseware revenues declined, primarily due to enrolment contraction following policy changes in the vocational markets. We continue to invest to build Pearson College and graduated our first 32 students during the year. Pearson College was one of only four private colleges to pass Quality Assurance Agency review the first time.

In Australia, courseware revenues grew modestly benefiting from growth in core subjects, such as Biology, and direct-to-institution sales of digital learning products offset by our exit from vocational publishing. Monash Online, our collaboration with Monash University, continues to show good growth and will launch additional courses in the second half of 2015. In addition we collaborated with another leading university in Australia to provide course development, recruitment, enrolment, and student support services for post-graduate courses.

Core — Professional

At VUE, test volumes grew strongly following the successful launch of a new contract with CPA Australia to deliver Professional exams and continued good growth in the UK Driving Theory test volumes. We will continue to deliver our UK contract to administer the Driving Theory test for DVSA until September 2016. VUE entered into ten year partnerships with the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA) and the Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA) in the UK to transform a selection of their exams from pen and paper to computer-based testing.

Growth

Growth sales increased by £12m, or 2%, to £724m in 2014 from £712m in 2013. Adjusted operating profit decreased by £3m or 9% to £32m in 2014, from £35m in 2013. This reflected a benefit from the acquisition of Grupo Multi offset by a slower adoption year in South Africa, launch costs associated with our new vocational colleges and a contract provision in Saudi Arabia, and weaker revenues and restructuring costs in Brazil.

In our statutory results we wrote down the balance sheet value of our Indian business by £77m largely reflecting the reduced value of online tutoring which was primarily focused on the US market.

Overall adjusted operating margins in the Growth markets were lower at 4.4% in 2014 compared to 4.9% in 2013.

Growth — School

In South Africa we performed well, competitively maintaining our market share of the School textbook market, but volumes declined significantly to more normal levels following a large adoption year, and significant share gains, in 2013.

In Brazil, enrolments in our sistemas were down 3% to 481,000 with growth in our public sistemas (NAME) offset by declines in our private sistemas as we combined our three sales forces into one. 72% of the municipalities that adopted NAME for lower secondary education showed improvement in their IDEB score, Brazil’s federally established measure of educational quality.

Growth — Higher Education

In South Africa student enrolments in CTI/MGI our private network of higher education institutions, grew by 15% to 13,400 across 13 campuses.

In Mexico, our fully accredited online university partnership, UTEL, increased the number of students enrolled from under 5,000 last year to more than 9,000 in 2014 as a result of improved consumer marketing efforts and better student retention.

 

44


Table of Contents

In India, higher education revenues declined due to higher levels of returns.

Growth — Professional

In Pearson English, good growth in direct delivery in China and inside services in Brazil due to the acquisition of Grupo Multi was partly offset by declines in courseware in Brazil and Mexico. Global student registrations for MyEnglishLab grew 15% to more than 460,000 with strong growth in Latin America.

We launched the Global Scale of English, a new global standard for scoring English language proficiency on a precise, numeric, universal scale for businesses, governments and academic institutions. The scale is being embedded into all Pearson English products and services.

In China, English direct delivery enrolments grew at both Wall Street English (WSE), up 2% to 66,000 and Global Education, up 7% to 117,000. To support long-term growth, we consolidated our ERP systems in China and deployed a Salesforce.com CRM system in WSE. We divested our online vocational training operations.

In Brazil, we completed the acquisition of Grupo Multi, the largest provider of private language schools in Brazil. We successfully integrated the business despite challenging market conditions and disruption caused by the World Cup and Presidential elections.

Penguin Random House

In the twelve months to December 31, 2014 our share of Penguin Random House adjusted operating profits were £69m, compared with the six months from July 1, 2013 to December 31, 2013 of £50m.

Pearson owns 47% of Penguin Random House. Penguin Random House was reported post-tax for the full year in 2014 compared to only the second half in 2013 following the combination of Penguin with Random House on July 1, 2013, which resulted in a £7m reduction in the contribution to operating income with an equal benefit to our tax charge.

Penguin Random House performed well in 2014, benefiting particularly from a strong publishing performance in Children’s around the world and multi-million-copy film and television tie ins.

The US business published 760 New York Times print and ebook bestsellers in 2014 (2013 full year pro forma: 790), enjoying exceptional success in children’s publishing with John Green’s The Fault in Our Stars (29 weeks at number one on the New York Times bestsellers list and nearly eight million copies sold) and four million copies of his backlist titles, tie-in titles from Disney’s Frozen film (more than 17 million copies sold), Dashner’s The Maze Runner, Forman’s If I Stay and continued strong sales of LEGO ® movie tie-in titles. Notable Adult titles included Grisham’s Gray Mountain , Child’s Personal , Monk Kidd’s The Invention of Wings , Follett’s Edge of Eternity, Bush’s 41:A Portrait of My Father, along with strong film and television tie-ins such as Flynn’s Gone Girl , Hillenbrand’s Unbroken, and Martins’ Song of Fire and Ice novels.

The UK business published 206 Sunday Times bestsellers (2013 full year pro forma: 207), also enjoying outstanding sales of John Green, along with the continued strength of Kinney’s Wimpy Kid franchise. Key Adult titles included Brown’s Inferno, Oliver’s Jamie’s Comfort Food and Girl Online by YouTube sensation Zoella, which became the fastest-selling debut UK novel ever.

Liquidity and capital resources

Cash flows and financing

Net cash generated from operations decreased by £186m (or 26%) to £518m in 2015 from £704m in 2014 reflecting the impact of lower sales, higher returns in US Higher Education and increased debtor days, primarily in North America. Net cash generated from operations increased by £20m (or 3%) to £704m in 2014 from £684m

 

45


Table of Contents

in 2013 reflecting some stabilization in the underlying trading environment with some offset from continued product investment. Cash spend on restructuring was level with 2013. The average working capital to sales ratio increased to 15.4% in 2015 from 12.3% in 2014 and 13.4% in 2013 reflecting the disposal of businesses with a lower working capital profile, higher returns, increased debtor days, increased product development investment, lower incentive accruals in 2015 and lower sales. Average working capital is the average month end balance in the year of inventory (including pre-publication), receivables and payables (including deferred revenue).

Net interest paid in 2015 was lower than 2014 at £51m reflecting lower interest on bonds (following repayments), lower average net debt and higher interest income on cash balances held in emerging markets. Net interest paid in 2014 was level with 2013 at £73m with higher average net debt levels and debt issue costs offset by currency translation gains.

Capital expenditure on property, plant and equipment and software intangibles was £247m in 2015, £182m in 2014 and £182m in 2013. The increase in 2015 was entirely due to investment in software and technology platforms as the Group sought to harmonize and expand its technology capabilities.

The acquisition of subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates accounted for a cash outflow of £20m in 2015 against £460m in 2014 and £58m in 2013. There were no major acquisitions in 2015. The major acquisition in 2014 was of Grupo Multi for £437m. There were no major acquisitions in 2013, with the cash outflow relating to various minor acquisitions and costs associated with prior period acquisitions.

The sale of subsidiaries and associates produced a net cash inflow of £1,409m in 2015 compared to an inflow of £366m in 2014 and an outflow of £130m in 2013. The cash inflow in 2015 relates to the proceeds on the sale of the Financial Times of £858m, the proceeds on the sale of The Economist Group of £377m and proceeds on the sale of PowerSchool £222m. The cash inflow in 2014 primarily relates to the proceeds on sale of Mergermarket of £375m, less associated costs. The cash outflow in 2013 primarily relates to the cash disposed with Penguin upon formation of Penguin Random House.

The cash outflow from financing of £364m in 2015 reflects a further 7% increase in the dividend, the repayment of a £300m Sterling bond, offset in part by the proceeds from the issue of a €500m Euro note. The cash outflow from financing of £534m in 2014 reflects a 7% increase in the dividend, the repayment of a $400m US dollar bond and a £250m sterling bond, offset in part by proceeds from the issue of a €500m Euro note. The cash outflow from financing of £395m in 2013 reflects a 7% increase in the dividend, the repayment of a $350m US Dollar note during the year and the buy-out of various non-controlling interests, with some offset from the proceeds of a $500m US Dollar note issued in the year.

Capital resources

Our borrowings fluctuate by season due to the effect of the school year on the working capital requirements in the educational materials business. Assuming no acquisitions or disposals, our maximum level of net debt normally occurs in July, and our minimum level of net debt normally occurs in December. Based on a review of historical trends in working capital requirements and of forecast monthly balance sheets for the next 12 months, we believe that we have sufficient funds available for the Group’s present requirements, with an appropriate level of headroom given our portfolio of businesses and current plans. Our ability to expand and grow our business in accordance with current plans and to meet long-term capital requirements beyond this 12-month period will depend on many factors, including the rate, if any, at which our cash flow changes and the availability of public and private debt and equity financing, including our ability to secure bank lines of credit. We cannot be certain that additional financing, if required, will be available on terms favorable to us, if at all.

At December 31, 2015, our net debt was £654m compared to net debt of £1,639m at December 31, 2014 reflecting the business disposals completed during 2015. Net debt is defined as all short-term, medium-term and long-term borrowing (including finance leases), less all cash, cash equivalents and liquid resources. Cash equivalents comprise short-term deposits with a maturity of up to 90 days, while liquid resources comprise short-

 

46


Table of Contents

term deposits with maturities of more than 90 days and other marketable instruments which are readily realizable and held on a short-term basis. Total Short-term, medium-term and long-term borrowing amounted to £2,330m at December 31, 2015, compared to £2,225m at December 31, 2014 reflecting repayment of a £300m Sterling bond, offset by the issue of a €500m Euro note and exchange movements (primarily the strengthening of the US dollar against Sterling). At December 31, 2015, total cash and liquid resources were £1,703m, compared to £530m at December 31, 2014. This increase reflects the proceeds from the business disposals completed during 2015.

Contractual obligations

The following table summarizes the maturity of our borrowings, our obligations under non-cancelable leases, and pension funding obligations, exclusive of anticipated interest payments. Due to the variability of future interest payments, these have been excluded from the table below.

 

     At December 31, 2015  
     Total      Less than
one year
     One to
two years
     Two to
five years
     After five
years
 
     £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  

Gross borrowings:

              

Bank loans, overdrafts and commercial paper

     38         38         —           —           —     

Bonds

     2,284         240         —           621         1,423   

Finance lease obligations………………

     8         4         3         1         —     

Operating lease obligations

     1,391         164         146         396         685   

UK Pension funding obligations

     90         90         —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     3,811         536         149         1,018         2,108   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At December 31, 2015 the Group had capital commitments for fixed assets, including finance leases already under contract, of £8m (2014: £13m). There are contingent liabilities in respect of indemnities, warranties and guarantees in relation to former subsidiaries and in respect of guarantees in relation to subsidiaries and associates. In addition there are contingent liabilities in respect of legal and royalty claims. None of these claims or guarantees is expected to result in a material gain or loss.

In 2014, the Group negotiated a new $1,750m committed revolving credit facility with an initial maturity date of August 2019. During 2015, the Group extended the maturity date of this facility by 1 year to August 2020. The facility requires the Group to pay an annual commitment fee of 0.1225%, payable quarterly, on the unused amount of the facility.

Off-Balance sheet arrangements

The Group does not have any off-balance sheet arrangements, as defined by the SEC for the purposes of From 20-F, that have or are reasonably likely to have a material current or future effect on the Group’s financial position or results of operations.

Borrowings

The Group finances its operations by a mixture of cash flows from operations, short-term borrowings from banks and commercial paper markets, and longer term loans from banks and capital markets.

We have in place a committed revolving credit facility of $1.75bn, which matures in August 2020. At December 31, 2015, the full $1.75bn was available under this facility. This credit facility contains two key covenants measured for each 12 month period ending June 30 and December 31:

We must maintain the ratio of our profit before interest, tax and amortization to our net interest payable at no less than 3:1; and

 

47


Table of Contents

We must maintain the ratio of our rolling 12 month average net debt to our EBITDA, which we explain below, at no more than 4:1.

“EBITDA” refers to earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization. We are currently in compliance with these covenants.

See note 18 of “Item 18. Financial Statements” for information on our longer term loans from banks and capital markets.

Treasury policy

Our treasury policy is described in note 19 of “Item 18. Financial Statements”. For a more detailed discussion of our borrowing and use of derivatives, see “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk”.

Related parties

There were no significant or unusual related party transactions in 2015, 2014 or 2013. Refer to note 36 in “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

Accounting principles

For a description of our principal accounting policies used refer to note 1 in “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

 

48


Table of Contents
ITEM 6.     DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Directors and senior management

We are managed by a board of directors and a chief executive who reports to the board and manages through an executive committee. We refer to the board of directors, the chairman of the board of directors and the executive committee as our “senior management”.

The following table sets forth information concerning directors, as of February 29, 2016.

 

Name

   Age     

Position

Sidney Taurel

     67       Chairman

John Fallon

     53       Chief Executive

Elizabeth Corley, CBE

     59       Non-executive Director

Vivienne Cox, CBE

     56       Senior Independent Director

Josh Lewis

     53       Non-executive Director

Linda Lorimer

     63       Non-executive Director

Harish Manwani

     62       Non-executive Director

Tim Score

     55       Non-executive Director

Lincoln Wallen

     55       Non-executive Director

Coram Williams

     42       Chief Financial Officer

Sidney Taurel

Appointed January 1, 2016. Chairman of the nomination committee and member of the remuneration committee.

Sidney has over 40 years of experience in business and finance, and is currently a board director and chairman of the Compensation Committee at IBM Corporation. He is also a director at McGraw Hill Financial, Inc., a role from which he will step down during 2016. Sidney is senior advisor at global investment bank Moelis & Co and an advisory board member at pharmaceutical firms Takeda Pharmaceutical and Almirall. He was chief executive officer of global pharmaceutical firm Eli Lilly and Company from 1998 until 2008, chairman of the business from 1999 until 2008, and has been chairman emeritus since 2009. Sidney has received three US presidential appointments: to the Homeland Security Advisory Council, the President’s Export Council and the Advisory Committee for Trade Policy and Negotiations, and is an officer of the French Legion of Honor.

John Fallon

Appointed October 3, 2012.

John became Pearson’s chief executive on 1 January 2013. Since 2008 he had been responsible for the company’s education businesses outside North America, and a member of the Pearson management committee. He joined Pearson in 1997 as director of communications and was appointed president of Pearson Inc., in 2000. In 2003, he was appointed CEO of Pearson’s educational publishing businesses for Europe, Middle East & Africa. Prior to joining Pearson, John was director of corporate affairs at Powergen plc, and was also a member of the company’s executive committee. Earlier in his career, John held senior public policy and communications roles in UK local government. He is an advisory board member of the Global Business Coalition for Education and a member of the Council of the University of Hull.

Elizabeth Corley, CBE

Appointed May 1, 2014. Chairman of the remuneration committee and member of the nomination committee.

 

49


Table of Contents

Elizabeth is non-executive vice chair of Allianz Global Investors, where she was chief executive officer from 2005 to 2016. She was previously at Merrill Lynch Investment Managers (formerly Mercury Asset Management) and Coopers & Lybrand. Elizabeth is acting-chair of the FICC Markets Standards Board, a member of the ESMA stakeholder group and an advisory council member of TheCityUK. She is a non-executive director of BAE Systems plc and the Financial Reporting Council. In addition, she is a member of FEAM’s management committee, the CFA Future of Finance Council, the Supervisory Board of Euler SA, a council member of the City of London IRSG and a member of the Committee of 200. She is a fellow of the CFA and the Royal Society of Arts and is also a crime fiction author.

Vivienne Cox, CBE

Appointed on January 1, 2012. Chairman of the reputation & responsibility committee and member of the audit, nomination and remuneration committees.

Vivienne has wide experience in energy, natural resources and business innovation. She worked for BP plc for 28 years, in Britain and Continental Europe, in posts including executive vice president and chief executive of BP’s gas, power and renewables business and its alternative energy unit. She is non-executive director of Stena International and chairman of the supervisory board of Vallourec, which supplies tubular systems for the energy industry. She is also lead independent director at the UK Department for International Development. Vivienne was appointed Commander of the Order of the British Empire (CBE) in the 2016 New Year Honours for services to the UK Economy and Sustainability.

Josh Lewis

Appointed on March 1, 2011. Member of the nomination, remuneration and reputation & responsibility committees.

Josh’s experience spans finance, education and the development of digital enterprises. He is the founder of Salmon River Capital LLC, a New York-based private equity/venture capital firm focused on technology-enabled businesses in education, financial services and other sectors. Over a 25-year career in active, principal investing, he has been involved in a broad range of successful companies, including several pioneering enterprises in the education sector. In addition, he has long been active in the non-profit education sector, with associations including New Leaders, New Classrooms, and the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation. He is also a non-executive director of several enterprises in the fin-tech/data, education, and other sectors.

Linda Lorimer

Appointed July 1, 2013. Member of the audit, nomination and reputation & responsibility committees.

Linda has a deep background in education strategy, administration and public affairs. She is senior counsellor to the president and provost of Yale University and until recently served as vice president for Global & Strategic Initiatives at Yale, where her duties included oversight of Yale’s Office of International Affairs and Office of Digital Dissemination. Over a 30-year career in higher education, she has been responsible for many of Yale’s administrative services including the university’s public communications, alumni relations and Office of Sustainability. Previously, Linda served as president of Randolph-Macon Woman’s College in Virginia and was chair of the board of the Association of American Colleges and Universities. She has served on the boards of several public companies, including as presiding director of the McGraw-Hill Companies.

Harish Manwani

Appointed October 1, 2013. Member of the nomination and reputation & responsibility committees.

Harish has an extensive background in emerging markets and senior experience in a successful global organization. He was previously chief operating officer of consumer products company Unilever, having joined

 

50


Table of Contents

the company in 1976 as a marketing management trainee in India, and held senior management roles around the world, including North America, Latin America, Europe, Africa and Asia. He is non-executive chairman of Hindustan Unilever Limited in India, and serves on the boards of Whirlpool Corporation, Qualcomm Inc. and Nielsen Holdings. He is also on the board of the Indian School of Business and the Economic Development Board (EDB) of Singapore, and is global executive advisor at Blackstone Private Equity.

Tim Score

Appointed January 1, 2015. Chairman of the audit committee and member of the nomination and remuneration committees.

Tim has extensive experience of the technology sector in both developed and emerging markets, having served as chief financial officer of ARM Holdings plc, the world’s leading semiconductor IP company, a position he held for 13 years. He is an experienced non-executive director and currently sits on the boards of The British Land Company plc and HM Treasury. He served on the board of National Express Group plc from 2005 to 2014, including time as interim chairman and six years as the senior independent director. Earlier in his career Tim held senior finance roles with Rebus Group, William Baird, BTR plc and others.

Lincoln Wallen

Appointed January 1, 2016. Member of the nomination committee.

Lincoln is chief technology officer for DreamWorks Animation, the global family entertainment company, a position he has held since 2012, having joined the company as head of research and development in 2008. Prior to this, Lincoln served as chief technology officer for the mobile business of Electronic Arts, Inc., a leading interactive entertainment software company. He has held senior positions at Criterion Software, MathEngine plc and is a non-executive director of the Smith Institute for Industrial Mathematics & System Engineering. Lincoln is also an advisory board member of Hewlett Packard Enterprise and a member of the STEM Advisory Committee of the National Academy foundation. Lincoln was formerly a lecturer and reader in computation at the University of Oxford.

Coram Williams

Appointed August 1, 2015.

Coram joined Pearson in 2003 and has held a number of senior positions including finance and operations director for Pearson’s English Language Teaching business in Europe, Middle East and Africa, interim president of Pearson Education Italia and head of financial planning and analysis for Pearson. In 2008 Coram became CFO of The Penguin Group and was latterly appointed CFO of Penguin Random House in 2013. Coram trained at Arthur Andersen, and subsequently worked in both the auditing and consulting practices of the firm.

The following table sets forth information concerning the executive committee, as of February 29, 2016

 

Name

  

Position

Sir Michael Barber

   Chief Education Advisor

Tim Bozik

   President, Global Products

Rod Bristow

   President, Core Markets

Gio Giovannelli

   President, Growth Markets

Albert Hitchcock

   Chief Technology and Operations Officer

Kate James

   Chief Corporate Affairs Officer

Don Kilburn

   President, North America

Bob Whelan

   President, Pearson Assessments

Melinda Wolfe

   Chief Human Resources Officer

 

51


Table of Contents

Sir Michael Barber

Sir Michael is Chief Education Advisor at Pearson and is a leading authority on education systems and reform. He leads Pearson’s worldwide program of research into education policy and efficacy, advising on and supporting the development of products and services that deliver efficacy and build on research findings. He leads Pearson’s strategy for developing innovative educational models for low-income families in the developing world. Sir Michael is a Distinguished Visiting Fellow at Harvard and holds an honorary doctorate from the University of Exeter. His publications include Oceans of Innovation and An Avalanche is Coming.

Tim Bozik

Tim is President, Global Products and has extensive knowledge of all aspects of higher education as well experience in moving Pearson towards being a more digital, data and services-led business. Tim joined Pearson in 1983 as a sales representative and has since held several leadership roles in product development and general management, including his most recent post as chief executive of US higher education. His work has included a focus on the role of technology, data and analytics to improve access, achievement and affordability.

Rod Bristow

Rod is President, Core Markets and has wide-ranging expertise in K-12 schools, higher and professional education, assessment, qualifications, and learning technology having been involved in education throughout his career. He was previously the President of Pearson UK. Rod is a Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts, a former President of the Publishers Association, a trustee of the Education and Employers Taskforce and a member of the President’s Committee of the Confederation of British Industry.

Gio Giovannelli

Gio is President, Growth Markets having joined Pearson as Managing Director of Pearson Brazil. Gio was previously CEO of Grupo Multi, Brazil’s leading English language learning business, which was acquired by Pearson in December 2013. Prior to Multi, he held CEO positions in Brazil across a number of sectors, including energy, mining and HR services. Gio is a Board member of Natura (cosmetics and beauty products) and CVC (travel and vacation operator), both listed in the Sao Paulo Stock Exchange BOVESPA. Gio earned his undergraduate degree in Italy’s Bocconi University, holds a Ph.D. in Economics from the American University in Washington DC and is an OPM graduate of Harvard Business School.

Albert Hitchcock

Albert joined Pearson in March 2014 as Chief Information Officer. He leads the IT organization across Pearson globally and has overall responsibility for implementing the group’s technology strategy to enable competitive advantage. He previously held the position of Group Chief Information Officer at Vodafone and prior to this was Global CIO at Nortel. Albert is a Fellow of the Institute of Engineering and Technology and a Chartered Engineer.

Kate James

Kate joined Pearson in January 2014 as Chief Corporate Affairs Officer. She has a background in international government relations, corporate communications, brand management and sustainability. Prior to joining Pearson, Kate was Chief Communications Officer at the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation. Kate is a member of the board of Vital Voices.

Don Kilburn

Don is President, North America and has broad product-service experience in Higher Ed and K-12. He is responsible for accelerating shift-to-services and digital and transforming North American business by putting

 

52


Table of Contents

learner outcomes at the center of Pearson. Previously, he was vice chairman of Pearson Higher Education North America and chief executive of Pearson Learning Solutions. Don joined Pearson in 1998 and has extensive general-manager experience in a variety of companies including Viacom and Xerox.

Bob Whelan

Bob is President, Pearson Assessments and has significant expertise in assessment and growing businesses. As president and chief executive officer of Pearson VUE since January 2000, Bob led Pearson’s growth as a global leader in computer-based assessments. He now leads Pearson’s combined assessments businesses including K12 and clinical assessment as well as Pearson VUE. Bob received his BA from the University of Alabama in finance and economics.

Melinda Wolfe

Melinda is Chief Human Resources Officer, having joined Pearson in September 2013. Her extensive human resources expertise includes business alignment, talent management, succession planning, diversity, leadership, change management, culture, employee engagement, team building, health and wellness and non-profit leadership. Melinda previously worked in Human Resources at Bloomberg LP and served as an adjunct professor at Columbia University’s School of International and Public Affairs, on Mayor Bloomberg’s Commission on Women as well as Planned Parenthood of NTC, the National Council for Research on Women, Auburn Seminary, the Dalton School and the advisory boards of Barnard, Duke University and Washington University.

Compensation of senior management

It is the role of the remuneration committee (the committee) to approve the remuneration and benefits packages of the executive directors and other members of the Pearson Executive.

The principal duties of the remuneration committee (the committee) are to:

 

  a. Determine and regularly review the remuneration policy for the executive directors, the presidents of the principal geographic markets and lines of business and other members of the Pearson executive who report directly to the CEO (Executive Management). This policy includes base salary, annual and long-term incentives, pension arrangements, any other benefits and termination of employment.

 

  b. Regularly review the implementation and operation of the remuneration policy for Executive Management and approve the individual remuneration and benefits packages of the executive directors.

 

  c. Approve the design of, and determine targets for, any performance-related pay plans operated by the company and approve the total payments to be made under such plans.

 

  d. Review the design of the company’s long-term incentive and other share plans for approval by the board and shareholders.

 

  e. Advise and decide on general and specific arrangements in connection with the termination of employment of executive directors.

 

  f. Review and approve corporate goals and objectives relevant to CEO remuneration and evaluate the CEO’s performance in light of those goals and objectives.

 

  g. Have delegated responsibility for determining the remuneration and benefits package of the chairman of the board.

 

  h. Appoint and set the terms of engagement for any remuneration consultants who advise the committee and monitor the cost of such advice.

 

53


Table of Contents

The committee also takes note of the remuneration arrangements for the company’s senior leadership group representing approximately 100 executives and managers.

Remuneration policy

Our starting point continues to be that total remuneration should reward both short and long-term results, delivering competitive rewards for target performance, but outstanding rewards for exceptional performance.

Total remuneration is made up of fixed and performance-linked elements, with each element supporting different objectives. Base salary helps to recruit, reward and retain people and reflects competitive market level, role, skills, experience and individual contribution. Allowances and benefits help to recruit and retain people and reflect the local competitive market. Retirement benefits help to recruit and retain people and recognize their long-term commitment to the company. Annual incentives motivate the achievement of annual strategic goals and personal objectives, provide focus on key financial metrics and reward individual contribution to the success of the company. Long-term incentives help to recruit, reward and retain people, drive long-term earnings, share price growth and value creation, align interests of executives and shareholders, encourage long-term shareholding and commitment to the company and link management’s long-term reward and wealth to corporate performance in a flexible way.

For benchmarking purposes, we review remuneration by reference to different comparator groups. We look at survey data from: select UK human capital-intensive businesses and UK and US media convergence companies with a focus on media, information services and technology (and cross-referenced with FTSE 100 companies with significant international exposure). These companies are of a range of sizes relative to Pearson, but the method our independent advisers, Willis Towers Watson, use to make comparisons on remuneration takes this variation in size into account. We also look at publicly disclosed and proxy data for global media convergence comparators with a focus on media and technology. We use these companies because they represent the wider executive talent pool from which we might expect to recruit externally and the pay market to which we might be vulnerable if our remuneration was not competitive.

Consistent with its policy, the committee places considerable emphasis on the performance-linked elements i.e. annual and long-term incentives. The committee will continue to review the mix of fixed and performance-linked remuneration on an annual basis, consistent with its overall philosophy.

Base salary

Base salaries are normally reviewed annually for the following year, taking into account general economic and market conditions, the level of increases made across the company as a whole, particular circumstances such as changes in role, responsibilities or organization, the remuneration of executives in similar positions in comparable companies and individual performance.

Allowances and benefits

Allowances and benefits include inter alia cash allowances and non-cash benefits such as health, welfare and car benefits. Allowances and benefits do not form part of pensionable earnings. The provision and level of allowances and benefits are competitive and appropriate in the context of the market.

Retirement benefits

New employees in the UK are eligible to join the Money Purchase 2003 section of the Pearson Group Pension plan. New employees in the US are eligible to join the 401(k) plan.

Under the Money Purchase 2003 section of the Pearson Group Pension Plan in the UK, normal retirement is age 62 but, subject to company consent, retirement is currently possible from age 55 or earlier in the event of

 

54


Table of Contents

ill-health. During service, the company and the employee make contributions into a pension fund. Company contributions amount to up to 16% of pensionable salary (double the amount of the employee contribution, which is limited according to certain age bands). Account balances are used to provide benefits at retirement. Pensions for a member’s spouse, dependent children and/or nominated financial dependents are payable on death.

Under the 401(k) plan in the US, which is a defined contribution plan, account balances will be used to provide benefits at retirement. Company contributions amount to 100% of the first 3% of eligible compensation contributed by the employee and 50% of the next 3%, plus a basic annual company contribution of 1.25% of eligible compensation. Pearson Inc. Pension Plan participants who were at least age 40 at December 31, 2001 can receive an additional 0.5% — 1.5% of pay. In the event of death before retirement, the account balances will be used to provide benefits for designated beneficiaries.

Depending on when they joined the company, directors may participate in the defined benefit Pearson Inc. Pension Plan in the US or the Final Pay section of the Pearson Group Pension Plan in the UK, both of which are closed to new members.

Under the Final Pay section of the Pearson Group Pension Plan in the UK, normal retirement age is 62, but subject to company consent, retirement is currently possible from age 55 or earlier in the event of ill-health. During service, the employee makes a contribution of 5% of pensionable salary and the pension fund builds up based on final pensionable salary and pensionable service. The accrued pension is reduced on retirement prior to age 60. Pensions for a member’s spouse, dependent children and/or nominated financial dependents are payable on death.

In the US, the defined benefit Pearson Inc. Pension Plan provides a lump sum benefit that is convertible to an annuity on retirement. The lump sum benefit accrued at an age dependent percentage of capped compensation until December 31, 2001 when further benefit accruals ceased for most employees. Employees who satisfied criteria of age and service as of November 30, 1998 continue to earn benefits under an alternative formula that provides for 1.5% of final average earnings, adjusted for US Social Security. The benefit paid to these employees is the maximum of the lump sum benefit converted to an annuity and the benefit earned under the alternative final average earnings formula.

Members of the Pearson Group Pension Plan who joined after May 1989 are subject to an upper limit of earnings that can be used for pension purposes, known as the earnings cap. This limit was abolished by the Finance Act 2004. However the Pearson Group Pension Plan has retained its own ‘cap’, which will increase annually in line with the UK Government’s Index of Retail Prices (All Items). The cap was £145,800 effective April 6, 2014, and £149,400 effective April 6, 2015, and £150,600 effective April 6, 2016.

As a result of the UK Government’s A-Day changes effective from April 2006, UK executive directors and other members of the Pearson Group Pension Plan who are, or become, affected by the lifetime allowance are provided with a cash supplement as an alternative to further accrual of pension benefits on a basis that is broadly cost neutral to the company. Effective from April 6, 2011, the annual allowance (i.e. the maximum amount of pension saving that benefits from tax relief each year) was reduced from £255,000 to £50,000. Since April 6, 2012, the lifetime allowance (i.e. the maximum amount of pension and/or lump sum that can benefit from tax relief) has been £1.5m and was reduced to £1.25m on April 6, 2014.

 

55


Table of Contents

The pension entitlements of each director are as follows:

 

John

Fallon

   Member of the Pearson Group Pension Plan. His pension accrual rate is 1/30th of pensionable salary per annum, restricted to the plan earnings cap. Until April 2006, the company also contributed to a Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme (FURBS) on his behalf. Since April 2006, he has received a taxable and non-pensionable cash supplement in replacement of the FURBS.

Coram

Williams

   Pearson Group Pension Plan Accrual rate of 1/60th of pensionable salary per annum, subject to the Plan earnings cap.

Robin

Freestone

(stepped down August 1, 2015)

   Member of the Money Purchase 2003 section of the Pearson Group Pension Plan. Company contributions are 16% of pensionable salary per annum, restricted to the plan earnings cap. Until April 2006, the company also contributed to a Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme (FURBS) on his behalf. Since April 2006, he has received a taxable and non-pensionable cash supplement in replacement of the FURBS.

Annual incentives

The purpose of annual incentives is to motivate the achievement of annual strategic goals and personal objectives, provide a focus on key financial metrics, and reward individual contribution to the success of the company.

Measures and performance targets are set by the committee at the start of the year with payment made after year end following the committee’s assessment of performance relative to targets.

The plans are designed to incentivize and reward underlying performance and actual results are adjusted for the effect of foreign exchange and for portfolio changes (acquisitions and disposals) and other factors that the committee considers relevant in the performance year.

Annual incentive plans are discretionary. The committee reserves the right to adjust payments up or down before they are made if it believes exceptional factors warrant doing so. The committee may in exceptional circumstances make a special award where it is satisfied that the normal operation of the annual incentive does not provide an appropriate incentive or reward to participants.

The committee also reserves the right as a form of malus to adjust payments before they are made if special circumstances exist that warrant this, such as financial misstatement, individual misconduct or reputational damage to the company. The committee also reserves, in the same special circumstances, a right to reclaim or claw back payments or awards that have already been made.

Annual incentives will not exceed 200% of base salary.

For the chief executive, the individual maximum opportunity that will apply for 2016 is 180% of base salary (which is the same as applied for 2015).

For other executive directors and other members of the Pearson Executive, individual incentive opportunities take into account their membership of that committee and the relative contribution of their businesses or roles to the company’s overall goals. The individual maximum opportunity that will apply for 2016 varies by individual but will be no more than 170% of base salary.

For the chief executive, other executive directors and other members of the Pearson Executive, there is normally no pay-out for performance at threshold.

 

56


Table of Contents

The committee has the discretion to select the performance measures, targets and relative weightings from year to year to ensure continuing alignment with strategy and to ensure targets are sufficiently stretching. The committee establishes a threshold below which no pay-out is achieved and a maximum at or above which the annual incentive pays out in full.

For 2015, the funding of annual incentives was related to the performance against targets for Pearson’s adjusted earnings per share, sales, and operating cash flow.

Individual annual incentive pay-outs also take into account individual performance against personal objectives. Personal objectives are agreed with the chief executive (or, in the case of the chief executive, the chairman) and may be functional, operational, strategic and non-financial and include inter alia objectives relating to environmental, social and governance issues.

Long-term incentives

The purpose of long-term incentives is to help to recruit, reward and retain, drive long-term earnings, share price growth and value creation, align the interests of executives and shareholders, encourage long-term shareholding and commitment to the company, and link management’s long-term reward and wealth to corporate performance in a flexible way.

Awards of restricted shares are made on an annual basis.

Awards of restricted shares for executive directors and other members of the Pearson Executive vest on a sliding scale based on performance against stretching corporate performance targets measured at the end of the three-year performance period.

For performance-related awards for members of the Pearson Executive, performance will continue to be tested over 3 years and 75% of the vested shares will continue to be released at that point. Starting with awards made in 2014, there is a mandatory restriction on participants’ ability to dispose of the 75% of the vested shares (other than to meet personal tax liabilities) for a further 2 years. Furthermore, participants’ rights to the release of the 25% of the vested shares are subject to continued employment over the same period.

Where shares vest, participants also receive additional shares representing the gross value of dividends that would have been paid on these shares during the performance period and reinvested.

The plan permits awards of restricted shares to be made that are not subject to performance conditions to satisfy reward and retention objectives. However, other than in exceptional circumstances on recruitment, it is the company’s policy not to award restricted shares to executive directors and other members of the Pearson Executive without performance conditions.

The long-term incentive plan also provides for the grant of stock options. Whilst it is not the committee’s intention to grant stock options in 2016 or the foreseeable future, the committee believes that it should retain the flexibility of granting stock options in addition to, or instead of, restricted stock awards in the right circumstances. Any decision by the committee to grant stock options in the future would take account of best practice prevailing at the time. The committee would consult with shareholders before granting stock options to executive directors.

Pearson’s reported financial results for the relevant periods are used to measure performance.

The committee reserves the right to adjust pay-outs up or down before they are released taking into account exceptional factors that distort underlying business performance or if it believes exceptional factors warrant doing so. In making such adjustments, the committee is guided by the principle of aligning shareholder and management interests.

 

57


Table of Contents

The committee also reserves the right as a form of malus to adjust pay-outs before they are released if exceptional circumstances exist that warrant this, such as financial misstatement, individual misconduct or reputational damage to the company.

The committee also reserves, in the same special circumstances, a right to reclaim or claw back pay-outs or awards that have already been released.

We set the level of individual awards by taking into account:

 

   

the face value of individual awards at the time of grant, assuming that performance targets are met in full;

 

   

market practice for comparable companies and market assessments of total remuneration from our independent advisers;

 

   

individual roles and responsibilities; and

 

   

company and individual performance.

The committee has the discretion to determine the performance measures, weightings and targets governing an award of restricted shares prior to grant to ensure continuing alignment with strategy and to ensure that targets are sufficiently stretching.

The committee establishes a threshold below which no pay-out is achieved and a maximum at or above which the award pays out in full.

Awards are normally subject to the achievement of targets for growth in earnings per share, return on invested capital and relative total shareholder return.

All employees (including executive directors) are also eligible to participate in savings-related share acquisition programs in the UK, US and rest of world, which are not subject to any performance conditions.

There are limits on the amount of new-issue equity we can use. In any rolling ten-year period, no more than 10% of Pearson equity will be issued, or be capable of being issued, under all Pearson’s share plans, and no more than 5% of Pearson equity will be issued, or be capable of being issued, under executive or discretionary plans.

Shareholding policy

Executive directors are expected to build up a substantial shareholding in the company in line with the policy of encouraging widespread employee ownership. Shares that count towards these guidelines include any shares held unencumbered by the executive, their spouse and/or dependent children plus any shares vested but held pending release under a restricted share plan. In 2014, the target holding was increased to 300% of salary for the chief executive and 200% of salary for the other executive directors. Mandatory guidelines were also extended to other members of the Pearson Executive at 100% of salary. Details of individual directors’ shareholding are set out at the end of this section.

Service agreements

In accordance with long established policy, all executive directors have service agreements under which, other than by termination in accordance with the terms of these agreements, employment continues indefinitely.

There are no special provisions for notice or compensation in the event of a change of control of Pearson.

It is the company’s policy that the company may terminate the chairman’s and executive directors’ service agreements by giving no more than 12 months’ notice.

 

58


Table of Contents

As an alternative, for executive directors the company may at its discretion pay in lieu of that notice. Payment-in-lieu of notice may be made in equal monthly installments from the date of termination to the end of any unexpired notice period. In the case of the CEO, payment-in-lieu of notice in installments may also be subject to mitigation and reduced taking into account earnings from alternative employment.

For executive directors, pay in lieu of notice comprises 100% of the annual salary at the date of termination and the annual cost to the company of providing pension and all other benefits. For the chairman, pay in lieu of notice comprises 100% of the annual fees at the date of termination. In limited circumstances, in addition to making a full payment in lieu of notice, the company may permit an executive director to stay employed after the announcement of his or her departure for a limited period to ensure an effective hand-over and/or allow time for a successor to be appointed.

The company may, depending on the circumstances of the termination, determine that it will not pay the director in lieu of notice and may instead terminate a director’s contract in breach and make a damages payment, taking into account as appropriate he director’s ability to mitigate his or her loss.

On cessation of employment, save as otherwise provided for under the rules of Pearson’s discretionary share plans, executive directors’ entitlements to any unvested awards lapse automatically. In the case of injury, disability, ill-health or redundancy (as determined by the committee), where a participant’s employing company ceases to be part of Pearson, or any other reason if the committee so decides in its absolute discretion:

 

   

awards that are subject to performance conditions will stay in force as if the participant had not ceased employment and shall vest on the original vesting date

 

   

awards that are not subject to a performance condition will be released on cessation of employment

 

   

the number of shares that are released shall be prorated for the period of the participant’s service in the restricted period (although the committee may in its absolute discretion waive or vary the prorating)

On cessation of employment, executive directors, having been notified of participation in an annual incentive plan for the relevant financial year, may retain entitlement to a pro rata annual incentive for their period of service in the financial year to their leaving date. Such pay-out will normally be calculated in good faith on the same terms and paid at the same time as for continuing executive directors.

Eligibility for allowances and benefits including retirement benefits normally ceases on retirement or on the termination of employment for any other reason.

Executive directors’ non-executive directorships

Our policy is that executive directors may, by agreement with the board, serve as non-executives of other companies and retain any fees payable for their services.

Where executive directors served as non-executive directors elsewhere, they either waived or did not receive fees.

Chairman’s and non-executive directors’ remuneration

The committee’s policy is that the chairman’s pay should be set at a level that is competitive with those of chairmen in similar positions in comparable companies. He is not entitled to any annual or long-term incentive, retirement or other employee benefits.

Fees for non-executive directors are determined by the full board having regard to market practice and within the restrictions contained in Pearson’s Articles of Association. Non-executive directors receive no other pay or benefits (other than reimbursement for expenses incurred in connection with their directorship of Pearson) and do not participate in Pearson’s equity-based incentive plans.

 

59


Table of Contents

The chairman’s and non-executive directors’ fees were last reviewed in 2014 and increased with effect from May 1, 2014 with a commitment to review again in 2017. Fees for the non-executive directors were last increased with effect from May 1, 2014.

The structure of non-executive directors’ fees is as follows:

 

     With effect from
May 1, 2014
 

Non-executive director

   £ 70,000   

Chairmanship of audit committee

   £ 27,500   

Chairmanship of remuneration committee

   £ 22,000   

Chairmanship of reputation and responsibility committee

   £ 10,000   

Membership of audit committee

   £ 15,000   

Membership of remuneration committee

   £ 10,000   

Membership of reputation and responsibility committee

   £ 5,000   

Senior independent director

   £ 22,000   

 

Notes:

(1) The fee paid to the chairman remains unchanged at £500,000.
(2) A minimum of 25% of the basic fee is paid in Pearson shares that the non-executive directors have committed to retain for the period of their directorships.
(3) Non-executive directors serve Pearson under letters of appointment and do not have service contracts. There is no entitlement to compensation on the termination of their directorships.

Remuneration of senior management

The remuneration received by executive directors in respect of the financial year ending December 31, 2015 was as follows:

 

     Base Salary/
Fees
     Allowances &
Benefits(1)
     Annual
Incentives
     Long-term
Incentives
     Retirement
Benefits
     Total  
     £000      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000  

Chairman

                 

Glen Moreno

     500         —           —           —           —           500   

Executive directors

                 

John Fallon

     776         62         0         54         371         1,263   

Coram Williams

     258         0         0         0         18         276   

Robin Freestone (stepped down
August 1, 2015)

     417         13         0         41         126         597   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Senior management as a group

     1,951         75         0         95         515         2,636   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Benefits include company car, car allowance, private use of a driver, healthcare, additional life cover and long-term disability insurance.
(2) Figures for Coram Williams and Robin Freestone relate to full period of employment in 2015; for Coram commencing 1 July 2015, and for Robin ending 30 September 2015. Note that Coram became an executive director and Robin stepped down as an executive director on 1 August 2015.
(3) Glen Moreno stepped down on 31 December 2015.

 

60


Table of Contents

Share options for senior management

This table sets forth for each director the number of share options held as of December 31, 2015 as well as the exercise price, rounded to the nearest whole pence/cent, and the range of expiration dates of these options.

 

Director

   Number of
Options
     Exercise
Price
     Earliest
Exercise Date
     Expiry Date  

John Fallon

     1,109         811.2p         08/01/17         02/01/18   

Robin Freestone

     1,109         811.2p         08/01/17         02/01/18   

 

Notes:

(1) The share option awards made in 2010 to John Fallon in respect of 1,930 shares and 2012 to Robin Freestone in respect of 990 shares vested and became exercisable in the year and were exercised on 3 August 2015.
(2) No variations to the terms and conditions of share options were made during the year.
(3) The acquisition of shares under the worldwide save for shares plan is not subject to a performance condition.
(4) All share options that become exercisable during the year are included in the single figure of total remuneration for that year. The value included in the single figure of total remuneration is the number of options multiplied by the difference between the discounted option price and the market value on the earliest exercise date. Share options that became exercisable in the 2015 are included in the single figure of total remuneration for 2015 based on the share price on 1 August 2015 of 1,203p.
(5) The market price on December 31, 2015 was 736.0p per share and the range during the year was 695.0p to 1,508.0p.

Share ownership of senior management

The table overleaf shows the number of ordinary shares and conditional shares held by directors and their connected persons as at December 31, 2015.

Ordinary shares include both ordinary shares listed on the London Stock Exchange and American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The figures include both shares and ADRs acquired by individuals investing part of their own after-tax annual bonus in Pearson shares under the annual bonus share matching plan.

Conditional shares means shares which have vested but remain held subject to continuing employment for a pre-defined holding period.

 

61


Table of Contents

Additional information with respect to share options held by, and bonus awards for, these persons is set out above in “Remuneration of Senior Management” and “Share Options of Senior Management”. The total number of ordinary shares held by senior management as of December 31, 2015 was 503,066.

 

As at 31 December 2015

   Ordinary
shares(1)
     Conditional
Shares
 

Glen Moreno

     210,000         —     

Sidney Taurel

     —           —     

John Fallon

     293,056         —     

Coram Williams

     10         —     

Tim Score

     849         —     

Elizabeth Corley

     1,267         —     

Vivienne Cox

     2,938         —     

Josh Lewis

     7,740         —     

Linda Lorimer

     2,675         —     

Lincoln Wallen

     —           —     

Harish Manwani

     2,571         —     

 

Notes:

(1) Ordinary shares include both ordinary shares listed on the London Stock Exchange and American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The figures include both shares and ADRs acquired by individuals investing part of their own after-tax annual bonus in Pearson shares under the annual bonus share matching plan.
(2) The register of directors’ interests (which is open to inspection during normal office hours) contains full details of directors’ shareholdings and options to subscribe for shares. The market price on December 31, 2015 was 736.0p per share and the range during the year was 695.0p to 1,508.0p.
(3) Ordinary shares do not include any shares vested but held pending release under a restricted share plan.
(4) On 29 February 2016, Coram Williams purchased 5,000 shares and on 2 March 2016, Sidney Taurel purchased 50,000 shares.
(5) Sidney Taurel and Lincoln Wallen were appointed as directors on 1 January 2016. Glen Moreno left Pearson on 31 December 2015.

The total remuneration of the executive committee is set out in the table below:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015  

Short-term employee benefits

     7   

Retirement benefits

     1   

Share-based payment costs

     1   
  

 

 

 

Total

     9   
  

 

 

 

Employee share ownership plans

In 1998, we introduced a worldwide save for shares plan. Under this plan, our employees around the world have the option to save a portion of their monthly salary over periods of three or five years. At the end of this period, the employee has the option to purchase ordinary shares with the accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 80% of the market price prevailing at the commencement of the employee’s participation in the plan.

In 2014, shareholders approved the renewal and extension of the life of the UK plan by a further ten years, until 2024 and the renewal of the directors’ authority to continue to operate equivalent arrangements for non-UK employees. As part of this renewal, the savings limit for the UK HMRC-approved part of the plan (which forms the basis of the plan in the rest of the world outside the US) was increased from £250 to £500 per month.

In the United States, this plan operates as a stock purchase plan under Section 423 of the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986. This plan was introduced in 2000 following Pearson’s listing on the New York Stock

 

62


Table of Contents

Exchange. Under it, participants save a portion of their monthly salary over six month periods, at the end of which they have the option to purchase ADRs with their accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 85% of the lower of the market price prevailing at the beginning or end of the period. The maximum employee contribution under the plan is $1,000 per month.

Board practices

Our board currently comprises the chairman, two executive directors and seven non-executive directors. Our articles of association provide that at every annual general meeting, one-third of the board of directors, or the number nearest to one-third, shall retire from office. The directors to retire each year are the directors who have been longest in office since their last election or appointment. A retiring director is eligible for re-election. If at any annual general meeting, the place of a retiring director is not filled, the retiring director, if willing, is deemed to have been re-elected, unless at or prior to such meeting it is expressly resolved not to fill the vacated office, or unless a resolution for the re-election of that director has been put to the meeting and lost. Our articles of association also provide that every director be subject to re-appointment by shareholders at the next annual general meeting following their appointment.

However in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code, the board has resolved that all directors should offer themselves for re-election on an annual basis at the company’s annual general meeting. Accordingly, all of the directors will offer themselves for re-election, (or re-appointment in the case of directors who were appointed since the last meeting), at the forthcoming annual general meeting on April 29, 2016.

Pearson is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”). As a listed non-US issuer, we are required to comply with some of the NYSE’s corporate governance rules, and otherwise must disclose on our website any significant ways in which our corporate governance practices differ from those followed by US companies under the NYSE listing standards. At this time, the Company believes that it is in compliance in all material respects with all the NYSE rules except that the Nomination Committee is not composed entirely of independent directors, and that it is the full board, not the Nomination Committee, that develops and recommends corporate governance principles.

The board of directors has established the following formal committees, all of which report to the board. Each committee has its own written terms of reference setting out its authority and duties. These can be found on our website (www.pearson.com/ governance).

Audit committee

This committee provides the board with a vehicle to appraise our financial management and reporting and to assess the integrity of our accounting procedures and financial controls. Tim Score chairs this committee and its other members are Vivienne Cox and Linda Lorimer. Lincoln Wallen will join the committee on March 1, 2016. Tim Score is also the designated audit committee financial expert within the meaning of the applicable rules and regulations of the US Securities and Exchange Commission. Our internal and external auditors have direct access to the committee to raise any matter of concern and to report the results of work directed by the committee.

Remuneration committee

This committee meets regularly to decide the remuneration and benefits of the executive directors and the executive committee. The committee also recommends the chairman’s remuneration to the board of directors for its decision and reviews management development and succession plans. Elizabeth Corley chairs this committee and its other members are Vivienne Cox, Josh Lewis, Tim Score and Sidney Taurel.

Nomination committee

This committee meets from time to time as necessary to consider the appointment of new directors. The committee is chaired by Sidney Taurel and comprises all of the non-executive directors.

 

63


Table of Contents

Reputation and responsibility committee

This committee meets regularly to oversee Pearson’s strategy and plans to build and protect its corporate reputation. It provides advice and guidance to management on these plans. Vivienne Cox chairs this committee and its other members are Josh Lewis, Linda Lorimer and Harish Manwani.

Employees

The average number of persons employed by us in continuing operations during each of the three fiscal years ended 2015 were as follows:

 

   

37,265 in fiscal 2015,

 

   

38,654 in fiscal 2014, and

 

   

39,886 in fiscal 2013.

We, through our subsidiaries, have entered into collective bargaining agreements with employees in various locations. Our management has no reason to believe that we would not be able to renegotiate any such agreements on satisfactory terms. We encourage employees to contribute actively to the business in the context of their particular job roles and believe that the relations with our employees are generally good.

The table set forth below shows for 2015, 2014 and 2013 the average number of persons employed in each of our segments.

 

Average number employed

   2015      2014      2013  

North America

     19,951         20,927         21,856   

Core

     5,936         6,139         7,075   

Growth

     11,114         11,406         10,768   

Other

     264         182         187   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Continuing operations

     37,265         38,654         39,886   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The average number employed in discontinued operations was 2,282 in 2015, 2,295 in 2014, and 5,821 in 2013.

 

ITEM 7. MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

As at February 29, 2016, the company had been notified under the Financial Conduct Authority’s Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the following significant voting rights in its shares:

 

Name of shareholder

   Number of
ordinary shares held
     % of outstanding
ordinary shares
represented by number
of shares held
 

Schroders plc

     42,151,560         5.13

BlackRock, Inc.

     42,201,515         5.14

The shareholders listed above have no special voting rights.

On February 29, 2016, record holders with registered addresses in the United States held 36,106,012 ADRs, which represented 4.4% of our outstanding ordinary shares. Some of these ADRs are held by nominees and so these numbers may not accurately represent the number of beneficial owners in the United States.

Loans and equity advanced to joint ventures and associates during the year and as at December 31, 2015 are shown in note 12 in “Item 18. Financial Statements.” Dividends receivable from joint ventures and associates are set out in note 12 in “Item 18. Financial Statements”. There were no other related party transactions in 2015.

 

64


Table of Contents
ITEM 8. FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The financial statements filed as part of this Annual Report are included on pages F-1 through F-71 hereof.

Other than those events described in note 37 in “Item 18. Financial Statements” of this Form 20-F and seasonal fluctuations in borrowings, there has been no significant change to our financial condition or results of operations since December 31, 2015. Our borrowings fluctuate by season due to the effect of the school year on the working capital requirements of the educational book business. Assuming no acquisitions or disposals, our maximum level of net debt normally occurs in July, and our minimum level of net debt normally occurs in December.

Our policy with respect to dividend distributions is described in response to “Item 3. Key Information” above.

See “Item 4. Information on the Company — Legal Proceedings” for information with respect to legal proceedings to which we may be subject from time to time.

 

ITEM 9. THE OFFER AND LISTING

The principal trading market for our ordinary shares is the London Stock Exchange. Our ordinary shares also trade in the United States in the form of ADSs evidenced by ADRs under a sponsored ADR facility with The Bank of New York Mellon, as depositary. We established this facility in March 1995 and most recently amended it in August 2014 in connection with our New York Stock Exchange listing. Each ADS represents one ordinary share.

The ADSs trade on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “PSO”.

 

65


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth the highest and lowest middle market quotations, which represent the average of closing bid and asked prices, for the ordinary shares, as derived from the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange and the average daily trading volume on the London Stock Exchange:

 

   

on an annual basis for our five most recent fiscal years,

 

   

on a quarterly basis for our most recent quarter and two most recent fiscal years, and

 

   

on a monthly basis for the six most recent months.

 

       Ordinary
shares
     Average daily
trading volume
 

Reference period

   High      Low     
     (In pence)      (Ordinary shares)  

Five most recent fiscal years

        

2015

     1508         695         2,928,500   

2014

     1341         998         2,499,900   

2013

     1365         1119         2,065,900   

2012

     1294         1111         2,174,000   

2011

     1222         983         2,012,900   

Most recent quarter and two most recent fiscal years

        

2015 Fourth quarter

     1224         695         3,376,500   

Third quarter

     1275         1074         2,849,300   

Second quarter

     1471         1205         2,673,500   

First quarter

     1508         1140         2,802,000   

2014 Fourth quarter

     1241         1113         2,255,400   

Third quarter

     1240         1087         2,242,500   

Second quarter

     1175         1008         2,424,400   

First quarter

     1341         998         3,086,800   

Most recent six months

        

February 2016

     859         719.5         3,337,500   

January 2016

     789         657.5         4,341,200   

December 2015

     823.5         695         2,764,700   

November 2015

     867.5         765         3,714,000   

October 2015

     1224         861.5         3,638,200   

September 2015

     1161         1082         2,225,900   

 

ITEM 10. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Articles of association

We summarize below the material provisions of our articles of association, as amended, which have been filed as an exhibit to our annual report on Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2015. The summary below is qualified entirely by reference to the Articles of Association. We have multiple business objectives and purposes and are authorized to do such things as the board may consider fit to further our interests or incidental or conducive to the attainment of our objectives and purposes.

Directors’ powers

Our business shall be managed by the board of directors and the board may exercise all such of our powers as are not required by law or by the Articles of Association or by any directions given by the Company by special resolution, to be exercised in a general meeting.

 

66


Table of Contents

Interested directors

For the purposes of section 175 of the Companies Act 2006 the board may authorize any matter proposed to it which would, if not so authorized, involve a breach of duty by a Director under that section, including, without limitation, any matter which relates to a situation in which a Director has, or can have, an interest which conflicts, or possibly may conflict, with the interests of the Company. Any such authorization will be effective only if:

 

  (a) any requirement as to quorum at the meeting at which the matter is considered is met without counting the Director in question or any other interested Director; and

 

  (b) the matter was agreed to without their voting or would have been agreed to if their votes had not been counted.

The board may (whether at the time of the giving of the authorization or subsequently) make any such authorization subject to any limits or conditions it expressly imposes but such authorization is otherwise given to the fullest extent permitted. The board may vary or terminate any such authorization at any time.

Provided that he has disclosed to the board the nature and extent of his interest, a Director notwithstanding his office:

 

  (a) may be a party to, or otherwise interested in, any transaction or arrangement with the Company or in which the Company is otherwise (directly or indirectly) interested;

 

  (b) may act by himself or his firm in a professional capacity for the Company (otherwise than as auditor) and he or his firm shall be entitled to remuneration for professional services as if he were not a Director;

 

  (c) may be a director or other officer of, or employed by, or a party to a transaction or arrangement with, or otherwise interested in, any body corporate in which the Company is otherwise (directly or indirectly) interested.

A Director shall not, by reason of his office, be accountable to the Company for any remuneration or other benefit which he derives from any office or employment or from any transaction or arrangement or from any interest in any body corporate:

 

  (a) the acceptance, entry into or existence of which has been approved by the board (subject, in any such case, to any limits or conditions to which such approval was subject); or

 

  (b) which he is permitted to hold or enter into by virtue of paragraph (a), (b) or (c) above;

nor shall the receipt of any such remuneration or other benefit constitute a breach of his duty under section 176 of the Act.

A Director shall be under no duty to the Company with respect to any information which he obtains or has obtained otherwise than as a Director of the Company and in respect of which he owes a duty of confidentiality to another person. However, to the extent that his relationship with that other person gives rise to a conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest, which has been approved by the board: the Director shall not be in breach of the general duties he owes to the Company by virtue of sections 171 to 177 of the Act because he fails:

 

  (a) to disclose any such information to the board or to any Director or other officer or employee of the Company; and/or

 

  (b) to use or apply any such information in performing his duties as a Director of the Company.

 

67


Table of Contents

Where the existence of a Director’s relationship with another person has been approved by the board and his relationship with that person gives rise to a conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest, the Director shall not be in breach of the general duties he owes to the Company by virtue of sections 171 to 177 of the Act because he:

 

  (a) absents himself from meetings of the board at which any matter relating to the conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest will or may be discussed or from the discussion of any such matter at a meeting or otherwise; and/or

 

  (b) makes arrangements not to receive documents and information relating to any matter which gives rise to the conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest sent or supplied by the Company and/or for such documents and information to be received and read by a professional adviser, for so long as he reasonably believes such conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest subsists.

Except as stated below, a Director shall not vote in respect of any contract or arrangement or any other proposal whatsoever in which he has an interest which is, to his knowledge, a material interest, otherwise than by virtue of his interests in shares or debentures or other securities of or otherwise in or through the Company. A Director shall not be counted in the quorum at a meeting of the Board in relation to any resolution on which he is debarred from voting.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Director will be entitled to vote, and be counted in the quorum, on any resolution concerning any of the following matters:

 

   

the giving of any guarantee, security or indemnity in respect of money lent or obligations incurred by him or by any other person at the request of or for the benefit of the Company or any of its subsidiaries;

 

   

the giving of any guarantee, security or indemnity to a third party in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company or any of its subsidiaries for which he himself has assumed responsibility in whole or in part and whether alone or jointly with others under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security;

 

   

any proposal relating to the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings where it is offering securities in which offer a Director is or may be entitled to participate as a holder of securities or in the underwriting or sub-underwriting of which a Director is to participate;

 

   

any proposal relating to another company in which he and any persons connected with him do not to his knowledge hold an interest in shares (as that term is used in sections 820 to 825 of the Companies Act 2006) representing one per cent or more of either any class of the equity share capital, or the voting rights, in such company;

 

   

any proposal relating to an arrangement for the benefit of the employees of the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings which does not award him any privilege or benefit not generally awarded to the employees to whom such arrangement relates; and

 

   

any proposal concerning insurance that we propose to maintain or purchase for the benefit of directors or for the benefit of persons, including Directors.

Where proposals are under consideration concerning the appointment of two or more Directors to offices or employment with us or any company in which we are interested, these proposals may be divided and considered separately and each of these directors, if not prohibited from voting under the provisions of the eighth paragraph before this one, will be entitled to vote and be counted in the quorum with respect to each resolution except that concerning his or her own appointment.

Borrowing powers

The board of Directors may exercise all powers to borrow money and to mortgage or charge our undertaking, property and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities, whether outright or as

 

68


Table of Contents

collateral security for any of our or any third party’s debts, liabilities or obligations. The board of directors must restrict the borrowings in order to secure that the aggregate amount of undischarged monies borrowed by us (and any of our subsidiaries), but excluding any intra-group debts, shall not at any time (without the previous sanction of the Company in the form of an ordinary resolution) exceed a sum equal to twice the aggregate of the adjusted capital and reserves.

Other provisions relating to directors

Under the articles of association, directors are paid out of our funds for their services as we may from time to time determine by ordinary resolution and, in the case of non-executive directors, up to an aggregate of £750,000 or such other amounts as resolved by the shareholders at a general meeting. Any Director who is not an Executive Director and who performs special services which in the opinion of the Board are outside the scope of the ordinary duties of a Director, may be paid such extra remuneration by way of additional fee, salary, commission or otherwise as the Board may determine in accordance with our remuneration policy. Under the articles of association, Directors currently are not required to hold any share qualification. However, our remuneration policy mandates a shareholding guideline for executive directors which they are expected to build towards over a specified period.

Annual general meetings

Pursuant to the Companies Act 2006, the Company must hold an annual general meeting (‘AGM’) (within six months beginning with the day following its accounting reference date) at a place and time determined by the board. The following matters are usually considered at an annual general meeting:

 

   

approving final dividends;

 

   

consideration of the accounts and balance sheet;

 

   

ordinary reports of the board of directors and auditors and any other documents required to be annexed to the balance sheet;

 

   

as holders of ordinary shares vote for the election of one-third of the members of the board of directors at every annual general meeting, the appointment or election of directors in the place of those retiring by rotation or otherwise. Notwithstanding the provisions of the Articles, the board has resolved that all directors should offer themselves for re-election annually, in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code;

 

   

appointment or reappointment of, and determination of the remuneration of, the auditors; and

 

   

the renewal, limitation, extension, variation or grant of any authority to the board in relation to the allotment of securities.

The board may call a general meeting whenever it thinks fit. If at any time there are not within the United Kingdom sufficient directors capable of acting to form a quorum, any director or any two members may convene a general meeting in the same manner as nearly as possible as that in which meetings may be convened by the board.

No business shall be dealt with at any general meeting unless a quorum is present when the meeting proceeds to business. Three members present in person and entitled to vote shall be a quorum for all purposes. A corporation being a member shall be deemed to be personally present if represented by its duly authorized representative.

If a quorum for a meeting convened at the request of shareholders is not present within fifteen minutes of the appointed time, the meeting will be dissolved. In any other case, the general meeting will be adjourned to the same day in the next week, at the same time and place, or to a time and place that the chairman fixes. If at that rescheduled meeting a quorum is not present within fifteen minutes from the time appointed for holding the

 

69


Table of Contents

meeting, the shareholders present in person or by proxy will be a quorum. The chairman or, in his absence, the deputy chairman or any other director nominated by the board, will preside as chairman at every general meeting. If no director is present at the general meeting or no director consents to act as chairman, the shareholders present shall elect one of their number to be chairman of the meeting.

Share Certificates

Every person whose name is entered as a member in the Company’s Register of Members shall be entitled to one certificate in respect of each class of shares held(the law regarding this does not apply to stock exchange nominees). Subject to the terms of issue of the shares, certificates are issued following allotment or receipt of the form of transfer bearing the appropriate stamp duty by our registrar, Equiniti, Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex, BN99 6DA, United Kingdom, telephone number +44 121-415-7062.

Share capital

Any share may be issued with such preferred, deferred or other special rights or other restrictions as may be determined by way of a shareholders’ vote in general meeting. Subject to the Companies Act 2006, any shares may be issued which are to be redeemed or are liable to be redeemed at the option of the Company or the shareholders.

There are no provisions in the Articles of Association which discriminate against any existing or prospective shareholder as a result of such shareholder owning a substantial number of shares.

Subject to the terms of the shares which have been issued, the directors may from time to time make calls upon the shareholders in respect of any moneys unpaid on their shares, provided that (subject to the terms of the shares so issued) no call on any share shall be payable at less than fourteen clear days from the last call. The directors may, if they see fit, receive from any shareholder willing to advance the same, all and any part of the moneys uncalled and unpaid upon any shares held by him.

Changes in capital

We may from time to time, by ordinary resolution subject to the Companies Act 2006:

 

   

consolidate and divide all or any of our share capital into shares of a larger nominal amount than its existing shares; or

 

   

sub-divide all of or any of our existing shares into shares of smaller nominal amounts.

We may, from time to time increase our share capital by allotting new shares in accordance with the prescribed threshold authorized by shareholders at the last annual general meeting and subject to the consents and procedures required by the Companies Act 2006, may by special resolution reduce our share capital.

Voting rights

Every holder of ordinary shares present in person at a meeting of shareholders has one vote on a vote taken by a show of hands. On a poll, every holder of ordinary shares who is present in person or by proxy has one vote for every ordinary share of which he or she is the holder. Voting at any meeting of shareholders is by a show of hands unless a poll is properly demanded before the declaration of the results of a show of hands. A poll may be demanded by:

 

   

the chairman of the meeting;

 

   

at least three shareholders present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote;

 

   

any shareholder or shareholders present in person or by proxy representing not less than one-tenth of the total voting rights of all shareholders having the right to vote at the meeting; or

 

70


Table of Contents
   

any shareholder or shareholders present in person or by proxy holding shares conferring a right to vote at the meeting being shares on which the aggregate sum paid up is equal to not less than one-tenth of the total sum paid up on all shares conferring that right.

Dividends

Holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends out of our profits that are available by law for distribution, as we may declare by ordinary resolution, subject to the terms of issue thereof. However, no dividends may be declared in excess of an amount recommended by the board of directors. The board may pay interim dividends on the shares of any class as it deems fit. We may invest or otherwise use all dividends left unclaimed for six months after having been declared for our benefit, until claimed. All dividends unclaimed for a period of twelve years after having been declared will be forfeited and revert to us.

The directors may, with the sanction of an ordinary resolution of the shareholders, offer any holders of ordinary shares the right to elect to receive ordinary shares credited as fully paid, in whole or in part, instead of cash in respect of such dividend.

The directors may deduct from any dividend payable to any shareholder all sums of money (if any) presently payable by that shareholder to us on account of calls or otherwise in relation to our shares.

Liquidation rights

In the event of our liquidation, after payment of all liabilities, our remaining assets would be used to repay the holders of ordinary shares the amount they paid for their ordinary shares. Any balance would be divided among the holders of ordinary shares in proportion to the nominal amount of the ordinary shares held by them.

Other provisions of the articles of association

Whenever our capital is divided into different classes of shares, the special rights attached to any class may, unless otherwise provided by the terms of the issue of the shares of that class, be varied or abrogated, either with the written consent of the holders of three-fourths of the issued shares of the class or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of these holders. In the event that a shareholder or other person appearing to the board of directors to be interested in ordinary shares fails to comply with a notice requiring him or her to provide information with respect to their interest in voting shares pursuant to section 793 of the Companies Act 2006, we may serve that shareholder with a notice of default. After service of a default notice, that shareholder shall not be entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting or at a separate meeting of holders of a class of shares or on a poll until he or she has complied in full with our information request.

If the shares described in the default notice represent at least one-fourth of 1% in nominal value of the issued ordinary shares, then the default notice may additionally direct that in respect of those shares:

 

   

we will not pay dividends (or issue shares in lieu of dividends); and

 

   

we will not register transfers of shares unless the shareholder is not himself in default as regards supplying the information requested and the transfer, when presented for registration, is in such form as the board of directors may require to the effect that after due and careful inquiry, the shareholder is satisfied that no person in default is interested in any of the ordinary shares which are being transferred or the transfer is an approved transfer, as defined in our articles of association.

No provision of our articles of association expressly governs the ordinary share ownership threshold above which shareholder ownership must be disclosed. Under the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority, any person who acquires, either alone or, in specified circumstances, with others an interest in our voting share capital equal to or in excess of 3% comes under an obligation to disclose prescribed

 

71


Table of Contents

particulars to us in respect of those ordinary shares. A disclosure obligation also arises where a person’s notifiable interests fall below 3%, or where, at or above 3%, the percentage of our voting share capital in which a person has a notifiable interest increases or decreases by 1% or more.

Limitations affecting holders of ordinary shares or ADSs

Under English law and our memorandum and articles of association, persons who are neither UK residents nor UK nationals may freely hold, vote and transfer ordinary shares in the same manner as UK residents or nationals.

With respect to the items discussed above, applicable UK law is not materially different from applicable US law.

Material contracts

Pearson has not entered into any contracts outside the ordinary course of business during the two year period immediately preceding the date of this annual report. The Trust Deed entered into in 2014 with respect to €500.0 million aggregate principal amount of 1.875% guaranteed notes due 2021 and the Trust Deed entered into in 2015 with respect to €500.0 million aggregate principal amount of 1.375% guaranteed notes due 2025, in each case, issued by a subsidiary and guaranteed by Pearson, are filed as Exhibits 2.9 and 2.10 of this report, respectively.

Executive employment contracts

We have entered into agreements with each of our executive directors pursuant to which such executive director is employed by us. These agreements describe the duties of such executive director and the compensation to be paid by us. See “Item 6. Directors, Senior Management and Employees — Compensation of Senior Management”.

It is the company’s policy that the company may terminate the executive directors’ service agreements by giving no more than 12 months’ notice. As an alternative, the company may at its discretion pay in lieu of that notice. Payment-in-lieu of notice may be made in equal monthly installments from the date of termination to the end of any unexpired notice period. In the case of the CEO, payment-in-lieu of notice in installments may also be subject to mitigation and reduced taking into account earnings from alternative employment. For executive directors, pay in lieu of notice comprises 100% of the annual salary at the date of termination and the annual cost to the company of providing pension and all other benefits. In limited circumstances, in addition to making a full payment in lieu of notice, the company may permit an executive director to stay employed after the announcement of his or her departure for a limited period to ensure an effective hand-over and/or allow time for a successor to be appointed. The company may, depending on the circumstances of the termination, determine that it will not pay the director in lieu of notice and may instead terminate a director’s contract in breach and make a damages payment, taking into account as appropriate he director’s ability to mitigate his or her loss.

Exchange controls

There are no UK government laws, decrees, regulations or other legislation which restrict or which may affect the import or export of capital, including the availability of cash and cash equivalents for use by us or the remittance of dividends, interest or other payments to nonresident holders of our securities, except as otherwise described under “— Tax Considerations” below.

 

72


Table of Contents

Tax considerations

The following is a discussion of the material US federal income tax considerations and UK tax considerations arising from the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares and ADSs by a US holder. A US holder is:

 

   

an individual citizen or resident of the US, or

 

   

a corporation created or organized in or under the laws of the US or any of its political subdivisions, or

 

   

an estate or trust the income of which is subject to US federal income taxation regardless of its source.

This discussion deals only with ordinary shares and ADSs that are held as capital assets by a US holder, and does not address tax considerations applicable to US holders that may be subject to special tax rules, such as:

 

   

dealers or traders in securities or currencies,

 

   

financial institutions or other US holders that treat income in respect of the ordinary shares or ADSs as financial services income,

 

   

insurance companies,

 

   

tax-exempt entities,

 

   

persons acquiring shares or ADSs in connection with employment,

 

   

US holders that hold the ordinary shares or ADSs as a part of a straddle or conversion transaction or other arrangement involving more than one position,

 

   

US holders that own, or are deemed for US tax purposes to own, 10% or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of our voting stock,

 

   

US holders that have a principal place of business or “tax home” outside the United States, or

 

   

US holders whose “functional currency” is not the US dollar.

For US federal income tax purposes, holders of ADSs will be treated as the owners of the ordinary shares represented by those ADSs. In practice, HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) will also regard holders of ADSs as the beneficial owners of the ordinary shares represented by those ADSs, although case law has cast some doubt on this. The discussion below assumes that HMRC’s position is followed.

In addition, the following discussion assumes that The Bank of New York Mellon will perform its obligations as depositary in accordance with the terms of the depositary agreement and any related agreements.

Because US and UK tax consequences may differ from one holder to the next, the discussion set out below does not purport to describe all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to you and your particular situation. Accordingly, you are advised to consult your own tax advisor as to the US federal, state and local, UK and other, including foreign, tax consequences of investing in the ordinary shares or ADSs. Except where otherwise indicated, the statements of US and UK tax law set out below are based on the laws, interpretations and tax authority practice in force or applicable as of February 29, 2016, being the last practicable date before the date of this Annual Report, and are subject to any changes occurring after that date, possibly with retroactive effect.

UK income taxation of distributions

The UK does not impose dividend withholding tax on dividends paid by the Company.

A US holder that is not resident in the UK for UK tax purposes and does not carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency (or in the case of a company a permanent establishment) to which the ordinary shares or ADSs are attributable will not generally be liable to pay UK tax on dividends paid by the Company.

 

73


Table of Contents

US income taxation of distributions

Distributions that we make with respect to the ordinary shares or ADSs, other than distributions in liquidation and distributions in redemption of stock that are treated as exchanges, will be taxed to US holders as ordinary dividend income to the extent that the distributions do not exceed our current and accumulated earnings and profits. The amount of any distribution will equal the amount of the cash distribution. Distributions, if any, in excess of our current and accumulated earnings and profits will constitute a non-taxable return of capital to a US holder and will be applied against and reduce the US holder’s tax basis in its ordinary shares or ADSs. To the extent that these distributions exceed the tax basis of the US holder in its ordinary shares or ADSs, the excess generally will be treated as capital gain.

Dividends that we pay will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction generally allowed to US corporations under Section 243 of the Code.

In the case of distributions in pounds, the amount of the distributions generally will equal the US dollar value of the pounds distributed, determined by reference to the spot currency exchange rate on the date of receipt of the distribution by the US holder in the case of shares or by The Bank of New York Mellon in the case of ADSs, regardless of whether the US holder reports income on a cash basis or an accrual basis. The US holder will realize separate foreign currency gain or loss only to the extent that this gain or loss arises on the actual disposition of pounds received. For US holders claiming tax credits on a cash basis, taxes withheld from the distribution are translated into US dollars at the spot rate on the date of the distribution; for US holders claiming tax credits on an accrual basis, taxes withheld from the distribution are translated into US dollars at the average rate for the taxable year.

A distribution by the Company to noncorporate shareholders will be taxed as net capital gain at a maximum rate of 20%, provided certain holding periods are met, to the extent such distribution is treated as a dividend under US federal income tax principles. In addition, a 3.8% Medicare tax will generally be imposed on the net investment income, which generally would include distributions treated as dividends under US federal income tax principles, of noncorporate taxpayers whose adjusted gross income exceeds a threshold amount.

UK taxation of capital gains

A US holder that is not resident in the UK for UK tax purposes and who does not carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency (or in the case of a company a permanent establishment) to which the ordinary shares or ADSs are attributable will not generally be liable for UK taxation on capital gains or eligible for relief for allowable losses, realized on the sale or other disposal of the ordinary shares or ADSs.

A US holder who is an individual who has been resident for tax purposes in the UK but who ceases to be so resident or becomes regarded as resident outside the UK for the purposes of any double tax treaty (“Treaty Non-resident”) and continues to not be resident in the UK, or continues to be Treaty Non-resident, for a period of five years or less (or, for departures before 6 April 2013, ceases to be resident or ordinarily resident or becomes Treaty Non-resident for a period of less than five tax years) and who disposes of his ordinary shares or ADSs during that period may also be liable on his return to the UK to UK tax on capital gains, subject to any available exemption or relief, even though he is not resident in the UK, or is Treaty Non-resident, at the time of the disposal.

US income taxation of capital gains

Upon a sale or exchange of ordinary shares or ADSs to a person other than Pearson, a US holder will recognize gain or loss in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realized on the sale or exchange and the US holder’s adjusted tax basis in the ordinary shares or ADSs. Any gain or loss recognized will be capital gain or loss and will be long-term capital gain or loss if the US holder has held the ordinary shares or ADSs for

 

74


Table of Contents

more than one year. Long-term capital gain of a noncorporate US holder is generally taxed at a maximum rate of 20%. In addition, a 3.8% Medicare tax will generally be imposed on the net investment income, which generally would include capital gains, of noncorporate taxpayers whose adjusted gross income exceeds a threshold amount.

Gain or loss realized by a US holder on the sale or exchange of ordinary shares or ADSs generally will be treated as US-source gain or loss for US foreign tax credit purposes.

Estate and gift tax

The current Estate and Gift Tax Convention, or the Convention, between the US and the UK generally relieves from UK Inheritance Tax (the equivalent of US Estate and Gift Tax) the transfer of ordinary shares or of ADSs where the transferor is domiciled in the US for the purposes of the Convention. This relief will not apply if the ordinary shares or ADSs are part of the business property of an individual’s permanent establishment in the UK or pertain to the fixed base in the UK of a person providing independent personal services. If no relief is given under the Convention, inheritance tax may be charged on death and also on the amount by which the value of an individual’s estate is reduced as a result of any transfer made by way of gift or other gratuitous or undervalue transfer, in general within seven years of death, and in certain other circumstances. In the unusual case where ordinary shares or ADSs are subject to both UK Inheritance Tax and US Estate or Gift Tax, the Convention generally provides for tax paid in the UK to be credited against tax payable in the US or for tax paid in the US to be credited against tax payable in the UK based on priority rules set forth in the Convention.

Stamp duty

No stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax (SDRT) will generally be payable in the UK on the purchase or transfer of an ADS, provided that the ADS, and any separate instrument or written agreement of transfer, remain at all times outside the UK and that the instrument or written agreement of transfer is not executed in the UK. Subject to the following paragraph, UK legislation does however provide for SDRT or (in the case of transfers) stamp duty to be chargeable at the rate of 1.5% of the amount or value of the consideration or, in some circumstances, the value of the ordinary shares (rounded up to the next multiple of £5 in the case of stamp duty), where ordinary shares are issued or transferred to a person whose business is or includes issuing depositary receipts, or to a nominee or agent for such a person, or issued or transferred to a person whose business is or includes the provision of clearance services or to a nominee or agent for such a person. Following litigation, HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) has accepted that it will no longer seek to apply the 1.5% SDRT charge when new shares are issued to a clearance service or depositary receipt system on the basis that the charge is not compatible with EU law. HMRC’s view is that the 1.5% SDRT or stamp duty charge will continue to apply to transfers of shares into a clearance service or depositary receipt system, unless they are an integral part of an issue of share capital. This view is currently being challenged in further litigation. Accordingly, specific professional advice should be sought before paying the 1.5% SDRT or stamp duty charge in any circumstances.

A transfer for value of the underlying ordinary shares will generally be subject to either stamp duty or SDRT, normally at the rate of 0.5% of the amount or value of the consideration (rounded up to the next multiple of £5 in the case of stamp duty). A transfer of ordinary shares from a nominee to its beneficial owner, including the transfer of underlying ordinary shares from the Depositary to an ADS holder, under which no beneficial interest passes will not be subject to stamp duty or SDRT.

Close company status

We believe that the close company provisions of the UK Corporation Tax Act 2010 do not apply to us.

Documents on display

Copies of our Memorandum and Articles of Association and filed as exhibits to this Annual Report and certain other documents referred to in this Annual Report are available for inspection at our registered office at 80 Strand, London WC2R 0RL (c/o the Company Secretary), or, in the US, at the registered office of Pearson Inc. at 330 Hudson Street, New York, New York, during usual business hours upon reasonable prior request.

 

75


Table of Contents
ITEM 11. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Introduction

Our principal market risks are changes in interest rates and currency exchange rates. Following an evaluation of these positions, we selectively enter into derivative financial instruments to manage our risk exposure. For this purpose, we primarily use interest rate swaps, interest rate caps and collars, forward rate agreements, currency swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts. Managing market risks is the responsibility of the chief financial officer, who acts pursuant to policies approved by the board of directors. The Audit Committee receives regular reports on our treasury activities.

We have a policy of not undertaking any speculative transactions, and we do not hold our derivative and other financial instruments for trading purposes.

We have formulated policies for hedging exposures to interest rate and foreign exchange risk, and have used derivatives to ensure compliance with these policies. Although a proportion of our derivative contracts were transacted without regard to existing IFRS requirements on hedge accounting, during 2015 and 2014 we qualified for hedge accounting under IFRS on a number of our key derivative contracts.

The following discussion addresses market risk only and does not present other risks that we face in the normal course of business, including country risk, credit risk and legal risk.

Interest rates

The Group’s financial exposure to interest rates arises primarily from its borrowings. The Group manages its exposure by borrowing at fixed and variable rates of interest, and by entering into derivative transactions. Objectives approved by the board concerning the proportion of debt outstanding at fixed rates govern the use of these financial instruments.

The Group’s objectives are applied to core net debt, which is measured at the year-end and comprises borrowings net of cash and other liquid funds. Our objective is to maintain a proportion of forecast core net debt in fixed or capped form for the next four years, subject to a maximum of 65% and a minimum that starts at 40% and falls by 10% each year.

The principal method of hedging interest rate risk is to enter into an agreement with a bank counterparty to pay a fixed rate and receive a variable rate, known as a swap. Under interest rate swaps, the Group agrees with other parties to exchange, at specified intervals, the difference between fixed-rate and variable-rate amounts calculated by reference to an agreed notional principal amount. The majority of the Group’s swap contracts are US dollar denominated, and some of them have deferred start dates, in order to maintain the desired risk profile as other contracts mature. The variable rates received are normally based on three-month or six-month LIBOR, and the dates on which these rates are set do not necessarily exactly match those of the hedged borrowings. Management believes that our portfolio of these types of swaps is an efficient hedge of our portfolio of variable rate borrowings.

In addition, from time to time, the Group issues bonds or other capital market instruments to refinance existing debt. To avoid the fixed rate on a single transaction unduly influencing our overall net interest expense, our typical practice has been to enter into a related derivative contract effectively converting the interest rate profile of the bond transaction to a variable interest rate. In some cases, the bond issue is denominated in a different currency to the Group’s desired borrowing risk profile and the Group enters into a related cross currency interest rate swap in order to maintain this risk profile, which is predominantly borrowings denominated in US dollars.

The Group’s accounting objective in its use of interest rate derivatives is to minimize the impact on the income statement of changes in the mark-to-market value of its derivative portfolio as a whole. It uses duration

 

76


Table of Contents

calculations to estimate the sensitivity of the derivatives to movements in market rates. The Group also identifies which derivatives are eligible for fair value hedge accounting (which reduces significantly the income statement impact of changes in the market value of a derivative). The Group then divides the total portfolio between hedge-accounted and pooled segments, so that the expected movement on the pooled segment is minimized.

Currency exchange rates

Although the Group is based in the UK, it has significant investments in overseas operations. The most significant currency in which the Group trades is the US dollar.

The Group’s policy is to align approximately the currency composition of its core net borrowings with its forecast operating profit before depreciation and amortization. This policy aims to soften the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on consolidated interest cover and earnings. This policy applies only to currencies that account for more than 15% of group operating profit, which currently only includes the US dollar. However, the Group still borrows small amounts in other currencies, typically for seasonal working capital needs. In addition, the Group’s policy does not require existing currency debt to be terminated to match declines in that currency’s share of Group operating profit. Also, the chief financial officer may request the inclusion of currencies that account for less than 15% of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortization in the above hedging process. Only one hedging transaction, denominated in South African rand, has been undertaken under that authority. The South African rand transaction matured in 2014.

At December 31, 2015 the Group’s net borrowings/(cash) in our main currencies (taking into account the effect of cross currency rate swaps) were: US dollar £1,345m and sterling £(385)m.

The Group uses both currency denominated debt and derivative instruments to implement the above policy. Its intention is that gains/losses on the derivatives and debt offset the losses/gains on the foreign currency assets and income. Each quarter the value of hedging instruments is monitored against the assets in the relevant currency and, where practical, a decision is made whether to treat the debt or derivative as a net investment hedge (permitting foreign exchange movements on it to be taken to reserves) for the purposes of reporting under IFRS.

Investments in overseas operations are consolidated for accounting purposes by translating values in one currency to another currency, in particular from US dollars to sterling. Fluctuations in currency exchange rates affect the currency values recorded in our accounts, although they do not give rise to any realized gain or loss, nor to any currency cash flows.

The Group is also exposed to currency exchange rates in its cash transactions and its investments in overseas operations. Cash transactions — typically for purchases, sales, interest or dividends — require cash conversions between currencies. Fluctuations in currency exchange rates affect the cash amounts that the Group pays or receives.

Forward foreign exchange contracts

The Group sometimes uses forward foreign exchange contracts where a specific major project or forecasted cash flow, including acquisitions and disposals, arises from a business decision that has used a specific foreign exchange rate. The Group’s policy is to effect routine transactional conversions between currencies, for example to collect receivables or settle payables, at the relevant spot exchange rate.

The Group seeks to offset purchases and sales in the same currency, even if they do not occur simultaneously. In addition, its debt and cash portfolios management gives rise to temporary currency shortfalls and surpluses. Both of these activities require using short-dated foreign exchange swaps between currencies.

 

77


Table of Contents

Although the Group prepares its consolidated financial statements in sterling, significant sums have been invested in overseas assets, particularly in the US. Therefore, fluctuations in currency exchange rates, particularly between the US dollar and sterling, and to a lesser extent between the euro and sterling, are likely to affect shareholders’ funds and other accounting values.

Derivatives

Under IFRS, the Group is required to record all derivative instruments on the balance sheet at fair value. Derivatives not classified as hedges are adjusted to fair value through earnings. Changes in the fair value of derivatives that the Group has designated and that qualify as effective hedges are either recorded in reserves or are offset in earnings by the corresponding movement in the fair value of the underlying hedged item. Any ineffective portion of derivatives that are classified as hedges is immediately recognized in earnings.

In 2015 and 2014 the Group met the prescribed designation requirements and hedge effectiveness tests under IFRS for some of its derivative contracts. As a result, the movements in the fair value of the effective portion of fair value hedges and net investment hedges have been offset in earnings and reserves respectively by the corresponding movement in the fair value of the underlying hedged item.

In line with the Group’s treasury policy, none of these instruments were considered trading instruments and each instrument was transacted solely to match an underlying financial exposure.

Quantitative information about market risk

The sensitivity of the Group’s derivative portfolio to changes in interest rates is found in note 19 of “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

 

ITEM 12. DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

AMERICAN DEPOSITARY SHARES

Fees paid by ADR holders

Our ordinary shares trade in the United States under a sponsored ADR facility with The Bank of New York Mellon as depositary.

The depositary collects its fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal, or from intermediaries acting for them. The depositary collects fees for making distributions to investors by deducting those fees from the amounts distributed or by selling a portion of distributable property to pay the fees. The depositary may collect its annual fee for depositary services by deductions from cash distributions or by directly billing investors or by charging the book-entry system accounts of participants acting for them. The depositary may generally refuse to provide fee-attracting services until its fees for those services are paid.

 

78


Table of Contents

The following table summarizes various fees currently charged by The Bank of New York Mellon:

 

Person depositing or withdrawing shares must pay to

the depositary:

  

For:

$5.00 (or less) per 100 ADSs (or portion of 100 ADSs)

  

•    Issuance of ADSs, including issuances resulting from a distribution of shares or rights or other property

 

•    Cancellation of ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal, including if the deposit agreement terminates

$.05 (or less) per ADS

  

•    Any cash distribution to ADS registered holders

A fee equivalent to the fee that would be payable if securities distributed had been shares and the shares had been deposited for issuance of ADSs   

•    Distribution of securities by the depositary to ADS registered holders of deposited securities

$.05 (or less) per ADS per calendar year

  

•    Depositary services

Registration of transfer fees

  

•    Transfer and registration of shares on the share register to or from the name of the depositary or its agent when shares are deposited or withdrawn

Expenses of the depositary

  

•    Cable, telex and facsimile transmissions (when expressly provided in the deposit agreement)

 

•    Converting foreign currency to US dollars

Taxes and other governmental charges the depositary or the custodian have to pay on any ADS or share underlying an ADS, for example, stock transfer taxes, stamp duty or withholding taxes   

•    As necessary

Any charges incurred by the depositary or its agents for servicing the deposited securities   

•    As necessary

Fees incurred in past annual period and fees to be paid in the future

The Company received payments from the depositary with respect to 2015 of $350,000 for standard out-of-pocket maintenance costs for the ADRs (consisting of the expenses of postage and envelopes for mailing the annual and interim financial of reports, printing and distributing dividend cheques, electronic filing of US Federal tax information, mailing required the forms, stationery, postage, facsimile and telephone calls), any applicable performance indicators relating to the ADR facility, underwriting fees and legal fees.

The depositary has agreed to reimburse the Company for expenses they incur that are related to establishment and maintenance expenses of the ADS program. The depositary has agreed to reimburse the Company for its continuing annual stock exchange listing fees. The depositary has also agreed to pay the standard out-of-pocket maintenance costs for the ADRs, which consists of the expenses of postage and envelopes for mailing annual and interim financial reports, printing and distributing dividend cheques, electronic filing of US Federal tax information, mailing required tax forms, stationery, postage, facsimile and telephone calls. It has also agreed to reimburse the Company annually for certain investor relationship programs or special investor relations promotional activities. In certain instances, the depositary has agreed to provide additional payments to the Company based on any applicable performance indicators relating to the ADR facility. There are limits on the amount of expenses for which the depositary will reimburse the Company, but the amount of reimbursement available to the Company is not necessarily tied to the amount of fees the depositary collects from investors.

 

79


Table of Contents

The depositary collects its fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal, or from intermediaries acting for them. The depositary collects fees for making distributions to investors by deducting those fees from the amounts distributed or by selling a portion of distributable property to pay the fees. The depositary may collect its annual fee for depositary services by deduction from cash distributions or by directly billing investors or by charging the book-entry system accounts of participants acting for them. The depositary may generally refuse to provide fee-attracting services until its fees for those services are paid.

 

80


Table of Contents

PART II

 

ITEM 13. DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

None.

 

ITEM 14. MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

None.

 

ITEM 15. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Disclosure controls and procedures

An evaluation of the effectiveness our disclosure controls and procedures as of December 31, 2015 was carried out by management, under the supervision and with the participation of our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer. Based on that evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a- 15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended) were effective as at December 31, 2015 at a reasonable assurance level. A controls system, no matter how well designed and operated, cannot provide absolute assurance to achieve its objectives.

Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for the Company. Internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the Company’ board of directors, management and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. Management has assessed the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2015 based on the framework in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (“COSO”). Based on this evaluation, management has concluded that the Company’s internal control over financial reporting was effective as a December 31, 2015 based on criteria in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the COSO.

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, has audited the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2015, as stated in their report which appears on page F-2.

Change in internal control over financial reporting

During the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 20-F, the Company has made no changes to its internal controls over financial reporting that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

ITEM 16A. AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

The members of the Board of Directors of Pearson plc have determined that Tim Score is an audit committee financial expert within the meaning of the applicable rules and regulations of the US Securities and Exchange Commission.

 

81


Table of Contents
ITEM 16B. CODE OF ETHICS

Pearson has adopted a code of ethics (the Pearson code of conduct) which applies to all employees including the chief executive officer and chief financial officer and other senior financial management. This code of ethics is available on our website (www.pearson.com/code-of-conduct.html). The information on our website is not incorporated by reference into this report.

 

ITEM 16C. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

In line with best practice, our relationship with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) is governed by our external auditor policy, which is reviewed and approved annually by the audit committee. The policy establishes procedures to ensure the auditors’ independence is not compromised as well as defining those non-audit services that PwC may or may not provide to Pearson. These allowable services are in accordance with relevant UK and US legislation.

The audit committee approves all audit and non-audit services provided by PwC. Certain categories of allowable non-audit services have been pre-approved by the audit committee subject to the authorities below:

 

   

Pre-approved non-audit services can be authorized by the chief financial officer up to £100,000 per project, subject to a cumulative limit of £500,000 per annum;

 

   

Tax compliance and related activities up to the greater of £1,000,000 per annum or 50% of the external audit fee; and

 

   

For tax advisory services we use the most appropriate advisor, usually after a tender process. Where we decide to use our independent auditor, authority, up to £100,000 per project subject to a cumulative limit of £500,000 per annum, has been delegated by the audit committee to management.

Services provided by PwC above these limits and all other allowable non-audit services, such as due diligence, irrespective of value, must be approved by the audit committee. Where appropriate, services will be tendered prior to awarding this work to the auditor.

The following table sets forth remuneration paid to PwC for 2014 and 2015:

 

Auditors’ Remuneration

   2015      2014  
     £m      £m  

Audit fees

     6         7   

Tax fees

     1         1   

All other fees

     3         1   

Audit fees include £35,000 (2014: £35,000) of audit fees relating to the audit of the parent company.

Fees for the audit of the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control over financial reporting are allocated to audit fees paid.

Tax services include services related to tax compliance and advisory services.

 

ITEM 16D. EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

Not applicable.

 

82


Table of Contents
ITEM 16E. PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASES

 

Period

  Total number of
shares purchased
    Average price
paid per share
    Total number of
units purchased
as part of publicly
announced plans
or programs
    Maximum
number
of shares that
may yet be
purchased under
the plans or
programs
 

February 1, 2013 – February 28, 2013

    1,000,000      £ 11.64        N/A        N/A   

April 1, 2013 – April 30, 2013

    1,000,000      £ 11.53        N/A        N/A   

June 1, 2013 – June 30, 2013

    1,972,725      £ 11.61        N/A        N/A   

September 1, 2013 – September 30, 2013

    139,192      £ 12.57        N/A        N/A   

April 1, 2014 – April 30, 2014

    906,892      £ 10.18        N/A        N/A   

July 1, 2015 – July 31, 2015

    1,974,362      £ 11.81        N/A        N/A   

Purchases of shares were made to satisfy obligations under Pearson employee share award programs. All purchases were made in open-market transactions. None of the foregoing share purchases was made as part of a publicly announced plan or program.

 

ITEM 16F. CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING AUDITOR

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 16G. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Pearson is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”). As a listed non-US issuer, we are required to comply with some of the NYSE’s corporate governance rules, and otherwise must disclose on our website any significant ways in which our corporate governance practices differ from those followed by US companies under the NYSE listing standards. At this time, the Company believes that it is in compliance in all material respects with all the NYSE rules except that the Nomination Committee is not composed entirely of independent directors, and that it is the full board, not the Nomination Committee, that develops and recommends corporate governance principles.

 

ITEM 16H. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURE

Not applicable.

 

83


Table of Contents

PART III

 

ITEM 17. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 18. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The financial statements filed as part of this Annual Report are included on pages F-1 through F-71 hereof.

 

ITEM 19. EXHIBITS

 

  1.1    Articles of Association of Pearson plc. ¥
  2.1    Indenture dated June 23, 2003 between Pearson plc and The Bank of New York, as trustee *
  2.2    Indenture dated May 6, 2008 among Pearson Dollar Finance Two plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Bank of New York, as trustee, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent. ¥
  2.3    Indenture dated May 17, 2010 between Pearson Funding Two plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Bank of New York Mellon, as trustee, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent. l
  2.4    Indenture dated May 8, 2012 between Pearson Funding Four plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Bank of New York Mellon, as trustee, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent. f
  2.5    Indenture dated May 8, 2013 between Pearson Funding Five plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Bank of New York Mellon, as trustee, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent. q
  2.6    Trust Deed dated May 19, 2014 between Pearson Funding Five plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation P.L.C, as trustee. ¥
  2.7    Trust Deed dated May 6, 2015 between Pearson Funding Five plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation P.L.C, as trustee.
  8.1    List of Significant Subsidiaries.
12.1    Certification of Chief Executive Officer.
12.2    Certification of Chief Financial Officer.
13.1    Certification of Chief Executive Officer.
13.2    Certification of Chief Financial Officer.
15    Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP.

 

* Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2003 and filed May 7, 2004.
l Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2010 and filed March 25, 2011.
f Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2012 and filed March 22, 2013.
q Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2013 and filed March 27, 2014.
¥ Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2014 and filed March 26, 2015.

 

84


Table of Contents

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS: CONTENTS

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-2   

Consolidated Income Statement for the year ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

     F-3   

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year ended December 31, 2015,
2014 and 2013

     F-4   

Consolidated Balance Sheet as at December 31, 2015 and 2014

     F-5   

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

     F-7   

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement for the year ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

     F-9   

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-10   

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Pearson plc

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated income statements, statements of comprehensive income, statements of changes in equity and cash flow statements present fairly in all material respects, the financial position of Pearson plc and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014 and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2015, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2015, based on criteria established in “Internal Control — Integrated Framework” (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). The Company’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in “Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting” appearing under Item 15 of this Form 20-F. Our responsibility is to express opinions on these financial statements and on the Group’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) and International Standards on Auditing. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control base on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

/s/PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London

United Kingdom

March 23, 2016

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Consolidated income statement

Year ended 31 December 2015

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014
restated
    2013
restated
 

Sales

     2         4,468        4,540        4,728   

Cost of goods sold

     4         (1,981     (2,021     (2,123
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

        2,487        2,519        2,605   

Operating expenses

     4         (2,094     (2,125     (2,202

Impairment of intangible assets

     11         (849     (77       

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

     12         52        31        28   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating (loss)/profit

     2         (404     348        431   

Finance costs

     6         (100     (140     (110

Finance income

     6         71        47        37   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

(Loss)/profit before tax

        (433     255        358   

Income tax

     7         81        (56     (88
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

(Loss)/profit for the year from continuing operations

        (352     199        270   

Profit for the year from discontinued operations

     3         1,175        271        269   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year

        823        470        539   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Attributable to:

         

Equity holders of the company

        823        471        538   

Non-controlling interest

               (1     1   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Earnings per share for profit from continuing and discontinued operations attributable to equity holders of the company during the year (expressed in pence per share)

         

– basic

     8         101.2p        58.1p        66.6p   

– diluted

     8         101.2p        58.0p        66.5p   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

(Loss)/earnings per share for (loss)/profit from continuing operations attributable to equity holders of the company during the year (expressed in pence per share)

         

– basic

     8         (43.3 )p      24.7p        33.3p   

– diluted

     8         (43.3 )p      24.6p        33.3p   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

Year ended 31 December 2015

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014     2013  

Profit for the year

        823        470        539   

Items that may be reclassified to the income statement

         

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations – Group

        (85     150        (206

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations – associates

        16        25        (11

Currency translation adjustment disposed – Group

        (10     (2     (18

Attributable tax

     7         5        (6     6   

Items that are not reclassified to the income statement

         

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations – Group

     25         110        23        79   

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations – associates

        8        (15       

Attributable tax

     7         (24     (1     (23
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income for the year

        20        174        (173
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income for the year

        843        644        366   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Attributable to:

         

Equity holders of the company

        845        645        369   

Non-controlling interest

        (2     (1     (3
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-4


Table of Contents

Consolidated balance sheet

As at 31 December 2015

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014  

Assets

       

Non-current assets

       

Property, plant and equipment

     10         320        334   

Intangible assets

     11         5,164        6,310   

Investments in joint ventures and associates

     12         1,103        1,118   

Deferred income tax assets

     13         276        295   

Financial assets – derivative financial instruments

     16         78        90   

Retirement benefit assets

     25         337        190   

Other financial assets

     15         143        54   

Trade and other receivables

     22         115        82   
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        7,536        8,473   

Current assets

       

Intangible assets – pre-publication

     20         841        820   

Inventories

     21         211        224   

Trade and other receivables

     22         1,284        1,310   

Financial assets – derivative financial instruments

     16         32        24   

Financial assets – marketable securities

     14         28        16   

Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts)

     17         1,703        530   
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        4,099        2,924   
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

        11,635        11,397   
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liabilities

       

Non-current liabilities

       

Financial liabilities – borrowings

     18         (2,048     (1,883

Financial liabilities – derivative financial instruments

     16         (136     (73

Deferred income tax liabilities

     13         (560     (714

Retirement benefit obligations

     25         (139     (163

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     23         (71     (82

Other liabilities

     24         (356     (310
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        (3,310     (3,225
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Current liabilities

       

Trade and other liabilities

     24         (1,390     (1,601

Financial liabilities – borrowings

     18         (282     (342

Financial liabilities – derivative financial instruments

     16         (29     (1

Current income tax liabilities

        (164     (190

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     23         (42     (53
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        (1,907     (2,187
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

        (5,217     (5,412
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net assets

        6,418        5,985   
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-5


Table of Contents

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014  

Equity

       

Share capital

     27         205        205   

Share premium

     27         2,590        2,579   

Treasury shares

     28         (72     (75

Translation reserve

        (7     70   

Retained earnings

        3,698        3,200   
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity attributable to equity holders of the company

        6,414        5,979   

Non-controlling interest

        4        6   
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity

        6,418        5,985   
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

These financial statements have been approved for issue by the board of directors on 4 March 2016 and signed on its behalf by

Coram Williams Chief financial officer

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Year ended 31 December 2015

 

    Equity attributable to equity holders of the company              

All figures in £ millions

  Share
capital
    Share
premium
    Treasury
shares
    Translation
reserve
    Retained
earnings
    Total     Non-
controlling

interest
    Total
equity
 

At 1 January 2015

    205        2,579        (75     70        3,200        5,979        6        5,985   

Profit for the year

                                823        823               823   

Other comprehensive income

                         (77     99        22        (2     20   

Total comprehensive income

                         (77     922        845        (2     843   

Equity-settled transactions

                                26        26               26   

Tax on equity-settled transactions

                                (1     (1            (1

Issue of ordinary shares under share option schemes

           11                             11               11   

Purchase of treasury shares

                  (23                   (23            (23

Release of treasury shares

                  26               (26                     

Changes in non-controlling interest

                                                       

Dividends

                                (423     (423            (423
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

    205        2,590        (72     (7     3,698        6,414        4        6,418   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

    Equity attributable to equity holders of the company              

All figures in £ millions

  Share
capital
    Share
premium
    Treasury
shares
    Translation
reserve
    Retained
earnings
    Total     Non-
controlling
interest
    Total
equity
 

At 1 January 2014

    205        2,568        (98     (103     3,128        5,700        6        5,706   

Profit for the year

                                471        471        (1     470   

Other comprehensive income

                         173        1        174               174   

Total comprehensive income

                         173        472        645        (1     644   

Equity-settled transactions

                                32        32               32   

Tax on equity-settled transactions

                                (3     (3            (3

Issue of ordinary shares under share option schemes

           11                             11               11   

Purchase of treasury shares

                  (9                   (9            (9

Release of treasury shares

                  32               (32                     

Changes in non-controlling interest

                                              2        2   

Dividends

                                (397     (397     (1     (398
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

    205        2,579        (75     70        3,200        5,979        6        5,985   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-7


Table of Contents
    Equity attributable to equity holders of the company              

All figures in £ millions

  Share
capital
    Share
premium
    Treasury
shares
    Translation
reserve
    Retained
earnings
    Total     Non-
controlling
interest
    Total
equity
 

At 1 January 2013

    204        2,555        (103     128        2,902        5,686        24        5,710   

Profit for the year

                                538        538        1        539   

Other comprehensive expense

                         (231     62        (169     (4     (173

Total comprehensive income

                         (231     600        369        (3     366   

Equity-settled transactions

                                37        37               37   

Tax on equity-settled transactions

                                                       

Issue of ordinary shares under share option schemes

    1        13                             14               14   

Purchase of treasury shares

                  (47                   (47            (47

Release of treasury shares

                  52               (52                     

Changes in non-controlling interest

                                13        13        (15     (2

Dividends

                                (372     (372            (372
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2013

    205        2,568        (98     (103     3,128        5,700        6        5,706   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The translation reserve includes exchange differences arising from the translation of the net investment in foreign operations and of borrowings and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments. Changes in non-controlling interest in 2014 relate to the disposal of a non-controlling interest in a Chinese business.

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Consolidated cash flow statement

Year ended 31 December 2015

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014     2013  

Cash flows from operating activities

         

Net cash generated from operations

     32         518        704        684   

Interest paid

        (75     (86     (82

Tax paid

        (232     (163     (246
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash generated from operating activities

        211        455        356   

Cash flows from investing activities

         

Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired

     30         (9     (448     (48

Acquisition of joint ventures and associates

        (11     (12     (10

Purchase of investments

        (7     (3     (64

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

        (86     (75     (118

Purchase of intangible assets

        (161     (107     (64

Disposal of subsidiaries, net of cash disposed

     31         1,030        327        (132

Proceeds from sale of associates

        379        39        2   

Proceeds from sale of investments

        13        9        2   

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment

     32         2        9        28   

Proceeds from sale of intangible assets

        1        2        2   

Proceeds from sale of liquid resources

        17        12        13   

Loans repaid by/(advanced to) related parties

        7        (10     (44

Loans advanced

               (2     (5

Investment in liquid resources

        (29     (22     (14

Interest received

        24        13        9   

Dividends received from joint ventures and associates

        162        120        64   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash received from/(used in) investing activities

        1,332        (148     (379

Cash flows from financing activities

         

Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares

     27         11        11        14   

Purchase of treasury shares

     28         (23     (9     (47

Proceeds from borrowings

        372        404        319   

Repayment of borrowings

        (300     (538     (225

Finance lease principal payments

        (1     (4     (8

Dividends paid to company’s shareholders

     9         (423     (397     (372

Dividends paid to non-controlling interest

               (1       

Purchase of non-controlling interest

     33                       (76
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash used in financing activities

        (364     (534     (395

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

        (19     (2     21   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

        1,160        (229     (397

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

        511        740        1,137   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     17         1,671        511        740   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The consolidated cash flow statement includes discontinued operations (see note 3).

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

General information

Pearson plc (the company), its subsidiaries and associates (together the Group) are international businesses covering educational courseware, assessents and services, and consumer publishing through its associate interest in Penguin Random House.

The company is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in England. The address of its registered office is 80 Strand, London WC2R 0RL.

The company has its primary listing on the London Stock Exchange and is also listed on the New York Stock Exchange.

These consolidated financial statements were approved for issue by the board of directors on 4 March 2016.

1. Accounting policies

The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these consolidated financial statements are set out below.

a. Basis of preparation

These consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis and in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and IFRS Interpretations Committee interpretations as adopted by the European Union (EU) and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under IFRS. In respect of the accounting standards applicable to the Group there is no difference between EU-adopted and IASB-adopted IFRS.

These consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of financial assets and liabilities (including derivative financial instruments) to fair value through profit or loss.

The prior year financial statements have been restated to reflect the classification of FT Group as a discontinued operation.

1. Interpretations and amendments to published standards effective 2015 The following amendments and interpretations were adopted in 2015: Amendments to IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits: Defined Benefit Plans – Employee Contributions’

 

   

Amendments to IFRS 2 ‘Share based Payment: Definition of vesting conditions’

 

   

Amendments to IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations: Accounting for contingent consideration in a business combination and scope exemptions for joint ventures’

 

   

Amendments to IFRS 8 ‘Operating Segments: Aggregation of operating segments and reconciliation of segment assets to entity’s assets’

 

   

Amendments to IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures: Key management personnel’

 

   

Amendments to IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value Measurement: Short term receivables and payables’

The adoption of these new pronouncements from 1 January 2015 does not have a material impact on the consolidated financial statements.

 

F-10


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

a. Basis of preparation continued

 

2. Standards, interpretations and amendments to published standards that are not yet effective The Group has not early adopted the following new pronouncements that are not yet effective:

IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018. The new standard details the requirements for the classification, measurement and recognition of financial assets and liabilities. The Group is yet to assess the full impact of IFRS 9.

IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018. The new standard specifies how and when an entity will recognise revenue, and requires more detailed disclosure. Adoption of the new standard is likely to have an impact on the Group and management is currently assessing the impact.

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019. The new standard details the requirements for the classification, measurement and recognition of lease arrangements. Adoption of the new standard is likely to have an impact on the Group and management is currently assessing the impact.

In June 2015 the IASB issued an exposure draft ED/2015/5 ‘Remeasurement on a Plan Amendment, Curtailment or Settlement/Availability of a Refund from a Defined Benefit Plan (Proposed Amendments to IAS 19 and IFRIC 14).’ Management are currently evaluating these proposals and although the proposals have not yet been finalised, it should be noted that the current draft, if adopted, may restrict the Group’s ability to recognise a pension asset in respect of pension surpluses in its UK defined benefit pension plan.

In addition, the current draft may require certain elements of committed minimum funding contributions to be recognised as a liability on the balance sheet.

3. Critical accounting assumptions and judgements The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting assumptions. It also requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas requiring a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions and estimates are significant to the consolidated financial statements, are discussed in the relevant accounting policies under the following headings and in the notes to the accounts where appropriate:

Consolidation: Business combinations – classification of investments

Consolidation: Business combinations – determination of fair values

Intangible assets: Goodwill

Intangible assets: Pre-publication assets

Taxation

Revenue recognition

Employee benefits: Pensions

b. Consolidation

1. Business combinations The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for business combinations.

The consideration transferred for the acquisition of a subsidiary is the fair value of the assets transferred, the liabilities incurred and the equity interest issued by the Group. The consideration transferred includes the fair value of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration arrangement. Acquisition related costs are expensed as incurred in the operating expenses line of the income statement.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

b. Consolidation continued

 

Identifiable assets and contingent assets acquired and identifiable liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date. The determination of fair values often requires significant judgements and the use of estimates, and, for material acquisitions, the fair value of the acquired intangible assets is determined by an independent valuer. The excess of the consideration transferred, the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and the acquisition date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquiree over the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired is recorded as goodwill.

See note 1e(1) for the accounting policy on goodwill. If this is less than the fair value of the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, in the case of a bargain purchase, the difference is recognised directly in the income statement.

On an acquisition-by-acquisition basis, the Group recognises any non-controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s net assets.

Management exercises judgement in determining the classification of its investments in its businesses, in line with the following:

2. Subsidiaries Subsidiaries are entities over which the Group has control. The Group controls an entity when the Group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group. They are deconsolidated from the date that control ceases.

3. Transactions with non-controlling interests Transactions with non-controlling interests that do not result in loss of control are accounted for as equity transactions, that is, as transactions with the owners in their capacity as owners. Any surplus or deficit arising from disposals to a non-controlling interest is recorded in equity. For purchases from a non-controlling interest, the difference between consideration paid and the relevant share acquired of the carrying value of the subsidiary is recorded in equity.

4. Joint ventures and associates Joint ventures are entities in which the Group holds an interest on a long-term basis and has rights to the net assets through contractually agreed sharing of control. Associates are entities over which the Group has significant influence but not the power to control the financial and operating policies, generally accompanying a shareholding of between 20% and 50% of the voting rights. Investments in joint ventures and associates are accounted for by the equity method and are initially recognised at the fair value of consideration transferred.

The Group’s share of its joint ventures’ and associates’ post-acquisition profits or losses is recognised in the income statement and its share of post-acquisition movements in reserves is recognised in reserves.

The Group’s share of its joint ventures’ and associates’ results is recognised as a component of operating profit as these operations form part of the core publishing business of the Group and are an integral part of existing wholly-owned businesses. The cumulative post-acquisition movements are adjusted against the carrying amount of the investment. When the Group’s share of losses in a joint venture or associate equals or exceeds its interest in the joint venture or associate, the Group does not recognise further losses unless the Group has incurred obligations or made payments on behalf of the joint venture or associate.

5. Contribution of a subsidiary to an associate or joint venture The gain or loss resulting from the contribution or sale of a subsidiary to an associate or a joint venture is recognised in full. Where such transactions do not involve cash consideration, significant judgements and estimates are used in determining the fair values of the consideration received.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

 

c. Foreign currency translation

1. Functional and presentation currency Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (the ‘functional currency’). The consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling, which is the company’s functional and presentation currency.

2. Transactions and balances Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement, except when deferred in equity as qualifying net investment hedges.

3. Group companies The results and financial position of all Group companies that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency are translated into the presentation currency as follows:

i) Assets and liabilities are translated at the closing rate at the date of the balance sheet

ii) Income and expenses are translated at average exchange rates

iii) All resulting exchange differences are recognised as a separate component of equity.

On consolidation, exchange differences arising from the translation of the net investment in foreign entities, and of borrowings and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments, are taken to shareholders’ equity. The Group treats specific intercompany loan balances, which are not intended to be repaid in the foreseeable future, as part of its net investment. When a foreign operation is sold, such exchange differences are recognised in the income statement as part of the gain or loss on sale.

The principal overseas currency for the Group is the US dollar. The average rate for the year against sterling was $1.53 (2014: $1.65) and the year end rate was $1.47 (2014: $1.56).

d. Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less depreciation. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for intended use. Land is not depreciated. Depreciation on other assets is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate their cost less their residual values over their estimated useful lives as follows:

 

Buildings (freehold):

   20-50 years

Buildings (leasehold):

   over the period of the lease

Plant and equipment:

   3-10 years

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date.

The carrying value of an asset is written down to its recoverable amount if the carrying value of the asset is greater than its estimated recoverable amount.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

 

e. Intangible assets

1. Goodwill For the acquisition of subsidiaries made on or after 1 January 2010, goodwill represents the excess of the consideration transferred, the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and the acquisition date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquiree over the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired. For the acquisition of subsidiaries made from the date of transition to IFRS to 31 December 2009, goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the net identifiable assets acquired. Goodwill on acquisitions of subsidiaries is included in intangible assets. Goodwill on acquisition of associates and joint ventures represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the net identifiable assets acquired. Goodwill on acquisitions of associates and joint ventures is included in investments in associates and joint ventures.

Goodwill is tested at least annually for impairment and carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. An impairment loss is recognised to the extent that the carrying value of goodwill exceeds the recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of fair value less costs of disposal and value in use. These calculations require the use of estimates and significant management judgement. A description of the key assumptions and sensitivities is included in note 11. Goodwill is allocated to aggregated cash-generating units for the purpose of impairment testing. The allocation is made to those aggregated cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from the business combination in which the goodwill arose.

Gains and losses on the disposal of an entity include the carrying amount of goodwill relating to the entity sold.

IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ has not been applied retrospectively to business combinations before the date of transition to IFRS.

2. Acquired software Software separately acquired for internal use is capitalised at cost. Software acquired in material business combinations is capitalised at its fair value as determined by an independent valuer. Acquired software is amortised on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful life of between three and eight years.

3. Internally developed software Internal and external costs incurred during the preliminary stage of developing computer software for internal use are expensed as incurred. Internal and external costs incurred to develop computer software for internal use during the application development stage are capitalised if the Group expects economic benefits from the development. Capitalisation in the application development stage begins once the Group can reliably measure the expenditure attributable to the software development and has demonstrated its intention to complete and use the software. Internally developed software is amortised on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful life of between three and eight years.

4. Acquired intangible assets Acquired intangible assets include customer lists, contracts and relationships, trademarks and brands, publishing rights, content, technology and software rights. These assets are capitalised on acquisition at cost and included in intangible assets. Intangible assets acquired in material business combinations are capitalised at their fair value as determined by an independent valuer. Intangible assets are amortised over their estimated useful lives of between two and 20 years, using an amortisation method that reflects the pattern of their consumption.

5. Pre-publication assets Pre-publication assets represent direct costs incurred in the development of educational programmes and titles prior to their publication. These costs are recognised as current intangible assets where the title will generate probable future economic benefits and costs can be measured reliably. Pre-publication assets are amortised upon publication of the title over estimated economic lives of five years or less, being an estimate of the expected operating life cycle of the title, with a higher proportion of the amortisation taken in the earlier years.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

e. Intangible assets continued

 

The investment in pre-publication assets has been disclosed as part of cash generated from operations in the cash flow statement (see note 32).

The assessment of the recoverability of pre-publication assets and the determination of the amortisation profile involve a significant degree of judgement based on historical trends and management estimation of future potential sales. An incorrect amortisation profile could result in excess amounts being carried forward as intangible assets that would otherwise have been written off to the income statement in an earlier period.

Reviews are performed regularly to estimate recoverability of pre-publication assets. The carrying amount of pre-publication assets is set out in note 20.

f. Other financial assets

Other financial assets, designated as available for sale investments, are non-derivative financial assets measured at estimated fair value. Changes in the fair value are recorded in equity in the fair value reserve. On the subsequent disposal of the asset, the net fair value gains or losses are taken to the income statement.

g. Inventories

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is determined using the first in first out (FIFO) method. The cost of finished goods and work in progress comprises raw materials, direct labour, other direct costs and related production overheads. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, less estimated costs necessary to make the sale. Provisions are made for slow moving and obsolete stock.

h. Royalty advances

Advances of royalties to authors are included within trade and other receivables when the advance is paid less any provision required to adjust the advance to its net realisable value. The realisable value of royalty advances relies on a degree of management judgement in determining the profitability of individual author contracts. If the estimated realisable value of author contracts is overstated, this will have an adverse effect on operating profits as these excess amounts will be written off.

The recoverability of royalty advances is based upon an annual detailed management review of the age of the advance, the future sales projections for new authors and prior sales history of repeat authors.

The royalty advance is expensed at the contracted or effective royalty rate as the related revenues are earned. Royalty advances which will be consumed within one year are held in current assets. Royalty advances which will be consumed after one year are held in non-current assets.

i. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents in the cash flow statement include cash in hand, deposits held on call with banks, other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less, and bank overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are included in borrowings in current liabilities in the balance sheet.

Short-term deposits and marketable securities with maturities of greater than three months do not qualify as cash and cash equivalents. Movements on these financial instruments are classified as cash flows from financing

 

F-15


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

i. Cash and cash equivalents continued

 

activities in the cash flow statement where these amounts are used to offset the borrowings of the Group or as cash flows from investing activities where these amounts are held to generate an investment return.

j. Share capital

Ordinary shares are classified as equity.

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Where any Group company purchases the company’s equity share capital (treasury shares) the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs, net of income taxes, is deducted from equity attributable to the company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled, reissued or disposed of. Where such shares are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable transaction costs and the related income tax effects, is included in equity attributable to the company’s equity holders.

k. Borrowings

Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, which is proceeds received net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently stated at amortised cost with any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value being recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method. Accrued interest is included as part of borrowings. Where a debt instrument is in a fair value hedging relationship, an adjustment is made to its carrying value in the income statement to reflect the hedged risk. Interest on borrowings is expensed in the income statement as incurred.

l. Derivative financial instruments

Derivatives are recognised at fair value and remeasured at each balance sheet date. The fair value of derivatives is determined by using market data and the use of established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and option valuation models. The Group designates certain of the derivative instruments within its portfolio to be hedges of the fair value of its bonds (fair value hedges) or hedges of net investments in foreign operations (net investment hedges).

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with any changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk.

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as net investment hedges are recognised in other comprehensive income. Gains and losses accumulated in equity are included in the income statement when the corresponding foreign operation is disposed of. Gains or losses relating to the ineffective portion are recognised immediately in finance income or finance costs in the income statement.

Certain derivatives do not qualify or are not designated as hedging instruments. Such derivatives are classified at fair value and any movement in their fair value is recognised immediately in finance income or finance costs in the income statement.

m. Taxation

Current tax is recognised on the amounts expected to be paid or recovered under the tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

m. Taxation continued

 

Deferred income tax is provided, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts. Deferred income tax is determined using tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and are expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred income tax liability is settled.

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can be utilised.

Deferred income tax is provided in respect of the undistributed earnings of subsidiaries other than where it is intended that those undistributed earnings will not be remitted in the foreseeable future.

Current and deferred tax are recognised in the income statement, except when the tax relates to items charged or credited directly to equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the tax is also recognised in equity or other comprehensive income.

The Group is subject to income taxes in numerous jurisdictions. Significant judgement is required in determining the estimates in relation to the worldwide provision for income taxes. There are many transactions and calculations for which the ultimate tax determination is uncertain during the ordinary course of business. The Group recognises liabilities for anticipated tax audit issues based on estimates of whether additional taxes will be due. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts that were initially recorded, such differences will impact the income tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which such determination is made.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities require management judgement in determining the amounts to be recognised. In particular, significant judgement is used when assessing the extent to which deferred tax assets should be recognised with consideration given to the timing and level of future taxable income together with any future tax planning strategies.

n. Employee benefits

1. Pensions The retirement benefit asset and obligation recognised in the balance sheet represents the net of the present value of the defined benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets at the balance sheet date. The defined benefit obligation is calculated annually by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method. The present value of the defined benefit obligation is determined by discounting estimated future cash flows using yields on high quality corporate bonds which have terms to maturity approximating the terms of the related liability.

When the calculation results in a potential asset, the recognition of that asset is limited to the asset ceiling – that is the present value of any economic benefits available in the form of refunds from the plan or a reduction in future contributions. Management uses judgement to determine the level of refunds available from the plan in recognising an asset.

The determination of the pension cost and defined benefit obligation of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes depends on the selection of certain assumptions, which include the discount rate, inflation rate, salary growth and longevity.

Actuarial gains and losses arising from experience adjustments and changes in actuarial assumptions are charged or credited to equity in other comprehensive income in the period in which they arise.

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

n. Employee benefits continued

 

The service cost, representing benefits accruing over the year, is included in the income statement as an operating cost. Net interest is calculated by applying the discount rate to the net defined benefit obligation and is presented as finance costs or finance income.

Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans are recognised as an operating expense in the income statement as incurred.

2. Other post-retirement obligations The expected costs of post-retirement medical and life assurance benefits are accrued over the period of employment, using a similar accounting methodology as for defined benefit pension obligations. The liabilities and costs relating to significant other post-retirement obligations are assessed annually by independent qualified actuaries.

3. Share-based payments The fair value of options or shares granted under the Group’s share and option plans is recognised as an employee expense after taking into account the Group’s best estimate of the number of awards expected to vest. Fair value is measured at the date of grant and is spread over the vesting period of the option or share. The fair value of the options granted is measured using an option model that is most appropriate to the award. The fair value of shares awarded is measured using the share price at the date of grant unless another method is more appropriate. Any proceeds received are credited to share capital and share premium when the options are exercised.

o. Provisions

Provisions are recognised if the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is more likely than not that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably estimated. Provisions are discounted to present value where the effect is material.

The Group recognises a provision for deferred consideration at fair value. Where this is contingent on future performance or a future event, judgement is exercised in establishing the fair value.

The Group recognises a provision for onerous lease contracts when the expected benefits to be derived from a contract are less than the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract.

The provision is based on the present value of future payments for surplus leased properties under non- cancellable operating leases, net of estimated sub-leasing income.

p. Revenue recognition

The Group’s revenue streams are courseware, assessments and services. Courseware includes curriculum materials provided in book form and/or via access to digital content. Assessments includes test development, processing and scoring services provided to governments, educational institutions, corporations and professional bodies. Services includes the operation of schools, colleges and universities, including sistemas in Brazil and English language teaching centres around the world as well as the provision of online learning services in partnership with universities and other academic institutions.

Revenue comprises the fair value of the consideration received or receivable for the sale of goods and services net of sales taxes, rebates and discounts, and after eliminating sales within the Group.

Revenue from the sale of books is recognised when title passes. A provision for anticipated returns is made based primarily on historical return rates. If these estimates do not reflect actual returns in future periods then revenues could be understated or overstated for a particular period.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

p. Revenue recognition continued

 

Revenue from the sale of off-the-shelf software is recognised on delivery or on installation of the software where that is a condition of the contract. In certain circumstances, where installation is complex, revenue is recognised when the customer has completed their acceptance procedures. Where software is provided under a term licence, revenue is recognised on a straight-line basis over the period of the license.

Revenue from the provision of services to academic institutions, such as programme development, student acquisition, education technology and student support services, is recognised as performance occurs.

Revenue from multi-year contractual arrangements, such as contracts to process qualifying tests for individual professions and government departments, is recognised as performance occurs. The assumptions, risks, and uncertainties inherent to long-term contract accounting can affect the amounts and timing of revenue and related expenses reported. Certain of these arrangements, either as a result of a single service spanning more than one reporting period or where the contract requires the provision of a number of services that together constitute a single project, are treated as long-term contracts with revenue recognised on a percentage of completion basis. Percentage of completion is calculated on a cost basis using the proportion of the total estimated costs incurred to date. Losses on contracts are recognised in the period in which the loss first becomes foreseeable. Contract losses are determined to be the amount by which estimated total costs of the contract exceed the estimated total revenues that will be generated.

Where a contractual arrangement consists of two or more separate elements that can be provided to customers either on a stand-alone basis or as an optional extra, such as the provision of supplementary materials or online access with textbooks and multiple deliverables within testing or service contracts, revenue is recognised for each element as if it were an individual contractual arrangement.

On certain contracts, where the Group acts as agent, only commissions and fees receivable for services rendered are recognised as revenue. Any third-party costs incurred on behalf of the principal that are rechargeable under the contractual arrangement are not included in revenue.

Income from recharges of freight and other activities which are incidental to the normal revenue generating activities is included in other income.

Circulation and advertising revenue is recognised when the newspaper or other publication is published. Subscription revenue is recognised on a straight-line basis over the life of the subscription.

q. Leases

Leases of property, plant and equipment where the Group has substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Finance leases are capitalised at the commencement of the lease at the lower of the fair value of the leased property and the present value of the minimum lease payments. Each lease payment is allocated between the liability and finance charges to achieve a constant rate on the finance balance outstanding. The corresponding rental obligations, net of finance charges, are included in financial liabilities – borrowings. The interest element of the finance cost is charged to the income statement over the lease period to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The property, plant and equipment acquired under finance leases are depreciated over the shorter of the useful life of the asset or the lease term.

 

F-19


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

q. Leases continued

 

Leases where a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership are retained by the lessor are classified as operating leases by the lessee. Payments made under operating leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) are charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease.

r. Dividends

Dividends are recorded in the Group’s financial statements in the period in which they are approved by the company’s shareholders.

s. Discontinued operations

A discontinued operation is a component of the Group’s business that represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations that has been disposed of or meets the criteria to be classified as held for sale.

Discontinued operations are presented in the income statement as a separate line and are shown net of tax.

t. Assets and liabilities held for sale

Assets and liabilities are classified as held for sale and stated at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell if it is highly probable that the carrying amount will be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. No depreciation is charged in respect of non-current assets classified as held for sale. Amounts relating to non-current assets and liabilities held for sale are classified as discontinued operations in the income statement where appropriate.

u. Trade receivables

Trade receivables are stated at fair value after provision for bad and doubtful debts and anticipated future sales returns (see also note 1p).

2. Segment information

The primary segments for management and reporting are geographies as outlined below. In addition, the Group separately discloses the results from the Penguin Random House (PRH) associate.

The chief operating decision-maker is the Pearson Executive.

Continuing operations:

North America School, Higher Education and Professional businesses in US and Canada.

Growth School, Higher Education and Professional businesses in emerging markets which are investment priorities, including Brazil, China, India and South Africa.

Core School, Higher Education and Professional businesses in more mature markets including UK, Australia and Italy.

The results of the FT Group segment (to 30 November 2015) and Mergermarket (to 4 February 2014) are shown as discontinued in the relevant periods.

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

 

For more detail on the services and products included in each business segment refer to the strategic report.

 

          2015  

All figures in £ millions

  Notes     North
America
    Core     Growth     PRH     Corporate     Discontinued
operations
    Group  

Continuing operations

               

Sales

      2,940        836        692                             4,468   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating (loss)/profit

      113        30        (595     48                      (404

Finance costs

    6                    (100

Finance income

    6                    71   
               

 

 

 

Loss before tax

                  (433

Income tax

    7                    81   
               

 

 

 

Loss for the year from continuing operations

                  (352
               

 

 

 

Segment assets

      6,399        1,573        719               1,841               10,532   

Joint ventures

    12        1               3                             4   

Associates

    12               6               1,093                      1,099   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

      6,400        1,579        722        1,093        1,841               11,635   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other segment items

               

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

    12        (9            (3     64               16        68   

Capital expenditure

    10, 11        85        33        110                      15        243   

Pre-publication investment

    20        218        63        66                             347   

Depreciation

    10        42        9        18                      6        75   

Amortisation

    11, 20        338        95        109                      15        557   

Impairment

    11        282        37        530                             849   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

 

          2014 restated  

All figures in £ millions

  Notes     North
America
    Core     Growth     PRH     Corporate     Discontinued
operations
    Group  

Continuing operations

               

Sales

      2,906        910        724                             4,540   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

      336        100        (103     15                      348   

Finance costs

    6                    (140

Finance income

    6                    47   
               

 

 

 

Profit before tax

                  255   

Income tax

    7                    (56
               

 

 

 

Profit for the year from continuing operations

                  199   
               

 

 

 

Segment assets

      6,580        1,426        1,394               660        219        10,279   

Joint ventures

    12        1               3                      9        13   

Associates

    12        1        8               1,095               1        1,105   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

      6,582        1,434        1,397        1,095        660        229        11,397   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other segment items

               

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

    12               (1     (3     35               20        51   

Capital expenditure

    10, 11        97        32        49                      16        194   

Pre-publication investment

    20        209        77        72                             358   

Depreciation

    10        41        10        16                      7        74   

Amortisation

    11, 20        306        99        121                      16        542   

Impairment

    11                      77                             77   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

          2013 restated  

All figures in £ millions

  Notes     North
America
    Core     Growth     PRH     Corporate     Discontinued
operations
    Group  

Continuing operations

               

Sales

      3,008        1,008        712                             4,728   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

      358        58        (5     20                      431   

Finance costs

    6                    (110

Finance income

    6                    37   
               

 

 

 

Profit before tax

                  358   

Income tax

    7                    (88
               

 

 

 

Profit for the year from continuing operations

                  270   
               

 

 

 

Other segment items

               

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

      1               (4     31               26        54   

Depreciation

    10        45        12        16                      9        82   

Amortisation

      285        131        103                      16        535   

Impairment

                                                       
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

 

There were no material inter-segment sales in 2013, 2014 or 2015.

Both operating profit and adjusted operating profit in 2015 are stated after the following restructuring charges: North America £24m (2014: £37m, 2013: £77m); Core £nil (2014: £21m, 2013: £49m); Growth £11m, (2014: £6m, 2013: £36m); Penguin Random House £12m (2014: £19m, 2013: £nil).

Corporate costs are allocated to business segments including discontinued operations on an appropriate basis depending on the nature of the cost; therefore the segment result is equal to the Group operating profit. Segment assets consist of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets, inventories, receivables, deferred taxation and other financial assets and exclude cash and cash equivalents and derivative assets. Corporate assets comprise cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities and derivative financial instruments. Capital expenditure comprises additions to property, plant and equipment and software (see notes 10 and 11).

Property, plant and equipment and intangible assets acquired through business combination were £1m (2014: £263m) (see note 30).

The following tables analyse the Group’s revenue streams. Courseware includes curriculum materials provided in book form and/or via access to digital content. Assessments includes test development, processing and scoring services provided to governments, educational institutions, corporations and professional bodies. Services includes the operation of schools, colleges and universities, including sistemas in Brazil and English language teaching centres around the world as well as the provision of online learning services in partnership with universities and other academic institutions. School Systems includes PowerSchool and Family Education Network, both of which were disposed during 2015.

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015  
   North
America
     Core      Growth      Group  

Courseware

           

School Courseware

     406         186         104         696   

Higher Education Courseware

     1,207         96         55         1,358   

English Courseware

     22         84         79         185   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,635         366         238         2,239   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Assessments

           

School and Higher Education Assessments

     420         301         15         736   

Clinical Assessments

     126         32                 158   

Professional Certification

     269         82         36         387   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     815         415         51         1,281   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Services

           

School Services

     209         1         47         257   

Higher Education Services

     223         26         70         319   

English Services

     18         28         286         332   

School Systems

     40                         40   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     490         55         403         948   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     2,940         836         692         4,468   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-23


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

 

     2014 restated  

All figures in £ millions

   North
America
     Core      Growth      Group  

Courseware

           

School Courseware

     389         214         120         723   

Higher Education Courseware

     1,179         114         66         1,359   

English Courseware

     22         92         75         189   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,590         420         261         2,271   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Assessments

           

School and Higher Education Assessments

     416         312         14         742   

Clinical Assessments

     115         34                 149   

Professional Certification

     228         93         19         340   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     759         439         33         1,231   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Services

           

School Services

     253                 56         309   

Higher Education Services

     215         22         90         327   

English Services

     20         29         284         333   

School Systems

     69                         69   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     557         51         430         1,038   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     2,906         910         724         4,540   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     2013 restated  

All figures in £ millions

   North
America
     Core      Growth      Group  

Courseware

           

School Courseware

     467         233         167         867   

Higher Education Courseware

     1,180         138         66         1,384   

English Courseware

     23         105         83         211   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,670         476         316         2,462   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Assessments

           

School and Higher Education Assessments

     452         375         7         834   

Clinical Assessments

     150                         150   

Professional Certification

     221         82         24         327   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     823         457         31         1,311   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Services

           

School Services

     239         6         79         324   

Higher Education Services

     167         23         83         273   

English Services

     22         46         203         271   

School Systems

     87                         87   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     515         75         365         955   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     3,008         1,008         712         4,728   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-24


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

 

The Group operates in the following main geographic areas:

 

     Sales      Non-current assets  

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014
restated
     2013
restated
     2015      2014  

Continuing operations

              

UK

     421         444         476         991         1,056   

Other European countries

     246         281         299         121         180   

US

     2,800         2,762         2,852         5,000         5,243   

Canada

     107         109         128         235         288   

Asia Pacific

     590         565         588         211         416   

Other countries

     304         379         385         144         661   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total continuing

     4,468         4,540         4,728         6,702         7,844   

Discontinued operations

              

UK

     134         170         270                   

Other European countries

     64         66         116                   

US

     72         68         430                   

Canada

     2         1         24                   

Asia Pacific

     35         34         110                   

Other countries

     5         4         12                   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total discontinued

     312         343         962                   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     4,780         4,883         5,690         6,702         7,844   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Sales are allocated based on the country in which the customer is located. This does not differ materially from the location where the order is received. The geographical split of non-current assets is based on the subsidiary’s country of domicile. This is not materially different to the location of the assets. Non-current assets comprise property, plant and equipment, intangible assets, investments in joint ventures and associates and trade and other receivables.

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

3. Discontinued operations

Discontinued operations relate to FT Group, Penguin and Mergermarket. An analysis of the results and cash flows of discontinued operations is as follows:

 

    2015     2014 restated     2013 restated  

All figures in £ millions

  FT Group     Total     Penguin     Mergermarket     FT Group     Total     Penguin     Mergermarket     FT Group     Total  

Sales

    312        312               9        334        343        513        108        341        962   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

    48        48               2        50        52        28        24        27        79   

Finance income/(costs)

                                              1               (3     (2
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before tax

    48        48               2        50        52        29        24        24        77   

Income tax

    (8     (8            (1     (7     (8     (9     (9     1        (17
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit after tax

    40        40               1        43        44        20        15        25        60   

Profit on disposal of Penguin

                  29                      29        202                      202   

Attributable tax benefit

                                              15                      15   

Profit on disposal of The Economist

    473        473                                                           

Profit on disposal of Financial Times

    711        711                                                           

Attributable tax expense

    (49     (49                                                        

Mergermarket transaction costs

                                                     (8            (8

Profit on disposal of Mergermarket

                         244               244                               

Attributable tax expense

                         (46            (46                            
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year from discontinued operations

    1,175        1,175        29        199        43        271        237        7        25        269   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating cash flows

    31        31               2        24        26        36        22        17        75   

Investing cash flows

    3        3                      (5     (5     (6     (2     2        (6

Financing cash flows

                                              (8     (29            (37
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total cash flows

    34        34               2        19        21        22        (9     19        32   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included within the cost of disposal of Penguin in 2013 are amounts in respect of the settlement of litigation related to the agency arrangement for eBooks. Also included in cost of disposal for Penguin for 2013 was a provision for amounts payable to Bertelsmann upon settlement of the transfer of Penguin’s UK past service pension liabilities to the new PRH venture. During 2014, it was decided that this transfer would not go ahead as planned and the costs have been credited back in the £29m gain reported against the disposal in 2014.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

4. Operating expenses

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014
restated
    2013
restated
 

By function:

      

Cost of goods sold

     1,981        2,021        2,123   

Operating expenses

      

Distribution costs

     80        84        88   

Selling, marketing and product development costs

     895        931        995   

Administrative and other expenses

     1,195        1,168        1,056   

Restructuring costs

     35        64        162   

Other net gains and losses

     (13     (2     16   

Other income

     (98     (120     (115
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total net operating expenses

     2,094        2,125        2,202   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Impairment of intangible assets

     849        77          
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     4,924        4,223        4,325   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included in other income is service fee income from Penguin Random House of £16m (2014: £41m, 2013: £28m). Included in administrative and other expenses are research and efficacy costs of £33m (2014: £22m, 2013: £5m). In addition to the restructuring costs shown above there were restructuring costs in Penguin Random House of £12m (2014: £19m, 2013: £nil) and in discontinued operations of £nil (2014: £1m, 2013: £14m).

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014
restated
    2013
restated
 

By nature:

         

Royalties expensed

        249        242        256   

Other product costs

        566        620        663   

Employee benefit expense

     5         1,742        1,832        1,938   

Contract labour

        182        183        190   

Employee related expense

        127        136        167   

Promotional costs

        163        149        148   

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

     10         69        67        73   

Amortisation of intangible assets – pre-publication

     20         281        292        308   

Amortisation of intangible assets – software

     11         61        51        48   

Amortisation of intangible assets – other

     11         199        184        163   

Impairment of intangible assets

     11         849        77          

Property and facilities

        219        204        213   

Technology and communications

        153        123        88   

Professional and outsourced services

        262        253        245   

Other general and administrative costs

        132        121        104   

Capitalised costs

        (219     (195     (193

Acquisition costs

               6        12   

Other net gains and losses

        (13     (2     16   

Other income

        (98     (120     (114
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

        4,924        4,223        4,325   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included in other net gains and losses within continuing operations in 2015 in the North America segment is the profit on disposal of PowerSchool of £30m, net of small losses on other investments. In the Core segment the loss on disposal relates to adjustments to prior year disposals.

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

4. Operating expenses continued

 

Included in other net gains and losses in continuing operations in 2014 are gains on the sale of joint venture interests in Safari Books Online and CourseSmart (£40m) and a loss on disposal of an investment in Nook Media (£38m).

Included in other net gains and losses in 2013 is a loss on the disposal of the Japanese school and local publishing assets.

During the year the Group obtained the following services from the Group’s auditors:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014      2013  

The audit of parent company and consolidated financial statements

     4         5         4   

The audit of the company’s subsidiaries

     2         2         2   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total audit fees

     6         7         6   

Other assurance services

     2         1         1   

Other non-audit services

     1                   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total other services

     3         1         1   

Tax compliance services

     1         1         2   

Tax advisory services

                     2   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total tax services

     1         1         4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total non-audit services

     4         2         5   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     10         9         11   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Reconciliation between audit and non-audit service fees is shown below:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014      2013  

Group audit fees including fees for attestation under section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act

         6             7             6   

Non-audit fees

     4         2         5   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     10         9         11   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Fees for attestation under section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act are allocated between fees payable for the audits of consolidated and subsidiary accounts.

Included in non-audit fees in 2015 are amounts related to carve out audits for disposals of £1m.

5. Employee information

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015      2014
restated
    2013
restated
 

Employee benefit expense

          

Wages and salaries (including termination benefits and restructuring costs)

        1,507         1,607        1,697   

Social security costs

        124         122        124   

Share-based payment costs

     26         26         32        37   

Retirement benefits – defined contribution plans

     25         66         61        58   

Retirement benefits – defined benefit plans

     25         19         21        22   

Other post-retirement benefits

     25                 (11       
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

        1,742         1,832        1,938   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

5. Employee information continued

 

The details of the emoluments of the directors of Pearson plc are shown in the report on directors’ remuneration.

 

Average number employed

   2015      2014
restated
     2013
restated
 

Employee numbers

        

North America

     19,951         20,927         21,856   

Core

     5,936         6,139         7,075   

Growth

     11,114         11,406         10,768   

Other

     264         182         187   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Continuing operations

     37,265         38,654         39,886   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The employee benefit expense relating to discontinued operations was £132m (2014: £151m, 2013: £330m) and the average number employed was 2,282 (2014: 2,295, 2013: 5,821).

6. Net finance costs

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014
restated
    2013
restated
 

Interest payable

        (61     (81     (81

Net finance costs in respect of retirement benefits

                      (3

Net foreign exchange losses

        (36     (53       

Finance cost of put options, deferred consideration associated with acquisitions and other interest charges related to transactions

                      (9

Derivatives not in hedging relationships

        (3     (6     (17
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Finance costs

        (100     (140     (110
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest receivable

        15        17        10   

Net finance income in respect of retirement benefits

     25         4        1          

Net foreign exchange gains

        43        17        22   

Financial instruments in a hedging relationship

                      1   

Derivatives not in hedging relationships

        9        12        4   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Finance income

        71        47        37   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net finance costs

        (29     (93     (73
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Analysed as:

         

Net interest payable

        (46     (64     (71

Other net finance income/(costs)

        17        (29     (2
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total net finance costs

        (29     (93     (73
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included in interest receivable is £1m (2014: £1m, 2013: £nil) of interest receivable from related parties. There was a net movement of £nil on fair value hedges in 2015 (2014: £nil, 2013: net gain of £1m), comprising a gain of £22m (2014: loss of £27m, 2013: gain of £95m) on the underlying bonds, offset by a loss of £22m (2014: gain of £27m, 2013: loss of £94m) on the related derivative financial instruments.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

7. Income tax

 

All figures in £ millions

  Notes     2015     2014
restated
    2013
restated
 

Current tax

       

Charge in respect of current year

      (155     (96     (130

Adjustments in respect of prior years

      42        30        (7
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total current tax charge

      (113     (66     (137
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Deferred tax

       

In respect of temporary differences

      185        8        14   

Other adjustments in respect of prior years

      9        2        35   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax credit

    13        194        10        49   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total tax credit/(charge)

      81        (56     (88
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The adjustments in respect of prior years in 2015, 2014 and 2013 mainly relate to changes in estimates arising from uncertain tax positions following agreement of historical tax positions.

The tax on the Group’s (loss)/profit before tax differs from the theoretical amount that would arise using the UK tax rate as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014
restated
    2013
restated
 

(Loss)/profit before tax

     (433     255        358   

Tax calculated at UK rate (2015: 20.25%, 2014: 21.5%)

     88        (55     (84

Effect of overseas tax rates

     52        (10     (13

Joint venture and associate income reported net of tax

     10        7        7   

Net expense not subject to tax

     (66     (11     (14

Gains and losses on sale of businesses not subject to tax

     (32            (6

Unutilised tax losses

     (22     (19     (7

Utilisation of previously unrecognised tax losses and credits

                   1   

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     51        32        28   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total tax credit/(charge)

     81        (56     (88
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

UK

     (25            (14

Overseas

     106        (56     (74
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total tax credit/(charge)

     81        (56     (88
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Tax rate reflected in earnings

     18.7     22.0     24.6

The tax (charge)/benefit recognised in other comprehensive income is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014     2013  

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

     5        (6     6   

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations

     (24     (1     (23
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     (19     (7     (17
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

A tax charge of £1m (2014: tax charge £3m, 2013: tax charge £nil) relating to share-based payments has been recognised directly in equity.

 

F-30


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

8. Earnings per share

Basic

Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity shareholders of the company by the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year, excluding ordinary shares purchased by the company and held as treasury shares.

Diluted

Diluted earnings per share is calculated by adjusting the weighted average number of ordinary shares to take account of all dilutive potential ordinary shares and adjusting the profit attributable, if applicable, to account for any tax consequences that might arise from conversion of those shares.

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014
restated
     2013
restated
 

(Loss)/profit for the year from continuing operations

        (352     199         270   

Non-controlling interest

               1         (1
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Earnings from continuing operations

        (352     200         269   

Profit for the year from discontinued operations

     3         1,175        271         269   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Earnings

        823        471         538   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares (millions)

        813.3        810.9         807.8   

Effect of dilutive share options (millions)

               1.0         1.1   

Weighted average number of shares (millions) for diluted earnings

        813.3        811.9         808.9   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations

          

Basic

        101.2p        58.1p         66.6p   

Diluted

        101.2p        58.0p         66.5p   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

(Loss)/earnings per share from continuing operations

          

Basic

        (43.3)p        24.7p         33.3p   

Diluted

        (43.3)p        24.6p         33.3p   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Earnings per share from discontinued operations

          

Basic

        144.5p        33.4p         33.3p   

Diluted

        144.5p        33.4p         33.3p   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

9. Dividends

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014      2013  

Final paid in respect of prior year 34.0p (2014: 32.0p, 2013: 30.0p)

     277         259         242   

Interim paid in respect of current year 18.0p (2014: 17.0p, 2013: 16.0p)

     146         138         130   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     423         397         372   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The directors are proposing a final dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 December 2015 of 34.0p per share which will absorb an estimated £277m of shareholders’ funds. It will be paid on 6 May 2016 to shareholders who are on the register of members on 8 April 2016. These financial statements do not reflect this dividend.

 

F-31


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

10. Property, plant and equipment

 

All figures in £ millions

   Land and
buildings
    Plant and
equipment
    Assets in
course of
construction
    Total  

Cost

        

At 1 January 2014

     375        568        32        975   

Exchange differences

     11        17               28   

Additions

     10        58        19        87   

Disposals

     (9     (46     (2     (57

Acquisition through business combination

            2               2   

Disposal through business disposal

            (1            (1

Reclassifications

     1        3        (4       

Transfer to software

                   (16     (16
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

     388        601        29        1,018   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exchange differences

     8        10        1        19   

Additions

     15        42        25        82   

Disposals

     (20     (86            (106

Acquisition through business combination

                            

Disposal through business disposal

     (48     (76            (124

Reclassifications

     16        17        (33       
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

     359        508        22        889   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

All figures in £ millions

   Land
and
buildings
    Plant and
equipment
    Assets in
course of
construction
     Total  

Depreciation

         

At 1 January 2014

     (210     (423             (633

Exchange differences

     (7     (15             (22

Charge for the year

     (23     (51             (74

Disposals

     9        36                45   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

     (231     (453             (684
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Exchange differences

     (5     (12             (17

Charge for the year

     (22     (53             (75

Disposals

     18        82                100   

Disposal through business disposal

     48        59                107   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

     (192     (377             (569
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Carrying amounts

         

At 1 January 2014

     165        145        32         342   

At 31 December 2014

     157        148        29         334   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

     167        131        22         320   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Depreciation expense of £19m (2014: £16m, 2013: £24m) has been included in the income statement in cost of goods sold and £50m (2014: £51m, 2013: £49m) in operating expenses. In 2015 £6m (2014: £7m, 2013: £9m) relates to discontinued operations.

The Group leases certain equipment under a number of finance lease agreements. The net carrying amount of leased plant and equipment included within property, plant and equipment was £8m (2014: £13m).

 

F-32


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

11. Intangible assets

 

All figures in £ millions

   Goodwill     Software     Acquired
customer lists,
contracts and
relationships
    Acquired
trademarks
and brands
    Acquired
publishing
rights
    Other
intangibles
acquired
    Total  

Cost

              

At 1 January 2014

     4,666        469        855        237        198        398        6,823   

Exchange differences

     198        17        34        5               14        268   

Impairment

     (67                                        (67

Additions – internal development

            54                                    54   

Additions – purchased

            53                                    53   

Disposals

            (7                                 (7

Acquisition through business combination

     238               5        69               186        498   

Disposal through business disposal

     (5     (5            (3     (1            (14

Transfer from PPE

            16                                    16   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

     5,030        597        894        308        197        598        7,624   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exchange differences

     105        17        25        (17     (7     (40     83   

Impairment

     (826                                        (826

Additions – internal development

            125                                    125   

Additions – purchased

            36                                    36   

Disposals

            (18            (4     (10     (29     (61

Acquisition through business combination

                                        1        1   

Disposal through business disposal

     (175     (138     (59     (6            (21     (399
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

     4,134        619        860        281        180        509        6,583   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

All figures in £ millions

   Goodwill      Software     Acquired
customer lists,
contracts and
relationships
    Acquired
trademarks
and brands
    Acquired
publishing
rights
    Other
intangibles
acquired
    Total  

Amortisation

               

At 1 January 2014

             (316     (249     (93     (148     (216     (1,022

Exchange differences

             (13     (11     (3            (12     (39

Impairment

                    (6     (2            (2     (10

Charge for the year

             (63     (83     (25     (12     (67     (250

Disposals

             5                                    5   

Disposal through business disposal

             1               1                      2   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

             (386     (349     (122     (160     (297     (1,314
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exchange differences

             (14     (8     1        6        (6     (21

Impairment

                    (13     (1     (9            (23

Charge for the year

             (74     (99     (40     (10     (53     (276

Disposals

        18               4        10        29        61   

Disposal through business disposal

             99        39        3               13        154   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

             (357     (430     (155     (163     (314     (1,419
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amounts

               

At 1 January 2014

     4,666         153        606        144        50        182        5,801   

At 31 December 2014

     5,030         211        545        186        37        301        6,310   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

     4,134         262        430        126        17        195        5,164   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-33


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11. Intangible assets continued

 

Goodwill

The goodwill carrying value of £4,134m relates to acquisitions completed after 1 January 1998. Prior to 1 January 1998 all goodwill was written off to reserves on the date of acquisition. For acquisitions completed between 1 January 1998 and 31 December 2002 no value was ascribed to intangibles other than goodwill and the goodwill on each acquisition was amortised over a period of up to 20 years. On adoption of IFRS on 1 January 2003, the Group chose not to restate the goodwill balance and at that date the balance was frozen (i.e. amortisation ceased). If goodwill had been restated then a significant value would have been ascribed to other intangible assets, which would be subject to amortisation, and the carrying value of goodwill would be significantly lower. For acquisitions completed after 1 January 2003 value has been ascribed to other intangible assets which are amortised.

Other intangible assets

Other intangibles acquired include content, technology and software rights.

Intangible assets are valued separately for each acquisition and the primary method of valuation used is the discounted cash flow method. The majority of acquired intangibles are amortised using an amortisation profile based on the projected cash flows underlying the acquisition date valuation of the intangible asset, which generally results in a larger proportion of amortisation being recognised in the early years of the asset’s life. The Group keeps the expected pattern of consumption under review.

Amortisation of £13m (2014: £12m, 2013: £15m) is included in the income statement in cost of goods sold and £248m (2014: £222m, 2013: £196m) in operating expenses. In 2015, £16m (2014: £15m, 2013: £16m) of amortisation relates to discontinued operations.

The range of useful economic lives for each major class of intangible asset (excluding goodwill and software) is shown below:

 

    

2015

Class of intangible asset

  

Useful economic life

Acquired customer lists, contracts and relationships

   3–20 years

Acquired trademarks and brands

   2–20 years

Acquired publishing rights

   5–20 years

Other intangibles acquired

   2–20 years

The expected amortisation profile of acquired intangible assets is shown below:

 

       2015  

All figures in £ millions

   One to five
years
     Six to ten
years
     More than
ten years
     Total  

Class of intangible asset

           

Acquired customer lists, contracts and relationships

     268         122         40         430   

Acquired trademarks and brands

     56         47         23         126   

Acquired publishing rights

     15         2                 17   

Other intangibles acquired

     146         43         6         195   

 

F-34


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11. Intangible assets continued

 

Impairment tests for cash-generating units (CGUs) containing goodwill

Impairment tests have been carried out where appropriate as described below.

Following a reorganisation of the business effective 1 January 2014 goodwill was allocated to CGUs, or an aggregation of CGUs, where goodwill could not be reasonably allocated to individual business units. Impairment reviews were conducted on these CGUs. The carrying value of the goodwill in each of the CGUs, after the impact of impairments, is summarised below:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

North America

     3,155         3,422   

Core

     635         618   

Growth (includes Brazil, China, India and South Africa)

             612   

Pearson VUE

     344         327   

Financial Times Group

             51   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     4,134         5,030   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The recoverable amount of each aggregated cash generating unit (CGU) is based on fair value less costs of disposal or value in use calculations as appropriate. Goodwill is tested at least annually for impairment. Other than goodwill there are no intangible assets with indefinite lives. The goodwill is generally denominated in the currency of the relevant cash flows and therefore the impairment review is not materially sensitive to exchange rate fluctuations.

Following significant economic and market deterioration in the Group’s operations in emerging markets and ongoing cyclical and policy-related pressures in the Group’s mature market operations, management’s expectations of future returns were revised down in the course of 2015. It was determined during the impairment review that the fair value less costs of disposal of the Growth, North America and Core CGUs no longer supported the carrying value of the goodwill. An impairment of £507m was booked in respect of the Group’s Growth operations, representing impairments of £269m in the Brazil CGU, £181m in the China CGU, £48m in the South Africa CGU and £9m in the Other Growth CGU, thereby bringing the carrying value of goodwill in those CGUs down to £nil. Impairments of £10m and £13m were also booked in respect of other acquired intangibles in the South Africa and Other Growth CGUs respectively, bringing their carrying value down to £nil. Impairments of £282m and £37m were also booked in respect of the North America and Core CGUs respectively, bringing the carrying value of the goodwill in those CGUs down to fair value less costs of disposal. Fair value less costs of disposal was determined using post-tax discount rates of 17.4% for Brazil, 11.0% for China, 13.6% for South Africa, 12.8% for Other Growth, 8.6% for North America and 8.7% for Core. Following the above impairments, the recoverable amounts of the Growth, North America and Core CGUs are £350m, £4,750m and £926m respectively.

Key assumptions

For the purpose of estimating the fair value less costs of disposal of the CGUs, management has used an income approach based on present value techniques. The calculations use cash flow projections based on financial budgets approved by management covering a five-year period, management’s best estimate about future developments and market assumptions. The fair value less costs of disposal measurement is categorised as Level 3 on the fair value hierarchy. The key assumptions used by management in the fair value less costs of disposal calculations were:

Discount rates The discount rate is based on the risk-free rate for government bonds, adjusted for a risk premium to reflect the increased risk in investing in equities. The risk premium adjustment is assessed for each specific

 

F-35


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11. Intangible assets continued

Key assumptions continued

 

CGU. The average post-tax discount rates range from 7.2% to 17.4%. Discount rates are lower for those businesses which operate in more mature markets with low inflation and higher for those operating in emerging markets with higher inflation.

Perpetuity growth rates A perpetuity growth rate of 2.0% (2014: 2.0%) was used for cash flows subsequent to the approved budget period for CGUs operating in mature markets. This perpetuity growth rate is a conservative rate and is considered to be lower than the long-term historical growth rates of the underlying territories in which the CGU operates and the long-term growth rate prospects of the sectors in which the CGU operates. CGU growth rates between 5.0% and 8.5% were used for cash flows subsequent to the approved budget period for CGUs operating in emerging markets with high inflation. These growth rates are also below the long-term historical growth rates in these markets.

The key assumptions used by management in setting the financial budgets for the initial five-year period were as follows:

Forecast sales growth rates Forecast sales growth rates are based on past experience adjusted for the strategic direction and near-term investment priorities within each CGU. Key factors include USA and UK college enrolment rates, assessment growth rates, the success of new product launches, growth rates and economic conditions in emerging markets and the rate of growth in new services businesses. The five-year sales forecasts use average nominal growth rates between 1.1% and 1.6% for mature markets and between 0.1% and 5.6% for emerging markets with high inflation.

Operating profits Operating profits are forecast based on historical experience of operating margins, adjusted for the impact of changes to product costs and cost saving initiatives, including the impact of the global restructuring programme planned in 2016.

Cash conversion Cash conversion is the ratio of operating cash flow to operating profit. Management forecasts cash conversion rates based on historical experience, adjusted for the impact of product investment priorities and the shift to digital and service based business.

Sensitivities

The Group’s impairment review is sensitive to a change in assumptions used, most notably the discount rates and the perpetuity growth rates. As the carrying value of goodwill in the Growth market CGUs has been written down to £nil, the value of other intangible assets in Brazil and China is sensitive to any increase in discount rates or reduction in perpetuity growth rates. In the North America and Core CGUs goodwill has been written down to fair value less costs of disposal and any further increase in discount rates or reduction in perpetuity growth rates would give rise to further impairment. A 0.1% increase in discount rates would cause the fair value less costs of disposal of the Brazil, China, North America and Core CGUs to reduce by £3m, £5m, £120m and £25m respectively. A 0.1% reduction in perpetuity growth rates would cause the fair value less costs of disposal of the Brazil, China, North America and Core CGUs to reduce by £2m, £5m, £100m and £21m respectively. All CGUs which have been written down to fair value less costs of disposal are highly sensitive to any reductions in short-term cash flows, whether driven by lower sales growth, lower operating profits or lower cash conversion. A 5% reduction in total annual operating profits, spread evenly across all CGUs, would give rise to an impairment of £29m in the Growth CGUs, £241m in the North America CGU and £62m in the Core CGU.

 

F-36


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11. Intangible assets continued

 

2014 impairment tests

In 2014 following deterioration in the market conditions for the Group’s online tutoring business based in India, it was determined in the course of the impairment review that the value in use of the India CGU no longer supported the carrying value of the goodwill in that CGU. An impairment of £67m was booked, thereby bringing the carrying value of goodwill in the India CGU down to £nil. An impairment of £10m was also booked in respect of other acquired intangibles in that CGU, bringing their carrying value to £nil. The India CGU incorporates all the Group’s trading operations in India. A pre-tax discount rate of 13.6% was used to determine the value in use of the India CGU. No previous assessment had been made of the value in use of that CGU as the Group’s India operations, prior to the 1 January 2014 reorganisation, were previously part of a larger Emerging Markets aggregated CGU.

12. Investments in joint ventures and associates

The amounts recognised in the balance sheet are as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Associates

     1,099         1,105   

Joint ventures

     4         13   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     1,103         1,118   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The amounts recognised in the income statement are as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Associates

     72        54   

Joint ventures

     (4     (3
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     68        51   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included within the 2015 results are discontinued operations consisting of £17m profit from associates (2014: £21m profit) and £1m loss from joint ventures (2014: £1m loss). For further information on discontinued operations and the profit on sale of associates and joint ventures, see notes 3 and 31.

Investment in associates

On 16 October 2015, the Group sold 39% of its 50% stake in The Economist (see note 31 for further information). As at 31 December 2015, the Group holds an 11% stake in The Economist which has been classified as an ‘Other financial asset’ (see note 15).

The Group has the following material associates:

 

     Principal
place of
business
     Ownership
interest
    Nature of
relationship
     Measurement
method
 

Penguin Random House Ltd

     UK/Global         47     See below         Equity   

Penguin Random House LLC

     US         47     See below         Equity   

On 1 July 2013 Penguin Random House was formed, upon the completion of an agreement between Pearson and Bertelsmann to merge their respective trade publishing companies, Penguin and Random House, with the parent companies owning 47% and 53% of the combined business respectively. The shareholder agreement includes

 

F-37


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12. Investments in joint ventures and associates continued

Investment in associates continued

 

protection rights for Pearson as the minority shareholder, including rights to dividends. Management considers ownership percentage, board composition and the additional protective rights, and exercises judgement to determine that Pearson has significant influence over Penguin Random House and Bertelsmann has the power to direct the relevant activities and therefore control. Penguin Random House does not have a quoted market price.

The summarised financial information of the material associates is detailed below:

 

     2015      2014  

All figures in £ millions

   Penguin
Random
House
    The
Economist
     Penguin
Random
House
    The
Economist
 

Assets

         

Current assets

     1,354                1,355        110   

Non-current assets

     1,244                1,429        166   

Liabilities

         

Current liabilities

     (1,034             (1,113     (190

Non-current liabilities

     (358             (424     (86
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net assets

     1,206                1,247          
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Sales

     2,453        276         2,416        320   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit from continuing operations

     136                74          

Profit from discontinued operations

            34                42   

Other comprehensive income/(expense)

     51                42        (20
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

     187        34         116        22   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Dividends received from associate

     142        20         95        21   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

The information above reflects the amounts presented in the financial statements of the associates, adjusted for fair value and similar adjustments. Amounts presented for The Economist cover the period up until the date of the partial disposal. The tax on Penguin Random House LLC is settled by the partners. For the purposes of clear and consistent presentation, the tax has been shown in the associate line items in the consolidated income statement and consolidated balance sheet, recording the Group’s share of profit after tax consistently for the Penguin Random House associates.

 

F-38


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12. Investments in joint ventures and associates continued

Investment in associates continued

 

A reconciliation of the summarised financial information to the carrying value of the material associates is shown below:

 

     2015     2014  

All figures in £ millions

   Penguin
Random
House
    The
Economist
    Penguin
Random
House
    The
Economist
 

Opening net assets

     1,247               1,232        16   

Exchange differences

     (1            (1       

Profit for the period

     136        34        74        42   

Other comprehensive income/(expense)

     51               42        (20

Dividends, net of tax paid

     (229     (40     (100     (42

Additions

     2                        

Distribution from associate in excess of carrying value

                          4   

Reversal of distribution from associate in excess of carrying value

            (3              

Disposal

            9                 
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing net assets

     1,206               1,247          

Share of net assets

     567               586          

Goodwill

     526               509          
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying value of associate

     1,093               1,095          
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Information on other individually immaterial associates is detailed below:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Loss from continuing operations

     (9     (2

Other comprehensive income

              
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive expense

     (9     (2
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Transactions with material associates

The Group has loans to Penguin Random House which are unsecured and interest is calculated based on market rates. The amount outstanding at 31 December 2015 was £47m (2014: £54m). The loans are provided under a working capital facility and fluctuate during the year. The loan outstanding at 31 December 2015 was repaid in its entirety in January 2016.

The Group also has a current asset receivable of £27m (2014: £41m) from Penguin Random House arising from the provision of services. Included in other income (note 4) is £16m (2014: £41m) of service fees.

Investment in joint ventures

Information on joint ventures, all of which are individually immaterial, is detailed below:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Loss from continuing operations

     (3     (3

Loss from discontinued operations

     (1       

Other comprehensive income

              
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive expense

     (4     (3
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-39


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

13. Deferred income tax

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Deferred income tax assets

     276        295   

Deferred income tax liabilities

     (560     (714
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net deferred income tax

     (284     (419
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Substantially all of the deferred income tax assets are expected to be recovered after more than one year.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities may be offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current income tax assets against current income tax liabilities and when the deferred income taxes relate to the same fiscal authority. At 31 December 2015 the Group has unrecognised deferred income tax assets of £nil (2014: £4m) in respect of UK losses, £11m (2014: £14m) in respect of US losses and approximately £70m (2014: £44m) in respect of losses in other territories. The US losses relate to state taxes and therefore have expiry periods of between five and 20 years.

The recognition of the deferred income tax assets is supported by management’s forecasts of the future profitability of the relevant business units.

The movement on the net deferred income tax account is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   Notes      2015     2014  

At beginning of year

        (419     (362

Exchange differences

        (26     (22

Income statement benefit

     7         196        10   

Disposal through business disposal

        1        (1

Tax charge to other comprehensive income or equity

        (36     (18

Transfer to current tax

               (26
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

At end of year

        (284     (419
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included in the income statement above for 2015 is a £2m benefit (2014: £nil) relating to discontinued operations.

The movement in deferred income tax assets and liabilities during the year is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

  Trading
losses
    Returns
provisions
    Retirement
benefit
obligations
    Other     Total  

Deferred income tax assets

         

At 1 January 2014

    15        39        42        154        250   

Exchange differences

    1        2        4        5        12   

Acquisition through business combination

    2                             2   

Income statement benefit

    10        3        7        35        55   

Tax benefit/(charge) to other comprehensive income or equity

                  10        (7     3   

Transfer to current tax

                         (26     (26

Disposal through business disposal

                  (1            (1
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

    28        44        62        161        295   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exchange differences

    5        3        4        9        21   

Income statement charge

    (14     (4     (3     (15     (36

Tax charge to other comprehensive income or equity

                  (4            (4
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

    19        43        59        155        276   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-40


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

13. Deferred income tax continued

 

Other deferred income tax assets include temporary differences on goodwill, deferred income, share-based payments, inventory and other provisions.

 

All figures in £ millions

  Goodwill
and
intangibles
    Other     Total  

Deferred income tax liabilities

     

At 1 January 2014

    (584     (28     (612

Exchange differences

    (30     (4     (34

Acquisition through business combination

    (2            (2

Income statement benefit/(charge)

    18        (63     (45

Tax charge to other comprehensive income or equity

           (21     (21
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

    (598     (116     (714
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exchange differences

    (41     (6     (47

Income statement benefit

    180        52        232   

Disposal through business disposal

    1               1   

Tax charge to other comprehensive income or equity

           (32     (32
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

    (458     (102     (560
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other deferred income tax liabilities include temporary differences in respect of depreciation and royalty advances.

14. Classification of financial instruments

The accounting classification of each class of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities, together with their carrying values and market values, is as follows:

 

          2015  
          Fair value     Amortised cost              

All figures in £ millions

  Notes     Available
for sale
    Derivatives
deemed held
for trading
    Derivatives
in hedging
relationships
    Other
liabilities
    Loans and
receivables
    Other
liabilities
    Total
carrying
value
    Total
market
value
 

Investments in listed securities

    15                                                           

Investments in unlisted securities

    15        143                                           143        143   

Cash and cash equivalents

    17                                    1,703               1,703        1,703   

Marketable securities

      28                                           28        28   

Derivative financial instruments

    16               29        81                             110        110   

Trade receivables

    22                                    963               963        963   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial assets

      171        29        81               2,666               2,947        2,947   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Derivative financial instruments

    16               (36     (129                          (165     (165

Trade payables

    24                                           (319     (319     (319

Bank loans and overdrafts

    18                                           (38     (38     (38

Borrowings due within one year

    18                                           (244     (244     (244

Borrowings due after more than one year

    18                                           (2,048     (2,048     (2,009
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial liabilities

             (36     (129                   (2,649     (2,814     (2,775
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-41


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

14. Classification of financial instruments continued

 

          2014  
          Fair value     Amortised cost              

All figures in £ millions

  Notes     Available
for sale
    Derivatives
deemed held
for trading
    Derivatives
in hedging
relationships
    Other
liabilities
    Loans and
receivables
    Other
liabilities
    Total
carrying
value
    Total
market
value
 

Investments in listed securities

    15        9                                           9        9   

Investments in unlisted securities

    15        45                                           45        45   

Cash and cash equivalents

    17                                    530               530        530   

Marketable securities

      16                                           16        16   

Derivative financial instruments

    16               6        108                             114        114   

Trade receivables

    22                                    989               989        989   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial assets

      70        6        108               1,519               1,703        1,703   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Derivative financial instruments

    16               (33     (41                          (74     (74

Trade payables

    24                                           (329     (329     (329

Bank loans and overdrafts

    18                                           (42     (42     (42

Borrowings due within one year

    18                                           (305     (305     (319

Borrowings due after more than one year

    18                                           (1,878     (1,878     (1,888
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial liabilities

             (33     (41                   (2,554     (2,628     (2,652
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Certain of the Group’s derivative financial instruments are classified as held for trading either as they do not meet the hedge accounting criteria specified in IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’ or as the Group has chosen not to seek hedge accounting for these instruments. None of these derivatives are held for speculative trading purposes. Transactions in derivative financial instruments are only undertaken to manage risks arising from underlying business activity, in accordance with the Group’s treasury policy as described in note 19.

The Group designates certain qualifying derivative financial instruments as hedges of the fair value of its bonds (fair value hedges). Changes in the fair value of these derivative financial instruments are recorded in the income statement, together with any change in the fair value of the hedged liability attributable to the hedged risk.

The Group also designates certain of its borrowings and derivative financial instruments as hedges of its investments in foreign operations (net investment hedges). Movements in the fair value of these financial instruments (to the extent they are effective) are recognised in other comprehensive income.

None of the Group’s financial assets or liabilities are designated at fair value through the income statement upon initial recognition.

More detail on the Group’s accounting for financial instruments is included in the Group’s accounting policies. The Group’s approach to managing risks in relation to financial instruments is described in note 19.

 

F-42


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

15. Other financial assets

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

At beginning of year

     54        94   

Exchange differences

     3        6   

Acquisition of investments

     101        12   

Disposal of investments

     (15     (58
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At end of year

     143        54   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other financial assets comprise listed securities of £nil (2014: £9m) and unlisted securities of £143m (2014: £45m).

Acquisition of investments includes the remaining 11% stake in The Economist, see note 31 for further information.

16. Derivative financial instruments

The Group’s approach to the management of financial risks is set out in note 19. The Group’s outstanding derivative financial instruments are as follows:

 

     2015     2014  

All figures in £ millions

   Gross  notional
amounts
     Assets      Liabilities     Gross notional
amounts
     Assets      Liabilities  

Interest rate derivatives – in a fair value hedge relationship

     1,952         70         (10     1,607         84         (5

Interest rate derivatives – not in a hedge relationship

     848                 (6     673                 (7

Cross-currency rate derivatives – in a hedge relationship

     1,879         10         (119     889         24         (36

Cross-currency rate derivatives – not in a hedge relationship

     120         30         (30     451         6         (26
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     4,799         110         (165     3,620         114         (74
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Analysed as expiring:

                

In less than one year

     324         32         (29     200         24         (1

Later than one year and not later than five years

     1,255         44         (4     1,386         67         (8

Later than five years

     3,220         34         (132     2,034         23         (65
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     4,799         110         (165     3,620         114         (74
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The carrying value of the above derivative financial instruments equals their fair value. Fair values are determined by using market data and the use of established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and option valuation models.

At the end of 2015, the currency split of the mark-to-market values of rate derivatives, including the exchange of principal on cross-currency rate derivatives, was US dollar £(917)m, sterling £102m, euro £759m and Brazilian real £nil (2014: US dollar £(607)m, sterling £214m, euro £430m and Brazilian real £4m).

The fixed interest rates on outstanding rate derivative contracts at the end of 2015 range from 1.10% to 14.48% (2014: 1.10% to 14.48%) and the floating rates are based on LIBOR in US dollar, euro and sterling.

 

F-43


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

16. Derivative financial instruments continued

 

The Group’s portfolio of rate derivatives is diversified by maturity, counterparty and type. Natural offsets between transactions within the portfolio and the designation of certain derivatives as hedges significantly reduce the risk of income statement volatility. The sensitivity of the portfolio to changes in market rates is set out in note 19.

Derivative financial assets and liabilities subject to offsetting arrangements are as follows:

 

       2015     2014  

All figures in £ millions

   Gross
derivative
assets
     Gross
derivative
liabilities
    Net  derivative
assets/
liabilities
    Gross
derivative
assets
     Gross
derivative
liabilities
    Net derivative
assets/
liabilities
 

Counterparties in an asset position

     50         (22     28        94         (28     66   

Counterparties in a liability position

     60         (143     (83     20         (46     (26
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total as presented in the balance sheet

     110         (165     (55     114         (74     40   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

All of the Group’s derivative financial instruments are subject to enforceable netting arrangements with individual counterparties, allowing net settlement in the event of default of either party. Offset arrangements in respect of cash balances are shown in note 17.

Counterparty exposure from all derivatives is managed, together with that from deposits and bank account balances, within credit limits that reflect published credit ratings and by reference to other market measures (e.g. market prices for credit default swaps) to ensure that there is no significant risk to any one counterparty. No single derivative transaction had a market value (positive or negative) at the balance sheet date that exceeded 3% of the Group’s consolidated total equity.

In accordance with IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’ the Group has reviewed all of its material contracts for embedded derivatives that are required to be separately accounted for if they do not meet certain requirements, and has concluded that there are no material embedded derivatives.

17. Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts)

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Cash at bank and in hand

     627         483   

Short-term bank deposits

     1,076         47   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,703         530   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Short-term bank deposits are invested with banks and earn interest at the prevailing short-term deposit rates.

At the end of 2015 the currency split of cash and cash equivalents was US dollar 23% (2014: 18%), sterling 57% (2014: 13%), euro 2% (2014: 3%), renminbi 8% (2014: 28%) and other 10% (2014: 38%).

Cash and cash equivalents have fair values that approximate to their carrying value due to their short-term nature. Cash and cash equivalents include the following for the purpose of the cash flow statement:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Cash and cash equivalents – continuing operations

     1,703        530   

Bank overdrafts – continuing operations

     (32     (19
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     1,671        511   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-44


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

17. Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts) continued

 

The Group has the following cash pooling arrangements in US dollars, sterling, euro and canadian dollars where both the company and the bank have a legal right of offset.

 

       2015      2014  

All figures in £ millions

   Offset
asset
     Offset
liability
    Net
offset
asset
     Offset
asset
     Offset
liability
    Net
offset
asset
 

US dollars

     446         (442         4         267         (266     1   

Sterling

     290         (289     1         430         (427     3   

Euro

     5         (3     2         9         (8     1   

Canadian dollars

     36         (10     26         10                10   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total for continuing operations as presented in the balance sheet

          33              15   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Offset arrangements in respect of derivatives are shown in note 16.

18. Financial liabilities – borrowings

The Group’s current and non-current borrowings are as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Non-current

     

4.0% US dollar notes 2016 (nominal amount $350m)

             231   

6.25% Global dollar bonds 2018 (nominal amount $550m)

     403         390   

4.625% US dollar notes 2018 (nominal amount $300m)

     218         210   

1.875% Euro notes 2021 (nominal amount €500m)

     386         408   

3.75% US dollar notes 2022 (nominal amount $500m)

     342         319   

3.25% US dollar notes 2023 (nominal amount $500m)

     336         315   

1.375% Euro notes 2025 (nominal amount €500m)

     359           

Bank loans and overdrafts

             5   

Finance lease liabilities

     4         5   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     2,048         1,883   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current

     

Due within one year or on-demand:

     

6.0% Sterling bonds 2015 (nominal amount £300m)

             300   

4.0% US dollar notes 2016 (nominal amount $350m)

     240           

Bank loans and overdrafts

     38         37   

Finance lease liabilities

     4         5   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     282         342   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total borrowings

     2,330         2,225   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Included in the non-current borrowings above is £15m of accrued interest (2014: £13m). Included in the current borrowings above is £1m of accrued interest (2014: £1m).

 

F-45


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Financial liabilities – borrowings continued

 

The maturity of the Group’s non-current borrowing is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Between one and two years

     3         239   

Between two and five years

     622         602   

Over five years

     1,423         1,042   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     2,048         1,883   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The carrying amounts and market values of borrowings are as follows:

 

     2015      2014  

All figures in £ millions

   Effective
interest rate
    Carrying
value
     Market
value
     Effective
interest rate
    Carrying
value
     Market
value
 

Bank loans and overdrafts

     n/a        38         38         n/a        42         42   

6.0% Sterling bonds 2015

                            6.27     300         314   

4.0% US dollar notes 2016

     4.26     240         240         4.26     231         233   

6.25% Global dollar bonds 2018

     6.46     403         405         6.46     390         397   

4.625% US dollar notes 2018

     4.69     218         213         4.69     210         205   

1.875% Euro notes 2021

     2.04     386         380         2.04     408         407   

3.75% US dollar notes 2022

     3.94     342         335         3.94     319         327   

3.25% US dollar notes 2023

     3.36     336         322         3.36     315         314   

1.375% Euro notes 2025

     1.44     359         350         n/a                  

Finance lease liabilities

     n/a        8         8         n/a        10         10   
    

 

 

    

 

 

      

 

 

    

 

 

 
       2,330         2,291           2,225         2,249   
    

 

 

    

 

 

      

 

 

    

 

 

 

The market values stated above are based on clean market prices at the year end or, where these are not available, on the quoted market prices of comparable debt issued by other companies. The effective interest rates above relate to the underlying debt instruments.

The carrying amounts of the Group’s borrowings are denominated in the following currencies:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

US dollar

     1,563         1,491   

Sterling

     1         303   

Euro

     759         408   

Other

     7         23   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     2,330         2,225   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group has the following undrawn capacity on its committed borrowing facilities as at 31 December:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Floating rate

     

– expiring within one year

               

– expiring beyond one year

     1,187         1,122   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,187         1,122   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-46


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Financial liabilities – borrowings continued

 

In addition to the above facilities, there are a number of short-term facilities that are utilised in the normal course of business.

All of the Group’s borrowings are unsecured. In respect of finance lease obligations, the rights to the leased asset revert to the lessor in the event of default.

The maturity of the Group’s finance lease obligations is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Finance lease liabilities – minimum lease payments

     

Not later than one year

     4         5   

Later than one year and not later than two years

     3         3   

Later than two years and not later than three years

     1         1   

Later than three years and not later than four years

             1   

Later than four years and not later than five years

               

Later than five years

               

Future finance charges on finance leases

               
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Present value of finance lease liabilities

     8         10   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The present value of finance lease liabilities is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Not later than one year

     4         5   

Later than one year and not later than five years

     4         5   

Later than five years

               
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     8         10   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s lease obligations approximate their fair value.

19. Financial risk management

The Group’s approach to the management of financial risks together with sensitivity analyses of its financial instruments is set out below.

Treasury policy

The Group holds financial instruments for two principal purposes: to finance its operations and to manage the interest rate and currency risks arising from its operations and its sources of finance. The Group finances its operations by a mixture of cash flows from operations, short-term borrowings from banks and commercial paper markets, and longer-term loans from banks and capital markets. The Group borrows principally in US dollars, euros and sterling, at both floating and fixed rates of interest, using derivative financial instruments (‘derivatives’), where appropriate, to generate the desired currency profile and interest rate basis. The derivatives used for this purpose are principally rate swaps, rate caps and collars, currency rate swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts. The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are interest rate risk, liquidity and refinancing risk, counterparty risk and foreign currency risk. These risks are managed by the chief financial officer under policies approved by the board, which are summarised in this note. All the key treasury policies remained unchanged throughout the year, except for revisions to the Group’s bank counterparty risk limits and clarifications in respect of the Group’s approach to compliance with laws and regulations.

 

F-47


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

Treasury policy continued

 

The audit committee receives regular reports on the Group’s treasury activities, policies and procedures. The treasury department is not a profit centre and its activities are subject to regular internal audit.

Liquidity and refinancing risk management

The Group’s objective is to secure continuity of funding at a reasonable cost. To do this it seeks to arrange committed funding for a variety of maturities from a diversity of sources. The Group’s policy objective is to maintain the weighted average maturity of its core gross borrowings (treating short-term advances as having the final maturity of the facilities available to refinance them) to be between three and ten years. At the end of 2015 the average maturity of gross borrowings was 5.1 years (2014: 4.7 years) of which bonds represented 98% (2014: 97%) of these borrowings.

The Group believes that ready access to different funding markets also helps to reduce its liquidity risk, and that published credit ratings and published financial policies improve such access. At the year end, the long-term ratings were Baa1 from Moody’s and BBB+ from Standard & Poor’s, and the short-term ratings were P2 and A2 respectively. All of the Group’s credit ratings remained unchanged during the year, although in October 2015, Standard & Poor’s changed the outlook on their long-term rating from ‘Stable’ to ‘Negative’. In February 2016, Moody’s changed Pearson’s long-term rating from Baa1 (negative) to Baa2 (stable). In March 2016, Standard & Poor’s changed Pearson’s long-term rating from BBB+ (Negative) to BBB (Stable). The short-term ratings from Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s remain unchanged at P2 and A2. The Group’s policy is to strive to maintain a rating of Baa1/BBB+ over the long term. The Group also uses a range of ratios to monitor and manage its finances internally. These include interest cover, net debt to operating profit and cash flow to debt measures. The Group also maintains undrawn committed borrowing facilities. At the end of 2015 the committed facilities amounted to $1,750m (£1,187m) and their weighted average maturity was 4.6 years.

Interest rate risk management

The Group’s exposure to interest rate fluctuations on its borrowings is managed by borrowing on a fixed rate basis and by entering into rate swaps, rate caps and forward rate agreements. The Group also aims to avoid undue exposure to a single interest rate setting. Reflecting this objective, the Group has predominantly swapped its fixed rate bond issues to floating rate at their launch. This creates a group of derivatives, under which the Group is a receiver of fixed rates and a payer of floating rates.

The Group’s policy objective has continued to be to set a target proportion of its forecast borrowings (taken at the year end, with cash netted against floating rate debt and before certain adjustments for IAS 39) to be hedged (i.e. fixed or capped at the year end) over the next four years, subject to a maximum of 65% and a minimum that starts at 40% and falls by 10% at each year end. At the end of 2015 the fixed to floating hedging ratio, on the above basis, was approximately 90%:10%. The higher than policy ratio is a result of higher cash balances due to divestments in 2015. Our policy is to not close out contracts where we anticipate reverting to compliance with the policy over the longer term. A simultaneous 1% change on 1 January 2016 in the Group’s variable interest rates in US dollar and sterling, taking into account forecast seasonal debt, would have a £6m effect on profit before tax.

The policy described above creates a further group of derivatives, under which the Group is a payer of fixed rates and a receiver of floating rates. The Group’s accounting objective in relation to its use of interest rate derivatives is to minimise the impact on the income statement of changes in the mark-to-market value of its derivative portfolio as a whole. It uses duration calculations to estimate the sensitivity of the derivatives to movements in

 

F-48


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

Interest rate risk management continued

 

market rates. The Group also identifies which derivatives are eligible for fair value hedge accounting (which reduces the income statement impact of changes in the market value of a derivative). The Group then balances the total portfolio between hedge-accounted and pooled segments, so that the expected movement on the pooled segment is minimal.

Financial counterparty risk management

Counterparty credit limits, which take published credit rating and other factors into account, are set to cover the Group’s total aggregate exposure to a single financial institution. The limits applicable to published credit ratings bands are approved by the chief financial officer within guidelines approved by the board. Exposures and limits applicable to each financial institution are reviewed on a regular basis.

Foreign currency risk management

Although the Group is based in the UK, it has its most significant investment in overseas operations. The most significant currency for the Group is the US dollar. The Group’s policy on routine transactional conversions between currencies (for example, the collection of receivables, and the settlement of payables or interest) remains that these should be transacted at the relevant spot exchange rate. The majority of the Group’s operations are domestic within their country of operation. No unremitted profits are hedged with foreign exchange contracts, as the company judges it inappropriate to hedge non cash flow translational exposure with cash flow instruments. However, the Group does seek to create a natural hedge of this exposure through its policy of aligning approximately the currency composition of its core net borrowings (after the impact of cross-currency rate derivatives) with its forecast operating profit before depreciation and amortisation. This policy aims to soften the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on consolidated interest cover and earnings. The policy above applies only to currencies that account for more than 15% of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortisation, which currently is only the US dollar. The Group still borrows small amounts in other currencies, typically for seasonal working capital needs. The Group policy does not require existing currency debt to be terminated to match declines in that currency’s share of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortisation. In addition, currencies that account for less than 15% of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortisation can be included in the above hedging process at the request of the chief financial officer.

Included within year end net debt, the net borrowings/(cash) in the hedging currencies above (taking into account the effect of cross-currency swaps) were: US dollar £1,345m and sterling £(385)m.

Use of currency debt and currency derivatives

The Group uses both currency denominated debt and derivative instruments to implement the above policy.

Its intention is that gains/losses on the derivatives and debt offset the losses/gains on the foreign currency assets and income. Each quarter the value of hedging instruments is monitored against the assets in the relevant currency and, where practical, a decision is made whether to treat the debt or derivative as a net investment hedge (permitting foreign exchange movements on it to be taken to reserves) for the purposes of IAS 39.

 

F-49


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

 

Analysis of Group debt, including the impact of derivatives

The following tables analyse the Group’s sources of funding and the impact of derivatives on the Group’s debt instruments.

The Group’s net debt position is set out below:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Cash and cash equivalents

     1,703        530   

Marketable securities

     28        16   

Derivative financial instruments

     (55     40   

Bank loans, overdrafts and loan notes

     (38     (42

Bonds

     (2,284     (2,173

Finance lease liabilities

     (8     (10
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net debt

     (654     (1,639
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The split of net debt between fixed and floating rate, stated after the impact of rate derivatives, is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Fixed rate

     577         597   

Floating rate

     77         1,042   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     654         1,639   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Gross borrowings, after the impact of cross-currency rate derivatives, analysed by currency are as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

US dollar

     2,308         2,099   

Sterling

     1         104   

Other

     21         22   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     2,330         2,225   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

As at 31 December 2015 the exposure of the borrowings of the Group to interest rate changes when the borrowings re-price is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   Less than
one year
     One to
five years
    More than
five years
    Total  

Re-pricing profile of borrowings

     282         625        1,423        2,330   

Effect of rate derivatives

     1,449         (33     (1,416       
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     1,731         592        7        2,330   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-50


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

Analysis of Group debt, including the impact of derivatives continued

 

The maturity of contracted cash flows associated with the Group’s financial liabilities is as follows:

 

     2015  

All figures in £ millions

   USD     GBP     Other     Total  

Not later than one year

     470        58        73        601   

Later than one year and not later than five years

     705                      705   

Later than five years

     1,578                      1,578   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     2,753        58        73        2,884   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Analysed as:

        

Bonds

     1,745               829        2,574   

Rate derivatives – inflows

     (335     (858     (919     (2,112

Rate derivatives – outflows

     1,155        858        90        2,103   

Trade payables

     188        58        73        319   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     2,753        58        73        2,884   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     2014  

All figures in £ millions

   USD     GBP     Other     Total  

Not later than one year

     398        160        99        657   

Later than one year and not later than five years

     877                      877   

Later than five years

     1,126                      1,126   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     2,401        160        99        2,660   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Analysed as:

        

Bonds

     1,711        318        439        2,468   

Rate derivatives – inflows

     (379     (656     (537     (1,572

Rate derivatives – outflows

     893        444        98        1,435   

Trade payables

     176        54        99        329   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     2,401        160        99        2,660   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

All cash flow projections shown above are on an undiscounted basis. Any cash flows based on a floating rate are calculated using interest rates as set at the date of the last rate reset. Where this is not possible, floating rates are based on interest rates prevailing at 31 December in the relevant year. All derivative amounts are shown gross, although the Group net settles these amounts wherever possible.

Any amounts drawn under revolving credit facilities and commercial paper are assumed to mature at the maturity date of the relevant facility, with interest calculated as payable in each calendar year up to and including the date of maturity of the facility.

 

F-51


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

 

Financial instruments – fair value measurement

The following table provides an analysis of those financial instruments that are measured subsequently to initial recognition at fair value, grouped into levels 1 to 3, based on the degree to which the fair value is observable:

Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs, other than quoted prices included within level 1, that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (as prices) or indirectly (derived from prices); and

Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

 

     2015     2014  

All figures in £ millions

   Level 1      Level 2     Level 3      Total     Level 1      Level 2     Level 3      Total  

Financial assets at fair value

                    

Derivative financial assets

             110                110                114                114   

Marketable securities

             28                28                16                16   

Available for sale financial assets

                    

Investments in listed securities

                                           9                9   

Investments in unlisted securities

                    143         143                       45         45   

Financial liabilities at fair value

                    

Derivative financial liabilities

             (165             (165             (74             (74
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

             (27     143         116                65        45         110   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

The following table analyses the movements in level 3 fair value measurements:

 

       2015     2014  

All figures in £ millions

   Investments
in unlisted
securities
    Investments
in unlisted
securities
 

At beginning of year

     45        94   

Exchange differences

     3        6   

Additions

     101        3   

Fair value movements

              

Disposals

     (6     (58
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At end of year

     143        45   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The fair value of the 11% stake in The Economist is valued by reference to the disposal transaction terms. The fair value of the remaining investments in unlisted securities is determined by reference to the financial performance of the underlying asset and amounts realised on the sale of similar assets.

 

F-52


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

 

Financial instruments – sensitivity analysis

As at 31 December 2015 the sensitivity of the carrying value of the Group’s financial instruments to fluctuations in interest rates and exchange rates is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

  Carrying value     Impact of 1%
increase in
interest rates
    Impact of 1%
decrease in
interest rates
    Impact of 10%
strengthening in
sterling
    Impact of 10%
weakening in
sterling
 

Investments in listed securities

                                  

Investments in unlisted securities

    143                      (4     5   

Cash and cash equivalents

    1,703                      (67     82   

Marketable securities

    28                               

Derivative financial instruments

    (55     (93     99        14        (18

Bonds

    (2,284     97        (103     208        (254

Other borrowings

    (46                   5        (6

Other net financial assets

    644                      (57     68   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial instruments

    133        4        (4     99        (123
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The table shows the sensitivities of the fair values of each class of financial instruments to an isolated change in either interest rates or foreign exchange rates. The class ‘Other net financial assets’ comprises trade receivables less trade payables.

The sensitivities of derivative instruments are calculated using established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and option valuation models. Where modelling an interest rate decrease of 1% led to negative interest rates, these points on the yield curve were adjusted to 0%. A large proportion of the movements shown above would impact equity rather than the income statement, due to the location and functional currency of the entities in which they arise and the availability of net investment hedge treatment. The changes in valuations are estimates of the impact of changes in market variables and are not a prediction of future events or anticipated gains or losses.

20. Intangible assets – Pre-publication

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Cost

    

At beginning of year

     2,138        1,933   

Exchange differences

     66        80   

Additions

     347        358   

Disposal through business disposal

     (90       

Disposals

     (260     (234

Acquisition through business combination

            1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At end of year

     2,201        2,138   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Amortisation

    

At beginning of year

     (1,318     (1,216

Exchange differences

     (47     (60

Charge for the year

     (281     (292

Disposal through business disposal

     26          

Disposals

     260        234   

Transfer to receivables

            16   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At end of year

     (1,360     (1,318
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amounts

    
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At end of year

     841        820   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-53


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

20. Intangible assets – Pre-publication continued

 

Included in the above are pre-publication assets amounting to £580m (2014: £546m) which will be realised in more than one year.

Amortisation is included in the income statement in cost of goods sold. There was no amortisation within discontinued operations in either year.

Disposal through business disposal amounts relate to the disposal of PowerSchool, see note 31 for further information.

21. Inventories

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Raw materials

     8         9   

Work in progress

     8         10   

Finished goods

     195         205   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     211         224   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The cost of inventories relating to continuing operations recognised as an expense and included in the income statement in cost of goods sold amounted to £331m (2014: £379m). In 2015, £33m (2014: £38m) of inventory provisions was charged in the income statement. None of the inventory is pledged as security.

22. Trade and other receivables

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Current

     

Trade receivables

     938         963   

Royalty advances

     20         18   

Prepayments and accrued income

     118         107   

Other receivables

     208         222   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,284         1,310   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Non-current

     

Trade receivables

     25         26   

Royalty advances

     13         8   

Prepayments and accrued income

     43         30   

Other receivables

     34         18   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     115         82   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Trade receivables are stated at fair value, net of provisions for bad and doubtful debts and anticipated future sales returns. The movements on the provision for bad and doubtful debts are as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

At beginning of year

     (73     (58

Exchange differences

     3          

Income statement movements

     (31     (21

Utilised

     32        17   

Acquisition through business combination

            (11

Disposal through business disposal

     5          
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At end of year

     (64     (73
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-54


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

22. Trade and other receivables continued

 

Concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited due to the Group’s large number of customers, who are internationally dispersed.

The ageing of the Group’s trade receivables is as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Within due date

     754        869   

Up to three months past due date

     253        203   

Three to six months past due date

     58        40   

Six to nine months past due date

     19        15   

Nine to 12 months past due date

     13        15   

More than 12 months past due date

     16        11   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total trade receivables

     1,113        1,153   

Less: provision for sales returns

     (150     (164
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net trade receivables

     963        989   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Group reviews its bad debt provision at least twice a year following a detailed review of receivable balances and historical payment profiles. Management believes all the remaining receivable balances are fully recoverable.

23. Provisions for other liabilities and charges

 

All figures in £ millions

   Deferred
consideration
    Property     Disposals
and closures
     Legal
and other
    Total  

At 1 January 2015

     57        7        20         51        135   

Exchange differences

     3                       (4     (1

Charged to income statement

                           12        12   

Released to income statement

     (1                    (4     (5

Disposal through business disposal

            (1             (1     (2

Utilised

     (6                    (20     (26
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

     53        6        20         34        113   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Analysis of provisions:

 

     2015  

All figures in £ millions

   Deferred
consideration
     Property      Disposals
and closures
     Legal
and other
     Total  

Current

     5         3         15         19         42   

Non-current

     48         3         5         15         71   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     53         6         20         34         113   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     2014  

Current

     7         4         20         22         53   

Non-current

     50         3                 29         82   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     57         7         20         51         135   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-55


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

23. Provisions for other liabilities and charges continued

 

Deferred consideration primarily relates to the formation of a venture in a North America business in 2011. Disposals and closures include liabilities related to the disposal of Penguin. Legal and other includes legal claims, contract disputes and potential contract losses.

24. Trade and other liabilities

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Trade payables

     319         329   

Social security and other taxes

     22         21   

Accruals

     371         501   

Deferred income

     766         801   

Interest payable

     19         28   

Other liabilities

     249         231   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,746         1,911   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Less: non-current portion

     

Accruals

     20         22   

Deferred income

     262         201   

Interest payable

             19   

Other liabilities

     74         68   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     356         310   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current portion

     1,390         1,601   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The carrying value of the Group’s trade and other liabilities approximates its fair value.

The deferred income balance comprises principally multi-year obligations to deliver workbooks to adoption customers in school businesses; advance payments in assessment, testing and training businesses; subscription income in school and college businesses; and obligations to deliver digital content in future periods.

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations

Background

The Group operates a number of defined benefit and defined contribution retirement plans throughout the world.

The largest plan is the Pearson Group Pension Plan (UK Group plan) in the UK, which is sectionalised to provide both defined benefit and defined contribution pension benefits. The defined benefit section was closed to new members from 1 November 2006. The defined contribution section, opened in 2003, is open to new and existing employees. Finally, there is a separate section within the UK Group plan set up for auto-enrolment. The defined benefit section of the UK Group plan is a final salary pension plan which provides benefits to members in the form of a guaranteed level of pension payable for life. The level of benefits depends on the length of service and final pensionable pay. The UK Group plan is funded with benefit payments from trustee administered funds. The UK Group plan is administered in accordance with the Trust Deed and Rules in the interests of its beneficiaries by Pearson Group Pension Trustee Limited.

 

F-56


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Background continued

 

At 31 December 2015 the UK Group plan has approximately 25,000 members, analysed in the following table:

 

All figures in %

   Active      Deferred      Pensioners      Total  

Defined benefit

     1         27         34         62   

Defined contribution

     14         24                 38   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     15         51         34         100   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The other major defined benefit plans are based in the US. These are also final salary pension plans which provide benefits to members in the form of a guaranteed pension payable for life, with the level of benefits dependent on length of service and final pensionable pay. The majority of the US plans are funded.

The Group also has several post-retirement medical benefit plans (PRMBs), principally in the US. PRMBs are unfunded but are accounted for and valued similarly to defined benefit pension plans.

The defined benefit schemes expose the Group to actuarial risks, such as life expectancy, inflation risks, and investment risk including asset volatility and changes in bond yields. The Group is not exposed to any unusual, entity specific or plan specific risks.

Assumptions

The principal assumptions used for the UK Group plan and the US PRMB are shown below. Weighted average assumptions have been shown for the other plans, which primarily relate to US pension plans.

 

    2015     2014     2013  

All figures in %

  UK Group
plan
    Other
plans
    PRMB     UK Group
plan
    Other
plans
    PRMB     UK Group
plan
    Other
plans
    PRMB  

Inflation

    3.1        2.5        2.5        3.0        2.5        2.5        3.4        2.5        2.5   

Rate used to discount plan liabilities

    3.7        4.0        4.0        3.6        3.7        3.7        4.4        4.4        4.4   

Expected rate of increase in salaries

    3.6        3.0        3.0        3.5        3.9        4.0        3.9        3.9        4.0   

Expected rate of increase for pensions in payment and deferred pensions

    1.9 to 5.10                      1.9 to 5.05                      2.3 to 5.1                 

Initial rate of increase in healthcare rate

                  7.0                      7.0                      7.5   

Ultimate rate of increase in healthcare rate

                  5.0                      5.0                      5.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The UK discount rate is based on corporate bond yields adjusted to reflect the duration of liabilities. The US discount rate is set by reference to a US bond portfolio matching model.

The inflation rate for the UK Group plan of 3.1% reflects the RPI rate. In line with changes to legislation in 2010, certain benefits have been calculated with reference to CPI as the inflationary measure and in these instances a rate of 2.1% has been used.

The expected rate of increase in salaries has been set at 3.6% for 2015 with a short-term assumption of 2.0% for three years.

For the UK plan, the mortality base table assumptions have been derived from the SAPS ‘all pensioners’ tables for males and the SAPS ‘normal health pensioners’ tables for females, adjusted to reflect the observed experience of the plan, with CMI model improvement factors. A 1.5% long-term rate improvement on the CMI model is applied for both males and females.

 

F-57


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Assumptions continued

 

For the US plans, the mortality table (RP – 2014) and 2014 Improvement scale (MP – 2014) with no adjustments have been adopted from 2014, reflecting the mortality assumption most prevalent in the US.

Using the above tables, the remaining average life expectancy in years of a pensioner retiring at age 65 on the balance sheet date for the UK Group plan and US plans is as follows:

 

     UK      US  

All figures in years

   2015      2014      2015      2014  

Male

     23.5         24.4         21.2         21.6   

Female

     25.6         24.5         23.2         23.8   

The remaining average life expectancy in years of a pensioner retiring at age 65, 20 years after the balance sheet date, for the UK and US Group plans is as follows:

 

     UK      US  

All figures in years

   2015      2014      2015      2014  

Male

     25.5         26.6         22.9         23.3   

Female

     27.8         26.4         24.9         25.5   

Although the Group anticipates that plan surpluses will be utilised during the life of the plan to address member benefits, the Group recognises its pension surplus in full in respect of the UK Group plan on the basis that it is management’s judgement that there are no substantive restrictions on the return of residual plan assets in the event of a winding up of the plan after all member obligations have been met.

Financial statement information

The amounts recognised in the income statement are as follows:

 

     2015  

All figures in £ millions

   UK Group
plan
    Defined
benefit  other
    Sub-total     Defined
contribution
     PRMB      Total  

Current service cost

     20        2        22        74                 96   

Curtailments

     (3            (3                     (3

Administration expenses

     5               5                        5   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total operating expense

     22        2        24        74                 98   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Interest on plan assets

     (98     (5     (103                     (103

Interest on plan liabilities

     90        7        97                2         99   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net finance (income)/expense

     (8     2        (6             2         (4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net income statement charge

     14        4        18        74         2         94   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-58


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Financial statement information continued

 

     2014  

All figures in £ millions

   UK Group
plan
    Defined
benefit other
    Sub-total     Defined
contribution
     PRMB     Total  

Current service cost

     20        2        22        69         2        93   

Curtailments

     (5            (5             (13     (18

Administration expenses

     4               4                       4   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expense

     19        2        21        69         (11     79   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest on plan assets

     (103     (7     (110                    (110

Interest on plan liabilities

     98        8        106                3        109   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net finance (income)/expense

     (5     1        (4             3        (1
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income statement charge/(income)

     14        3        17        69         (8     78   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

       2013  

All figures in £ millions

   UK Group
plan
    Defined
benefit other
    Sub-total     Defined
contribution
     PRMB     Total  

Current service cost

     22        3        25        72         4        101   

Curtailments

                                  (4     (4

Administration expenses

     4               4                       4   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expense

     26        3        29        72                101   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest on plan assets

     (95     (6     (101                    (101

Interest on plan liabilities

     94        7        101                3        104   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net finance (income)/expense

     (1)        1                       3        3   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income statement charge

     25        4        29        72         3        104   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included within the 2015 results are discontinued operations consisting of a £5m charge (2014: £nil, 2013: £7m) relating to defined benefit schemes and a £8m charge (2014: £8m charge, 2013: £14m) relating to defined contribution schemes.

The amounts recognised in the balance sheet are as follows:

 

    2015     2014  

All figures in £ millions

  UK Group
plan
    Other
funded
plans
    Other
unfunded
plans
    Total     UK Group
plan
    Other
funded
plans
    Other
Unfunded
plans
    Total  

Fair value of plan assets

    2,803        135               2,938        2,714        164               2,878   

Present value of defined benefit obligation

    (2,466     (157     (18     (2,641     (2,524     (196     (23     (2,743
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net pension asset/(liability)

    337        (22     (18     297        190        (32     (23     135   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other post-retirement medical benefit obligation

          (76           (81

Other pension accruals

          (23           (27
       

 

 

         

 

 

 

Net retirement benefit asset

          198              27   
       

 

 

         

 

 

 

Analysed as:

               

Retirement benefit assets

          337              190   

Retirement benefit obligations

          (139           (163
       

 

 

         

 

 

 

 

F-59


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Financial statement information continued

 

The following gains/(losses) have been recognised in other comprehensive income:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014     2013  

Amounts recognised for defined benefit plans

     104         36        70   

Amounts recognised for post-retirement medical benefit plans

     6         (13     9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total recognised in year

     110         23        79   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

The fair value of plan assets comprises the following:

 

     2015      2014  

All figures in %

   UK Group
plan
     Other
funded
plans
     Total      UK Group
plan
     Other
funded
plans
     Total  

Equities

     12         2         14         26         2         28   

Bonds

     8         2         10         42         3         45   

Property

     9                 9         9                 9   

Qualifying investment fund

     50                 50                           

Other

     17                 17         17         1         18   

The plan assets do not include any of the Group’s own financial instruments, or any property occupied by the Group.

The table below further disaggregates the UK Group plan assets into additional categories and those assets which have a quoted market price in an active market and those that do not:

 

     2015      2014  

All figures in %

   Quoted market
price
     No quoted
market price
     Quoted
market price
     No quoted
market price
 

UK equities

             1         5         1   

Non-UK equities

     11         2         20         2   

Fixed-interest securities

     6                 19           

Index-linked securities

     4                 26           

Property

             9                 9   

Qualifying investment fund

     50                           

Other

             17                 18   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     71         29         70         30   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The liquidity profile of the UK Group plan assets is as follows:

 

All figures in %

   2015      2014  

Liquid – call <1 month

     73         72   

Less liquid – call 1-3 months

     2         2   

Liquid – call >3 months

     25         26   

 

F-60


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Financial statement information continued

 

Changes in the values of plan assets and liabilities of the retirement benefit plans are as follows:

 

       2015     2014  

All figures in £ millions

   UK Group
plan
    Other
plans
    Total     UK Group
plan
    Other
plans
    Total  

Fair value of plan assets

            

Opening fair value of plan assets

     2,714        164        2,878        2,353        156        2,509   

Exchange differences

            2        2               4        4   

Interest on plan assets

     98        5        103        103        7        110   

Return on plans assets excluding interest

     (8     (4     (12     286        9        295   

Contributions by employer

     72        5        77        62        4        66   

Contributions by employee

     2               2        2               2   

Benefits paid

     (95     (17     (112     (92     (16     (108

Transfer

     20        (20                            
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing fair value of plan assets

     2,803        135        2,938        2,714        164        2,878   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Present value of defined benefit obligation

            

Opening defined benefit obligation

     (2,524     (219     (2,743     (2,267     (191     (2,458

Exchange differences

            (3     (3            (5     (5

Current service cost

     (20     (2     (22     (20     (2     (22

Administration expenses

     (5            (5     (4            (4

Curtailments

     3               3        5               5   

Interest cost

     (90     (7     (97     (98     (8     (106

Actuarial gains/(losses) – experience

     107        2        109        11        (1     10   

Actuarial gains/(losses) – demographic

     (33     1        (32            (8     (8

Actuarial gains/(losses) – financial

     33        6        39        (241     (20     (261

Contributions by employee

     (2            (2     (2            (2

Transfer

     (30     30                               

Benefits paid

     95        17        112        92        16        108   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing defined benefit obligation

     (2,466     (175     (2,641     (2,524     (219     (2,743
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The weighted average duration of the defined benefit obligation is 17.1 years for the UK and 8.7 years for the US.

Changes in the value of the US PRMB are as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014  

Opening defined benefit obligation

     (81     (77

Exchange differences

     (3     (4

Current service cost

            (2

Curtailments

            13   

Interest cost

     (2     (3

Actuarial gains/(losses) – experience

     2          

Actuarial gains/(losses) – demographic

     2        (7

Actuarial gains/(losses) – financial

     2        (6

Benefits paid

     4        5   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing defined benefit obligation

     (76     (81
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-61


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Funding

The UK Group plan is self-administered with the plan’s assets being held independently of the Group in trust. The trustee of the plan is required to act in the best interest of the plan’s beneficiaries. The most recent triennial actuarial valuation for funding purposes was completed as at 1 January 2015 and this valuation revealed a technical provisions funding shortfall of £27m which was eliminated by contributions paid during 2015.

As a consequence of the disposal of the FT Group, an agreement has been made between Pearson and the Plan Trustee to accelerate the funding of the plan so that it becomes fully funded on a ‘self-sufficiency’ basis in the near future. This is a much higher level of funding than technical provisions. As a result the plan expects to be able to provide benefits (in accordance with the plan rules) with a very low level of reliance on future funding from Pearson. A commitment has also been made to maintain that level of funding in future years. In addition to a substantial company contribution following the Penguin Random House merger (to be paid before July 2017), an upfront contribution will be made to the plan following the disposal of the FT Group. This is expected to be approximately £90m and there will be further annual contributions to eliminate any remaining shortfall in the self-sufficiency funding.

At 31 December 2015, assets of the plan are divided into two elements: matching assets, which are assets that produce cash flows that can be expected to match the cash flows for a proportion of the membership, and include a Liability Driven investment mandate (UK Bonds, interest rate/inflation swaps and other derivative instruments), inflation-linked property and infrastructure; and return seeking assets, which are assets invested with a longer-term horizon to generate the returns needed to provide the remaining expected cash flows for the beneficiaries, and include equities, property and alternative asset classes. During the fourth quarter of 2015 the plan’s long-term investment strategy was updated to an allocation of 84.2% Matching Assets and 15.8% Return Seeking Assets as at 31 December 2015.

Regular contributions to the plan in respect of the defined benefit sections are estimated to be £8m for 2016.

The Group expects to contribute $10m in 2016 and $10m in 2017 to its US defined benefit pension plans.

Sensitivities

The effect of a one percentage point increase and decrease in the discount rate on the defined benefit obligation and the total pension expense is as follows:

 

     2015  

All figures in £ millions

   1% increase     1% decrease  

Effect:

    

(Decrease)/increase in defined benefit obligation – UK Group plan

     (372     495   

(Decrease)/increase in defined benefit obligation – US plan

     (16     19   

The effect of members living one year more or one year less on the defined benefit obligation is as follows:

 

     2015  

All figures in £ millions

   1 year
increase
     1 year
decrease
 

Effect:

     

Increase/(decrease) in defined benefit obligation – UK Group plan

     100         (96

Increase/(decrease) in defined benefit obligation – US plan

     7         (7

 

F-62


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Sensitivities continued

 

The effect of a half percentage point increase and decrease in the inflation rate is as follows:

 

     2015  

All figures in £ millions

   0.5%
increase
     0.5%
decrease
 

Effect:

     

Increase/(decrease) in defined benefit obligation – UK Group plan

     113         (103

Increase/(decrease) in defined benefit obligation – US plan

               

The above sensitivity analyses are based on a change in an assumption while holding all other assumptions constant, although in practice this is unlikely to occur and changes in some assumptions may be correlated. When calculating these sensitivities the same method has been applied to calculate the defined benefit obligation as has been applied when calculating the liability recognised in the balance sheet. This methodology is the same as prior periods.

26. Share-based payments

The Group recognised the following charges in the income statement in respect of its equity-settled share-based payment plans:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014      2013  

Pearson plans

     26         32         37   

Share-based payment charges included in discontinued operations amounted to £3m (2014: £3m, 2013: £5m). The Group operates the following equity-settled employee option and share plans:

Worldwide Save for Shares Plan Since 1994, the Group has operated a Save-As-You-Earn plan for UK employees. In 1998, the Group introduced a Worldwide Save for Shares Plan. Under these plans, employees can save a portion of their monthly salary over periods of three or five years. At the end of this period, the employee has the option to purchase ordinary shares with the accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 80% of the market price prevailing at the time of the commencement of the employee’s participation in the plan. Options that are not exercised within six months of the end of the savings period lapse unconditionally.

Employee Stock Purchase Plan In 2000, the Group established an Employee Stock Purchase Plan which allows all employees in the US to save a portion of their monthly salary over six-month periods. At the end of the period, the employee has the option to purchase ADRs with their accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 85% of the lower of the market price prevailing at the beginning or end of the period.

Long-Term Incentive Plan This plan was first introduced in 2001, renewed in 2006 and again in 2011. The plan consists of restricted shares. The vesting of restricted shares is normally dependent on continuing service over a three to five-year period, and in the case of senior management upon the satisfaction of corporate performance targets over a three-year period. These targets may be based on market and/or non-market performance criteria. Restricted shares awarded to senior management in May 2014 and May 2015 vest dependent on relative total shareholder return, return on invested capital and earnings per share growth. Restricted shares awarded to senior management in November 2014 vest dependent on earnings per share growth. Other restricted shares awarded in 2014 and 2015 vest depending on continuing service over a three-year period.

 

F-63


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Share-based payments continued

 

The number and weighted average exercise prices of share options granted under the Group’s plans are as follows:

 

     2015      2014  
     Number of
share options
   

Weighted

average

exercise price

     Number of
share options
   

Weighted

average

exercise price

 
     000s     £      000s     £  

Outstanding at beginning of year

     3,507        8.48         2,792        8.73   

Granted during the year

     1,024        11.49         1,985        8.11   

Exercised during the year

     (578     8.78         (727     8.24   

Forfeited during the year

     (696     9.12         (538     8.76   

Expired during the year

     (7     8.85         (5     7.43   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding at end of year

     3,250        9.24         3,507        8.48   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Options exercisable at end of year

     138        8.89         43        8.24   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Options were exercised regularly throughout the year. The weighted average share price during the year was £11.86 (2014: £11.41). Early exercises arising from redundancy, retirement or death are treated as an acceleration of vesting and the Group therefore recognises in the income statement the amount that otherwise would have been recognised for services received over the remainder of the original vesting period.

The options outstanding at the end of the year have weighted average remaining contractual lives and exercise prices as follows:

 

     2015      2014  

Range of exercise prices £

   Number of
share
options
000s
     Weighted
average
contractual
life Years
     Number of
share
options
000s
     Weighted
average
contractual
life Years
 

0-5

                               

5-10

     2,361         2.08         3,507         2.68   

>10

     889         3.26                   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     3,250         2.40         3,507         2.68   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

In 2015 and 2014 options were granted under the Worldwide Save for Shares Plan. The weighted average estimated fair value for the options granted was calculated using a Black-Scholes option pricing model.

The weighted average estimated fair values and the inputs into the Black-Scholes model are as follows:

 

     2015
Weighted
average
    2014
Weighted
average
 

Fair value

   £ 1.99      £ 2.41   

Weighted average share price

   £ 13.37      £ 11.09   

Weighted average exercise price

   £ 11.49      £ 8.11   

Expected volatility

     23.00     21.27

Expected life

     3.7 years        3.9 years   

Risk-free rate

     0.90     1.3

Expected dividend yield

     4.44     4.33

Forfeiture rate

     3.2     3.4

 

F-64


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Share-based payments continued

 

The expected volatility is based on the historical volatility of the company’s share price over the previous three to seven years depending on the vesting term of the options.

The following shares were granted under restricted share arrangements:

 

     2015      2014  
     Number of
shares
000s
     Weighted
average
fair value
£
     Number of
shares
000s
     Weighted
average
fair value
£
 

Long-Term Incentive Plan

     1,942         12.27         5,875         11.44   

The fair value of shares granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan that vest unconditionally is determined using the share price at the date of grant. The number of shares expected to vest is adjusted, based on historical experience, to account for potential forfeitures. Restricted shares granted under the Annual Bonus Share Matching Plan are valued using the share price at the date of grant. Participants under both plans are entitled to dividends during the vesting period and therefore the share price is not discounted.

Restricted shares with a market performance condition were valued by an independent actuary using a Monte Carlo model. Restricted shares with a non-market performance condition were fair valued based on the share price at the date of grant. Non-market performance conditions are taken into consideration by adjusting the number of shares expected to vest based on the most likely outcome of the relevant performance criteria.

27. Share capital and share premium

 

     Number
of shares
000s
     Ordinary
shares
£m
     Share
premium
£m
 

At 1 January 2014

     818,580         205         2,568   

Issue of ordinary shares – share option schemes

     1,303                 11   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

     819,883         205         2,579   

Issue of ordinary shares – share option schemes

     1,185                 11   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

     821,068         205         2,590   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The ordinary shares have a par value of 25p per share (2014: 25p per share). All issued shares are fully paid. All shares have the same rights.

The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to continue as a going concern while maximising the return to shareholders through the optimisation of the debt and equity balance.

The capital structure of the Group consists of debt (see note 18), cash and cash equivalents (see note 17) and equity attributable to equity holders of the parent, comprising issued capital, reserves and retained earnings.

The Group reviews its capital structure on a regular basis and will balance its overall capital structure through payments of dividends, new share issues as well as the issue of new debt or the redemption of existing debt in line with the financial risk policies outlined in note 19.

 

F-65


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

28. Treasury shares

 

     Pearson plc  
     Number
of shares
000s
    £m  

At 1 January 2014

     9,282        98   

Purchase of treasury shares

     907        9   

Release of treasury shares

     (2,997     (32
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2014

     7,192        75   

Purchase of treasury shares

     1,987        23   

Release of treasury shares

     (2,474     (26
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 31 December 2015

     6,705        72   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Group holds Pearson plc shares in trust to satisfy its obligations under its restricted share plans (see note 26).

These shares, representing 0.8% (2014: 0.9%) of called-up share capital, are treated as treasury shares for accounting purposes and have a par value of 25p per share.

The nominal value of Pearson plc treasury shares amounts to £1.7m (2014: £1.8m).

At 31 December 2015 the market value of Pearson plc treasury shares was £49.3m (2014: £85.6m).

29. Other comprehensive income

 

    2015  
    Attributable to equity
holders of the company
    Non
controlling
interest
    Total  

All figures in £ millions

  Translation
reserve
    Retained
earnings
    Total      

Items that may be reclassified to the income statement

         

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations – Group

    (83            (83     (2     (85

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations – associate

    16               16               16   

Currency translation adjustment disposed – subsidiaries

    (10            (10            (10

Attributable tax

           5        5               5   

Items that are not reclassified to the income statement

         

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations – Group

           110        110               110   

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations – associate

           8        8               8   

Attributable tax

           (24     (24            (24
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive expense for the year

    (77     99        22        (2     20   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-66


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

29. Other comprehensive income continued

 

    2014  
    Attributable to equity
holders of the company
    Non
controlling
interest
    Total  

All figures in £ millions

  Translation
reserve
    Retained
earnings
    Total      

Items that may be reclassified to the income statement

         

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations – Group

    150               150               150   

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations – associate

    25               25               25   

Currency translation adjustment disposed – subsidiaries

    (2            (2            (2

Attributable tax

           (6     (6            (6

Items that are not reclassified to the income statement

         

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations – Group

           23        23               23   

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations – associate

           (15     (15            (15

Attributable tax

           (1     (1            (1
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive expense for the year

    173        1        174               174   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     2013  
     Attributable to equity holders of
the company
    Non-
controlling
Interest
    Total  

All figures in £ millions

   Translation
reserve
    Retained
earnings
    Total      

Items that may be reclassified to the income statement

          

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations – Group

     (202            (202     (4     (206

Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations – associate

     (11            (11            (11

Currency translation adjustment disposed – subsidiaries

     (18            (18            (18

Attributable tax

            6        6               6   

Items that are not reclassified to the income statement

          

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations – Group

            79        79               79   

Remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations – associate

                                   

Attributable tax

            (23     (23            (23
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive expense for the year

     (231     62        (169     (4     (173
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

30. Business combinations

There were no significant acquisitions in 2015. On 11 February 2014, the Group acquired 100% of Grupo Multi, the leading adult English language training company in Brazil. Fair values for the assets and liabilities arising from the Grupo Multi acquisition and other smaller acquisitions completed in the year are set out below.

 

F-67


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

30. Business combinations continued

 

Fair values for the assets and liabilities arising from acquisitions completed in the year are as follows:

 

          2015     2014  

All figures in £ millions

  Notes     Total
fair value
    Total
fair value
 

Property, plant and equipment

    10               2   

Intangible assets

    11        1        260   

Intangible assets – pre-publication

    20               1   

Inventories

             4   

Trade and other receivables

             36   

Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts)

             3   

Financial liabilities – borrowings

             (49

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

    23               (14

Trade and other liabilities

             (24

Current income tax liabilities

             (20
   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net assets acquired at fair value

      1        199   

Goodwill

    11               238   
   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

      1        437   
   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Satisfied by:

     

Cash

      (1     (437
   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total consideration

      (1     (437
   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The goodwill arising on these acquisitions results from cost and revenue synergies and from assets and benefits that cannot be separately recognised.

There is no goodwill arising on 2015 acquisitions. Goodwill of £240m arising on 2014 acquisitions is expected to be deductible for tax purposes.

Intangible assets acquired in 2014 have the following useful economic lives: customer lists, contracts and relationships four years; trademarks and brands 20 years, and other acquired intangibles 12 years.

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014     2013  

Cash flow on acquisitions

      

Cash – current year acquisitions

     (1     (437     (25

Deferred payments for prior year acquisitions and other items

     (6     (5     (6

Cash and cash equivalents acquired

            3        2   

Acquisition costs and other acquisition liabilities paid

     (2     (9     (19
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash outflow

     (9     (448     (48
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-68


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

31. Disposals including business closures

 

    2015     2014     2013  

All figures in £ millions

  FT Group     PowerSchool     Other     Total     Mergermarket     Penguin     Other     Total     Penguin     Other     Total  

Disposal of subsidiaries

                     

Property, plant and equipment

    (15     (2            (17     (2            (1     (3     (39     (3     (42

Intangible assets

    (46     (19     (5     (70     (12                   (12     (43            (43

Investments in joint ventures and associates

    (8                   (8                                 (22            (22

Other financial assets

                    (1            (1

Intangible assets – pre-publication

           (64            (64                                 (20     (6     (26

Inventories

    (1                   (1                                 (91     (3     (94

Trade and other receivables

    (72     (16     (3     (91     (23            (2     (25     (447     (6     (453

Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts)

    (29            (4     (33     (19            (11     (30     (34     (3     (37

Net deferred income tax (assets)/liabilities

    (2            3        1        1                      1        (22            (22

Retirement benefit obligations

    7                      7                                           4        4   

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

    2                      2        4                      4        7               7   

Trade and other liabilities

    109        35        6        150        69               12        81        224        10        234   

Current income tax liabilities

    1                      1        6                      6                        

Non-controlling interest

                                              (2     (2     3               3   

Attributable goodwill

    (50     (119     (6     (175     (156            (1     (157     (370     (6     (376

Cumulative translation adjustment

    4        6          10        2                 2        18               18   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net assets disposed

    (100     (179     (9     (288     (130            (5     (135     (837     (13     (850

Cash received

    858        222        9        1,089        375                      375               3        3   

Deferred proceeds

                                              6        6                        

Fair value of associate acquired

                    1,160               1,160   

Costs

    (47     (13     (9     (69     (1     29        (2     26        (121     (14     (135
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gain/(loss) on disposal

    711        30        (9     732        244        29        (1     272        202        (24     178   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014     2013  

Cash flow from disposals

      

Cash – current year disposals

     1,089        375        3   

Cash and cash equivalents disposed

     (33     (30     (37

Costs and other disposal liabilities paid

     (26     (18     (98
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash inflow

     1,030        327        (132
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included in the gain on sale of PowerSchool is the write down of related software assets of £70m. The write down of the software assets reflects the reduced market opportunity for software which was to be integrated with PowerSchool and the recognition that adoption of such software in US schools is now unlikely to occur at the rate originally envisaged.

 

F-69


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

31. Disposals including business closures continued

 

The gain on disposal of Penguin in 2013 arises from the measurement at fair value of the associate investment acquired in Penguin Random House. Determination of fair value is described in note 12.

Disposal of associates

On 16 October 2015, the Group sold 39% of its 50% stake in The Economist resulting in a gain on disposal of £473m. The gain comprises proceeds of £377m, gain on revaluation of remaining 11% investment to fair value of £92m and liabilities disposed of £4m.

32. Cash generated from operations

 

All figures in £ millions

  Notes     2015     2014     2013  

Profit

      823        470        539   

Adjustments for:

       

Income tax

      (24     110        90   

Depreciation

    10        75        74        82   

Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangibles and goodwill

    11        1,051        264        168   

Amortisation of software

    11        74        63        59   

Net finance costs

      29        93        75   

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

    12        (68     (51     (54

Profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates, investments and fixed assets

      (1,194     (272     (187

Acquisition costs

             6        12   

Net foreign exchange adjustment from transactions

      22        27        (40

Share-based payment costs

    26        26        32        37   

Pre-publication

      (57     (52     (77

Inventories

      10        6        18   

Trade and other receivables

      (99     (69     (50

Trade and other liabilities

      (80     72        72   

Retirement benefit obligations

      (57     (58     (57

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

      (13     (11     (3
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash generated from operations

      518        704        684   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash generated from operations is translated at an exchange rate approximating the rate at the date of cash flow. The difference between this rate and the average rate used to translate profit gives rise to a currency adjustment in the reconciliation between net profit and net cash generated from operations. This adjustment reflects the timing difference between recognition of profit and the related cash receipts or payments.

In the cash flow statement, proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment comprise:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015     2014     2013  

Net book amount

     6        12        19   

Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment

     (4     (3     9   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment

     2        9        28   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

33. Purchase of non-controlling interest

There were no purchases of non-controlling interests in 2015 or 2014. In 2013 the Group purchased non-controlling interests in the South African business for £65m, and in the Indian business for £11m.

 

 

F-70


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

34. Contingencies

There are contingent Group liabilities that arise in the normal course of business in respect of indemnities, warranties and guarantees in relation to former subsidiaries and in respect of guarantees in relation to subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates. In addition there are contingent liabilities of the Group in respect of legal claims, contract disputes, royalties, copyright fees, permissions and other rights. None of these claims are expected to result in a material gain or loss to the Group.

35. Commitments

At the balance sheet date there were no commitments for capital expenditure contracted for but not yet incurred.

The Group leases various offices and warehouses under non-cancellable operating lease agreements. The leases have varying terms and renewal rights. The Group also leases various plant and equipment under operating lease agreements, also with varying terms. Lease expenditure charged to the income statement was £156m (2014: £157m).

The future aggregate minimum lease payments in respect of operating leases are as follows:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Not later than one year

     164         161   

Later than one year and not later than two years

     146         150   

Later than two years and not later than three years

     143         126   

Later than three years and not later than four years

     130         122   

Later than four years and not later than five years

     123         115   

Later than five years

     685         701   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,391         1,375   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

36. Related party transactions

Joint ventures and associates

Amounts advanced to joint ventures and associates during the year and at the balance sheet date are set out in note 12. Apart from transactions with the Group’s joint ventures and associates, there were no other material related party transactions.

Key management personnel

Key management personnel are deemed to be the members of the Pearson Executive. It is this committee which had responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Group in 2015. Key management personnel compensation is disclosed below:

 

All figures in £ millions

   2015      2014  

Short-term employee benefits

     7         10   

Retirement benefits

     1         1   

Share-based payment costs

     1         2   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     9         13   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

There were no other material related party transactions. No guarantees have been provided to related parties.

37. Events after the balance sheet date

In January 2016, Pearson announced that it was embarking on a restructuring programme to simplify the business, reduce costs and position the company for growth in its major markets. The majority of the programme is expected to be complete by mid-year 2016 and will involve implementation costs in 2016 of approximately £320m.

 

F-71


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets the requirements for filing a Form 20-F and that it has caused and authorized the undersigned for sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

Pearson plc
/s/ Coram Williams

Coram Williams

Chief Financial Officer

Date: March 23, 2016

Exhibit 2.7

EXECUTION VERSION

DATED 6 MAY 2015

PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC

(the “Issuer”)

AND

PEARSON PLC

(the “Guarantor”)

AND

THE LAW DEBENTURE TRUST CORPORATION P.L.C.

(the “Trustee”)

constituting

€500,000,000

1.375 per cent. Guaranteed Notes due 2025

  

 

 

TRUST DEED

  

 

 

 

LOGO

REF: EMW/SK/43380-30660


CONTENTS

 

Clause        Page  

1.

  DEFINITIONS      4   

2.

  COVENANT TO REPAY AND TO PAY INTEREST ON THE NOTES      9   

3.

  FORM AND ISSUE OF NOTES AND COUPONS      11   

4.

  FEES, DUTIES AND TAXES      12   

5.

  COVENANT OF COMPLIANCE      12   

6.

  CANCELLATION OF NOTES AND RECORDS      12   

7.

  GUARANTEE      13   

8.

  ENFORCEMENT      15   

9.

  ACTION, PROCEEDINGS AND INDEMNIFICATION      15   

10.

  APPLICATION OF MONEYS      15   

11.

  NOTICE OF PAYMENTS      16   

12.

  INVESTMENT BY TRUSTEE      16   

13.

  PARTIAL PAYMENTS      16   

14.

  COVENANTS BY THE ISSUER AND THE GUARANTOR      16   

15.

  REMUNERATION AND INDEMNIFICATION OF TRUSTEE      19   

16.

  SUPPLEMENT TO TRUSTEE ACTS      20   

17.

  TRUSTEE’S LIABILITY      24   

18.

  TRUSTEE CONTRACTING WITH THE ISSUER AND THE GUARANTOR      24   

19.

  WAIVER, AUTHORISATION AND DETERMINATION      25   

20.

  HOLDER OF DEFINITIVE NOTE ASSUMED TO BE COUPONHOLDER      26   

21.

  SUBSTITUTION      26   

22.

  CURRENCY INDEMNITY      27   

23.

  NEW TRUSTEE      28   

24.

  TRUSTEE’S RETIREMENT AND REMOVAL      28   
25.   TRUSTEE’S POWERS TO BE ADDITIONAL      28   

26.

  NOTICES      29   

27.

  GOVERNING LAW      30   

28.

  COUNTERPARTS      30   

29.

 

CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT 1999

     30   

SCHEDULE 1 FORM OF GLOBAL NOTES

     31   

PART 1 FORM OF TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE

     31   

PART 2 FORM OF PERMANENT GLOBAL NOTE

     36   

SCHEDULE 2 FORM OF DEFINITIVE NOTE AND COUPON

     41   

PART 1 FORM OF DEFINITIVE NOTE

     41   

 

ii


Clause        Page  

FORM OF COUPON

     43   

PART 2 TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

     45   

SCHEDULE 3 PROVISIONS FOR MEETINGS OF NOTEHOLDERS

     59   

SCHEDULE 4 FORM OF DIRECTORS’ CERTIFICATE

     67   

SIGNATORIES

     69   

 

iii


THIS TRUST DEED is made on 6 May 2015 BETWEEN :

 

(1) PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC , a company incorporated under the laws of England and Wales with company number 08422787, whose registered office is at 80 Strand, London, WC2R 0RL, England (the “ Issuer ”);

 

(2) PEARSON PLC , a company incorporated under the laws of England and Wales with company number 00053723, whose registered office is at 80 Strand, London, WC2R 0RL, England (the “ Guarantor ”); and

 

(3) THE LAW DEBENTURE TRUST CORPORATION P.L.C. , a company incorporated under the laws of England and Wales, whose registered office is at Fifth Floor, 100 Wood Street, London EC2V 7EX (the “ Trustee ”, which expression shall, wherever the context so admits, include such company and all other persons or companies for the time being the trustee or trustees of these presents) as trustee for the Noteholders and Couponholders (each as defined below).

WHEREAS:

 

(A) By a resolution of Board of Directors of the Issuer passed on 27 April 2015 the Issuer has resolved to issue €500,000,000 in aggregate principal amount of 1.375 per cent. Guaranteed Notes due 2025 to be constituted by this Trust Deed.

 

(B) By a resolution of Board of Directors of the Guarantor passed on 5 December 2014 and a resolution of the standing committee of the Guarantor passed on 27 April 2015, the Guarantor has agreed to guarantee the said Notes and to enter into certain covenants as set out in this Trust Deed.

 

(C) The said Notes in definitive form will be in bearer form with Coupons attached. (D) The Trustee has agreed to act as trustee of these presents for the benefit of the Noteholders and Couponholders upon and subject to the terms and conditions of these presents.

 

(D) The trustee has agreed to act as trustee of these presents for the benefit of the Noteholders and Couponholders upon and subject to the terms and conditions of these presents.

NOW THIS TRUST DEED WITNESSES AND IT IS AGREED AND DECLARED as follows:

 

1. DEFINITIONS

 

1.1 In these presents unless there is anything in the subject or context inconsistent therewith the following expressions shall have the following meanings:

 

Agency Agreement    means the paying agency agreement appointing the initial Paying Agents in relation to the Notes and any other agreement for the time being in force appointing successor paying agents in relation to the Notes, or in connection with their duties, the terms of which have previously been approved in writing by the Trustee, together with any agreement for the time being in force amending or modifying with the prior written approval of the Trustee any of the aforesaid agreements in relation to the Notes;
Appointee    means any attorney, manager, agent, delegate, nominee, custodian or other person appointed by the Trustee under these presents;
Auditors    means the independent auditors for the time being of the Issuer or the Guarantor (as the case may be) or, in the event of their being unable or unwilling promptly to carry out any action requested of them pursuant to the provisions of these presents, such other firm of accountants or such financial advisors as may be nominated by the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor and approved by the Trustee or, failing such nomination or approval, as may be nominated by the Trustee in each case for the purposes of these presents;

 

4


Change of Control Triggering Event    has the meaning set out in Condition 7.8;
Clearstream, Luxembourg    means Clearstream Banking, société anonyme;
Conditions    means the Terms and Conditions of the Notes in the form set out in Schedule 2 as the same may from time to time be modified in accordance with these presents and any reference in these presents to a particular specified Condition or paragraph of a Condition shall in relation to the Notes be construed accordingly;
Couponholders    means the several persons who are for the time being holders of the Coupons;
Coupons    means the bearer interest coupons appertaining to the Notes in definitive form or, as the context may require, a specific number thereof and includes any replacements for Coupons issued pursuant to Condition 12 ( Replacement of Notes and Coupons );
Euroclear    means Euroclear Bank SA/NV;
Event of Default    means any of the conditions, events or acts provided in Condition 10 ( Events of Default ) to be events upon the happening of which the Notes would, subject only to notice by the Trustee as therein provided, become immediately due and repayable;
Extraordinary Resolution    has the meaning set out in paragraph 1 of Schedule 3;
FATCA Withholding    means any withholding or deduction pursuant to an agreement described in Section 1471(b) of the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (the “ Code ”) or otherwise imposed pursuant to Sections 1471 through 1474 of the Code (or any regulations thereunder or official interpretations thereof) or an intergovernmental agreement between the United States and another jurisdiction facilitating the implementation thereof (or any law implementing such an intergovernmental agreement);
Global Note    means the Temporary Global Note and/or the Permanent Global Note, as the context may require;
holding company    means a holding company within the meaning of section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006 of Great Britain;
Liability    means any loss, damage, cost, charge, claim, demand, expense, judgment, action, proceeding or other liability whatsoever (including, without limitation, in respect of taxes, duties, levies, imposts and other charges) and including any value added tax or similar tax charged or chargeable in respect thereof and legal fees and expenses (in the case of costs and expenses, properly incurred) on a full indemnity basis;
Material Company    has the meaning set out in Condition 10.2;
Noteholders    means the several persons who are for the time being holders of the Notes save that, for so long as such Notes or any part thereof are represented by a Global Note deposited with a common safe- keeper for Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg or, in respect of Notes in definitive form held in an account with Euroclear or Clearstream, Luxembourg, each person who is for the time being shown in the records (in accordance with its usual procedures and in which the holder of a particular nominal amount of Notes is clearly identified together with the amount of such holding) of

 

5


   Euroclear or Clearstream, Luxembourg (other than Clearstream, Luxembourg, if Clearstream, Luxembourg shall be an accountholder of Euroclear, and Euroclear, if Euroclear shall be an accountholder of Clearstream, Luxembourg) as the holder of a particular nominal amount of the Notes shall be deemed to be the holder of such nominal amount of such Notes (and the holder of the relevant Global Note shall be deemed not to be the holder) for all purposes of these presents other than with respect to the payment of principal or interest on such nominal amount of such Notes, the rights to which shall be vested, as against the Issuer and the Trustee, solely in such common safe-keeper and for which purpose such common safe-keeper shall be deemed to be the holder of such nominal amount of such Notes in accordance with and subject to its terms and the provisions of these presents; and the words “ holder ” and “ holders ” and related expressions shall (where appropriate) be construed accordingly;
Notes    means the notes in bearer form comprising the said €500,000,000 in aggregate principal amount of 1.375 per cent. Guaranteed Notes due 2025 of the Issuer hereby constituted or the principal amount thereof for the time being outstanding or, as the context may require, a specific number thereof and includes any replacements for Notes issued pursuant to Condition 12 ( Replacement of Notes and Coupons ) and (except for the purposes of clause 3) the Temporary Global Note and the Permanent Global Note;
Official List    has the meaning set out in Section 103 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000;
outstanding    means in relation to the Notes all the Notes issued other than:
  

(a)    those Notes which have been redeemed pursuant to these presents;

  

(b)    those Notes in respect of which the date for redemption in accordance with the Conditions has occurred and the redemption moneys (including all interest payable thereon) have been duly paid to the Trustee or to the Principal Paying Agent, as applicable, in the manner provided in the Agency Agreement (and where appropriate notice to that effect has been given to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices )) and remain available for payment against presentation of the relevant Notes and/or Coupons;

  

(c)    those Notes which have been purchased and cancelled in accordance with Condition 7 ( Redemption and Purchase );

  

(d)    those Notes which have become void under Condition 9 ( Prescription );

  

(e)    those mutilated or defaced Notes which have been surrendered and cancelled and in respect of which replacements have been issued pursuant to Condition 12 ( Replacement of Notes and Coupons );

  

(f)     (for the purpose only of ascertaining the principal amount of the Notes outstanding and without prejudice to the status for any other purpose of the relevant Notes) those Notes which are alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed and in

 

6


  

respect of which replacements have been issued pursuant to Condition 12 ( Replacement of Notes and Coupons ); and

  

(g)    any Global Note to the extent that it shall have been exchanged for another Global Note in respect of the Notes or for the Notes in definitive form pursuant to its provisions;

   PROVIDED THAT for each of the following purposes, namely:
  

(i)     the right to attend and vote at any meeting of the Noteholders or any of them, an Extraordinary Resolution in writing or an Ordinary Resolution in writing as envisaged by paragraph 1 of Schedule 3 and any direction or request by the holders of the Notes;

  

(ii)    the determination of how many and which Notes are for the time being outstanding for the purposes of subclause 9.1, Conditions 11 ( Enforcement ) and 15 ( Meetings of Noteholders, Modification, Waiver, Authorisation and Determination ) and paragraphs 4, 7 and 9 of Schedule 3;

  

(iii)  any discretion, power or authority (whether contained in these presents or vested by operation of law) which the Trustee is required, expressly or impliedly, to exercise in or by reference to the interests of the Noteholders or any of them; and

  

(iv)   the determination by the Trustee whether any event, circumstance, matter or thing is, in its opinion, materially prejudicial to the interests of the Noteholders or any of them,

   those Notes (if any) which are for the time being held by or on behalf of or for the benefit of the Issuer, the Guarantor, any Subsidiary of the Issuer or Guarantor, any holding company of the Issuer or Guarantor or any other Subsidiary of any such holding company, in each case as beneficial owner, shall (unless and until ceasing to be so held) be deemed not to remain outstanding;
Paying Agents    means the several institutions (including where the context permits the Principal Paying Agent) at their respective specified offices initially appointed as paying agents in relation to the Notes by the Issuer and the Guarantor pursuant to the Agency Agreement and/or, if applicable, any Successor paying agents in relation to the Notes;
Permanent Global Note    means the permanent global note in respect of the Notes to be issued pursuant to clause 3.3 in the form or substantially in the form set out in Schedule 1 Part 2;
Potential Event of Default    means any condition, event or act which, with the lapse of time and/or the issue, making or giving of any notice, certification, declaration, demand, determination and/or request and/or the taking of any similar action and/or the fulfilment of any similar condition, would constitute an Event of Default;
Principal Paying Agent    means the institution at its specified office initially appointed as principal paying agent in relation to the Notes by the Issuer and the Guarantor pursuant to the Agency Agreement or, if applicable, any Successor principal paying agent in relation to the Notes;
Relevant Date    has the meaning set out in Condition 8 ( Taxation );
Relevant Jurisdiction    has the meaning set out in Condition 8 ( Taxation );

 

7


repay ”, “ redeem ” and “ pay    shall each include both the others and cognate expressions shall be construed accordingly;
Subsidiary    has the meaning set out in Condition 7.8 ( Redemption and Purchase – Interpretation );
Successor    means, in relation to the Principal Paying Agent and the other Paying Agents, any successor to any one or more of them in relation to the Notes which shall become such pursuant to the provisions of these presents, and/or the Agency Agreement (as the case may be) and/or such other or further principal paying agent and paying agents (as the case may be) in relation to the Notes as may (with the prior approval of, and on terms previously approved by, the Trustee in writing) from time to time be appointed as such, and/or, if applicable, such other or further specified offices (in the former case being within the same place as those for which they are substituted) as may from time to time be nominated, in each case by the Issuer and, if applicable, the Guarantor, and (except in the case of the initial appointments and specified offices made under and specified in the Conditions and/or the Agency Agreement, as the case may be) notice of whose appointment or, as the case may be, nomination has been given to the Noteholders pursuant to subclause 1.1(a) of the Agency Agreement in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices );
Temporary Global Note    means the temporary global note in respect of the Notes to be issued pursuant to clause 3.1 in the form or substantially in the form set out in Schedule 1 Part 1;
the London Stock Exchange    means the London Stock Exchange plc or any successor thereto;
these presents    means this Trust Deed and the Schedules and any deed supplemental hereto and the Schedules (if any) thereto and the Notes, the Coupons and the Conditions, all as from time to time modified in accordance with the provisions herein or therein contained;
Trust Corporation    means a corporation entitled by rules made under the Public Trustee Act 1906 or entitled pursuant to any other comparable legislation applicable to a trustee in any other jurisdiction to carry out the functions of a custodian trustee;
Trustee Acts    means the Trustee Act 1925 and the Trustee Act 2000; and
UK Listing Authority    means the Financial Conduct Authority in its capacity as competent authority under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.
1.2    (a)    Words denoting the singular shall include the plural and vice versa, words denoting one gender only shall include the other genders and words denoting persons only shall include firms and corporations and vice versa.

 

  (b) All references in these presents to principal and/or interest in respect of the Notes or to any moneys payable by the Issuer and/or the Guarantor under these presents shall be deemed to include, in the case of amounts of principal payable, a reference to any specific redemption amount (as defined in the relevant Conditions) and, in any case, a reference to any additional amounts which may be payable under Condition 8 ( Taxation ) or, if applicable, under any undertaking or covenant given pursuant to subclause 14(q) or subclause 21.1(b)(ii).

 

8


  (c) All references to “EUR”, “euro” and “€” shall be construed as references to the currency introduced at the start of the third stage of European economic and monetary union pursuant to the Treaty establishing the European Union, as amended.

 

  (d) All references in these presents to any statute or any provision of any statute shall be deemed also to refer to any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof or any statutory instrument, order or regulation made thereunder or under any such modification or re-enactment.

 

  (e) All references in these presents to guarantees or to an obligation being guaranteed shall be deemed to include respectively references to indemnities or to an indemnity being given in respect thereof.

 

  (f) All references in these presents to any action, remedy or method of proceeding for the enforcement of the rights of creditors shall be deemed to include, in respect of any jurisdiction other than England, references to such action, remedy or method of proceeding for the enforcement of the rights of creditors available or appropriate in such jurisdiction as shall most nearly approximate to such action, remedy or method of proceeding described or referred to in these presents.

 

  (g) All references in these presents to taking proceedings against the Issuer and/or the Guarantor shall be deemed to include references to proving in the winding up of the Issuer and/or the Guarantor (as the case may be).

 

  (h) All references in these presents to Euroclear and/or Clearstream, Luxembourg shall be deemed to include references to any other clearing system as is approved by the Trustee.

 

  (i) Unless the context otherwise requires words or expressions used in these presents shall bear the same meanings as in the Companies Act 2006 of the United Kingdom.

 

  (j) In this Trust Deed references to Schedules, clauses, subclauses, paragraphs and subparagraphs shall be construed as references to the Schedules to this Trust Deed and to the clauses, subclauses, paragraphs and subparagraphs of this Trust Deed respectively.

 

  (k) In these presents tables of contents and clause headings are included for ease of reference and shall not affect the construction of these presents.

 

  (l) All references in these presents to Notes being “listed” or “having a listing” shall, in relation to the London Stock Exchange, be construed to mean that such Notes have been admitted to the Official List by the UK Listing Authority and to trading on the London Stock Exchange’s market for listed securities and all references in these presents to “listing” or “listed” shall include references to “quotation” and “quoted”, respectively.

 

  (m) All references in these presents to the “records” of Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg shall be to the records that each of Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg holds for its customers which reflect the amount of such customers’ interest in the Notes.

 

2. COVENANT TO REPAY AND TO PAY INTEREST ON THE NOTES

 

2.1 The aggregate principal amount of the Notes is limited to €500,000,000.

 

2.2 The Issuer covenants with the Trustee that it will, in accordance with these presents, on the due date for the final maturity of the Notes provided for in the Conditions, or on such earlier date as the same or any part thereof may become due and repayable thereunder, pay or procure to be paid unconditionally to or to the order of the Trustee in euro in London in immediately available funds the principal amount of the Notes repayable on that date and shall in the meantime and until such date (both before and after any judgment or other order of a court of competent jurisdiction) pay or procure to be paid unconditionally to or to the order of the Trustee as aforesaid interest (which shall accrue from day to day) on the principal amount of the Notes at the rate of 1.375 per cent. per annum payable annually in arrear on 6 May, the first such payment (representing a full year’s interest) to be made on 6 May 2016 PROVIDED THAT:

 

  (a)

every payment of principal or interest in respect of the Notes to or to the order of the Principal Paying Agent in the manner provided in the Agency Agreement shall operate in satisfaction pro

 

9


  tanto of the relative covenant by the Issuer in this clause except to the extent that there is default in the subsequent payment thereof in accordance with the Conditions to the Noteholders or Couponholders (as the case may be);

 

  (b) in any case where payment of principal is not made to the Trustee or the Principal Paying Agent on or before the due date, interest shall continue to accrue on the principal amount of the Notes (both before and after any judgment or other order of a court of competent jurisdiction) at the rate aforesaid (or, if higher, the rate of interest on judgment debts for the time being provided by English law) up to and including the date which the Trustee determines to be the date on and after which payment is to be made to the Noteholders in respect thereof as stated in a notice given to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) (such date to be not later than 30 calendar days after the day on which the whole of such principal amount, together with an amount equal to the interest which has accrued and is to accrue pursuant to this proviso up to and including that date, has been received by the Trustee or the Principal Paying Agent); and

 

  (c) in any case where payment of the whole or any part of the principal amount of any Note is improperly withheld or refused upon due presentation thereof (other than in circumstances contemplated by proviso (b) above) interest shall accrue on that principal amount payment of which has been so withheld or refused (both before and after any judgment or other order of a court of competent jurisdiction) at the rate aforesaid (or, if higher, the rate of interest on judgment debts for the time being provided by English law) from and including the date of such withholding or refusal up to and including the date on which, upon further presentation of the relevant Note, payment of the full amount (including interest as aforesaid) in euro payable in respect of such Note is made or (if earlier) the seventh day after notice is given to the relevant Noteholder (in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices )) that the full amount (including interest as aforesaid) in euro payable in respect of such Note is available for payment, provided that, upon further presentation thereof being duly made, such payment is made.

The Trustee will hold the benefit of this covenant on trust for the Noteholders and the Couponholders and itself in accordance with these presents.

TRUSTEE’S REQUIREMENTS REGARDING PAYING AGENTS

 

2.3 At any time after an Event of Default or a Potential Event of Default shall have occurred or if there is failure to make payment of any amount in respect of any Note when due or the Trustee shall have received any money which it proposes to pay under clause 10 to the Noteholders and/or Couponholders, the Trustee may:

 

  (a) by notice in writing to the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Principal Paying Agent and the other Paying Agents require the Principal Paying Agent and the other Paying Agents pursuant to the Agency Agreement:

 

  (i) to act thereafter as Principal Paying Agent and Paying Agents respectively of the Trustee in relation to payments to be made by or on behalf of the Trustee under the provisions of these presents mutatis mutandis on the terms provided in the Agency Agreement (with consequential amendments as necessary and save that the Trustee’s liability under any provisions thereof for the indemnification, remuneration and payment of out-of-pocket expenses of the Paying Agents shall be limited to the amounts for the time being held by the Trustee on the trusts of these presents relating to the Notes and available for such purpose) and thereafter hold all Notes and Coupons and all sums, documents and records held by them in respect of Notes and Coupons on behalf of the Trustee; or

 

  (ii) to deliver up all Notes and Coupons and all sums, documents and records held by them in respect of Notes and Coupons to the Trustee or as the Trustee shall direct in such notice provided that such notice shall be deemed not to apply to any documents or records which the relevant Paying Agent is obliged not to release by any law or regulation; and/or

 

10


  (b) by notice in writing to the Issuer and the Guarantor require each of them to make all subsequent payments in respect of the Notes and Coupons to or to the order of the Trustee and not to the Principal Paying Agent; with effect from the issue of any such notice to the Issuer and the Guarantor and until such notice is withdrawn proviso (a) to subclause 2.2 of this clause relating to the Notes shall cease to have effect.

FURTHER ISSUES

 

2.4   (a)   The Issuer shall be at liberty from time to time (but subject always to the provisions of these presents) without the consent of the Noteholders or Couponholders to create and issue further notes or bonds either (i) having the same terms and conditions in all respects (or in all respects save for the first payment of interest thereon), and so that the same shall be consolidated and form a single series, with the Notes and/or the further notes or bonds of any other series or (ii) upon such terms as to ranking, interest, conversion, redemption and otherwise as the Issuer may at the time of issue thereof determine.

 

  (b) Any further notes or bonds which are to be created and issued pursuant to the provisions of paragraph 2.4(a)(i) above so as to form a single series with the Notes and/or the further notes or bonds of any other series shall be constituted by a deed supplemental to this Trust Deed and any other further notes or bonds which are to be created and issued pursuant to the provisions of paragraph 2.4(a)(ii) above may (subject to the consent of the Trustee) be constituted by a deed supplemental to this Trust Deed. In any such case the Issuer and the Guarantor shall prior to the issue of any further notes or bonds to be so constituted execute and deliver to the Trustee a deed supplemental to this Trust Deed (in relation to which all applicable stamp duties or other documentation fees, duties or taxes have been paid and, if applicable, duly stamped or denoted accordingly) containing a covenant by the Issuer in the form mutatis mutandis of subclause 2.2 in relation to the principal and interest in respect of such further notes or bonds and such other provisions (whether or not corresponding to any of the provisions contained in this Trust Deed) as the Trustee shall require including making such consequential modifications to this Trust Deed as the Trustee shall require in order to give effect to such issue of further notes or bonds.

 

  (c) A memorandum of every such supplemental deed shall be endorsed by the Trustee on this Trust Deed and by the Issuer and the Guarantor on their duplicates of this Trust Deed.

 

  (d) Whenever it is proposed to create and issue any further notes or bonds the Issuer shall give to the Trustee not less than 14 calendar days’ notice in writing of its intention so to do stating the amount of further notes or bonds proposed to be created and issued.

 

3. FORM AND ISSUE OF NOTES AND COUPONS

 

3.1 The Notes shall be represented initially by the Temporary Global Note which the Issuer shall issue to a common safe-keeper on terms that such common safe-keeper shall hold the same for the account of the persons who would otherwise be entitled to receive the Notes in definitive form (“ Definitive Notes ”) (as notified to such common safe-keeper by Citigroup Global Markets Limited) and the successors in title to such persons as appearing in the records of Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg for the time being.

 

3.2 The Temporary Global Note shall be printed or typed in the form or substantially in the form set out in Schedule 1 Part 1 and may be a facsimile. The Temporary Global Note shall be in the aggregate principal amount of €500,000,000 and shall be signed manually or in facsimile by a person duly authorised by the Issuer on behalf of the Issuer and shall be authenticated by or on behalf of the Principal Paying Agent and shall be effectuated by the common safe-keeper acting on the instructions of the Principal Paying Agent. The Temporary Global Note so executed and authenticated shall be a binding and valid obligation of the Issuer and title thereto shall pass by delivery.

 

3.3

The Issuer shall issue the Permanent Global Note in exchange for the Temporary Global Note in accordance with the provisions thereof. The Permanent Global Note shall be printed or typed in the form or

 

11


  substantially in the form set out in Schedule 1 Part 2 and may be a facsimile. The Permanent Global Note shall be in the aggregate principal amount of up to €500,000,000 and shall be signed manually or in facsimile by a person duly authorised by the Issuer on behalf of the Issuer and shall be authenticated by or on behalf of the Principal Paying Agent and shall be effectuated by the common safe-keeper acting on the instructions of the Principal Paying Agent. The Permanent Global Note so executed and authenticated and effectuated shall be a binding and valid obligation of the Issuer and title thereto shall pass by delivery.

 

3.4 The Issuer shall issue Definitive Notes (together with the unmatured Coupons attached) in exchange for the Temporary Global Note and/or the Permanent Global Note in accordance with the provisions thereof.

 

3.5 The Definitive Notes and the Coupons shall be in bearer form in the respective forms or substantially in the respective forms set out in Schedule 2 and the Definitive Notes shall be issued in the denominations of €100,000 and integral multiples of €1,000 in excess thereof up to and including €199,000 each (serially numbered) and shall be endorsed with the Conditions. Title to the Definitive Notes and the Coupons shall pass by delivery.

 

3.6 The Definitive Notes shall be signed manually or in facsimile by one of the Directors of the Issuer on behalf of the Issuer and shall be authenticated by or on behalf of the Principal Paying Agent. The Coupons shall not be signed.

 

3.7 The Issuer may use the facsimile signature of any person who at the date such signature is affixed is a person duly authorised by the Issuer or is a Director of the Issuer as referred to in subclauses 3.2, 3.3 and 3.6 above notwithstanding that at the time of issue of the Temporary Global Note, the Permanent Global Note or any of the Definitive Notes, as the case may be, he may have ceased for any reason to be so authorised or to be the holder of such office. The Definitive Notes so signed and authenticated, and the Coupons, upon execution and authentication of the relevant Definitive Notes, shall be binding and valid obligations of the Issuer.

 

4. FEES, DUTIES AND TAXES

The Issuer will pay any stamp, issue, registration, documentary and other fees, duties and taxes, including interest and penalties, payable on or in connection with (a) the execution and delivery of these presents, (b) the constitution and issue of the Notes and the Coupons and (c) any action taken by or on behalf of the Trustee or (where permitted under these presents so to do) any Noteholder or Couponholder to enforce, or to resolve any doubt concerning, or for any other purpose in relation to, these presents.

 

5. COVENANT OF COMPLIANCE

Each of the Issuer and the Guarantor severally covenants with the Trustee that it will comply with and perform and observe all the provisions of these presents which are expressed to be binding on it. The Conditions shall be binding on the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Noteholders and the Couponholders. The Trustee shall be entitled to enforce the obligations of the Issuer and the Guarantor under the Notes and the Coupons as if the same were set out and contained in the trust deeds constituting the same, which shall be read and construed as one document with the Notes and the Coupons. The Trustee will hold the benefit of this covenant upon trust for itself and the Noteholders and the Couponholders according to its and their respective interests.

 

6. CANCELLATION OF NOTES AND RECORDS

 

6.1

The Issuer shall procure that all Notes issued by it (a) which are redeemed or (b) which are purchased and surrendered for cancellation by or on behalf of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Subsidiary of the Issuer or the Guarantor or (c) which, being mutilated or defaced, have been surrendered and replaced pursuant to Condition 12 ( Replacement of Notes and Coupons ) (together in each case, in the case of Definitive Notes, with all unmatured Coupons attached thereto or delivered therewith) and all Coupons paid in accordance

 

12


  with the relevant Conditions or which, being mutilated or defaced, have been surrendered and replaced pursuant to Condition 12 ( Replacement of Notes and Coupons ) shall forthwith be cancelled by or on behalf of the Issuer. A certificate stating:

 

  (a) the aggregate principal amount of Notes which have been redeemed and the aggregate amounts in respect of Coupons which have been paid;

 

  (b) the serial numbers of such Notes in definitive form;

 

  (c) the total numbers (where applicable, of each denomination) by maturity date of such Coupons;

 

  (d) the aggregate amount of interest paid (and the due dates of such payments) on Global Notes;

 

  (e) the aggregate principal amount of Notes (if any) which have been purchased by or on behalf of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Subsidiary of the Issuer and the Guarantor and cancelled and the serial numbers of such Notes in definitive form and the total number (where applicable, of each denomination) by maturity date of the Coupons attached thereto or surrendered therewith;

 

  (f) the aggregate principal amounts of Notes and the aggregate amounts in respect of Coupons which have been so exchanged or surrendered and replaced and the serial numbers of such Notes in definitive form and the total number (where applicable, of each denomination) by maturity date of such Coupons; and

 

  (g) the total number of each denomination by maturity date of unmatured Coupons missing from Notes in definitive form which have been redeemed or surrendered and replaced and the serial numbers of the Notes in definitive form to which the missing unmatured Coupons appertained

shall be given to the Trustee by or on behalf of the Issuer as soon as possible and in any event within four months after the date of any such redemption, purchase, payment, exchange or replacement (as the case may be). The Trustee may accept such certificate as conclusive evidence of redemption, purchase, exchange or replacement pro tanto of the Notes or payment of interest thereon respectively and of cancellation of the relative Notes and Coupons.

 

6.2 The Issuer shall procure (a) that the Principal Paying Agent shall keep a full and complete record of all Notes and Coupons (other than serial numbers of Coupons) and of their redemption, cancellation, payment or exchange (as the case may be) and of all replacement notes or coupons issued in substitution for lost, stolen, mutilated, defaced or destroyed Notes or Coupons and (b) that such records shall be made available to the Trustee at all reasonable times.

 

7. GUARANTEE

 

7.1 The Guarantor hereby irrevocably and unconditionally, and notwithstanding the release of any other guarantor or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditors of the Issuer or any Subsidiary of the Guarantor, guarantees to the Trustee:

 

  (a) the due and punctual payment in accordance with the provisions of these presents of the principal of and interest on the Notes and of any other amounts payable by the Issuer under these presents; and

 

  (b) the due and punctual performance and observance by the Issuer of each of the other provisions of these presents on the Issuer’s part to be performed or observed.

 

7.2 If the Issuer fails for any reason whatsoever punctually to pay any such principal, interest or other amount payable on the Notes or under these presents, the Guarantor shall cause each and every such payment to be made as if the Guarantor instead of the Issuer were expressed to be the primary obligor under these presents and not merely as surety (but without affecting the nature of the Issuer’s obligations) to the intent that the holder of the relevant Note or Coupon or the Trustee (as the case may be) shall receive the same amounts in respect of principal, interest or such other amount as would have been receivable had such payments been made by the Issuer.

 

7.3

If any payment received by the Trustee or any Noteholder or Couponholder under the provisions of these presents shall (whether on the subsequent bankruptcy, insolvency or corporate reorganisation of the Issuer

 

13


  or, without limitation, on any other event) be avoided or set aside for any reason, such payment shall not be considered as discharging or diminishing the liability of the Guarantor and this guarantee shall continue to apply as if such payment had at all times remained owing by the Issuer and the Guarantor shall indemnify the Trustee and the Noteholders and/or Couponholders (as the case may be) in respect thereof PROVIDED THAT the obligations of the Issuer and/or the Guarantor under this subclause shall, as regards each payment made to the Trustee or any Noteholder or Couponholder which is avoided or set aside, be contingent upon such payment being reimbursed to the Issuer or other persons entitled through the Issuer.

 

7.4 The Guarantor hereby agrees that its obligations under this clause shall be unconditional and that the Guarantor shall be fully liable irrespective of the validity, regularity, legality or enforceability against the Issuer of, or of any defence or counter-claim whatsoever available to the Issuer in relation to, its obligations under these presents, whether or not any action has been taken to enforce the same or any judgment obtained against the Issuer, whether or not any of the other provisions of these presents have been modified, whether or not any time, indulgence, waiver, authorisation or consent has been granted to the Issuer by or on behalf of the Noteholders or the Couponholders or the Trustee, whether or not any determination has been made by the Trustee pursuant to subclause 19.1, whether or not there have been any dealings or transactions between the Issuer, any of the Noteholders or Couponholders or the Trustee, whether or not the Issuer has been dissolved, liquidated, merged, consolidated, bankrupted or has changed its status, functions, control or ownership, whether or not the Issuer has been prevented from making payment by foreign exchange provisions applicable at its place of registration or incorporation and whether or not any other circumstances have occurred which might otherwise constitute a legal or equitable discharge of or defence to a guarantor. Accordingly the validity of this guarantee shall not be affected by reason of any invalidity, irregularity, illegality or unenforceability of all or any of the obligations of the Issuer under these presents and this guarantee shall not be discharged nor shall the liability of the Guarantor under these presents be affected by any act, thing or omission or means whatever whereby its liability would not have been discharged if it had been the principal debtor.

 

7.5 Without prejudice to the provisions of subclause 9.1 the Trustee may determine from time to time whether or not it will enforce this guarantee which it may do without making any demand of or taking any proceedings against the Issuer and may from time to time make any arrangement or compromise with the Guarantor in relation to this guarantee which the Trustee may consider expedient in the interests of the Noteholders.

 

7.6 The Guarantor waives diligence, presentment, demand of payment, filing of claims with a court in the event of dissolution, liquidation, merger or bankruptcy of the Issuer, any right to require a proceeding first against the Issuer, protest or notice with respect to these presents or the indebtedness evidenced thereby and all demands whatsoever and covenants that this guarantee shall be a continuing guarantee, shall extend to the ultimate balance of all sums payable and obligations owed by the Issuer under these presents, shall not be discharged except by complete performance of the obligations in these presents and is additional to, and not instead of, any security or other guarantee or indemnity at any time existing in favour of any person, whether from the Guarantor or otherwise.

 

7.7 If any moneys shall become payable by the Guarantor under this guarantee the Guarantor shall not, so long as the same remain unpaid, without the prior written consent of the Trustee:

 

  (a) in respect of any amounts paid by it under this guarantee, exercise any rights of subrogation or contribution or, without limitation, any other right or remedy which may accrue to it in respect of or as a result of any such payment; or

 

  (b) in respect of any other moneys for the time being due to the Guarantor by the Issuer, claim payment thereof or exercise any other right or remedy;

(including in either case claiming the benefit of any security or right of set-off or, on the liquidation of the Issuer, proving in competition with the Trustee). If, notwithstanding the foregoing, upon the bankruptcy, insolvency or liquidation of the Issuer, any payment or distribution of assets of the Issuer of any kind or character, whether in cash, property or securities, shall be received by the Guarantor before payment in full

 

14


of all amounts payable under these presents shall have been made to the Noteholders, the Couponholders and the Trustee, such payment or distribution shall be received by the Guarantor on trust to pay the same over immediately to the Trustee for application in or towards the payment of all sums due and unpaid under these presents in accordance with clause 10.

 

7.8 Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Issuer under these presents have been irrevocably paid in full, the Trustee may:

 

  (a) refrain from applying or enforcing any other moneys, security or rights held or received by the Trustee in respect of those amounts, or apply and enforce the same in such manner and order as it sees fit (whether against those amounts or otherwise), and the Guarantor shall not be entitled to the benefit of the same; and

 

  (b) hold in a suspense account any moneys received from the Guarantor or on account of the Guarantor’s liability under this guarantee, without liability to pay interest on those moneys.

 

7.9 The obligations of the Guarantor under these presents constitute direct, unconditional, unsubordinated and (subject to the provisions of Condition 4 ( Negative Pledge )) unsecured obligations of the Guarantor and rank and will rank pari passu among themselves and (save for certain obligations required to be preferred by law) equally with all other unsecured obligations (other than subordinated obligations, if any) of the Guarantor, from time to time outstanding.

 

8. ENFORCEMENT

 

8.1 The Trustee may at any time, at its discretion and without notice, take such proceedings and/or other steps as it may think fit against or in relation to each of the Issuer and the Guarantor to enforce their respective obligations under these presents.

 

8.2 Proof that as regards any specified Note or Coupon the Issuer or the Guarantor (as the case may be) has made default in paying any amount due in respect of such Note or Coupon shall (unless the contrary be proved) be sufficient evidence that the same default has been made as regards all other Notes or Coupons (as the case may be) in respect of which the relevant amount is due and payable.

 

9. ACTION, PROCEEDINGS AND INDEMNIFICATION

 

9.1 The Trustee shall not be bound to take any action in relation to these presents (including but not limited to the giving of any notice pursuant to Condition 10 ( Events of Default ) or the taking of any proceedings and/or other steps mentioned in subclause 8.1) unless respectively directed or requested to do so (a) by an Extraordinary Resolution or (b) in writing by the holders of at least one-quarter in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding and in either case then only if it shall be indemnified and/or secured and/or prefunded to its satisfaction against all Liabilities to which it may render itself liable or which it may incur by so doing.

 

9.2 Only the Trustee may enforce the provisions of these presents. No Noteholder or Couponholder shall be entitled to proceed directly against the Issuer or the Guarantor to enforce the performance of any of the provisions of these presents unless the Trustee having become bound as aforesaid to take proceedings fails to do so within a reasonable period and such failure is continuing.

 

10. APPLICATION OF MONEYS

All moneys received by the Trustee under these presents (including any moneys which represent principal or interest in respect of Notes or Coupons which have become void under Condition 9 ( Prescription )) shall be held by the Trustee upon trust to apply them (subject to clause 12):

 

  (a) First , in payment or satisfaction of all amounts then due and unpaid under clause 15 to the Trustee and/or any Appointee;

 

  (b) Secondly , in or towards payment pari passu and rateably of all principal and interest then due and unpaid in respect of the Notes; and

 

15


  (c) Thirdly , in payment of the balance (if any) to the Issuer (without prejudice to, or liability in respect of, any question as to how such payment to the Issuer shall be dealt with as between the Issuer, the Guarantor and any other person).

Without prejudice to this clause 10, if the Trustee holds any moneys which represent principal or interest in respect of Notes which have become void or in respect of which claims have been prescribed under Condition 9 ( Prescription ), the Trustee will hold such moneys on the above trusts.

 

11. NOTICE OF PAYMENTS

The Trustee shall give notice to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) of the day fixed for any payment to them under clause 10. Such payment may be made in accordance with Condition 6 ( Payments ) and any payment so made shall be a good discharge to the Trustee.

 

12. INVESTMENT BY TRUSTEE

 

12.1 The Trustee may at its discretion and pending payment invest moneys at any time available for the payment of principal and interest on the Notes in some or one of the investments hereinafter authorised for such periods as it may consider expedient with power from time to time at the like discretion to vary such investments and to accumulate such investments and the resulting interest and other income derived therefrom. The accumulated investments shall be applied under clause 10. All interest and other income deriving from such investments shall be applied first in payment or satisfaction of all amounts then due and unpaid under clause 15 to the Trustee and/or any Appointee and otherwise held for the benefit of and paid to the Noteholders or the holders of the related Coupons, as the case may be.

 

12.2 Any moneys which under the trusts of these presents ought to or may be invested by the Trustee may be invested in the name or under the control of the Trustee in any investments or other assets in any part of the world whether or not they produce income or by placing the same on deposit in the name or under the control of the Trustee at such bank or other financial institution and in such currency as the Trustee may think fit. If that bank or institution is the Trustee or a subsidiary, holding or associated company of the Trustee, it need only account for an amount of interest equal to the amount of interest which would, at then current rates, be payable by it on such a deposit to an independent customer. The Trustee may at any time vary any such investments for or into other investments or convert any moneys so deposited into any other currency and shall not be responsible for any loss resulting from any such investments or deposits, whether due to depreciation in value, fluctuations in exchange rates or otherwise.

 

13. PARTIAL PAYMENTS

Upon any payment under clause 10 (other than payment in full against surrender of a Note or Coupon) the Note or Coupon in respect of which such payment is made shall be produced to the Trustee or the Paying Agent by or through whom such payment is made and the Trustee shall or shall cause such Paying Agent to enface thereon a memorandum of the amount and the date of payment but the Trustee may in any particular case dispense with such production and enfacement upon such indemnity being given as it shall think sufficient.

 

14. COVENANTS BY THE ISSUER AND THE GUARANTOR

Each of the Issuer and the Guarantor severally covenants with the Trustee that so long as any of the Notes remains outstanding it shall:

 

  (a) at all times maintain Paying Agents, in accordance with the Conditions;

 

  (b)

at all times keep and procure that each of the Material Companies shall keep and use all reasonable endeavours to procure that each of its Subsidiaries shall keep, proper books of account and allow the Trustee and any person appointed by it to whom the Issuer, the Guarantor or the Material Company (as the case may be) shall have no reasonable objection free access to such books at all reasonable

 

16


  times during normal business hours, provided that the Trustee shall only use information so obtained in connection with the performance of its duties under these presents or by operation of law;

 

  (c) give notice in writing to the Trustee of the occurrence of any Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Change of Control Triggering Event forthwith upon the Issuer becoming aware thereof and without waiting for the Trustee to take any action mentioned in Condition 10 ( Events of Default );

 

  (d) send to the Trustee at the time of the issue thereof two copies of every balance sheet, profit and loss account and annual or interim report issued by the Issuer and/or the Guarantor to its shareholders (or any class thereof) in their capacity as such and make available for inspection by Noteholders and Couponholders at the specified office of the Principal Paying Agent and each of the other Paying Agents copies of each annual report sent to the Trustee as aforesaid as soon as practicable after the date of the issue thereof;

 

  (e) send to the Trustee (in addition to any copies to which it may be entitled as a holder of any securities of the Issuer or the Guarantor) two copies of all notices, statements and circulars which are issued to the shareholders of the Issuer or the Guarantor and which contain information having a material bearing on the interests of the Noteholders as soon as practicable, but in any event not later than 30 calendar days after the time of the issue thereof and make available to the Paying Agents as many copies of such notices, statements and circulars as they may reasonably require in order to satisfy requests therefor from Noteholders;

 

  (f) to the extent not prohibited by law execute and do all such further documents, acts and things as may be necessary at any time or times in the reasonable opinion of the Trustee to give effect to the terms and conditions of these presents;

 

  (g) take all reasonable steps to require that the Principal Paying Agent notifies the Trustee forthwith in the event that it does not, on or before the due date for payment of the Notes or any of them to the Noteholders or of any of the Coupons to the Couponholders, receive unconditionally the full amount in euro of the moneys payable on such due date on all such Notes or, as the case may be, all such Coupons;

 

  (h) at all times use its best endeavours to obtain and maintain the listing of the Notes on the London Stock Exchange and of any further Notes on such exchange (if any) as may be agreed with the Trustee or, if, in either such case, it is unable to do so having used such best endeavours, use all reasonable endeavours to obtain and maintain a quotation for or listing of the relevant Notes on such other stock exchange or exchanges as it may (with the approval of the Trustee) determine and will give notice thereof to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) and shall also use all reasonable endeavours to procure that there will at all times be furnished to any stock exchange on which the Notes are for the time being quoted or listed such information and undertakings as such stock exchange may require to be furnished in accordance with its normal requirements or in accordance with any arrangements for the time being made with any such stock exchange;

 

  (i) comply with all its obligations under the Agency Agreement and not make any modification or amendment to such Agreement without the prior written consent of the Trustee and use all reasonable endeavours to procure that the other parties thereto comply with all their respective obligations thereunder;

 

  (j) give to the Trustee notice of its intention to redeem any of the Notes pursuant to Condition 7.2 ( Redemption and Purchase – Redemption for Taxation Reasons ) or Condition 7.3 ( Redemption and Purchase – Redemption at the Option of the Issuer ) as soon as practicable and in any event not later than 14 calendar days prior to the date of publication of any notice of redemption which is given to Noteholders pursuant to Condition 13 ( Notices );

 

  (k) send to the Trustee, not later than the date of publication, two copies of each notice regarding the Notes published in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices );

 

17


  (l) send to the Trustee, at the time of sending its annual accounts and in any event not later than 180 calendar days after the end of the Issuer’s financial year and also within 14 calendar days after any request by the Trustee, a certificate of the Issuer and Guarantor in or substantially in the form set out in Schedule 4 signed by any two Directors of the Issuer (or any Director and the company secretary) and any two Directors of the Guarantor (or any Director and the company secretary or deputy company secretary) to the effect that to the best of the knowledge, information and belief of the Issuer and the Guarantor:

 

  (i) there did not exist, as at a date not more than ten calendar days prior to the date of the certificate, any Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Change of Control Triggering Event or, if such Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Change of Control Triggering Event did then exist, specifying the same; and

 

  (ii) since the last certificate (or, in the case of the first such certificate, the date hereof) each of the Issuer and the Guarantor has complied with all its obligations contained in these presents or (if such is not the case) specifying the respects in which it has not complied;

 

  (m) in the event of any Noteholder or, as the case may be, Couponholder having been refused unconditional payment of any sum due in respect of any of the Notes or the Coupons (as the case may be) by any Paying Agent forthwith procure that upon the Principal Paying Agent receiving the full amount due to enable such payments to be made it will give notice to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) that such amount has been received;

 

  (n) give to the Trustee notice of its intention to remove any Paying Agent at least seven days before notice of any such change is given to Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices );

 

  (o) deliver to the Trustee as soon as possible upon being so requested in writing by the Trustee, a certificate of the Issuer (signed on behalf of the Issuer by one of its Directors) or, as appropriate, a certificate of the Guarantor (signed on behalf of the Guarantor by one of its Directors) setting out the total number of Notes which, at the date of such certificate, are beneficially held by or on behalf of the Issuer, the Guarantor, any Subsidiary of the Issuer or the Guarantor, any holding company of the Issuer or the Guarantor or any Subsidiary of any such holding company;

 

  (p) deliver to the Trustee, as soon as practicable after delivery of any annual report of the Issuer and/or Guarantor to the Trustee pursuant to paragraph (d) of this clause and in any event within 180 calendar days of the end of its financial year, a certificate setting out a list of names of the Material Companies as at the end of such financial year or (as the case may be) as at the date of such request or, if appropriate, a certificate stating that there are no Material Companies;

 

  (q) if payments of principal or interest in respect of the Notes or the Coupons by or on behalf of the Issuer or the Guarantor shall become subject generally to the taxing jurisdiction of any territory or any political sub-division or any authority therein or thereof having power to tax other than or in addition to the United Kingdom or any such political sub-division or any such authority therein or thereof, immediately upon becoming aware thereof notify the Trustee of such event and (unless the Trustee otherwise agrees) enter forthwith into a deed supplemental to this Trust Deed, giving to the Trustee an undertaking or covenant in form and manner satisfactory to the Trustee in terms corresponding to the terms of Condition 8 ( Taxation ) with the substitution for (or, as the case may be, the addition to) the references therein to the United Kingdom or any political sub-division or any authority therein or thereof having power to tax of references to that other or additional territory or any political subdivision or any authority therein or thereof having power to tax to whose taxing jurisdiction such payments shall have become subject as aforesaid such Trust Deed also (where applicable) to modify Condition 7.2 ( Redemption for Taxation Reasons ) so that such Condition shall make reference to the other or additional territory, any political sub-division and any authority therein or thereof having power to tax; and

 

18


  (r) provide the Trustee with information that it is reasonably able to provide about the source and character for US federal tax purposes of any payment to be made by it pursuant to these presents so as to enable the Trustee to determine whether and in what amount the Trustee is obliged to make any FATCA Withholding.

 

15. REMUNERATION AND INDEMNIFICATION OF TRUSTEE

 

15.1 The Issuer shall pay to the Trustee remuneration for its services as trustee as from the date of this Trust Deed, such remuneration to be at such rate and to be paid on such dates as may from time to time be agreed between the Issuer and the Trustee. Upon the issue of any further Notes the rate of remuneration in force immediately prior thereto shall be increased by such amount as shall be agreed between the Issuer and the Trustee, such increased remuneration to be calculated from such date as shall be agreed as aforesaid. The rate of remuneration in force from time to time may upon the final redemption of the whole of the Notes be reduced by such amount as shall be agreed between the Issuer and the Trustee, such reduced remuneration to be calculated from such date as shall be agreed as aforesaid. Such remuneration shall accrue from day to day and be payable (in priority to payments to the Noteholders and Couponholders as provided in clause 10 hereof) up to and including the date when, all the Notes having become due for redemption, the redemption moneys and interest thereon to the date of redemption have been paid to the Principal Paying Agent or, as the case may be, the Trustee PROVIDED THAT if upon due presentation of any Note or Coupon or any cheque payment of the moneys due in respect thereof is improperly withheld or refused, remuneration will commence again to accrue.

 

15.2 In the event of the occurrence of an Event of Default, a Potential Event of Default or Change of Control Triggering Event the Issuer agrees that the Trustee shall be entitled to be paid additional remuneration calculated at its normal hourly rates in force from time to time. In any other case, if the Trustee considers it expedient or necessary or being requested by the Issuer or the Guarantor to undertake duties which the Trustee and the Issuer agree to be of an exceptional nature or otherwise outside the scope of the normal duties of the Trustee under these presents the Issuer shall pay to the Trustee additional remuneration as shall be agreed between them (and which may be calculated by reference to the Trustee’s normal hourly rates from time to time).

 

15.3 The Issuer shall in addition pay to the Trustee an amount equal to the amount of any value added tax or similar tax chargeable in respect of its remuneration under these presents.

 

15.4 In the event of the Trustee and the Issuer failing to agree:

 

  (a) (in a case to which the second sentence of subclause 15.1 above applies) upon the amount of the remuneration; or

 

  (b) (in a case to which subclause 15.2 above applies) upon whether such duties shall be of an exceptional nature or otherwise outside the scope of the normal duties of the Trustee under these presents, or upon the amount of such additional remuneration,

such matters shall be determined by a person (acting as an expert and not as an arbitrator) selected by the Trustee and approved by the Issuer or, failing such approval, nominated (on the application of the Trustee) by the President for the time being of The Law Society of England and Wales (the expenses involved in such nomination and the fees of such person being payable by the Issuer) and the determination of any such person shall be final and binding upon the Trustee and the Issuer.

 

15.5 The Issuer shall also pay or discharge all Liabilities properly incurred by the Trustee in relation to the preparation and execution of, the exercise of its powers and the performance of its duties under, and in any other manner in relation to, these presents, including but not limited to travelling expenses and any stamp, issue, registration, documentary and other taxes or duties paid or payable by the Trustee in connection with any action taken or contemplated by or on behalf of the Trustee for enforcing, or resolving any doubt concerning, or for any other purpose in relation to, these presents.

 

19


15.6 All amounts payable pursuant to subclause 15.5 and/or 16(cc) shall be payable by the Issuer on the date specified in a demand by the Trustee and in the case of payments actually made by the Trustee prior to such demand shall carry interest at a rate equal to the Trustee’s cost of borrowing from the date such demand is made, and in all other cases shall (if not paid within 30 calendar days after the date of such demand or, if such demand specifies that payment is to be made on an earlier date, on such earlier date) carry interest at such rate from such thirtieth calendar day of such other date specified in such demand. All remuneration payable to the Trustee shall carry interest at such rate from the due date therefor. A certificate from the Trustee as to the Trustee’s cost of borrowing on any particular date or during any particular period shall be conclusive and binding on the Issuer.

 

15.7 Unless otherwise specifically stated in any discharge of these presents the provisions of this clause and clause 16(cc) shall continue in full force and effect notwithstanding such discharge.

 

16. SUPPLEMENT TO TRUSTEE ACTS

Section 1 of the Trustee Act 2000 shall not apply to the duties of the Trustee in relation to the trusts constituted by these presents. Where there are any inconsistencies between the Trustee Acts and the provisions of these presents, the provisions of these presents shall, to the extent allowed by law, prevail and, in the case of any such inconsistency with the Trustee Act 2000, the provisions of these presents shall constitute a restriction or exclusion for the purposes of that Act.

The Trustee shall have all the powers conferred upon trustees by the Trustee Acts and by way of supplement thereto it is expressly declared as follows:

 

  (a) The Trustee may in relation to these presents act on the advice or opinion of or any information obtained from any lawyer, valuer, accountant, surveyor, banker, broker, auctioneer or other expert whether obtained by the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Trustee or otherwise and whether or not subject to any cap on liability and shall not be responsible for any Liability occasioned by so acting.

 

  (b) Any such advice, opinion or information may be sent or obtained by letter, telex, telegram, facsimile transmission, email or cable and the Trustee shall not be liable for acting on any advice, opinion or information purporting to be conveyed by any such letter, telex, telegram, facsimile transmission, email or cable although the same shall contain some error or shall not be authentic.

 

  (c) The Trustee may call for and shall be at liberty to accept as sufficient evidence of any fact or matter or the expediency of any transaction or thing a certificate signed by any two Directors (or any Director and the company secretary) of the Issuer and/or by any two Directors (or any Director and the company secretary or deputy company secretary) of the Guarantor and the Trustee shall not be bound in any such case to call for further evidence or be responsible for any Liability that may be occasioned by it or any other person acting on such certificate.

 

  (d) The Trustee shall be at liberty to hold these presents and any other documents relating thereto or to deposit them in any part of the world with any banker or banking company or company whose business includes undertaking the safe custody of documents or lawyer or firm of lawyers considered by the Trustee to be of good repute and the Trustee shall not be responsible for or required to insure against any Liability incurred in connection with any such holding or deposit and may pay all sums required to be paid on account of or in respect of any such deposit provided that, unless it is required in connection with the enforcement of the obligations of the Issuer under these presents or unless it comprises the holding or placing of such documents in the United Kingdom, the Trustee may not take any such action if a liability to stamp duty or other taxes would thereby arise.

 

  (e) The Trustee shall not be responsible for the receipt or application of the proceeds of the issue of any of the Notes by the Issuer, the exchange of any Global Note for another Global Note or definitive Notes or the delivery of any Global Note or definitive Notes to the person(s) entitled to it or them.

 

  (f)

The Trustee shall not be bound to give notice to any person of the execution of any documents comprised or referred to in these presents or to take any steps to ascertain whether any Event of

 

20


  Default, Potential Event of Default, Change of Control or Triggering Event has happened and, until it shall have actual knowledge or express notice pursuant to these presents to the contrary, the Trustee shall be entitled to assume that no Event of Default, Potential Event of Default, Change of Control or Triggering Event has happened and that each of the Issuer and the Guarantor is observing and performing all its obligations under these presents.

 

  (g) Save as expressly otherwise provided in these presents, the Trustee shall have absolute and uncontrolled discretion as to the exercise or non-exercise of its trusts, powers, authorities and discretions under these presents (the exercise or non-exercise of which as between the Trustee and the Noteholders and Couponholders shall be conclusive and binding on the Noteholders and Couponholders) and shall not be responsible for any Liability which may result from their exercise or non-exercise.

 

  (h) The Trustee shall not be liable to any person by reason of having acted upon any Extraordinary Resolution in writing or any Extraordinary or other resolution purporting to have been passed at any meeting of Noteholders in respect whereof minutes have been made and signed or any direction or request of Noteholders even though subsequent to its acting it may be found that there was some defect in the constitution of the meeting or the passing of the resolution or (in the case of an Extraordinary Resolution in writing) that not all Noteholders had signed the Extraordinary Resolution or that for any reason the resolution was not valid or binding upon such Noteholders and the relative Couponholders.

 

  (i) The Trustee shall not be liable to any person by reason of having accepted as valid or not having rejected any Note or Coupon purporting to be such and subsequently found to be forged or not authentic.

 

  (j) Any consent or approval given by the Trustee for the purposes of these presents may be given on such terms and subject to such conditions (if any) as the Trustee thinks fit and notwithstanding anything to the contrary in these presents may be given retrospectively and, in determining whether any approval required of the Trustee has been withheld reasonably or unreasonably, such determination shall be made by reference only to the interests of the Noteholders.

 

  (k) The Trustee shall not (unless and to the extent ordered so to do by a court of competent jurisdiction) be required to disclose to any Noteholder or Couponholder any information (including, without limitation, information of a confidential, financial or price sensitive nature) made available to the Trustee by the Issuer or the Guarantor or any other person in connection with these presents and no Noteholder or Couponholder shall be entitled to take any action to obtain from the Trustee any such information and the Trustee shall not (unless and to the extent ordered as aforesaid or unless, following the occurrence of an Event of Default or a Potential Event of Default, the Trustee considers it necessary or expedient in the interests of the Noteholders so to do in connection with the convening of a meeting of the Noteholders arising out of or in connection with such Event of Default or Potential Event of Default or unless the Trustee considers it necessary or expedient in the interests of the Noteholders so to do in connection with any proposal which the Issuer may put to the Noteholders) so disclose any confidential, financial, price sensitive or other information so made available.

 

  (l) Where it is necessary or desirable for any purpose in connection with these presents to convert any sum from one currency to another it shall (unless otherwise provided by these presents or required by law) be converted at such rate or rates, in accordance with such method and as at such date for the determination of such rate of exchange, as may be agreed by the Trustee in consultation with the Issuer or the Guarantor as relevant and any rate, method and date so agreed shall be binding on the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Noteholders and the Couponholders.

 

  (m) The Trustee as between itself and the Noteholders and Couponholders may determine all questions and doubts arising in relation to any of the provisions of these presents. Every such determination, whether or not relating in whole or in part to the acts or proceedings of the Trustee, shall be conclusive and shall bind the Trustee and the Noteholders and Couponholders.

 

21


  (n) In connection with the exercise by it of any of its trusts, powers, authorities or discretions under these presents (including, without limitation, any modification, waiver, authorisation or determination), the Trustee shall have regard to the general interests of the Noteholders as a class and shall not have regard to any interests arising from circumstances particular to individual Noteholders or Couponholders (whatever their number) and, in particular but without limitation, shall not have regard to the consequences of such exercise for individual Noteholders or Couponholders (whatever their number) resulting from their being for any purpose domiciled or resident in, or otherwise connected with, or subject to the jurisdiction of, any particular territory and the Trustee shall not be entitled to require, nor shall any Noteholder or Couponholder be entitled to claim, from the Issuer or any other person any indemnification or payment in respect of any tax consequence of any such exercise upon individual Noteholders or Couponholders except, in the case of the Issuer, to the extent provided for in Condition 8 ( Taxation ) and/or any undertaking given in addition thereto or in substitution therefor under these presents.

 

  (o) Any trustee of these presents being a lawyer, accountant, broker or other person engaged in any profession or business shall be entitled to charge and be paid all usual professional and other charges for business transacted and acts done by him or his firm in connection with the trusts of these presents and also his reasonable charges in addition to disbursements for all other work and business done and all time spent by him or his firm in connection with matters arising in connection with these presents.

 

  (p) The Trustee may whenever it thinks fit delegate by power of attorney or otherwise to any person or persons or fluctuating body of persons (whether being a joint trustee of these presents or not but not being a person or body of persons to whom the Issuer may reasonably object) all or any of its trusts, powers, authorities and discretions under these presents except that the Trustee may not delegate the power of certification of material prejudice referred to in Condition 10 ( Events of Default ) or any determination referred to in clause 16(n) or the right to give notice to the Issuer declaring that the Notes are immediately due and repayable as referred to in Condition 10 ( Events of Default ) unless before such delegation the Trustee provides to the Issuer confirmation in writing that the Trustee has been advised by its legal advisers that it would be appropriate to delegate that power or, as the case may be, right (with or without any other trusts, powers, authorities and discretions) to another person or persons or fluctuating body of persons because of a conflict of interest, or possible conflict of interest, and/or any other similar circumstance which the Trustee might face or be subjected to as the Trustee of these presents if it were not to delegate that right. Such delegation may be made upon such terms (including (subject to the consent of the Trustee) power to sub-delegate) and subject to such conditions and regulations as the Trustee may in the interests of the Noteholders think fit. Provided that it shall have exercised reasonable care in the selection of such delegate, the Trustee shall not be under any obligation to supervise the proceedings or acts of any such delegate or sub-delegate or be in any way responsible for any Liability incurred by reason of any misconduct or default on the part of any such delegate or sub-delegate. The Trustee shall within a reasonable time after any such delegation or any renewal, extension or termination thereof give notice thereof to the Issuer.

 

  (q) The Trustee may in the conduct of the trusts of these presents instead of acting personally employ and pay an agent (whether being a lawyer or other professional person but not being a person to whom the Issuer may reasonably object) to transact or conduct, or concur in transacting or conducting, any business and to do, or concur in doing, all acts required to be done in connection with these presents (including the receipt and payment of money). Provided that it shall have exercised reasonable care in the selection of such agent, the Trustee shall not be in any way responsible for any Liability incurred by reason of any misconduct or default on the part of any such agent or be bound to supervise the proceedings or acts of any such agent.

 

  (r)

The Trustee may appoint and pay any person to act as a custodian or nominee on any terms in relation to such assets of the trusts constituted by these presents as the Trustee may determine,

 

22


  including for the purpose of depositing with a custodian these presents or any document relating to the trusts constituted by these presents and the Trustee shall not be responsible for any Liability incurred by reason of the misconduct, omission or default on the part of any person appointed by it hereunder or be bound to supervise the proceedings or acts of such person; the Trustee is not obliged to appoint a custodian if the Trustee invests in securities payable to bearer.

 

  (s) The Trustee shall not be responsible for the execution, delivery, legality, effectiveness, adequacy, genuineness, validity, performance, enforceability or admissibility in evidence of these presents or any other document relating or expressed to be supplemental thereto and shall not be liable for any failure to obtain any licence, consent or other authority for the execution, delivery, legality, effectiveness, adequacy, genuineness, validity, performance, enforceability or admissibility in evidence of these presents or any other document relating or expressed to be supplemental thereto.

 

  (t) The Trustee may call for and shall rely on any records, certificate or other document of or to be issued by Euroclear or Clearstream, Luxembourg in relation to any determination of the nominal amount of Notes represented by a Global Note standing to the account of any person. Any such records, certificate or other document shall be conclusive and binding for all purposes. Any such certificate or other document may comprise any form of statement or print out of electronic records provided by the relevant clearing system in accordance with its usual procedures and in which the holder of a particular principal amount of Notes is clearly identified together with the amount of such holding. The Trustee shall not be liable to any person by reason of having accepted as valid or not having rejected any such records, certificate or other document to such effect purporting to be issued by Euroclear or Clearstream, Luxembourg and subsequently found to be forged or not authentic.

 

  (u) The Trustee shall not be responsible to any person for failing to request, require or receive any legal opinion relating to the Notes or for checking or commenting upon the content of any such legal opinion and shall not be responsible for any Liability incurred thereby.

 

  (v) Subject to the requirements, if any, of the London Stock Exchange, any corporation into which the Trustee shall be merged or with which it shall be consolidated or any company resulting from any such merger or consolidation shall be a party hereto and shall be the Trustee under these presents without executing or filing any paper or document or any further act on the part of the parties thereto.

 

  (w) The Trustee shall not be bound to take any action in connection with these presents or any obligations arising pursuant thereto, including, without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, forming any opinion or employing any financial adviser, where it is not reasonably satisfied that the Issuer will be able to indemnify it against all Liabilities which may be incurred in connection with such action and may demand prior to taking any such action that there be paid to it in advance such sums as it reasonably considers (without prejudice to any further demand) shall be sufficient so to indemnify it and on such demand being made the Issuer shall be obliged to make payment of all such sums in full.

 

  (x) No provision of these presents shall require the Trustee to do anything which may (i) be illegal or contrary to applicable law or regulation; or (ii) cause it to expend or risk its own funds or otherwise incur any Liability in the performance of any of its duties or in the exercise of any of its rights, powers or discretions, if it shall have reasonable grounds for believing that repayment of such funds or adequate indemnity against such risk or Liability is not assured to it.

 

  (y) Unless notified to the contrary, the Trustee shall be entitled to assume without enquiry (other than requesting a certificate pursuant to subclause 14(o)) that no Notes are held by, for the benefit of, or on behalf of, the Issuer, the Guarantor, any Subsidiary of the Issuer and the Guarantor, any holding company of the Issuer and the Guarantor or any other Subsidiary of such holding company.

 

23


  (z) The Trustee shall have no responsibility whatsoever to the Issuer, the Guarantor, any Noteholder or Couponholder or any other person for the maintenance of or failure to maintain any rating of any of the Notes by any rating agency.

 

  (aa) The Trustee shall not be responsible for, or for investigating any matter which is the subject of, any recital, statement, representation, warranty or covenant of any person contained in these presents, or any other agreement or document relating to the transactions contemplated in these presents or under such other agreement or document.

 

  (bb) The Trustee shall not be liable or responsible for any Liabilities or inconvenience which may result from anything done or omitted to be done by it if such act or omission is in accordance with the provisions of these presents.

 

  (cc) Without prejudice to the right of indemnity by law given to trustees and subject to clause 17, each of the Issuer and the Guarantor shall severally indemnify the Trustee and every Appointee and keep it or him indemnified against all Liabilities to which it or he may be or become subject or which may be incurred by it or him in the preparation and execution or purported execution of any of its or his trusts, powers, authorities and discretions under these presents or its or his functions under any such appointment or in respect of any other matter or thing done or omitted in any way relating to these presents or any such appointment.

 

  (dd) The Trustee shall be entitled to deduct any amount arising as a result of FATCA Withholding and shall have no obligation to gross up any payment hereunder or to pay any additional amount as a result of such FATCA Withholding.

 

17. TRUSTEE’S LIABILITY

Nothing in these presents shall in any case in which the Trustee has failed to show the degree of care and diligence required of it as trustee having regard to the provisions of these presents conferring on it any trusts, powers, authorities or discretions exempt the Trustee from or indemnify it against any liability for breach of trust or any liability which by virtue of any rule of law would otherwise attach to it in respect of any negligence, default or breach of duty of which it may be guilty in relation to its duties under these presents.

 

18. TRUSTEE CONTRACTING WITH THE ISSUER AND THE GUARANTOR

Neither the Trustee nor any director or officer or holding company, Subsidiary or associated company of a corporation acting as a trustee under these presents shall by reason of its or his fiduciary position be in any way precluded from:

 

  (a) entering into or being interested in any contract or financial or other transaction or arrangement with the Issuer or the Guarantor or any person or body corporate associated with the Issuer or the Guarantor (including without limitation any contract, transaction or arrangement of a banking or insurance nature or any contract, transaction or arrangement in relation to the making of loans or the provision of financial facilities or financial advice to, or the purchase, placing or underwriting of or the subscribing or procuring subscriptions for or otherwise acquiring, holding or dealing with, or acting as paying agent in respect of, the Notes or any other notes, bonds stocks, shares, debenture stock, debentures or other securities of, the Issuer or the Guarantor or any person or body corporate associated as aforesaid); or

 

  (b) accepting or holding the trusteeship of any other trust deed constituting or securing any other securities issued by or relating to the Issuer or the Guarantor or any such person or body corporate so associated or any other office of profit under the Issuer or the Guarantor or any such person or body corporate so associated,

and shall be entitled to exercise and enforce its rights, comply with its obligations and perform its duties under or in relation to any such contract, transaction or arrangement as is referred to in (a) above or, as the

 

24


case may be, any such trusteeship or office of profit as is referred to in (b) above without regard to the interests of the Noteholders and notwithstanding that the same may be contrary or prejudicial to the interests of the Noteholders and shall not be responsible for any Liability occasioned to the Noteholders thereby and shall be entitled to retain and shall not be in any way liable to account for any profit made or share of brokerage or commission or remuneration or other amount or benefit received thereby or in connection therewith.

Where any holding company, subsidiary or associated company of the Trustee or any director or officer of the Trustee acting other than in his capacity as such a director or officer has any information, the Trustee shall not thereby be deemed also to have knowledge of such information and, unless it shall have actual knowledge of such information, shall not be responsible for any loss suffered by Noteholders resulting from the Trustee’s failing to take such information into account in acting or refraining from acting under or in relation to these presents.

 

19. WAIVER, AUTHORISATION AND DETERMINATION

 

19.1 The Trustee may without the consent or sanction of the Noteholders and without prejudice to its rights in respect of any subsequent breach, Event of Default or Potential Event of Default from time to time and at any time but only if and in so far as in its opinion the interests of the Noteholders shall not be materially prejudiced thereby waive or authorise any breach or proposed breach by the Issuer or the Guarantor of any of the covenants or provisions contained in these presents or determine that any Event of Default or Potential Event of Default shall not be treated as such for the purposes of these presents PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT the Trustee shall not exercise any powers conferred on it by this clause in contravention of any express direction given by Extraordinary Resolution or by a request under Condition 11 ( Enforcement ) but so that no such direction or request shall affect any waiver, authorisation or determination previously given or made. Any such waiver, authorisation or determination may be given or made on such terms and subject to such conditions (if any) as the Trustee may determine, shall be binding on the Noteholders and the Couponholders and, if, but only if, the Trustee shall so require, shall be notified by the Issuer to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) as soon as practicable thereafter.

MODIFICATION

 

19.2 The Trustee may without the consent or sanction of the Noteholders or Couponholders at any time and from time to time concur with the Issuer and the Guarantor in making any modification (a) to these presents (including without limitation the proviso to paragraph 7 of Schedule 3 or any matters referred to in that proviso) which in the opinion of the Trustee it may be proper to make PROVIDED THAT the Trustee is of the opinion that such modification will not be materially prejudicial to the interests of the Noteholders or (b) to these presents if in the opinion of the Trustee such modification is of a formal, minor or technical nature or to correct a manifest error or to comply with mandatory provisions of applicable law. Any such modification may be made on such terms and subject to such conditions (if any) as the Trustee may determine, shall be binding upon the Noteholders and the Couponholders and, unless the Trustee agrees otherwise, shall be notified by the Issuer to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) as soon as practicable thereafter.

BREACH

 

19.3 Any breach of or failure to comply with any such terms and conditions (if any) that the Trustee may determine as are referred to in subclauses 19.1 and 19.2 shall constitute a default by the Issuer or the Guarantor (as the case may be) in the performance or observance of a covenant or provision binding on it under or pursuant to these presents.

 

25


20. HOLDER OF DEFINITIVE NOTE ASSUMED TO BE COUPONHOLDER

 

20.1 Wherever in these presents the Trustee is required or entitled to exercise a power, trust, authority or discretion under these presents, except as ordered by a court of competent jurisdiction or as required by applicable law, the Trustee shall, notwithstanding that it may have notice to the contrary, assume that each Noteholder is the holder of all Coupons appertaining to each Note in definitive form of which he is the holder.

NO NOTICE TO COUPONHOLDERS

 

20.2 Neither the Trustee nor the Issuer nor the Guarantor shall be required to give any notice to the Couponholders for any purpose under these presents and the Couponholders shall be deemed for all purposes to have notice of the contents of any notice given to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ).

ENTITLEMENT TO TREAT HOLDER AS ABSOLUTE OWNER

 

20.3 The Issuer, the Guarantor, the Trustee and the Paying Agents may (to the fullest extent permitted by applicable laws) deem and treat the holder of any Note or of a particular principal amount of the Notes and the holder of any Coupon as the absolute owner of such Note, principal amount or Coupon, as the case may be, for all purposes (whether or not such Note, principal amount or Coupon shall be overdue and notwithstanding any notice of ownership thereof or of trust or other interest with regard thereto, any notice of loss or theft thereof or any writing thereon), and the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Trustee and the Paying Agents shall not be affected by any notice to the contrary. All payments made to any such holder shall be valid and, to the extent of the sums so paid, effective to satisfy and discharge the liability for the moneys payable in respect of such Note, principal amount or Coupon, as the case may be.

 

21. SUBSTITUTION

 

21.1   (a)  

The Trustee may without the consent of the Noteholders or the Couponholders

at any time agree with the Issuer and the Guarantor to the substitution (a) in place of the Issuer (or of the previous substitute under this clause) as the principal debtor under these presents of the Guarantor, a successor in business of the Issuer or the Guarantor, a holding company of the Issuer or the Guarantor or any Subsidiary of the Guarantor; or (b) in place of the Guarantor (or of the previous substitute under this clause) as the guarantor in respect of these presents of a successor in business to the Guarantor or a holding company of the Guarantor (such substituted company being hereinafter called the “ New Company ”), provided in each case that a deed supplemental to this Trust Deed is executed or some other form of undertaking is given by the New Company in form and manner satisfactory to the Trustee, agreeing to be bound by the provisions of these presents with any consequential amendments which the Trustee may deem appropriate as fully as if the New Company had been named in these presents as the principal debtor in place of the Issuer (or of the previous substitute under the clause) or as the guarantor in place of the Guarantor and provided further that (except where the New Company is the Guarantor) the Guarantor unconditionally and irrevocably guarantees all amounts payable under these presents to the satisfaction of the Trustee.

 

  (b) The following further conditions shall apply to (a) above:

 

  (i) the Issuer, the Guarantor and the New Company shall comply with such other requirements as the Trustee may direct in the interests of the Noteholders;

 

  (ii)

where the New Company is incorporated, domiciled or resident in, or subject generally to the taxing jurisdiction of, a territory other than or in addition to the Relevant Jurisdiction or any political sub-division or any authority therein or thereof having power to tax, undertakings or covenants shall be given by the New Company in terms corresponding to the provisions of Condition 8 ( Taxation ) with the substitution for (or, as the case may be, the addition to) the

 

26


  references to the Relevant Jurisdiction of references to that other or additional territory in which the New Company is incorporated, domiciled or resident or to whose taxing jurisdiction it is subject and (where applicable) Condition 7.2 ( Redemption and Purchase – Redemption for Taxation Reasons ) shall be modified accordingly;

 

  (iii) without prejudice to the rights of reliance of the Trustee under the immediately following subclause (iv), the Trustee is satisfied that the relevant transaction is not materially prejudicial to the interests of the Noteholders; and

 

  (iv) if two Directors of the New Company (or other officers acceptable to the Trustee) shall certify that the New Company is solvent both at the time at which the relevant transaction is proposed to be effected and immediately thereafter (which certificate the Trustee may rely upon absolutely) the Trustee shall not be under any duty to have regard to the financial condition, profits or prospects of the New Company or to compare the same with those of the Issuer or the previous substitute under this clause as applicable.

 

21.2 Any such supplemental trust deed or undertaking shall, if so expressed, operate to release the Issuer or the Guarantor or the previous substitute, as the case may be, as aforesaid from all of its obligations as principal debtor under these presents. Not later than 14 calendar days after the execution of such documents and compliance with such requirements, the New Company shall give notice thereof to the Noteholders in the manner provided in Condition 13 ( Notices ). Upon the execution of such documents and compliance with such requirements, the New Company shall be deemed to be named in these presents as the principal debtor in place of the Issuer (or in place of the previous substitute under this clause) or, as the case may be, as guarantor in place of the Guarantor under these presents and these presents shall be deemed to be modified in such manner as shall be necessary to give effect to the above provisions and, without limitation, references in these presents to the Issuer or the Guarantor (as applicable) shall, unless the context otherwise requires, be deemed to be or include references to the New Company.

 

22. CURRENCY INDEMNITY

Each of the Issuer and the Guarantor shall severally indemnify the Trustee, every Appointee, the Noteholders and the Couponholders and keep them indemnified against:

 

  (a) any Liability incurred by any of them arising from the non-payment by the Issuer or the Guarantor of any amount due to the Trustee or the Noteholders or Couponholders under these presents by reason of any variation in the rates of exchange between those used for the purposes of calculating the amount due under a judgment or order in respect thereof and those prevailing at the date of actual payment by the Issuer or the Guarantor; and

 

  (b) any deficiency arising or resulting from any variation in rates of exchange between (i) the date as of which the local currency equivalent of the amounts due or contingently due under these presents (other than this clause) is calculated for the purposes of any bankruptcy, insolvency or liquidation of the Issuer or the Guarantor and (ii) the final date for ascertaining the amount of claims in such bankruptcy, insolvency or liquidation. The amount of such deficiency shall be deemed not to be reduced by any variation in rates of exchange occurring between the said final date and the date of any distribution of assets in connection with any such bankruptcy, insolvency or liquidation.

The above indemnities and the indemnity set out in clause 16(cc) shall constitute obligations of the Issuer and the Guarantor separate and independent from their obligations under the other provisions of these presents and shall apply irrespective of any indulgence granted by the Trustee or the Noteholders or the Couponholders from time to time and shall continue in full force and effect notwithstanding the judgment or filing of any proof or proofs in any bankruptcy, insolvency or liquidation of the Issuer or the Guarantor for a liquidated sum or sums in respect of amounts due under these presents (other than this clause). Any such deficiency as aforesaid shall be deemed to constitute a loss suffered by the Noteholders and Couponholders and no proof or evidence of any actual loss shall be required by the Issuer or the Guarantor or their liquidator or liquidators.

 

27


23. NEW TRUSTEE

 

23.1 The power to appoint a new trustee of these presents shall, subject as hereinafter provided, be vested in the Issuer but no person shall be appointed who shall not previously have been approved by an Extraordinary Resolution. One or more persons may hold office as trustee or trustees of these presents but such trustee or trustees shall be or include a Trust Corporation. Whenever there shall be more than two trustees of these presents the majority of such trustees shall be competent to execute and exercise all the duties, powers, trusts, authorities and discretions vested in the Trustee by these presents provided that a Trust Corporation shall be included in such majority. Any appointment of a new trustee of these presents shall as soon as practicable thereafter be notified by the Issuer to the Principal Paying Agent and the Noteholders.

SEPARATE AND CO-TRUSTEES

 

23.2 Notwithstanding the provisions of subclause 23.1 above, the Trustee may, upon giving prior notice to the Issuer and the Guarantor (but without the consent of the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Noteholders or the Couponholders), appoint any person established or resident in any jurisdiction (whether a Trust Corporation or not) to act either as a separate trustee or as a co-trustee jointly with the Trustee:

 

  (a) if the Trustee considers such appointment to be in the interests of the Noteholders;

 

  (b) for the purposes of conforming to any legal requirements, restrictions or conditions in any jurisdiction in which any particular act or acts is or are to be performed; or

 

  (c) for the purposes of obtaining a judgment in any jurisdiction or the enforcement in any jurisdiction of either a judgment already obtained or any of the provisions of these presents against the Issuer and/or the Guarantor.

Each of the Issuer and the Guarantor irrevocably appoints the Trustee to be its attorney in its name and on its behalf to execute any such instrument of appointment. Such a person shall (subject always to the provisions of these presents) have such trusts, powers, authorities and discretions (not exceeding those conferred on the Trustee by these presents) and such duties and obligations as shall be conferred or imposed by the instrument of appointment. The Trustee shall have power in like manner to remove any such person. Such reasonable remuneration as the Trustee may pay to any such person, together with any attributable Liabilities incurred by it in performing its function as such separate trustee or co-trustee, shall for the purposes of these presents be treated as Liabilities incurred by the Trustee.

 

24. TRUSTEE’S RETIREMENT AND REMOVAL

A trustee of these presents may retire at any time on giving not less than 60 calendar days’ prior written notice to the Issuer and the Guarantor without giving any reason and without being responsible for any Liabilities incurred by reason of such retirement. The Noteholders may by Extraordinary Resolution remove any trustee or trustees for the time being of these presents. The Issuer and the Guarantor undertake that in the event of the only trustee of these presents which is a Trust Corporation (for the avoidance of doubt, disregarding for this purpose any separate or co-trustee appointed under subclause 23.2) giving notice under this clause or being removed by Extraordinary Resolution they will use their best endeavours to procure that a new trustee of these presents being a Trust Corporation is appointed as soon as reasonably practicable thereafter. The retirement or removal of any such trustee shall not become effective until a successor trustee being a Trust Corporation is appointed. If, in such circumstances, no appointment of such a new trustee has become effective within 60 calendar days of the date of such notice or Extraordinary Resolution, the Trustee shall be entitled to appoint a Trust Corporation as trustee of these presents, but no such appointment shall take effect unless previously approved by an Extraordinary Resolution.

 

25. TRUSTEE’S POWERS TO BE ADDITIONAL

The powers conferred upon the Trustee by these presents shall be in addition to any powers which may from time to time be vested in the Trustee by the general law or as a holder of any of the Notes or Coupons.

 

28


26. NOTICES

Any notice or demand to the Issuer, the Guarantor or the Trustee to be given, made or served for any purposes under these presents shall be given, made or served by sending the same by pre-paid post (first class if inland, first class airmail if overseas) or facsimile transmission or by email or by delivering it by hand as follows:

 

to the Issuer:    Pearson Funding Five plc
   80 Strand
   London WC2R 0RL
   United Kingdom
   Facsimile No. 020 7010 6714
   Email: plctreasury@pearson.com
   (Attention: Directors)
   With a copy to:
   Pearson plc
   80 Strand
   London WC2R 0RL
   United Kingdom
   Facsimile No.: 020 7010 6633
   Email: companysecretary@pearson.com
   (Attention: General Counsel)
to the Guarantor:    Pearson plc
   80 Strand
   London WC2R 0RL
   United Kingdom
   Facsimile No.: 020 7010 6714
   Email: plctreasury@pearson.com
   (Attention: Senior Vice President, Treasury)
   With a copy to:
   Pearson plc
   80 Strand
   London WC2R 0RL
   United Kingdom
   Facsimile No.: 020 7010 6633
   Email: companysecretary@pearson.com
   (Attention: General Counsel)
to the Trustee:    The Law Debenture Trust Corporation p.l.c.
   Fifth Floor
   100 Wood Street
   London EC2V 7EX
   United Kingdom
   Facsimile No.: 020 7606 0643
   Email: LegalNotices@lawdeb.com
   (Attention: The Manager, Commercial Trusts
  

(Ref: 201280))

 

29


or to such other address or facsimile number as shall have been notified (in accordance with this clause) to the other parties hereto and any notice or demand sent by post as aforesaid shall be deemed to have been given, made or served two calendar days in the case of inland post or seven calendar days in the case of overseas post after despatch and any notice or demand sent by facsimile transmission as aforesaid shall be deemed to have been given, made or served at the time of despatch provided that in the case of a notice or demand given by facsimile transmission a confirmation of transmission is received by the sending party and such notice or demand shall forthwith be confirmed by post. The failure of the addressee to receive such confirmation shall not invalidate the relevant notice or demand given by facsimile transmission.

Such communications will take effect if sent by email (a) in the case of communications to the Trustee, upon written confirmation of receipt from the Trustee (for the avoidance of doubt an automatically generated “received” or “read” receipt will not constitute written confirmation) and (b) otherwise, when received as evidenced by a read receipt, and, where a particular department or officer is specified as part of its address details provided under this clause 26, if addressed to that department or officer.

 

27. GOVERNING LAW

These presents and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with these presents are governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, English law.

 

28. COUNTERPARTS

This Trust Deed and any deed supplemental hereto may be executed and delivered in any number of counterparts, all of which, taken together, shall constitute one and the same deed and any party to this Trust Deed or any deed supplemental hereto may enter into the same by executing and delivering a counterpart.

 

29. CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT 1999

A person who is not a party to these presents has no rights under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce any term of these presents, but this does not affect any right or remedy of a third party which exists or is available apart from that Act.

IN WITNESS whereof this Trust Deed has been executed as a deed by the Issuer, the Guarantor and the Trustee and delivered on the date first stated on page 4.

 

30


SCHEDULE 1

FORM OF GLOBAL NOTES

PART 1

FORM OF TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE

PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC

(Incorporated with limited liability under the laws of

England and Wales with registered number 08422787)

ISIN: XS1228153661            Common Code: 122815366

TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE

Representing up to

€500,000,000 1.375 PER CENT. GUARANTEED

NOTES DUE 2025

Unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed

as to payment of principal and interest by

PEARSON PLC

(Incorporated under the laws of

England and Wales with registered number 00053723)

This Note is a temporary Global Note without interest coupons in respect of a duly authorised issue of Notes of Pearson Funding Five plc (the “ Issuer ”), designated as specified in the title hereof (the “ Notes ”), limited to the aggregate principal amount of five hundred million euro (€500,000,000) and constituted by a Trust Deed dated 6 May 2015 (the “ Trust Deed ”) between the Issuer, Pearson PLC as guarantor (the “ Guarantor ”) and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation p.l.c. as trustee (the trustee for the time being thereof being herein called the “ Trustee ”). References herein to the Conditions (or to any particular numbered Condition) shall be to the Conditions (or that particular one of them) set out in Schedule 2 to the Trust Deed. The nominal amount of Notes represented by this temporary Global Note shall be the aggregate principal amount from time to time entered in the records of both Euroclear Bank SA/NV (“ Euroclear ”) and Clearstream Banking, société anonyme (“ Clearstream, Luxembourg ” and with Euroclear and any other clearing system appointed by the Trustee together the relevant “ Clearing Systems ”).

The records of the relevant Clearing Systems (which expression in this temporary Global Note means the records that each relevant Clearing System holds for its customers which reflect the amount of such customer’s interest in the Notes) shall be conclusive evidence of the nominal amount of Notes represented by this Global Note and, for these purposes, a statement issued by a relevant Clearing System (which statement shall be made available to the bearer upon request) stating the nominal amount of Notes represented by this Global Note at any time shall be conclusive evidence of the records of the relevant Clearing System at that time.

 

1. Promise to Pay

Subject as provided in this temporary Global Note the Issuer promises to pay to the bearer the principal amount of this temporary Global Note (being at the date hereof five hundred million euro (€500,000,000)) on 6 May 2025 (or on such earlier date as the said principal amount may become repayable in accordance with the Conditions or the Trust Deed) and to pay interest annually in arrear on 6 May on the principal

 

31


amount from time to time of this temporary Global Note at the rate of 1.375 per cent. per annum together with such other amounts (if any) as may be payable, all subject to and in accordance with the Conditions and the provisions of the Trust Deed.

 

2. Exchange for Permanent Global Note and Purchases

This temporary Global Note is exchangeable in whole or in part upon the request of the bearer for a further global note in respect of up to €500,000,000 aggregate principal amount of the Notes (the “ Permanent Global Note ”) only on and subject to the terms and conditions set out below.

On and after 15 June 2015 (the “ Exchange Date ”) interests in this temporary Global Note may be exchanged in whole or in part at the specified office of the Principal Paying Agent (or such other place as the Trustee may agree) for interests recorded in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems in a Permanent Global Note and the Issuer shall procure that interests in the Permanent Global Note shall be entered pro rata in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems such that the nominal amount represented by this temporary Global Note shall be reduced by the principal amount of this temporary Global Note so exchanged, provided that if definitive Notes (together with the Coupons appertaining thereto) have already been issued in exchange for all the Notes represented for the time being by the Permanent Global Note, then this temporary Global Note may thereafter be exchanged only for definitive Notes (together with the Coupons appertaining thereto) and in such circumstances references herein to the Permanent Global Note shall be construed accordingly and provided further that the Permanent Global Note shall be issued and delivered (or, as the case may be, endorsed) only if and to the extent that there shall have been presented to the Issuer a certificate from the relevant Clearing System(s) to the effect that it has received from or in respect of a person entitled to a beneficial interest in a particular nominal amount of the Notes represented by this Global Note (as shown by its records) a certificate of non-US beneficial ownership in the form required by it.

Any person who would, but for the provisions of this temporary Global Note, the Permanent Global Note and the Trust Deed, otherwise be entitled to receive a definitive Note or definitive Notes shall not be entitled to require the exchange of an interest in this temporary Global Note for a like interest in the Permanent Global Note unless and until he shall have delivered or caused to be delivered to the relevant Clearing System(s), a certificate of non-US beneficial ownership in the form required by it.

Upon (a) any exchange of interests in this temporary Global Note for a like interests in the Permanent Global Note or (b) the purchase by or on behalf of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Subsidiary of the Issuer or Guarantor and cancellation of an interest in this temporary Global Note recorded in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems in accordance with the Conditions, the Issuer shall procure that the portion of the principal amount of this temporary Global Note so exchanged or purchased and cancelled shall be entered pro rata in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems, whereupon the principal amount hereof shall be reduced for all purposes by the amount so exchanged or so purchased and cancelled and, in each case, endorsed.

 

3. Payments

Until the entire principal amount of this temporary Global Note has been extinguished, this temporary Global Note shall in all respects be entitled to the same benefits as the definitive Notes for the time being represented hereby and shall be entitled to the benefit of and be bound by the Trust Deed, except that the holder of this temporary Global Note shall not (unless upon due presentation of this temporary Global Note for exchange, issue and delivery (or, as the case may be, endorsement) of the Permanent Global Note is improperly withheld or refused and such withholding or refusal is continuing at the relevant payment date) be entitled (a) to receive any payment of interest on this temporary Global Note except (subject to (b) below) upon certification as hereinafter provided or (b) on and after the Exchange Date, to receive any payment on this temporary Global Note. Upon any payment of principal or interest on this temporary Global Note the Issuer shall procure that the amount so paid shall be recorded in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems.

 

32


Payments of interest in respect of Notes for the time being represented by this temporary Global Note shall be made to the bearer only upon presentation to the Issuer of a certificate from the relevant Clearing System(s) to the effect that it has received from or in respect of a person entitled to a beneficial interest in a particular nominal amount of the Notes represented by this Global Note (as shown by its records) a certificate of non-US beneficial ownership in the form required by it, and each payment so made will discharge the Issuer’s obligations in respect thereof. Any person who would, but for the provisions of this temporary Global Note and of the Trust Deed, otherwise be beneficially entitled to a payment of interest on this temporary Global Note shall not be entitled to require such payment unless and until he shall have delivered or caused to be delivered to the relevant Clearing System(s) a certificate of non-US beneficial ownership in the form required by it.

Upon payment in respect of the Notes represented by this temporary Global Note, the Issuer shall procure that the amount so paid shall be entered pro rata in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems, but any failure to make such entries shall not affect the discharge referred to in the previous paragraph.

All payments of any amounts payable and paid to the bearer of this temporary Global Note shall be valid and, to the extent of the sums so paid, effectual to satisfy and discharge the liability for the moneys payable hereon, on the Permanent Global Note and on the relevant definitive Notes and Coupons.

 

4. Accountholders

For so long as all of the Notes are represented by one or both of the Permanent Global Note and this temporary Global Note and such Global Note(s) is/are held on behalf of the relevant Clearing Systems, each person who is for the time being shown in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems as the holder of a particular principal amount of such Notes (each an Accountholder) (in which regard any certificate or other document issued by the relevant Clearing Systems as to the principal amount of such Notes standing to the account of any person shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding for all purposes) shall be treated as the holder of such principal amount of such Notes for all purposes (including for the purposes of any quorum requirements of, or the right to demand a poll at, meetings of the Noteholders) other than with respect to the payment of principal and interest on such Notes, the right to which shall be vested, as against the Issuer, the Guarantor and the Trustee, solely in the bearer of the relevant Global Note in accordance with and subject to its terms and the terms of the Trust Deed. Each Accountholder must look solely to the relevant Clearing Systems for its share of each payment made to the bearer of the relevant Global Note.

 

5. Notices

For so long as all of the Notes are represented by one or both of the Permanent Global Note and this temporary Global Note and such Global Note(s) is/are held on behalf of the relevant Clearing Systems, notices to Noteholders may be given by delivery of the relevant notice to the relevant Clearing Systems for communication to the relevant Accountholders rather than by publication as required by Condition 13 ( Notices ) provided that, so long as the Notes are admitted to the official list maintained by the Financial Conduct Authority in its capacity as the UK Listing Authority (the “ UKLA ”) and admitted to trading on the London Stock Exchange plc’s regulated market for listed securities, all requirements of the UKLA have been complied with. Any such notice shall be deemed to have been given to the Noteholders on the second day after the day on which such notice is delivered to the relevant Clearing Systems as aforesaid.

Whilst any Notes held by a Noteholder are represented by a Global Note, notices to be given by such Noteholder may be given by such Noteholder to the Principal Paying Agent through the relevant Clearing Systems, in such a manner as the Principal Paying Agent and the relevant Clearing Systems may approve for this purpose.

 

33


6. Prescription

Claims against the Issuer and the Guarantor in respect of principal and interest on the Notes represented by the Permanent Global Note or this temporary Global Note will be prescribed after 10 years (in the case of principal) and five years (in the case of interest) from the Relevant Date (as defined in Condition 8 ( Taxation )).

 

7. Option to Purchase

For so long as all of the Notes are represented by one or both of the Global Notes and such Global Note(s) is/are held on behalf of the relevant Clearing Systems, the option of the Noteholders provided for in Condition 7.4 ( Redemption and Purchase – Offer to Purchase upon a Change of Control Triggering Event ) may be exercised by an Accountholder giving notice to the Principal Paying Agent in accordance with the standard procedures of the relevant Clearing Systems (which may include notice being given on his instructions by the relevant Clearing Systems or any common safe-keeper for them to the Principal Paying Agent by electronic means) of the principal amount of the Notes in respect of which such option is exercised and at the same time presenting or procuring the presentation of the relevant Global Note to the Principal Paying Agent for notation accordingly within the time limits set forth in that Condition.

 

8. Authentication and Effectuation

This temporary Global Note shall not be or become valid or obligatory for any purpose unless and until authenticated by or on behalf of the Principal Paying Agent and effectuated by the entity appointed as common safe-keeper by the relevant Clearing Systems.

 

9. Governing Law

This temporary Global Note and any non contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with these presents is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, the laws of England.

 

10. Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999

No rights are conferred on any person under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce any term of this temporary Global Note, but this does not affect any right or remedy of any person which exists or is available apart from that Act.

 

34


IN WITNESS whereof the Issuer has caused this temporary Global Note to be signed manually or in facsimile by a person duly authorised on its behalf.

 

PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC
By:  

 

  (Duly authorised )
Issued in London, England on 6 May 2015.
Certificate of authentication
This temporary Global Note is duly authenticated without recourse, warranty or liability.

Duly authorised

for and on behalf of

The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch as Principal Paying Agent
Certificate of effectuation
This temporary Global Note is effectuated without recourse, warranty or liability.

 

Duly authorised

for and on behalf of

Euroclear Bank SA/NV

as common safe-keeper

 

35


PART 2

FORM OF PERMANENT GLOBAL NOTE

ANY UNITED STATES PERSON WHO HOLDS THIS OBLIGATION WILL BE SUBJECT TO LIMITATIONS UNDER THE UNITED STATES INCOME TAX LAWS, INCLUDING THE LIMITATIONS PROVIDED IN SECTIONS 165(j) AND 1287(a) OF THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE.

PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC

(Incorporated with limited liability under the laws of

England and Wales with registered number 08422787)

ISIN: XS1228153661            Common Code: 122815366

PERMANENT GLOBAL NOTE

representing up to

€500,000,000 1.375 PER CENT. GUARANTEED

NOTES DUE 2025

Unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed

as to payment of principal and interest by

PEARSON PLC

(Incorporated with limited liability under the laws of England and Wales with

registered number 00053723)

This Note is a permanent Global Note without interest coupons in respect of a duly authorised issue of Notes of Pearson Funding Five plc (the “ Issuer ”), designated as specified in the title hereof (the “ Notes ”), limited to the aggregate principal amount of up to five hundred million euro (€500,000,000) and constituted by a Trust Deed dated 6 May 2015 (the “ Trust Deed ”) between the Issuer, Pearson plc as guarantor (the “ Guarantor ”) and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation p.l.c. as trustee (the trustee for the time being thereof being herein called the “ Trustee ”). References herein to the Conditions (or to any particular numbered Condition) shall be to the Conditions (or that particular one of them) set out in Schedule 2 to the Trust Deed.

 

1. Promise to pay

Subject as provided in this permanent Global Note the Issuer promises to pay to the bearer the principal amount of this permanent Global Note on 6 May 2025 (or in whole or, where applicable, in part on such earlier date as the said principal amount or part respectively may become repayable in accordance with the Conditions or the Trust Deed) and to pay interest annually in arrear on 6 May on the principal amount from time to time of this permanent Global Note at the rate of 1.375 per cent. per annum together with such other amounts (if any) as may be payable, all subject to and in accordance with the Conditions and the provisions of the Trust Deed.

The nominal amount of Notes represented by this permanent Global Note shall be the aggregate amount from time to time entered in the records of both Euroclear Bank SA/NV (“ Euroclear ”) and Clearstream Banking, société anonyme (“ Clearstream ”, Luxembourg and with Euroclear and any other clearing system

 

36


appointed by the Trustee together the relevant “ Clearing Systems ”). The records of the relevant Clearing Systems shall be conclusive evidence of the nominal amount of Notes represented by this permanent Global Note and, for these purposes, a statement issued by a relevant Clearing System (which statement shall be made available to the bearer upon request) stating the nominal amount of Notes represented by this permanent Global Note at any time shall be conclusive evidence of the records of the relevant Clearing System at that time.

 

2. Exchange for Definitive Notes and Purchases

This permanent Global Note will be exchangeable in whole but not in part (free of charge to the holder) for definitive Notes only (a) upon the happening of any of the events defined in the Trust Deed as Events of Default, (b) if either Euroclear or Clearstream Luxembourg is closed for business for a continuous period of 14 calendar days (other than by reason of holiday, statutory or otherwise) or announces an intention permanently to cease business or does in fact do so and no alternative clearing system satisfactory to the Trustee is available, or (c) if the Issuer would suffer a disadvantage as a result of a change in laws or regulations (taxation or otherwise) or as a result of a change in the practice of Euroclear and/or Clearstream, Luxembourg which would not be suffered were the Notes in definitive form and a certificate to such effect signed by two Directors of the Issuer is given to the Trustee. Thereupon (in the case of (a) and (b) above) the holder of this permanent Global Note (acting on the instructions of (an) Accountholder(s) (as defined below)) may give notice to the Issuer, and (in the case of (c) above) the Issuer may give notice to the Trustee and the Noteholders, of its intention to exchange this permanent Global Note for definitive Notes on or after the Exchange Date (as defined below).

On or after the Exchange Date the holder of this permanent Global Note may or, in the case of (c) above, shall surrender this permanent Global Note to or to the order of the Principal Paying Agent. In exchange for this permanent Global Note the Issuer will deliver, or procure the delivery of, definitive Notes in bearer form, serially numbered, in the denominations of €100,000 and integral multiples of €1,000 in excess thereof up to and including €199,000 with interest coupons (Coupons) attached on issue in respect of interest which has not already been paid on this permanent Global Note (in exchange for the whole of this permanent Global Note).

Exchange Date means a day specified in the notice requiring exchange falling not less than 60 calendar days after that on which such notice is given and on which banks are open for business in the city in which the specified office of the Principal Paying Agent is located and (except in the case of (b) above) in the city in which the relevant Clearing System is located.

Upon (a) any exchange of interests in the temporary Global Note by which the Notes were initially represented (the “ Temporary Global Note ”) recorded in the relevant Clearing Systems for interests in this permanent Global Note or (b) the purchase by or on behalf of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any other Subsidiary of the Guarantor and cancellation of an interest in this permanent Global Note in accordance with the Conditions, the Issuer shall procure that the portion of the principal amount hereof so exchanged or so purchased and cancelled shall be entered pro rata in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems and, upon any such entry being made, the principal amount of the Notes recorded in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems and represented by this permanent Global Note shall be reduced by the principal amount of this permanent Global Note so exchanged or purchased and cancelled. Upon the exchange of the whole of this permanent Global Note for definitive Notes this permanent Global Note shall be surrendered to or to the order of the Principal Paying Agent and cancelled and, if the holder of this permanent Global Note requests, returned to it together with any relevant definitive Notes.

 

3. Payments

Until the entire principal amount of this permanent Global Note has been extinguished, this permanent Global Note shall (subject as hereinafter and in the Trust Deed provided) in all respects be entitled to the

 

37


same benefits as the definitive Notes and shall be entitled to the benefit of and be bound by the Trust Deed. Payments of principal and interest in respect of Notes represented by this permanent Global Note will be made against presentation for endorsement and, if no further payment falls to be made in respect of the Notes, surrender of this permanent Global Note to the order of the Principal Paying Agent or such other Paying Agent as shall have been notified to the Noteholders for such purposes. Upon any payment of principal or interest on this permanent Global Note the Issuer shall procure that the amount so paid shall be entered pro rata in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems and, upon any such entry being made, the principal amount of the Notes recorded in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems and represented by this permanent Global Note shall be reduced by the aggregate principal amount of such instalment so paid, and each payment so made will discharge the obligations in respect thereof.

All payments of any amounts payable and paid to the bearer of this permanent Global Note shall be valid and, to the extent of the sums so paid, effectual to satisfy and discharge the liability for the moneys payable hereon and on the relevant definitive Notes and Coupons, and any failure to make entries referred to above shall not affect such satisfaction and discharge.

 

4. Accountholders

For so long as all of the Notes are represented by one or both of the Temporary Global Note and this permanent Global Note and such Global Note(s) is/are held on behalf of the relevant Clearing Systems, each person who is for the time being shown in the records of the relevant Clearing Systems as the holder of a particular principal amount of such Notes (each an Accountholder) (in which regard any certificate or other document issued by the relevant Clearing Systems as to the principal amount of such Notes standing to the account of any person shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding for all purposes) shall be treated as the holder of such principal amount of such Notes for all purposes (including for the purposes of any quorum requirements of, or the right to demand a poll at, meetings of the Noteholders) other than with respect to the payment of principal and interest on such Notes, the right to which shall be vested, as against the Issuer, the Guarantor and the Trustee, solely in the bearer of the relevant Global Note in accordance with and subject to its terms and the terms of the Trust Deed. Each Accountholder must look solely to the relevant Clearing Systems, for its share of each payment made to the bearer of the relevant Global Note.

 

5. Notices

For so long as interests in all of the Notes are represented by one or both of the Temporary Global Note and this permanent Global Note and such Global Note(s) is/are held on behalf of the relevant Clearing Systems, notices to Noteholders may be given by delivery of the relevant notice to the relevant Clearing Systems for communication to the relevant Accountholders rather than by publication as required by Condition 13 ( Notices ) provided that, so long as the Notes are admitted to the official list maintained by the Financial Conduct Authority in its capacity as the UK Listing Authority (the “ UKLA ”) and admitted to trading on the London Stock Exchange plc’s regulated market for listed securities, all requirements of the UKLA have been complied with. Any such notice shall be deemed to have been given to the Noteholders on the second day after the day on which such notice is delivered to the relevant Clearing Systems as aforesaid.

Whilst any Notes held by a Noteholder are represented by a Global Note, notices to be given by such Noteholder may be given by such Noteholder to the Principal Paying Agent through the relevant Clearing Systems, as the case may be, in such a manner as the Principal Paying Agent and the relevant Clearing Systems, as the case may be, may approve for this purpose.

 

6. Prescription

Claims against the Issuer and the Guarantor in respect of principal and interest on the Notes represented by the Temporary Global Note or this permanent Global Note will be prescribed after 10 years (in the case of principal) and five years (in the case of interest) from the Relevant Date (as defined in Condition 8 ( Taxation )).

 

38


7. Option to Purchase

For so long as all of the Notes are represented by one or both of the Global Notes and such Global Note(s) is/are held on behalf of the relevant Clearing Systems, the option of the Noteholders provided for in Condition 7.4 ( Redemption and Purchase – Offer to Purchase upon a Change of Control Triggering Event ) may be exercised by an Accountholder giving notice to the Principal Paying Agent in accordance with the standard procedures of the relevant Clearing Systems (which may include notice being given on his instructions by the relevant Clearing Systems or any common safe-keeper for them to the Principal Paying Agent by electronic means) of the principal amount of the Notes in respect of which such option is exercised and at the same time presenting or procuring the presentation of the relevant Global Note to the Principal Paying Agent for notation accordingly within the time limits set forth in that Condition.

 

8. Authentication and Effectuation

This permanent Global Note shall not be or become valid or obligatory for any purpose unless and until authenticated by or on behalf of the Principal Paying Agent and effectuated by the entity appointed as common safe-keeper by the relevant Clearing Systems.

 

9. Governing Law

This permanent Global Note and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with these presents is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, the laws of England.

 

10. Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999

No rights are conferred on any person under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce any term of this permanent Global Note, but this does not affect any right or remedy of any person which exists or is available apart from that Act.

 

39


IN WITNESS whereof the Issuer has caused this permanent Global Note to be signed manually or in facsimile by a person duly authorised on its behalf.

 

PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC
By:  

 

  (Duly authorised)

Issued in London, England on 6 May 2015.

Certificate of authentication

This permanent Global Note is duly authenticated

without recourse, warranty or liability.

Duly authorised

for and on behalf of

The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch

as Principal Paying Agent

Certificate of effectuation

 

This permanent Global Note is effectuated

without recourse, warranty or liability.

   

Duly authorised

for and on behalf of

Euroclear Bank SA/NV

as common safe-keeper

 

40


SCHEDULE 2

FORM OF DEFINITIVE NOTE AND COUPON

PART 1

FORM OF DEFINITIVE NOTE

ANY UNITED STATES PERSON WHO HOLDS THIS OBLIGATION WILL BE SUBJECT TO LIMITATIONS UNDER THE UNITED STATES INCOME TAX LAWS, INCLUDING THE LIMITATIONS PROVIDED IN SECTIONS 165(j) AND 1287(a) OF THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE.

 

[100,000]    ISIN: XS1228153661   [Serial No.]

PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC

(Incorporated with limited liability under the laws of

England and Wales with registered number 08422787)

€500,000,000 1.375 PER CENT. GUARANTEED

NOTES DUE 2025

Unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed as to

payment of principal and interest by

PEARSON PLC

(Incorporated with limited liability under the laws of

England and Wales with registered number 00053723)

The issue of the Notes was authorised by a resolution of the Board of Directors of Pearson Funding Five plc (the “ Issuer ”) passed on 27 April 2015 and the giving of the guarantee in respect of the Notes was authorised by a resolution of the Board of Directors of Pearson plc (the “ Guarantor ”) passed on 5 December 2014 and a resolution of the standing committee of the Guarantor passed on 27 April 2015.

This Note forms one of a series of Notes constituted by a Trust Deed (the “ Trust Deed ”) dated 6 May 2015 made between the Issuer, the Guarantor and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation p.l.c. as trustee for the holders of the Notes and issued as Notes in bearer form in the denominations of €100,000 and integral multiples of €1,000 in excess thereof up to and including €199,000 each with Coupons attached in an aggregate principal amount of €500,000,000.

The Issuer for value received and subject to and in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of the Notes (the “ Conditions ”) endorsed hereon hereby promises to pay to the bearer on 6 May 2025 (or on such earlier date as the principal sum hereunder mentioned may become repayable in accordance with the Conditions) the principal sum of:

€500,000,000 (Five Hundred Million Euro)

together with interest on the said principal sum at the rate of 1.375 per cent. per annum payable annually in arrear on each Interest Payment Date and together with such other amounts (if any) as may be payable, all subject to and in accordance with the Conditions and the provisions of the Trust Deed.

 

41


Neither this Note nor the Coupons appertaining hereto shall be or become valid or obligatory for any purpose unless and until this Note has been authenticated by or on behalf of the Principal Paying Agent.

IN WITNESS whereof this Note has been executed on behalf of the Issuer.

 

PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC
By:  

 

  Director

Dated as of [●]

Issued in London, England.

Certificate of authentication

This Note is duly authenticated

without recourse, warranty or liability.

Duly authorised

for and on behalf of

The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch

as Principal Paying Agent

 

42


FORM OF COUPON

On the front:

ANY UNITED STATES PERSON WHO HOLDS THIS OBLIGATION WILL BE SUBJECT TO LIMITATIONS UNDER THE UNITED STATES INCOME TAX LAWS, INCLUDING THE LIMITATIONS PROVIDED IN SECTIONS 165(j) AND 1287(a) OF THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE.

PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC

€500,000,000 1.375 PER CENT. GUARANTEED

NOTES DUE 2025

Coupon appertaining to a Note in the denomination of €100,000 and integral multiples of €1,000 in excess thereof up to and including €199,000.

 

This Coupon is separately    Coupon for
negotiable, payable to bearer,    €[        ]
and subject to the    due on
Conditions of the said Notes.    6 May 20[16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24/25]
This Coupon is payable to bearer subject to such Conditions, under which it may become void before its due date.

 

[No.]    [100,000]    ISIN: XS1228153661   [Serial No.]

 

43


On the back:

PRINCIPAL PAYING AGENT

The Bank of New York Mellon

One Canada Square

London E14 5AL

 

44


PART 2

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

The €500,000,000 1.375 per cent. Guaranteed Notes due 2025 (the “ Notes ”, which expression shall in these Conditions, unless the context otherwise requires, include any further notes issued pursuant to Condition 17 ( Further Issues ) and forming a single series with the Notes) of Pearson Funding Five plc (the “ Issuer ”) are constituted by a Trust Deed dated 6 May 2015 (the “ Trust Deed ”) made between the Issuer, Pearson plc (the “ Guarantor ”) as guarantor and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation p.l.c. (the “ Trustee ”, which expression shall include its successor(s)) as trustee for the holders of the Notes (the “ Noteholders ”) and the holders of the interest coupons appertaining to the Notes (the “ Couponholders ” and the “Coupons” respectively).

The statements in these Conditions include summaries of, and are subject to, the detailed provisions of and definitions in the Trust Deed. Copies of the Trust Deed and the Agency Agreement dated 6 May 2015 (the “ Agency Agreement ”) made between the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Principal Paying Agent, and the Trustee are available for inspection during normal business hours by the Noteholders and the Couponholders at the registered office for the time being of the Trustee, being at the date of issue of the Notes at Fifth Floor, 100 Wood Street, London EC2V 7EX, United Kingdom and at the specified office of the Principal Paying Agent. The Noteholders and the Couponholders are entitled to the benefit of, are bound by, and are deemed to have notice of, all the provisions of the Trust Deed and the Agency Agreement applicable to them.

 

1. FORM, DENOMINATION AND TITLE

 

1.1 Form and Denomination

The Notes are in bearer form, serially numbered, in the denominations of €100,000 and integral multiples of €1,000 (the “ Calculation Amount ”) in excess thereof up to and including €199,000 (each a “ Specified Denomination ”) with Coupons attached on issue. Notes of one denomination may not be exchanged for Notes of the other denomination.

 

1.2 Title

Title to the Notes and to the Coupons will pass by delivery.

 

1.3 Holder Absolute Owner

The Issuer, the Guarantor, any Paying Agent and the Trustee may (to the fullest extent permitted by applicable laws) deem and treat the bearer of any Note or Coupon as the absolute owner for all purposes (whether or not the Note or Coupon shall be overdue and notwithstanding any notice of ownership or writing on the Note or Coupon or any notice of previous loss or theft of the Note or Coupon or of any trust or interest therein) and shall not be required to obtain any proof thereof or as to the identity of such bearer.

 

2. STATUS OF THE NOTES

The Notes and the Coupons are direct, unconditional, unsubordinated and (subject to the provisions of Condition 4 ( Negative Pledge )) unsecured obligations of the Issuer and rank and will rank pari passu among themselves and (save for certain obligations required to be preferred by law) equally with all other unsecured obligations (other than subordinated obligations, if any) of the Issuer, from time to time outstanding.

 

3. GUARANTEE

 

3.1 Guarantee

The payment of the principal and interest in respect of the Notes and all other moneys payable by the Issuer under or pursuant to the Trust Deed has been unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed by the Guarantor (the “ Guarantee ”) in the Trust Deed.

 

45


3.2 Status of the Guarantee

The obligations of the Guarantor under the Guarantee are direct, unconditional, unsubordinated and (subject to the provisions of Condition 4 ( Negative Pledge )) unsecured obligations of the Guarantor and rank and will rank pari passu among themselves and (save for certain obligations required to be preferred by law) equally with all other unsecured obligations (other than subordinated obligations, if any) of the Guarantor, from time to time outstanding.

 

4. NEGATIVE PLEDGE

So long as any of the Notes remains outstanding, the Guarantor will not, and will not permit any Material Company to, create or permit to arise or subsist any Relevant Indebtedness or grant or permit to subsist any guarantee of any Relevant Indebtedness, which Relevant Indebtedness or guarantee of Relevant Indebtedness is secured by any mortgage, pledge or other charge upon any of the present or future assets or revenues (including uncalled capital) of the Guarantor or such Material Company, unless in any such case as aforesaid simultaneously with, or prior to the creation of such security, there shall be taken any and all action necessary to procure that such security is extended equally and rateably to all amounts payable in respect of the Notes, the Coupons and under the Trust Deed to the satisfaction of the Trustee, or such other security is provided as the Trustee shall in its absolute discretion deem to be not materially less beneficial to the interests of the Noteholders or as shall be approved by an Extraordinary Resolution (as defined in the Trust Deed) of the Noteholders.

For the purposes of this Condition, “ Relevant Indebtedness ” means any indebtedness of the Issuer or the Guarantor or of any other person which is in the form of or represented by any bonds, notes, loan stock, depositary receipts or other securities which are intended by the Issuer or the Guarantor to be, or are, with the consent or concurrence of the Issuer or the Guarantor for the time being, quoted or listed on, or dealt in or traded on, any stock exchange, over-the-counter securities market or other organised securities market (whether or not initially distributed by means of a private placing) and any reference to a guarantee in respect of any Relevant Indebtedness shall include a reference to an indemnity being given in respect thereof.

 

5. INTEREST

 

5.1 Interest Rate and Interest Payment Dates

The Notes bear interest on their outstanding principal amount from and including 6 May 2015 at the rate of 1.375 per cent. per annum, payable annually in arrear on 6 May (each such date an “ Interest Payment Date ”). The first payment (for the period from and including 6 May 2015 to but excluding 6 May 2016 and amounting to €13.75 per €1,000 principal amount of Notes) shall be made on 6 May 2016.

 

5.2 Interest Accrual

Each Note will cease to bear interest from and including its due date for redemption unless, upon due presentation, payment of the principal in respect of the Note is improperly withheld or refused or unless default is otherwise made in respect of payment, in which event interest shall continue to accrue as provided in the Trust Deed.

 

5.3 Calculation of Broken Interest

When interest is required to be calculated in respect of a period of less than a full year, it shall be calculated on the basis of (a) the actual number of days in the period from and including the date from which interest begins to accrue (the “ Accrual Date” ) to but excluding the date on which it falls due divided by (b) the actual number of days from and including the Accrual Date to but excluding the next following Interest Payment Date.

 

46


6. PAYMENTS

 

6.1 Payments in respect of Notes

Payments of principal and interest in respect of each Note will be made in euro against presentation and surrender (or, in the case of part payment only, endorsement) of the Note, except that payments of interest due on an Interest Payment Date will be made against presentation and surrender (or, in the case of part payment only, endorsement) of the relevant Coupon, in each case at the specified office outside the United States of any of the Paying Agents.

 

6.2 Method of Payment

Payments will be made by credit or transfer to an account in euro maintained by the payee with a bank in London.

 

6.3 Missing Unmatured Coupons

Each Note should be presented for payment together with all relative unmatured Coupons, failing which the full amount of any relative missing unmatured Coupon (or, in the case of payment not being made in full, that proportion of the full amount of the missing unmatured Coupon which the amount so paid bears to the total amount due) will be deducted from the amount due for payment. Each amount so deducted will be paid in the manner mentioned above against presentation and surrender (or, in the case of part payment only, endorsement) of the relative missing Coupon at any time before the expiry of ten years after the Relevant Date (as defined in Condition 8 ( Taxation )) in respect of the relevant Note (whether or not the Coupon would otherwise have become void pursuant to Condition 9 ( Prescription )) or, if later, five years after the date on which the Coupon would have become due, but not thereafter.

 

6.4 Payments subject to Applicable Laws

Payments in respect of principal and interest on the Notes are subject in all cases to any fiscal or other laws and regulations applicable in the place of payment, but without prejudice to the provisions of Condition 8 ( Taxation ).

 

6.5 Payment only on a Presentation Date

A holder shall be entitled to present a Note or Coupon for payment only on a Presentation Date and shall not, except as provided in Condition 5 ( Interest ), be entitled to any further interest or other payment if a Presentation Date is after the due date.

Presentation Date means a day which (subject to Condition 9 ( Prescription )):

 

  (a) is or falls after the relevant due date;

 

  (b) is a Business Day in the place of the specified office of the Paying Agent at which the Note or Coupon is presented for payment; and

 

  (c) a day on which TARGET2 (or any successor thereto) is open for settlement of payments in euro.

In this Condition: “ Business Day ” means, in relation to any place, a day on which commercial banks and foreign exchange markets settle payments and are open for general business (including dealing in foreign exchange and foreign currency deposits); and “ TARGET2 ” means the Trans-European Automated Real-Time Gross Settlement Express Transfer payment system which utilises a single shared platform and which was launched on 19 November 2007, or any successor thereto.

 

6.6 Initial Paying Agents

The names of the initial Paying Agents and their initial specified offices are set out at the end of these Conditions. The Issuer and the Guarantor reserve the right, subject to the prior written approval of the Trustee, at any time to vary or terminate the appointment of any Paying Agent and to appoint additional or other Paying Agents provided that:

 

  (a) there will at all times be a Principal Paying Agent;

 

47


  (b) there will at all times be at least one Paying Agent (which may be the Principal Paying Agent) having its specified office in a European city which so long as the Notes are admitted to official listing on the London Stock Exchange shall be London; and

 

  (c) the Issuer undertakes that it will ensure that it maintains a Paying Agent in a Member State of the European Union that is not obliged to withhold or deduct tax pursuant to European Council Directive 2003/48/EC or any law implementing or complying with, or introduced in order to conform to, such Directive.

Notice of any termination or appointment and of any changes in specified offices will be given to the Noteholders promptly by the Issuer in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ).

 

7. REDEMPTION AND PURCHASE

 

7.1 Redemption at Maturity

Unless previously redeemed or purchased and cancelled as provided below, the Issuer will redeem the Notes at their principal amount on 6 May 2025.

 

7.2 Redemption for Taxation Reasons

If the Issuer satisfies the Trustee immediately before the giving of the notice referred to below that:

 

  (a) as a result of any change in, or amendment to, the laws or regulations of a Relevant Jurisdiction (as defined in Condition 8 ( Taxation )), or any change in the application or official interpretation of the laws or regulations of a Relevant Jurisdiction, which change or amendment becomes effective after 6 May 2015, on the next Interest Payment Date either (i) the Issuer would be required to pay additional amounts as provided or referred to in Condition 8 ( Taxation ) or (ii) the Guarantor would be unable for reasons outside its control to procure payment by the Issuer and in making payment itself would be required to pay such additional amounts; and

 

  (b) the requirement cannot be avoided by the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor taking reasonable measures available to it,

the Issuer may at its option, having given not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) (which notice shall be irrevocable), redeem all the Notes, but not some only, at any time at their principal amount together with interest accrued to but excluding the date of redemption, provided that no such notice of redemption shall be given earlier than 90 days prior to the earliest date on which the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor would be required to pay such additional amounts, were a payment in respect of the Notes then due. Prior to the publication of any notice of redemption pursuant to this paragraph, the Issuer shall deliver to the Trustee a certificate signed by two Directors of the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor stating that the requirement referred to in (a) above will apply on the next Interest Payment Date, and cannot be avoided by the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor taking reasonable measures available to it, and the Trustee shall be entitled to accept the certificate as sufficient evidence of the satisfaction of the conditions precedent set out above, in which event it shall be conclusive and binding on the Noteholders and the Couponholders.

 

7.3 Redemption at the Option of the Issuer

The Issuer may, at any time, having given not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) (which notice shall be irrevocable), redeem all (but not some only) of the Notes at the Optional Redemption Amount on any Optional Redemption Date.

For the purposes of this Condition 7.3, “ Optional Redemption Amount ” means, in respect of each Note of the Specified Denomination: (a) 100 per cent of the Calculation Amount; or (b) if higher, the sum, as determined by the Calculation Agent, of the present values of the remaining scheduled payments of principal and interest on such Note (not including any portion of such payments of interest accrued to the date of redemption) discounted to the Optional Redemption Date on an annual basis at the Reference Rate plus the Optional Redemption Margin, where:

Business Day ” shall have the meaning specified in Condition 6.5.

 

48


Calculation Agent ” means a leading investment, merchant or commercial bank appointed by the Issuer not less than 15 days prior to the scheduled date for redemption for the purposes of calculating the Optional Redemption Amount, and notified to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 15.

“Optional Redemption Date ” means any Business Day falling after 6 May 2015.

Optional Redemption Margin ” means 17 basis points.

Quotation Time ” means 5:00 p.m. (Brussels time).

Reference Bond ” means a German Bundesobligationen selected by the Calculation Agent as having maturity comparable to the remaining term of the Notes that would be utilised, at the time of selection and in accordance with customary financial practice, in pricing new issues of corporate debt securities of comparable maturity to the remaining term of the Notes.

Reference Bond Price ” means: (i) the average of five Reference Market Maker Quotations for the relevant Optional Redemption Date, after excluding the highest and lowest Reference Market Maker Quotations; (ii) if the Calculation Agent obtains fewer than five, but more than one, such Reference Market Maker Quotations, the average of all such quotations; or (iii) if only one such Reference Market Maker Quotation is obtained, the amount of the Reference Market Maker Quotation so obtained.

Reference Market Makers ” means five brokers or market makers of securities such as the Reference Bond selected by the Calculation Agent or such other five persons operating in the market for securities such as the Reference Bond as are selected by the Calculation Agent in consultation with the relevant Issuer.

Reference Market Maker Quotations ” means, with respect to each Reference Market Maker and any Optional Redemption Date, the average, as determined by the Calculation Agent, of the bid and asked prices for the Reference Bond (expressed in each case as a percentage of its principal amount) quoted in writing to the Calculation Agent at the Quotation Time on the Reference Rate Determination Day.

Reference Rate ” means, with respect to any Optional Redemption Date, the rate per annum equal to the equivalent yield to maturity of the Reference Bond, calculated by the Calculation Agent on the Reference Rate Determination Day using a price for the Reference Bond (expressed as a percentage of its principal amount) equal to the Reference Bond Price for such Optional Redemption Date.

Reference Rate Determination Day ” means the day falling three Business Days prior to the Optional Redemption Date.

 

7.4 Offer to Purchase upon a Change of Control Triggering Event

If a Change of Control Triggering Event occurs, unless the Issuer has exercised its option to redeem the Notes pursuant to Conditions 7.2 or 7.3, the Issuer will be required to make an offer (the “ Change of Control Offer ”) to each Noteholder to purchase all or any part (equal to €100,000 or an integral multiple of €1,000 in excess thereof) of that Noteholder’s Notes. In the Change of Control Offer, the Issuer will be required to offer payment in cash equal to the aggregate principal amount of Notes purchased, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, on the Notes purchased to but excluding the date of purchase (the “ Change of Control Payment ”). Within 30 days following any Change of Control Triggering Event or, at the option of the Issuer, prior to any Change of Control, but after public announcement of the transaction that constitutes or may constitute the Change of Control, the Issuer will give written notice to the Trustee, in accordance with the procedures set forth in Clause 26 ( Notices ) of the Trust Deed, describing: (i) the transaction which constitutes or may constitute the Change of Control Triggering Event; (ii) offering to purchase the Notes on the date specified in such notice, which date will be a date no earlier than 30 days and no later than 60 days from the date such notice is given (the “ Change of Control Payment Date ”); and (iii) including the instructions (as determined by the Issuer) that a Noteholder must follow in order to have its Notes purchased.

 

49


The notice will, if given prior to the date of consummation of the Change of Control, state that the offer to purchase is conditional on the Change of Control Triggering Event occurring on or prior to the Change of Control Payment Date.

On the Change of Control Payment Date, the Issuer will, to the extent lawful:

 

  (a) accept for purchase all Notes or portions of Notes properly tendered and not withdrawn pursuant to the Change of Control Offer;

 

  (b) deposit with the agent as set out in the written notice an amount equal to the Change of Control Payment in respect of all Notes or portions of Notes properly tendered and not withdrawn; and

 

  (c) deliver or cause to be delivered to the Principal Paying Agent the Notes accepted for purchase together with a certificate signed by an Officer of the Issuer stating the aggregate principal amount of Notes or portions of Notes being purchased and request that such Notes are cancelled forthwith as contemplated pursuant to Condition 7.6 below.

The Issuer will not be required to make a Change of Control Offer upon the occurrence of a Change of Control Triggering Event if a third party makes such an offer in the manner, at the times and otherwise in compliance with the requirements for an offer made by the Issuer and the third party purchases all Notes properly tendered and not withdrawn under its offer. In addition, the Issuer will not purchase any Notes if there has occurred and is continuing on the Change of Control Payment Date an Event of Default under Condition 10 ( Events of Default ), other than a default in the payment of the Change of Control Payment upon a Change of Control Triggering Event.

The Guarantor hereby irrevocably and unconditionally guarantees the obligations of the Issuer to make a Change of Control Offer as described above. The Guarantor further irrevocably and unconditionally guarantees to make payment for any and all Notes properly tendered and not withdrawn as described above.

The Trustee is under no obligation to ascertain whether a Change of Control Triggering Event, a Change of Control or Rating Event or any event which could lead to the occurrence of or could constitute a Change of Control Triggering Event or Rating Event has occurred and, until it shall have actual knowledge or notice to the contrary, the Trustee may assume that no Change of Control Triggering Event, Change of Control or Rating Event or other such event has occurred.

References in the Trust Deed and in these Conditions to principal shall, unless the context otherwise requires, be deemed to include a reference any purchase monies paid pursuant to this Condition 7.4.

 

7.5 Purchases

The Issuer, the Guarantor or any of the Guarantor’s other Subsidiaries may at any time purchase Notes (provided that all unmatured Coupons appertaining to the Notes are purchased with the Notes) in any manner and at any price.

 

7.6 Cancellations

All Notes which are (a) redeemed or (b) purchased by or on behalf of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any of the Guarantor’s other Subsidiaries will forthwith be cancelled, together with all relative unmatured Coupons attached to the Notes or surrendered with the Notes, and accordingly may not be held, reissued or resold.

 

7.7 Notices Final

Upon the expiry of any notice as is referred to in paragraph 7.2, 7.3 or 7.4 above the Issuer shall be bound to redeem or purchase the Notes to which the notice refers, all in accordance with the terms of such paragraph.

 

7.8 Interpretation

In these Conditions:

Affiliate ” shall have the meaning given in Rule 405 of the U.S. Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

Board of Directors ” means, as to any Person, the board of directors, management committee or similar governing body of such Person or any duly authorised committee thereof.

 

50


“Change of Control” means the occurrence of any of the following:

 

  (a) the consummation of any transaction (including, without limitation, any merger or consolidation) the result of which is that any Person or “group” (as used in Section 13d-3 of the Exchange Act) (other than an Affiliate of the Guarantor) becomes the beneficial owner, directly or indirectly, of more than 50 per cent. of the Voting Stock of the Guarantor or other Voting Stock into which the Voting Stock of the Guarantor is reclassified, consolidated, exchanged or changed, measured by voting power rather than number of shares;

 

  (b) the direct or indirect sale, transfer, conveyance or other disposition (other than by way of merger or consolidation), in one or more series of related transactions, of all or substantially all of the assets of the Guarantor and the Subsidiaries of the Guarantor, taken as a whole, to one or more Persons (other than an Affiliate of the Guarantor);

 

  (c) the first day on which a majority of the members of the Board of Directors of the Guarantor are not Continuing Directors; or

 

  (d) the adoption of a plan relating to the liquidation or dissolution of the Guarantor.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a transaction will not be deemed to involve a Change of Control if:

 

  (i) the Guarantor becomes a direct or indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of a holding company; and

 

  (ii) (A) the direct or indirect holders of the Voting Stock of such holding company immediately following that transaction are substantially the same as the holders of the Voting Stock of the Guarantor immediately prior to that transaction or (B) immediately following that transaction one Person (other than a holding company satisfying the requirements of this sentence) is not the beneficial owner, directly or indirectly, of more than 50 per cent. of the Voting Stock of such holding company.

“Change of Control Triggering Event” means the occurrence of both a Change of Control and a Rating Event.

“Continuing Directors” means, as of any date of determination, any member of the Board of Directors of the Guarantor who (1) was a member of such Board of Directors on the date the Notes were issued or (2) was nominated for election, elected or appointed to such Board of Directors with the approval of a majority of the continuing directors who were members of such Board of Directors at the time of such nomination, election or appointment (either by a specific vote or by approval of the proxy statement of the Guarantor in which such member was named as a nominee for election as a director, without objection to such nomination).

“Exchange Act” means the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

“Investment Grade Rating” means a rating equal to or higher than Baa3 (or the equivalent) by Moody’s and BBB- (or the equivalent) by S&P, and the equivalent investment grade credit rating from any additional rating agency or rating agencies selected by the Issuer.

“Moody’s” means Moody’s Investor Service Inc.

“Officer” means, when used in connection with any action to be taken by the Issuer or the Guarantor, as the case may be, the chairman of the Board of Directors, the chief executive officer, any executive director of the Issuer or the Guarantor, as the case may be, or any person authorised by the Board of Directors of the of the Issuer or the Guarantor, as the case may be, (such authorisation to be evidenced in writing and delivered to the Trustee) to act as representative of such persons.

“Person” means an individual, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, unincorporated organisation, trust or joint venture, or a governmental agency or political subdivision thereof, or any other entity.

 

51


“Rating Agencies” means (1) each of Moody’s and S&P; and (2) if either Moody’s or S&P ceases to rate the Notes or fails to make a rating of the Notes publicly available for reasons outside the control of the Issuer and the Guarantor, a “nationally recognised statistical rating organisation” within the meaning of Rule 15c3-1(c)(2)(vi)(F) under the Exchange Act selected by the Issuer or the Guarantor (as certified by a resolution of the Board of Directors of the Issuer or the Guarantor) as a replacement agency for Moody’s or S&P, or both of them, as the case may be.

“Rating Event” means the rating on the Notes is lowered by each of the Rating Agencies and the Notes are rated below an Investment Grade Rating by each of the Rating Agencies on any day during the period commencing 60 days prior to the first public announcement by the Guarantor of any Change of Control (or pending Change of Control) and ending 60 days following the consummation of such Change of Control (which period will be extended following consummation of a Change of Control for so long as any of the Rating Agencies has publicly announced that it is considering a possible ratings change).

“Subsidiary” means, in relation to the Issuer or the Guarantor, any company (i) in which the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor holds a majority of the voting rights or (ii) of which the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor is a member and has the right to appoint or remove a majority of the board of directors or (iii) of which the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor is a member and controls a majority of the voting rights, and includes any company which is a Subsidiary of a Subsidiary of the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor.

“S&P” means Standard & Poor’s Rating Services, a division of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc.

“Voting Stock” means, with respect to any specified Person as of any date, the capital stock of such Person that is at the time entitled to vote generally in the election of the board of directors of such Person.

 

8. TAXATION

 

8.1 Payment without Withholding

All payments in respect of the Notes by or on behalf of the Issuer or the Guarantor shall be made without withholding or deduction for, or on account of, any present or future taxes, duties, assessments or governmental charges of whatever nature (“ Taxes ”) imposed or levied by or on behalf of the Relevant Jurisdiction, unless the withholding or deduction of the Taxes is required by law. In that event, the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor will pay such additional amounts as may be necessary in order that the net amounts received by the Noteholders and Couponholders after the withholding or deduction shall equal the respective amounts which would have been receivable in respect of the Notes or, as the case may be, Coupons in the absence of the withholding or deduction; except that no additional amounts shall be payable in relation to any payment in respect of any Note or Coupon:

 

  (a) presented for payment by or on behalf of, a holder who is liable to the Taxes in respect of the Note or Coupon by reason of his having some connection with the Relevant Jurisdiction other than the mere holding of the Note or Coupon; or

 

  (b) where such withholding or deduction could have been avoided by the holder making a declaration of non-residence or other similar claim for exemption to any authority of or in the United Kingdom; or

 

  (c) where such withholding or deduction is imposed on a payment to an individual and is required to be made pursuant to European Council Directive 2003/48/EC or any law implementing or complying with, or introduced in order to conform to, such Directive; or

 

  (d) presented for payment by or on behalf of a holder who would have been able to avoid such withholding or deduction by presenting the relevant Note or Coupon to another Paying Agent in a Member State of the European Union; or

 

  (e) presented for payment more than 30 days after the Relevant Date (as defined below) except to the extent that a holder would have been entitled to additional amounts on presenting the same for payment on the last day of the period of 30 days assuming, whether or not such is in fact the case, that day to have been a Presentation Date (as defined in Condition 6 ( Payments ).

 

52


8.2 Interpretation

In these Conditions:

 

  (a) Relevant Date ” means the date on which the payment first becomes due but, if the full amount of the money payable has not been received by the Principal Paying Agent or the Trustee on or before the due date, it means the date on which, the full amount of the money having been so received, notice to that effect has been duly given to the Noteholders by the Issuer in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ); and

 

  (b) Relevant Jurisdiction ” means the United Kingdom or any political subdivision or any authority thereof or therein having power to tax or any other jurisdiction or any political subdivision or any authority thereof or therein having power to tax to which the Issuer or the Guarantor, as the case may be, becomes subject in respect of payments made by it of principal and interest on the Notes and Coupons.

 

8.3 Additional Amounts

Any reference in these Conditions to any amounts in respect of the Notes shall be deemed also to refer to any additional amounts which may be payable under this Condition or under any undertakings given in addition to, or in substitution for, this Condition pursuant to the Trust Deed.

 

9. PRESCRIPTION

Notes and Coupons will become void unless presented for payment within periods of 10 years (in the case of principal) and five years (in the case of interest) from the Relevant Date in respect of the Notes or, as the case may be, the Coupons, subject to the provisions of Condition 6 ( Payments ).

 

10. EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

10.1 At any time after the happening of any of the following events (each an Event of Default), the Trustee at its absolute discretion may, and if so required in writing by the holders of not less than 25 per cent. in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding or if so directed by an Extraordinary Resolution of the Noteholders shall (subject in each case to being indemnified and/or secured and/or prefunded to its satisfaction), give notice to the Issuer declaring the Notes to be repayable, so long as at the time of such notice such event or (as the case may be) all such events shall not have been waived by, or remedied to the reasonable satisfaction of, the Trustee:

 

  (a) default being made in the payment of any interest in respect of any of the Notes for a period of 30 days as and when the same ought to be paid; or

 

  (b) default being made in the payment of the principal in respect of any of the Notes for a period of two Business Days as and when the same ought to be paid; or

 

  (c) default being made by the Issuer or the Guarantor in the performance or observance of any other covenant, undertaking, condition or provision contained in the Trust Deed or in the Notes and (except where the Trustee shall have certified in writing to the Issuer or the Guarantor (as the case may be) that it considers such default to be incapable of remedy when no such notice as is hereinafter mentioned shall be required) such default continues for a period of 30 days or more immediately following the service by the Trustee on the Issuer of a notice requiring the same to be remedied; or

 

  (d)

the occurrence of any event of default as defined in any mortgage, indenture or instrument under which there may be issued, or by which there may be secured or evidenced, any indebtedness of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Material Company for money borrowed, whether such indebtedness now exists or shall hereafter be created, resulting in such indebtedness in principal amount in excess of $50,000,000 (or the equivalent thereof in other currencies) becoming or being declared due and payable prior to the date on which it would otherwise become due and payable, and such acceleration not having been

 

53


  rescinded or annulled, or such indebtedness not having been discharged, within a period of 30 days after written notice thereof shall have been given to the Issuer and the Guarantor by the Trustee; or

 

  (e) an order being made or an effective resolution being passed for the winding up or dissolution of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Material Company (except, in the case of a Material Company, for a winding-up for the purpose of a reconstruction or amalgamation the terms of which have previously been approved in writing by the Trustee or a voluntary solvent winding-up in connection with the transfer of all or the major part of the business, undertaking and assets of such Material Company to the Issuer or the Guarantor, another Material Company or any Subsidiary which becomes a Material Company as a result of such transfer); or

 

  (f) the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Material Company stopping or announcing an intention to stop payment in respect of any binding obligations or ceasing to carry on all or substantially all of its business (except a cessation (1) in the circumstances referred to in the parentheses of paragraph (e) above or (2) consequent upon a sale by a Material Company of all or any part of its business on arm’s length terms and for fair market value); or

 

  (g) an encumbrancer taking possession of, or an administrative or other receiver, an administrator or any similar official being appointed in relation to, the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Material Company or in relation to the whole or any substantial part of the undertaking, property, assets or revenues of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Material Company or a distress or execution or other legal process being levied or enforced upon or sued out against the whole or any substantial part of the chattels or property of the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Material Company and not being discharged within 28 days; or

 

  (h) the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Material Company being unable to pay its debts within the meaning of Section 123(1) of the Insolvency Act 1986; or

 

  (i) the Issuer, the Guarantor or any Material Company consenting to proceedings relating to itself under any applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, composition or other similar laws or making a conveyance or assignment for the benefit of, or entering into any composition with, its creditors generally, or being adjudicated or found bankrupt or insolvent by any competent court; or

 

  (j) the Guarantee ceases to be in full force and effect or the Guarantor shall, in writing, deny or disaffirm its obligations under the Guarantee.

Upon any such declaration being made as aforesaid, the outstanding Notes shall become immediately due and repayable at their principal amount, together with accrued interest as provided in the Trust Deed.

 

10.2 Interpretation

In this Condition, “ Business Day ” means any day other than a Saturday or Sunday or a day on which commercial banks and trust companies located in New York City or London are authorised or required by law, regulation or executive order to be closed.

In these Conditions:

Material Company ” means:

 

  (a) the Issuer; and

 

  (b) any Subsidiary of the Guarantor:

 

  (i) whose unconsolidated profits (before interest, taxation and non-operating items) are more than 5 per cent. of the consolidated profits of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries (the “ Group ”) (before interest, taxation and non-operating items); or

 

  (ii) whose external turnover is more than 3 per cent. of the consolidated turnover of the Group,

all as shown (in the case of any Subsidiary) in the accounts used for preparing the Group consolidation in the most recent annual consolidated financial statements of the Group. If a Subsidiary (other than the Issuer) which is not a Material Company on the basis of the most recent such accounts receives a

 

54


transfer of assets or the right to receive any trading profits or turnover which, taken together with the existing trading profits, assets or, as the case may be, turnover of that Subsidiary, would satisfy any test in (i) or (ii) above, then that Subsidiary shall also be a Material Company on and from the date it receives such transfer. If a Material Company disposes of any assets or the right to receive any trading profits or turnover such that it would on the basis of the most recent such accounts cease to be a Material Company, then it shall be excluded as a Material Company on and from the date of such disposal. A report (whether or not addressed to the Trustee) by two directors of the Guarantor that a Subsidiary of the Guarantor is or is not or was or was not at any particular time or throughout any specified period a Material Company may be relied upon by the Trustee without further enquiry or evidence and, if so relied upon by the Trustee shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all parties.

 

11. ENFORCEMENT

 

11.1 Enforcement by the Trustee

The Trustee may at any time, at its discretion and without notice, take such proceedings against the Issuer and/or the Guarantor as it may think fit to enforce the provisions of the Trust Deed, the Notes and the Coupons, but it shall not be bound to take any such proceedings or any other action in relation to the Trust Deed, the Notes or the Coupons unless (a) it has been so directed by an Extraordinary Resolution of the Noteholders or so requested in writing by the holders of at least one-quarter in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding and (b) it has been indemnified and/or secured and/or prefunded to its satisfaction.

 

11.2 Enforcement by the Noteholders

No Noteholder or Couponholder shall be entitled to proceed directly against the Issuer or the Guarantor unless the Trustee, having become bound so to proceed, fails so to do within a reasonable period and the failure shall be continuing.

 

12. REPLACEMENT OF NOTES AND COUPONS

Should any Note or Coupon be lost, stolen, mutilated, defaced or destroyed it may be replaced at the specified office of the Principal Paying Agent upon payment by the claimant of the expenses incurred in connection with the replacement and on such terms as to evidence and indemnity as the Issuer may reasonably require. Mutilated or defaced Notes or Coupons must be surrendered before replacements will be issued.

 

13. NOTICES

All notices to the Noteholders will be valid if published in a leading English language daily newspaper published in London or such other English language daily newspaper with general circulation in Europe as the Trustee may approve. It is expected that publication will normally be made in the Financial Times . The Issuer shall also ensure that notices are duly published in a manner which complies with the rules and regulations of any stock exchange or the relevant authority on which the Notes are for the time being listed. Any such notice will be deemed to have been given on the date of the first publication or, where required to be published in more than one newspaper, on the date of the first publication in all required newspapers. If publication as provided above is not practicable, notice will be given in such other manner, and shall be deemed to have been given on such date, as the Trustee may approve. Couponholders will be deemed for all purposes to have notice of the contents of any notice given to the Noteholders in accordance with this paragraph.

So long as the Notes are held on behalf of Euroclear or Clearstream, any notice to the holders of the Notes shall be validly given by the delivery of the relevant notice to Euroclear or Clearstream, rather than by notification as required by these Conditions.

 

55


14. SUBSTITUTION

The Trustee may, without the consent of the Noteholders or the Couponholders, agree with the Issuer and the Guarantor to the substitution (a) in place of the Issuer as the principal debtor in respect of the Notes of (i) the Guarantor, (ii) a successor in business to the Issuer or the Guarantor, (iii) a holding company (as defined in the Trust Deed) of the Issuer or the Guarantor or (iv) any Subsidiary of the Guarantor; or (b) in place of the Guarantor as the guarantor in respect of the Notes, the Coupons and the Trust Deed of (i) a successor in business to the Guarantor or (ii) a holding company of the Guarantor, subject to:

 

  (a) except in the case of the substitution of the Guarantor, the Notes being unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed by the Guarantor;

 

  (b) the Trustee being satisfied that the interests of the Noteholders will not be materially prejudiced by the substitution; and

 

  (c) certain other conditions set out in the Trust Deed being complied with.

 

15. MEETINGS OF NOTEHOLDERS, MODIFICATION, WAIVER, AUTHORISATION AND DETERMINATION

The Trust Deed contains provisions for convening meetings of the Noteholders to consider any matter affecting their interests, including the sanctioning by Extraordinary Resolution of a modification of the Notes, the Coupons or any of the provisions of the Trust Deed. Such a meeting may be convened by the Issuer or the Trustee or by Noteholders holding not less than 5 per cent. in principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding. The quorum at any such meeting for passing an Extraordinary Resolution will be one or more persons holding or representing a clear majority in principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding, or at any adjourned meeting one or more persons being or representing Noteholders whatever the principal amount of the Notes so held or represented, except that at any meeting the business of which includes the modification of certain provisions of the Notes or the Coupons or the Trust Deed (including modifying the date of maturity of the Notes or any date for payment of interest thereon, reducing or cancelling the amount of principal or the rate of interest payable in respect of the Notes or altering the currency of payment of the Notes or the Coupons), the quorum shall be one or more persons holding or representing not less than two-thirds in principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding, or at any adjourned such meeting one or more persons holding or representing not less than one-third in principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding. An Extraordinary Resolution passed at any meeting of the Noteholders shall be binding on all the Noteholders, whether or not they are present at the meeting, and on all Couponholders. An Extraordinary Resolution may also be effected in writing executed by or on behalf of persons holding or representing not less than three-fourths in principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding.

The Trustee may agree, without the consent of the Noteholders or Couponholders, to:

 

  (a) any modification of the Notes, the Coupons or the Trust Deed which is not, in the opinion of the Trustee, materially prejudicial to the interests of the Noteholders; or

 

  (b) any modification of the Notes, the Coupons or the Trust Deed which is of a formal, minor or technical nature or which is made to correct a manifest error or to comply with mandatory provisions of applicable law.

The Trustee may also agree, without the consent of the Noteholders or Couponholders, to the waiver or authorisation of any breach or proposed breach of any of these Conditions or any of the provisions of the Trust Deed or determine, without any such consent as aforesaid, that any Event of Default or Potential Event of Default (each as defined in the Trust Deed) shall not be treated as such, which in any such case is not, in the opinion of the Trustee, materially prejudicial to the interests of the Noteholders.

 

56


Any such modification, waiver, authorisation or determination as aforesaid shall be binding on the Noteholders and the Couponholders and, unless the Trustee agrees otherwise, any such modification shall be notified to the Noteholders by the Issuer in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) as soon as practicable thereafter.

In connection with the exercise by it of any of its trusts, powers, authorities or discretions (including, but without limitation, any modification, waiver, authorisation or determination), the Trustee shall have regard to the general interests of the Noteholders as a class but shall not have regard to any interests arising from circumstances particular to individual Noteholders or Couponholders (whatever their number) and, in particular, but without limitation, shall not have regard to the consequences of such exercise for individual Noteholders or Couponholders (whatever their number) resulting from their being for any purpose domiciled or resident in, or otherwise connected with, or subject to the jurisdiction of, any particular territory and the Trustee shall not be entitled to require, nor shall any Noteholder or Couponholder be entitled to claim, from the Issuer or any other person any indemnification or payment in respect of any tax consequence of any such exercise upon individual Noteholders or Couponholders except, in the case of the Issuer, to the extent provided for in Condition 8 ( Taxation ) and/or any undertaking given in addition to, or in substitution for, Condition 8 ( Taxation ) pursuant to the Trust Deed.

 

16. INDEMNIFICATION OF THE TRUSTEE AND ITS CONTRACTING WITH THE ISSUER AND THE GUARANTOR

 

16.1 Indemnification of the Trustee

The Trust Deed contains provisions for the indemnification of the Trustee and for its relief from responsibility, including provisions relieving it from taking action unless indemnified and/or secured and/or prefunded to its satisfaction.

 

16.2 Trustee Contracting with the Issuer and the Guarantor

The Trust Deed also contains provisions pursuant to which the Trustee is entitled, inter alia , (a) to enter into business transactions with the Issuer and/or the Guarantor and/or any of the Guarantor’s other Subsidiaries and to act as trustee for the holders of any other securities issued or guaranteed by, or relating to, the Issuer and/or the Guarantor and/or any of the Guarantor’s other Subsidiaries, (b) to exercise and enforce its rights, comply with its obligations and perform its duties under or in relation to any such transactions or, as the case may be, any such trusteeship without regard to the interests of, or consequences for, the Noteholders or Couponholders, and (c) to retain and not be liable to account for any profit made or any other amount or benefit received thereby or in connection therewith.

 

17. FURTHER ISSUES

The Issuer is at liberty from time to time without the consent of the Noteholders or Couponholders to create and issue further notes or bonds (whether in bearer or registered form) either (a) ranking pari passu in all respects (or in all respects save for the first payment of interest thereon) and so that the same shall be consolidated and form a single series with the outstanding notes or bonds of any series (including the Notes) constituted by the Trust Deed or any supplemental deed or (b) upon such terms as to ranking, interest, conversion, redemption and otherwise as the Issuer may determine at the time of the issue. Any further notes or bonds which are to form a single series with the outstanding notes or bonds of any series (including the Notes) constituted by the Trust Deed or any supplemental deed shall, and any other further notes or bonds may (with the consent of the Trustee), be constituted by a deed supplemental to the Trust Deed. The Trust Deed contains provisions for convening a single meeting of the Noteholders and the holders of notes or bonds of other series in certain circumstances where the Trustee so decides.

 

57


18. GOVERNING LAW

The Trust Deed (including the Guarantee), the Notes and the Coupons and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with the Trust Deed (including the Guarantee), the Notes and the Coupons are governed by, and will be construed in accordance with, English law.

 

19. RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES

No rights are conferred on any person under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce any term of this Note, but this does not affect any right or remedy of any person which exists or is available apart from that Act.

 

58


SCHEDULE 3

PROVISIONS FOR MEETINGS OF NOTEHOLDERS

DEFINITIONS

 

1. As used in this Schedule the following expressions shall have the following meanings unless the context otherwise requires:

Block Voting Instruction ” means an English language document issued by a Paying Agent in which:

 

  (a) it is certified that on the date thereof Notes (whether in definitive form or represented by a Global Note) which are held in an account with any Clearing System (in each case not being Notes in respect of which a Voting Certificate has been issued and is outstanding in respect of the meeting specified in such Block Voting Instruction) have been deposited with such Paying Agent or (to the satisfaction of such Paying Agent) are held to its order or under its control or are blocked in an account with a Clearing System and that no such Notes will cease to be so deposited or held or blocked until the first to occur of:

 

  (1) the conclusion of the meeting specified in such Block Voting Instruction; and

 

  (2) the surrender to the Paying Agent, not less than 48 Hours before the time for which such meeting is convened, of the receipt issued by such Paying Agent in respect of each such deposited Note which is to be released or (as the case may require) the Notes ceasing with the agreement of the Paying Agent to be held to its order or under its control or so blocked and the giving of notice by the Paying Agent to the Issuer in accordance with paragraph 3(F) of this Schedule of the necessary amendment to the Block Voting Instruction;

 

  (b) it is certified that each holder of such Notes has instructed such Paying Agent that the vote(s) attributable to the Notes so deposited or held or blocked should be cast in a particular way in relation to the resolution(s) to be put to such meeting and that all such instructions are, during the period commencing 48 Hours prior to the time for which such meeting is convened and ending at the conclusion or adjournment thereof, neither revocable nor capable of amendment;

 

  (c) the aggregate principal amount of the Notes so deposited or held or blocked is listed distinguishing with regard to each such resolution between those in respect of which instructions have been given that the votes attributable thereto should be cast in favour of the resolution and those in respect of which instructions have been so given that the votes attributable thereto should be cast against the resolution; and

 

  (d) one or more persons named in such Block Voting Instruction (each hereinafter called a proxy) is or are authorised and instructed by such Paying Agent to cast the votes attributable to the Notes so listed in accordance with the instructions referred to in (c) above as set out in such Block Voting Instruction;

Clearing System ” means Euroclear and/or Clearstream, Luxembourg and includes in respect of any Note any clearing system on behalf of which such Note is held or which is the bearer or holder of a Note, in either case whether alone or jointly with any other Clearing System(s). For the avoidance of doubt, the provisions of clause 1.2(h) shall apply to this definition;

Eligible Person ” means any one of the following persons who shall be entitled to attend and vote at a meeting:

 

  (a) a holder of a Note in definitive form; (b) a bearer of any Voting Certificate; and

 

  (c) a proxy specified in any Block Voting Instruction;

Extraordinary Resolution ” means:

 

  (a) a resolution passed at a meeting duly convened and held in accordance with these presents by a majority consisting of not less than three-fourths of the Eligible Persons voting thereat upon a show of hands or, if a poll is duly demanded, by a majority consisting of not less than three-fourths of the votes cast on such poll; or

 

59


  (b) a resolution in writing signed by or on behalf of the holders of not less than three-fourths in principal amount of the Notes which resolution may be contained in one document or in several documents in like form each signed by or on behalf of one or more of the holders;

Ordinary Resolution ” means:

 

  (a) a resolution passed at a meeting duly convened and held in accordance with these presents by a clear majority of the Eligible Persons voting thereat on a show of hands or, if a poll is duly demanded, by a simple majority of the votes cast on such poll; or

 

  (b) a resolution in writing signed by or on behalf of the holders of not less than a clear majority in principal amount of the Notes, which resolution may be contained in one document or in several documents in like form each signed by or on behalf of one or more of the holders;

Voting Certificate ” means an English language certificate issued by a Paying Agent in which it is stated:

 

  (a) that on the date thereof Notes (whether in definitive form or represented by a Global Note) which are held in an account with any Clearing System (in each case not being Notes in respect of which a Block Voting Instruction has been issued and is outstanding in respect of the meeting specified in such Voting Certificate) were deposited with such Paying Agent or (to the satisfaction of such Paying Agent) are held to its order or under its control or are blocked in an account with a Clearing System and that no such Notes will cease to be so deposited or held or blocked until the first to occur of:

 

  (1) the conclusion of the meeting specified in such Voting Certificate; and

 

  (2) the surrender of the Voting Certificate to the Paying Agent who issued the same; and

 

  (b) that the bearer thereof is entitled to attend and vote at such meeting in respect of the Notes represented by such Voting Certificate;

24 Hours ” means a period of 24 hours including all or part of a day upon which banks are open for business in both the place where the relevant meeting is to be held and in each of the places where the Paying Agents have their specified offices (disregarding for this purpose the day upon which such meeting is to be held) and such period shall be extended by one period or, to the extent necessary, more periods of 24 hours until there is included as aforesaid all or part of a day upon which banks are open for business in all of the places as aforesaid; and

48 Hours ” means a period of 48 hours including all or part of two days upon which banks are open for business both in the place where the relevant meeting is to be held and in each of the places where the Paying Agents have their specified offices (disregarding for this purpose the day upon which such meeting is to be held) and such period shall be extended by one period or, to the extent necessary, more periods of 24 hours until there is included as aforesaid all or part of two days upon which banks are open for business in all of the places as aforesaid.

For the purposes of calculating a period of “ Clear Days ” in relation to a meeting, no account shall be taken of the day on which the notice of such meeting is given (or, in the case of an adjourned meeting, the day on which the meeting to be adjourned is held) or the day on which such meeting is held.

All references in this Schedule to a “meeting” shall, where the context so permits, include any relevant adjourned meeting.

EVIDENCE OF ENTITLEMENT TO ATTEND AND VOTE

 

2. A holder of a Note (whether in definitive form or represented by a Global Note) which is held in an account with any Clearing System may require the issue by a Paying Agent of Voting Certificates and Block Voting Instructions in accordance with the terms of paragraph 3.

 

60


For the purposes of paragraph 3, the Principal Paying Agent and each Paying Agent shall be entitled to rely, without further enquiry, on any information or instructions received from a Clearing System and shall have no liability to any holder or other person for any loss, damage, cost, claim or other liability occasioned by its acting in reliance thereon, nor for any failure by a Clearing System to deliver information or instructions to the Principal Paying Agent or any Paying Agent.

The holder of any Voting Certificate or the proxies named in any Block Voting Instruction shall for all purposes in connection with the relevant meeting be deemed to be the holder of the Notes to which such Voting Certificate or Block Voting Instruction relates and the Paying Agent with which such Notes have been deposited or the person holding Notes to the order or under the control of such Paying Agent or the Clearing System in which such Notes have been blocked shall be deemed for such purposes not to be the holder of those Notes.

PROCEDURE FOR ISSUE OF VOTING CERTIFICATES, BLOCK VOTING INSTRUCTIONS AND PROXIES

 

3. (A)   Definitive Notes not held in a Clearing System - Voting Certificate

A holder of a Note in definitive form which is not held in an account with any Clearing System (not being a Note in respect of which a Block Voting Instruction has been issued and is outstanding in respect of the meeting specified in such Voting Certificate) may obtain a Voting Certificate in respect of such Note from a Paying Agent subject to such holder having procured that such Note is deposited with such Paying Agent or (to the satisfaction of such Paying Agent) is held to its order or under its control upon terms that no such Note will cease to be so deposited or held until the first to occur of:

 

  (i) the conclusion of the meeting specified in such Voting Certificate; and

 

  (ii) the surrender of the Voting Certificate to the Paying Agent who issued the same.

 

  (B) Global Notes and definitive Notes held in a Clearing System - Voting Certificate

A holder of a Note (not being a Note in respect of which instructions have been given to the Principal Paying Agent in accordance with paragraph 3(D) of this Schedule) represented by a Global Note or which is in definitive form and is held in an account with any Clearing System may procure the delivery of a Voting Certificate in respect of such Note by giving notice to the Clearing System through which such holder’s interest in the Note is held specifying by name a person (an Identified Person) (which need not be the holder himself) to collect the Voting Certificate and attend and vote at the meeting. The relevant Voting Certificate will be made available at or shortly prior to the commencement of the meeting by the Principal Paying Agent against presentation by such Identified Person of the form of identification previously notified by such holder to the Clearing System. The Clearing System may prescribe forms of identification (including, without limitation, a passport or driving licence) which it deems appropriate for these purposes. Subject to receipt by the Principal Paying Agent from the Clearing System, no later than 24 Hours prior to the time for which such meeting is convened, of notification of the principal amount of the Notes to be represented by any such Voting Certificate and the form of identification against presentation of which such Voting Certificate should be released, the Principal Paying Agent shall, without any obligation to make further enquiry, make available Voting Certificates against presentation of the form of identification corresponding to that notified.

 

  (C) Definitive Notes not held in a Clearing System - Block Voting Instruction

A holder of a Note in definitive form which is not held in an account with any Clearing System (not being a Note in respect of which a Voting Certificate has been issued and is outstanding in respect of the meeting specified in such Block Voting Instruction) may require a Paying Agent to issue a Block Voting Instruction in respect of such Note by depositing such Note with such Paying Agent or (to the satisfaction of such Paying Agent) by procuring that, not less than 48 Hours before the time fixed for

 

61


the relevant meeting, such Note is held to the Paying Agent’s order or under its control, in each case on terms that no such Note will cease to be so deposited or held until the first to occur of:

 

  (a) the conclusion of the meeting specified in such Block Voting Instruction; and

 

  (b) the surrender to the Paying Agent, not less than 48 Hours before the time for which such meeting is convened, of the receipt issued by such Paying Agent in respect of each such deposited or held Note which is to be released or (as the case may require) the Note or Notes ceasing with the agreement of the Paying Agent to be held to its order or under its control and the giving of notice by the Paying Agent to the Issuer in accordance with paragraph 3(F) hereof of the necessary amendment to the Block Voting Instruction;

and instructing the Paying Agent that the vote(s) attributable to the Note or Notes so deposited or held should be cast in a particular way in relation to the resolution or resolutions to be put to such meeting and that all such instructions are, during the period commencing 48 Hours prior to the time for which such meeting is convened and ending at the conclusion or adjournment thereof, neither revocable nor capable of amendment.

 

  (D) Global Notes and definitive Notes held in a Clearing System - Block Voting Instruction

A holder of a Note (not being a Note in respect of which a Voting Certificate has been issued) represented by a Global Note or which is in definitive form and is held in an account with any Clearing System may require the Principal Paying Agent to issue a Block Voting Instruction in respect of such Note by first instructing the Clearing System through which such holder’s interest in the Note is held to procure that the votes attributable to such Note should be cast at the meeting in a particular way in relation to the resolution or resolutions to be put to the meeting. Any such instruction shall be given in accordance with the rules of the Clearing System then in effect. Subject to receipt by the Principal Paying Agent of instructions from the Clearing System, no later than 24 Hours prior to the time for which such meeting is convened, of notification of the principal amount of the Notes in respect of which instructions have been given and the manner in which the votes attributable to such Notes should be cast, the Principal Paying Agent shall, without any obligation to make further enquiry, appoint a proxy to attend the meeting and cast votes in accordance with such instructions.

 

  (E) Each Block Voting Instruction, together (if so requested by the Trustee) with proof satisfactory to the Trustee of its due execution on behalf of the relevant Paying Agent shall be deposited by the relevant Paying Agent at such place as the Trustee shall approve not less than 24 Hours before the time appointed for holding the meeting at which the proxy or proxies named in the Block Voting Instruction proposes to vote, and in default the Block Voting Instruction shall not be treated as valid unless the Chairman of the meeting decides otherwise before such meeting proceeds to business. A copy of each Block Voting Instruction shall be deposited with the Trustee before the commencement of the meeting but the Trustee shall not thereby be obliged to investigate or be concerned with the validity of or the authority of the proxy or proxies named in any such Block Voting Instruction.

 

  (F) Any vote given in accordance with the terms of a Block Voting Instruction shall be valid notwithstanding the previous revocation or amendment of the Block Voting Instruction or of any of the instructions of the relevant holder or the relevant Clearing System (as the case may be) pursuant to which it was executed provided that no intimation in writing of such revocation or amendment has been received from the relevant Paying Agent by the Issuer at its registered office (or such other place as may have been required or approved by the Trustee for the purpose) by the time being 24 Hours (in the case of a Block Voting Instruction) or 48 Hours (in the case of a proxy) before the time appointed for holding the meeting at which the Block Voting Instruction is to be used.

CONVENING OF MEETINGS, QUORUM AND ADJOURNED MEETINGS

 

4.

The Issuer, the Guarantor or the Trustee may at any time, and the Issuer shall upon a requisition in writing in the English language signed by the holders of not less than five per cent. in principal amount of the Notes

 

62


  for the time being outstanding, convene a meeting and if the Issuer makes default for a period of seven calendar days in convening such a meeting the same may be convened by the Trustee or the requisitionists. Whenever the Issuer or the Guarantor is about to convene any such meeting the Issuer or the Guarantor, as the case may be, shall forthwith give notice in writing to the Trustee of the day, time and place thereof and of the nature of the business to be transacted thereat. Every such meeting shall be held at such time and place as the Trustee may appoint or approve in writing.

 

5. At least 21 Clear Days’ notice specifying the place, day and hour of meeting shall be given to the holders prior to any meeting in the manner provided by Condition 13 ( Notices ). Such notice, which shall be in the English language, shall state generally the nature of the business to be transacted at the meeting thereby convened and, in the case of an Extraordinary Resolution, shall either specify in such notice the terms of such resolution or state fully the effect on the holders of such resolution, if passed. Such notice shall include statements as to the manner in which holders may arrange for Voting Certificates or Block Voting Instructions to be issued and, if applicable, appoint proxies. A copy of the notice shall be sent by post to the Trustee (unless the meeting is convened by the Trustee), to the Issuer (unless the meeting is convened by the Issuer) and to the Guarantor (unless the meeting is convened by the Guarantor).

 

6. A person (who may but need not be a holder) nominated in writing by the Trustee shall be entitled to take the chair at the relevant meeting, but if no such nomination is made or if at any meeting the person nominated shall not be present within 15 minutes after the time appointed for holding the meeting the holders present shall choose one of their number to be Chairman, failing which the Issuer may appoint a Chairman. The Chairman of an adjourned meeting need not be the same person as was Chairman of the meeting from which the adjournment took place.

 

7. At any such meeting one or more Eligible Persons present and holding or representing in the aggregate not less than one-twentieth of the principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding shall (except for the purpose of passing an Extraordinary Resolution) form a quorum for the transaction of business (including the passing of an Ordinary Resolution) and no business (other than the choosing of a Chairman) shall be transacted at any meeting unless the requisite quorum be present at the commencement of the relevant business. The quorum at any such meeting for passing an Extraordinary Resolution shall (subject as provided below) be one or more Eligible Persons present and holding or representing in the aggregate a clear majority in principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding PROVIDED THAT at any meeting the business of which includes any of the following matters (each of which shall, subject only to subclause 19.2 and clause 21, only be capable of being effected after having been approved by Extraordinary Resolution) namely:

 

  (i) reduction or cancellation of the amount of principal or the rate of interest payable or, where applicable, modification, except where such modification is in the opinion of the Trustee bound to result in an increase, of the method of calculating the amount payable or modification of the date of maturity of the Notes or any date for payment of interest thereon or, where applicable, of the method of calculating the date of payment in respect of any principal or interest in respect of the Notes;

 

  (ii) alteration of the currency in which payments under the Notes and Coupons are to be made;

 

  (iii) alteration of the majority required to pass an Extraordinary Resolution;

 

  (iv) the sanctioning of any such scheme or proposal or substitution as is described in paragraphs 19(i) and (j) of this Schedule; and

 

  (v) alteration of this proviso or the proviso to paragraph 9 hereto,

the quorum shall be one or more Eligible Persons present and holding or representing in the aggregate not less than two-thirds of the principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding.

 

8.

If within 15 minutes (or such longer period not exceeding 30 minutes as the Chairman may decide) after the time appointed for any such meeting a quorum is not present for the transaction of any particular business, then, subject and without prejudice to the transaction of the business (if any) for which a quorum is present,

 

63


  the meeting shall if convened upon the requisition of holders be dissolved. In any other case it shall stand adjourned to the same day in the next week (or if such day is a public holiday the next succeeding business day) at the same time and place (except in the case of a meeting at which an Extraordinary Resolution is to be proposed in which case it shall stand adjourned for such period, being not less than 13 Clear Days nor more than 42 Clear Days, and to such place as may be appointed by the Chairman either at or subsequent to such meeting and approved by the Trustee). If within 15 minutes (or such longer period not exceeding 30 minutes as the Chairman may decide) after the time appointed for any adjourned meeting a quorum is not present for the transaction of any particular business, then, subject and without prejudice to the transaction of the business (if any) for which a quorum is present, the Chairman may either (with the approval of the Trustee) dissolve such meeting or adjourn the same for such period, being not less than 13 Clear Days (but without any maximum number of Clear Days), and to such place as may be appointed by the Chairman either at or subsequent to such adjourned meeting and approved by the Trustee, and the provisions of this sentence shall apply to all further adjourned such meetings.    

 

9. At any adjourned meeting one or more Eligible Persons present (whatever the principal amount of the Notes so held or represented by them) shall (subject as provided below) form a quorum and shall have power to pass any resolution and to decide upon all matters which could properly have been dealt with at the meeting from which the adjournment took place had the requisite quorum been present PROVIDED THAT at any adjourned meeting the quorum for the transaction of business comprising any of the matters specified in the proviso to paragraph 7 shall be one or more Eligible Persons present and holding or representing in the aggregate not less than one-third of the principal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding.

 

10. Notice of any adjourned meeting at which an Extraordinary Resolution is to be submitted shall be given in the same manner as notice of an original meeting but as if 10 were substituted for 21 in paragraph 5 and such notice shall state the required quorum. Subject as aforesaid it shall not be necessary to give any notice of an adjourned meeting.

CONDUCT OF BUSINESS AT MEETINGS

 

11. Every question submitted to a meeting shall be decided in the first instance by a show of hands. A poll may be demanded (before or on the declaration of the result of the show of hands) by the Chairman, the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Trustee or any Eligible Person (whatever the amount of the Notes so held or represented by him).

 

12. At any meeting, unless a poll is duly demanded, a declaration by the Chairman that a resolution has been carried or carried by a particular majority or lost or not carried by a particular majority shall be conclusive evidence of the fact without proof of the number or proportion of the votes recorded in favour of or against such resolution.

 

13. Subject to paragraph 15 hereof, if at any such meeting a poll is so demanded it shall be taken in such manner and, subject as hereinafter provided, either at once or after an adjournment as the Chairman directs and the result of such poll shall be deemed to be the resolution of the meeting at which the poll was demanded as at the date of the taking of the poll. The demand for a poll shall not prevent the continuance of the meeting for the transaction of any business other than the motion on which the poll has been demanded.

 

14. The Chairman may, with the consent of (and shall if directed by) any such meeting, adjourn the same from time to time and from place to place; but no business shall be transacted at any adjourned meeting except business which might lawfully have been transacted at the meeting from which the adjournment took place.

 

15. Any poll demanded at any such meeting on the election of a Chairman or on any question of adjournment shall be taken at the meeting without adjournment.

 

16.

Any director or officer of the Trustee, its lawyers and financial advisors, any director or officer of the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantor, their lawyers and financial advisors, any director or officer of any of the Paying Agents and any other person authorised so to do by the Trustee may attend and speak at any

 

64


  meeting. Save as aforesaid, no person shall be entitled to attend and speak nor shall any person be entitled to vote at any meeting unless he is an Eligible Person. No person shall be entitled to vote at any meeting in respect of Notes which are deemed to be not outstanding by virtue of the proviso to the definition of “outstanding” in subclause 1.1.

 

17. At any meeting:

 

  (a) on a show of hands every Eligible Person present shall have one vote; and

 

  (b) on a poll every Eligible Person present shall have one vote in respect of each €1 or such other amount as the Trustee may in its absolute discretion stipulate, in principal amount of the Notes held or represented by such Eligible Person.

Without prejudice to the obligations of the proxies named in any Block Voting Instruction, any Eligible Person entitled to more than one vote need not use all his votes or cast all the votes to which he is entitled in the same way.

 

18. The proxies named in any Block Voting Instruction need not be holders. Nothing herein shall prevent any of the proxies named in any Block Voting Instruction from being a director, officer or representative of or otherwise connected with the Issuer or the Guarantor.

 

19. A meeting shall in addition to the powers hereinbefore given have the following powers exercisable only by Extraordinary Resolution (subject to the provisions relating to quorum contained in paragraphs 7 and 9 hereof) namely:

 

  (a) Power to sanction any compromise or arrangement proposed to be made between the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Trustee, any Appointee and the holders and Couponholders or any of them.

 

  (b) Power to sanction any abrogation, modification, compromise or arrangement in respect of the rights of the Trustee, any Appointee, the holders, the Couponholders the Issuer or the Guarantor against any other or others of them or against any of their property whether such rights arise under these presents or otherwise.

 

  (c) Power to assent to any modification of the provisions of these presents which is proposed by the Issuer, the Guarantor, the Trustee or any holder.

 

  (d) Power to give any authority or sanction which under the provisions of these presents is required to be given by Extraordinary Resolution.

 

  (e) Power to appoint any persons (whether holders or not) as a committee or committees to represent the interests of the holders and to confer upon such committee or committees any powers or discretions which the holders could themselves exercise by Extraordinary Resolution.

 

  (f) Power to approve of a person to be appointed a trustee and power to remove any trustee or trustees for the time being of these presents.

 

  (g) Power to discharge or exonerate the Trustee and/or any Appointee from all liability in respect of any act or omission for which the Trustee and/or such Appointee may have become responsible under these presents.

 

  (h) Power to authorise the Trustee and/or any Appointee to concur in and execute and do all such deeds, instruments, acts and things as may be necessary to carry out and give effect to any Extraordinary Resolution.

 

  (i) Power to sanction any scheme or proposal for the exchange or sale of the Notes for or the conversion of the Notes into or the cancellation of the Notes in consideration of shares, stock, notes, bonds, debentures, debenture stock and/or other obligations and/or securities of the Issuer or any other company formed or to be formed, or for or into or in consideration of cash, or partly for or into or in consideration of such shares, stock, notes, bonds, debentures, debenture stock and/or other obligations and/or securities as aforesaid and partly for or into or in consideration of cash.

 

65


  (j) Power to approve the substitution of any entity for the Issuer and/or the Guarantor (or any previous substitute) as principal debtor and/or guarantor, as the case may be, under these presents.

 

20. Any resolution passed at a meeting of the holders duly convened and held in accordance with these presents shall be binding upon all the holders whether or not present or whether or not represented at such meeting and whether or not voting and upon all Couponholders and each of them shall be bound to give effect thereto accordingly and the passing of any such resolution shall be conclusive evidence that the circumstances justify the passing thereof. Any duty derived from any principle of law or equity that would otherwise have the effect of requiring the holders of the Notes to exercise their powers to vote for or against any Extraordinary Resolution or any other resolution contemplated by this Trust Deed or the Conditions for the benefit or in the interests of any group or class of holders as a whole and not merely individual holders is excluded to the fullest extent permitted by law. Notice of the result of the voting on any resolution duly considered by the holders shall be published in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) by the Issuer within 14 calendar days of such result being known, PROVIDED THAT the non-publication of such notice shall not invalidate such result.

 

21. Minutes of all resolutions and proceedings at every meeting shall be made and entered in books to be from time to time provided for that purpose by the Issuer and any such minutes as aforesaid, if purporting to be signed by the Chairman of the meeting at which such resolutions were passed or proceedings transacted, shall be conclusive evidence of the matters therein contained and, until the contrary is proved, every such meeting in respect of the proceedings of which minutes have been made shall be deemed to have been duly held and convened and all resolutions passed or proceedings transacted thereat to have been duly passed or transacted.

 

22. Subject to all other provisions of these presents the Trustee may (after consultation with the Issuer and the Guarantor where the Trustee considers such consultation to be practicable but without the consent of the Issuer, the Guarantor, the holders or the Couponholders) prescribe such further or alternative regulations regarding the requisitioning and/or the holding of meetings and attendance and voting thereat as the Trustee may in its sole discretion reasonably think fit (including, without limitation, the substitution for periods of 24 Hours and 48 Hours referred to in this Schedule of shorter periods). Such regulations may, without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, reflect the practices and facilities of any relevant Clearing System. Notice of any such further or alternative regulations may, at the sole discretion of the Trustee, be given to holders in accordance with Condition 13 ( Notices ) at the time of service of any notice convening a meeting or at such other time as the Trustee may decide.

 

66


SCHEDULE 4

FORM OF DIRECTORS’ CERTIFICATE

[ON THE HEADED PAPER OF THE [ISSUER/GUARANTOR]]

 

To: The Law Debenture Trust Corporation p.l.c.

Fifth Floor,

100 Wood Street,

London EC2V 7EX,

England.

Attention: The Manager, Commercial Trusts (Ref: 200850)

[ Date ]

Dear Sirs

Pearson Funding Five plc

€500,000,000 1.375 per cent. Guaranteed Notes due 2025

This certificate is delivered to you in accordance with clause 14(l) of the Trust Deed dated 6 May 2015 (the “ Trust Deed ”) and made between Pearson Funding Five plc (the “ Issuer ”), Pearson plc (the “ Guarantor ”) and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation p.l.c. (the “ Trustee ”). All words and expressions defined in the Trust Deed shall (save as otherwise provided herein or unless the context otherwise requires) have the same meanings herein.

We hereby certify that, to the best of our knowledge, information and belief:

 

(a) as at [    ] 1 , no Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Change of Control Triggering Event existed [other than [    ]] 2  and no Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Change of Control Triggering Event had existed at any time since [    ] 3  [the certification date (as defined in the Trust Deed) of the last certificate delivered under clause [14(l)]] 4  [other than [    ]] 5 ; and

 

(b)

from and including [    ] 3 [the certification date of the last certificate delivered under clause [14(l)]]4 to and including [    ] 1 , each of the Issuer and the Guarantor has complied in all respects with its obligations under these presents (as defined in the Trust Deed) [other than [    ]] 6 .

 

1   Specify a date not more than 10 calendar days before the date of delivery of the certificate.
2   If any Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Change of Control Triggering Event did exist, give details; otherwise delete.
3   Insert date of Trust Deed in respect of the first certificate delivered under Clause 14(l), otherwise delete.
4   Include unless the certificate is the first certificate delivered under Clause 14(l), in which case delete.
5   If any Event of Default, Potential Event of Default or Change of Control Triggering Event did exist, give details; otherwise delete.
6   If the Issuer and/or Guarantor has failed to comply with any obligation(s), give details; otherwise delete.

 

67


For and on behalf of    
PEARSON FUNDING FIVE PLC    

 

   

 

Director     [Director]/[Company Secretary]
PEARSON PLC    

 

   

 

Director     [Director]/[Company Secretary]/[Deputy Company Secretary]

 

68


SIGNATORIES

 

EXECUTED as a DEED by PEARSON   )  
FUNDING FIVE PLC acting by :   )  
Authorised Signatory    
Authorised Signatory    
EXECUTED as a DEED by PEARSON PLC   )  
acting by:   )  
Authorised Signatory    
Authorised Signatory    
EXECUTED as a DEED by   )  
THE LAW DEBENTURE TRUST   )  
CORPORATION p.l.c. acting by :   )  
Director    
Director/Secretary    

 

69

Exhibit 8.1

List of Subsidiaries

 

Company   

Country of

Incorporation

A Plus Education Solutions Private Limited    India
Addison Wesley Longman Australia Pty Limited    Australia
Addison Wesley Longman, Inc.    US
Addison-Wesley Educational Publishers Inc.    US
AEL (S) PTE Limited    Singapore
Aldwych Finance Limited    UK
America’s Choice, Inc.    US
ASET Group Limited    UK
ASET Limited    UK
ASET Management Limited    UK
ASET Solutions Limited    UK
ATI Professional Development LLC    US
Atkey Finance Limited    Ireland
Aulis Verwaltungs GmbH    Germany
Axis Finance Inc.    US
Beijing Global Education & Technology Co., Ltd.    China
Beijing Wall Street English Training Centre Company Limited    China
Berrisford Finance Limited    Ireland
Blue Wharf Limited    UK
Burmedia Investments Limited    UK
CA of Michigan, LLC    US
Camsaw College Publishing Company, Inc.    US
Camsaw, Inc.    US
CAMSAWUSA, Inc.    US
Casapsi Livraria e Editora Ltda    Brazil
Centro Cultural Americano Franquias e Comércio Ltda.    Brazil
Century Consultants, Ltd.    US
Certiport China Co. Ltd.    China
Certiport China Holding, LLC    US
Certiport, Inc.    US
CG Manipal Schools Private Limited    Nepal
Chongqing WSE Training Centre Co Ltd    China
Cogmed Systems AB    Sweden
Connections Academy of Alaska, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Arizona, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Arkansas, LLC    US
Connections Academy of California, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Colorado, LLC    US
Connections Academy of DC, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Florida, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Georgia, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Idaho, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Indiana, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Iowa, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Kansas, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Kentucky, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Louisiana, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Maine, LLC    US


Company   

Country of

Incorporation

Connections Academy of Maryland, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Massachusetts, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Minnesota, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Missouri, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Nevada, LLC    US
Connections Academy of New Jersey, LLC    US
Connections Academy of New Mexico, LLC    US
Connections Academy of New York, LLC    US
Connections Academy of North Carolina, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Ohio, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Oklahoma, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Oregon, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Pennsylvania LLC    US
Connections Academy of South Carolina, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Tennessee, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Texas, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Utah, LLC    US
Connections Academy of Virginia LLC    US
Connections Academy of Washington LLC    US
Connections Academy of Wisconsin LLC    US
Connections Academy of Wyoming, LLC    US
Connections Education, LLC    US
Connections Education, Inc.    US
CTI Education Group (Pty) Limited    South Africa
Dale Seymour Publications, Inc.    US
Dominie Press Inc    US
Dorian Finance Limited    Ireland
Dorling Kindersley Australasia Pty Limited    Australia
E Q L Assessment Limited    UK
EBNT Canada Holdings ULC    Canada
EBNT Holdings Limited    Canada
EBNT USA Holdings Inc.    US
eCollege.com    US
Edexcel Limited    UK
Edexcel South Africa Pty Ltd    South Africa
Éditions Du Renouveau Pédagogique Inc.    Canada
Education by Association (Pty) Ltd    South Africa
Education Development International Plc    UK
Education Resources (Cyprus) Limited    Cyprus
Educational Management Group Inc    US
Educational Publishers LLP    UK
Educational Resources (HK) Limited    Hong Kong
Educational Resources Pte Ltd    Singapore
Educomp Higher Initiatives Pte Ltd    Singapore
Embanet ULC    Canada
Embanet-Compass Knowledge Group, Inc.    US
Embankment Finance Limited    UK
English Language Learning and Instruction System, Inc.    US
eNVQ Limited    UK
Escape Studios Limited    UK
Falstaff Holdco Inc.    US
Falstaff Inc.    US


Company   

Country of

Incorporation

FastExpress Centro de Idiomas Ltda    Brazil
FBH, Inc.    US
Florida Connections Academy, L.L.C.    US
Franchise Support & Services, SL    Spain
Gamma Master China, Limited    Hong Kong
GED Domains LLC    US
GED Testing Service LLC    US
Global Education & Technology (HK) Limited    Hong Kong
Global Education & Technology Group Limited    Cayman Islands
Global Elite Education & Technology (Shanghai) Co. Limited    China
GlobalEnglish Asia, Inc.    US
GlobalEnglish Brasil Ltda.    Brazil
GlobalEnglish France SARL    France
GlobalEnglish Germany GmbH    Germany
GlobalEnglish Hong Kong Limited    Hong Kong
GlobalEnglish India Private Limited    India
GlobalEnglish Mexico S. de R.L.    Mexico
Globe Fearon Inc.    US
GOAL Limited    UK
Green Wharf Limited    UK
Guangzhou Crescent Software Co., Ltd    China
Heilongjiang WSE Training Centre Co Ltd    China
Heinemann Educational Botswana (Publishers) (Pty) Limited    Botswana
Heinemann Lesotho(Pty) Ltd    Lesotho
Heinemann Publishers (Pty) Ltd    South Africa
Icodeon Limited    UK
IndiaCan Education Private Limited    India
Integral 7, Inc.    US
Intellipro, Inc    US
J M Soluções Exportação e Importação Ltda    Brazil
Joint Examining Board Limited    UK
Kagiso Education Pty Ltd    South Africa
Knowledge Analysis Technologies, LLC    US
LCCI International Qualifications (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.    Malaysia
LCCIEB Training Consultancy., Ltd    China
Learn Capital Venture Partners II, L.P.    US
LessonLab, Inc.    US
Lignum Oil Company    US
Linx Brasil Distribuidora Ltda.    Brazil
Longman (Malawi) Limited    Malawi
Longman Australasia Pty Ltd    Australia
Longman Group (Overseas Holdings) Limited    UK
Longman Indochina Acquisition, L.L.C.    US
Longman Kenya Limited    Kenya
Longman Mocambique Ltda    Mozambique
Longman Swaziland (Pty) Limited    Swaziland
Longman Tanzania Limited    Tanzania
Longman Zambia Educational Publishers Pty Ltd    Zambia
Longman Zambia Limited    Zambia
Longman Zimbabwe (Private) Ltd    Zimbabwe
Longmaned Ecuador S.A.    Ecuador
LRTE VOXY, LLC    US


Company   

Country of

Incorporation

LRTE Voxy, L.P.    US
Maskew Miller Longman (Pty) Limited    South Africa
MeasureUp, LLC    US
Midlands Educational Technology Limited    UK
Midrand Graduate Institute Pty Ltd    South Africa
Modern Curriculum Inc.    US
Multi Treinamento e Editora Ltda.    Brazil
Multilingua Limited    UK
National Computer Systems Japan Co. Ltd    Japan
NCS Information Services Technology (Beijing) Co Ltd    China
NCS Pearson Pty Ltd    Australia
NCS Pearson Puerto Rico, Inc.    Puerto Rico
NCS Pearson, Inc.    US
Ordinate Corporation    US
P.Ed. Aust Pty Ltd    Australia
Pearson (Beijing) Management Consulting Co., Ltd.    China
Pearson (Guizhou) Education Technology Co., Ltd.    China
Pearson (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.    Singapore
Pearson Affordable Learning Fund Limited    UK
Pearson America LLC    US
Pearson Amsterdam B.V.    Netherlands
Pearson Amsterdam Finance Limited    UK
Pearson Assessment & Information B.V.    Netherlands
Pearson Assessment and Information GmbH    Germany
Pearson Australia Finance Unlimited    UK
Pearson Australia Group Pty Ltd    Australia
Pearson Australia Holdings Pty Ltd    Australia
Pearson Australia Pty Ltd    Australia
Pearson Benelux B.V.    Netherlands
Pearson Books Limited    UK
Pearson Brazil Finance Limited    UK
Pearson Business (Asia Pacific) Pte. Ltd    Singapore
Pearson Business Services Inc.    US
Pearson Canada Assessment Inc    Canada
Pearson Canada Finance Unlimited    UK
Pearson Canada Holdings Inc    Canada
Pearson Canada Inc.    Canada
Pearson Central Europe sp. z o.o.    Poland
Pearson Charitable Foundation    US
Pearson College Limited    UK
Pearson DBC Holdings Inc.    US
Pearson Desarrollo y Capacitación Profesional Chile Limitada    Chile
Pearson Deutschland GmbH    Germany
Pearson Digital Learning Puerto Rico, Inc.    Puerto Rico
Pearson Dollar Finance plc    UK
Pearson Dollar Finance Two plc    UK
Pearson Educacion de Chile Limitada    Chile
Pearson Educacion de Colombia S A S    Colombia
Pearson Educacion de Mexico, S.A. de C.V.    Mexico
Pearson Educacion de Panama S.A.    Panama
Pearson Educacion de Peru S.A.    Peru
Pearson Educacion de Venezuela C.A.    Venezuela


Company   

Country of

Incorporation

Pearson Educacion S.A.    Spain
Pearson Education (Singapore) Pte Ltd    Singapore
Pearson Education Achievement Solutions (RF) (Pty) Ltd    South Africa
Pearson Education Africa (Pty) Ltd    South Africa
Pearson Education and Assessment, Inc.    US
Pearson Education Asia Limited    Hong Kong
Pearson Education Botswana (Pty) Limited    Botswana
Pearson Education do Brasil S.A    Brazil
Pearson Education Hellas S.A.    Greece
Pearson Education Holdings Inc.    US
Pearson Education Holdings Limited    UK
Pearson Education Indochina Limited    Thailand
Pearson Education Investments Limited    UK
Pearson Education Korea Limited    South Korea
Pearson Education Limited    UK
Pearson Education Namibia (Pty) Limited    Namibia
Pearson Education Publishing Limited    Nigeria
Pearson Education S.A.    Uruguay
Pearson Education S.A.    Argentina
Pearson Education South Africa (Pty) Ltd    South Africa
Pearson Education South Asia Pte. Ltd.    Singapore
Pearson Education Taiwan Ltd    Taiwan
Pearson Education, Inc.    US
Pearson Educational Measurement Canada, Inc.    Canada
Pearson Educational Publishers, LLC    US
Pearson Egitim Cozumleri Tikaret Limited Sirketi    Turkey
Pearson English (Shanghai) Software Technology Co., Ltd.    China
Pearson English Corporation    US
Pearson English KK    Japan
Pearson Falstaff (Holdings) Inc.    US
Pearson France SAS    France
Pearson Funding Five plc    UK
Pearson Funding Four plc    UK
Pearson Funding One plc    UK
Pearson Funding Two plc    UK
Pearson Group FURBS Trustee Limited    UK
Pearson Group Pension Trustee Limited    UK
Pearson Heinemann Limited    UK
Pearson Holdings Inc.    US
Pearson Holdings Southern Africa (Pty) Limited    South Africa
Pearson in Practice ATA Limited    UK
Pearson in Practice Holdings Limited    UK
Pearson in Practice Skills Based Learning Limited    UK
Pearson in Practice Technology Limited    UK
Pearson Inc.    US
Pearson India Education Services Private Limited    India
Pearson International Finance Limited    UK
Pearson Investment Holdings, Inc.    US
Pearson Ioki sp. z o.o.    Poland
Pearson Italia S.p.A    Italy
Pearson Japan KK    Japan
Pearson Lanka (Private) Limited    Sri Lanka


Company   

Country of

Incorporation

Pearson Learning China (HK) Limited    Hong Kong
Pearson Lesotho (Pty) Ltd    Lesotho
Pearson Loan Finance No. 3 Limited    UK
Pearson Loan Finance No. 4 Limited    UK
Pearson Loan Finance No.2 Unlimited    UK
Pearson Loan Finance Unlimited    UK
Pearson Longman LLC    US
Pearson Longman Uganda Limited    Uganda
Pearson Luxembourg No. 2. Sarl    Luxembourg
Pearson Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.    Malaysia
Pearson Management Services Limited    UK
Pearson Management Services Philippines Inc.    Philippines
Pearson South Africa (Pty) Ltd (formerly Pearson Marang (Pty) Ltd)    South Africa
Pearson Netherlands B.V.    Netherlands
Pearson Netherlands Holdings B.V.    Netherlands
Pearson New Zealand Limited    New Zealand
Pearson Nominees Limited    UK
Pearson Online Tutoring LLC    US
Pearson Overseas Holdings Limited    UK
Pearson PEM P.R., Inc.    Puerto Rico
Pearson Pension Property Fund Limited    UK
Pearson PRH Holdings Limited    UK
Pearson Professional Assessments Limited    UK
Pearson Publications Inc.    US
Pearson Real Estate Holdings Inc.    US
Pearson Real Estate Holdings Limited    UK
Pearson Schweiz AG    Switzerland
Pearson Services Limited    UK
Pearson Shared Services Limited    UK
Pearson Sweden AB    Sweden
Pearson VUE Philippines, Inc.    Philippines
Peisheng Yucai (Beijing) Technology Development Limited    China
Penguin Capital, LLC    US
Peter Honey Publications Ltd    UK
Phumelela Publishers (Pty) Ltd    South Africa
PN Holdings Inc.    US
Prentice-Hall Hispanoamericana S.A. de C.V.    Mexico
Prentice-Hall Holdings B.V.    Netherlands
ProctorCam, Inc.    US
PT Efficient English Services    Indonesia
Reading Property Holdings LLC    US
Rebus Planning Associates Inc    US
Regents Publishing Co., Inc.    US
Reston Publishing Co., Inc    US
Revolution Learning Capital Partners, L.P.    US
Revolution Pearson Special    US
Rycade Capital Corporation    US
Sector Training Limited    UK
Servicios Administrativos Pearson Educacion S.A. de C.V.    Mexico
Shanghai AWL Education Software Ltd    China
Silver Burdett Ginn Inc.    US
Skylight Training and Publishing Inc    US


Company   

Country of

Incorporation

Smarthinking, Inc.    US
Sound Holdings Inc.    US
Spear Insurance Company Limited    Bermuda
Stark Holding GmbH    Germany
Stark Verlagsgesellschaft mbH & Co. KG    Germany
Stark Verwaltungsgesellschaft mbH    Germany
Sunnykey International Holdings Limited (BVI)    BVI
Tecquipment Services Limited    UK
Testchange Limited    UK
Texas Connections Academy at Houston, LLC    US
The Assessment Company Limited    UK
The Coaching Space Limited    UK
The Learning Edge International pty Ltd    Australia
The SIOP Institute, LLC    US
The Waite Group Inc    US
TQ Catalis Limited    UK
TQ Clapham Limited    UK
TQ Education and Training Limited    UK
TQ Education and Training Limited    Saudi Arabia
TQ Global Limited    UK
TQ Group Limited    UK
TQ Holdings Limited    UK
TQ Training Limited    UK
TQ Training Services Limited    UK
TQ Trustees Limited    UK
Training for Advancement Holdings Limited    UK
Training for Advancement Limited    UK
Vue Testing Services Israel Ltd    Israel
Wall Street English Training Centre (Shanghai) Company Limited    China
Wall Street Institute Kft,    Hungary
Wall Street Institute Master Italia Srl    Italy
WP Group Pension Trustees Limited    UK
WSE Education Brazil Licenciamentos e Cursos de Idiomas Ltda.    Brazil
WSE Training Centre (Guangdong) Co., Ltd.    China
WSI Education GmbH    Germany
WSI International, Inc.    US
WSI Korea, Inc    South Korea

Exhibit 12.1

CERTIFICATIONS

I, John Fallon, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Pearson plc;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this annual report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this annual report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this annual report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of Pearson plc as of, and for, the periods presented in this annual report;

 

4. Pearson plc’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for Pearson plc and have:

 

  a) designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to Pearson plc, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this annual report is being prepared;

 

  b) designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) evaluated the effectiveness of Pearson plc’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this annual report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) disclosed in this annual report any change in Pearson plc’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, Pearson plc’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. Pearson plc’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to Pearson plc’s auditors and the audit committee of Pearson plc’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent function):

 

  a) all significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect Pearson plc’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in Pearson plc’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 23, 2016

 

/s/ John Fallon

John Fallon
Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 12.2

CERTIFICATIONS

I, Coram Williams, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Pearson plc;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this annual report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this annual report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this annual report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of Pearson plc as of, and for, the periods presented in this annual report;

 

4. Pearson plc’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for Pearson plc and have:

 

  a) designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to Pearson plc, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this annual report is being prepared;

 

  b) designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) evaluated the effectiveness of Pearson plc’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this annual report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) disclosed in this annual report any change in Pearson plc’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, Pearson plc’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. Pearson plc’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to Pearson plc’s auditors and the audit committee of Pearson plc’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent function):

 

  a) all significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect Pearson plc’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in Pearson plc’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 23, 2016

 

/s/ Coram Williams

Coram Williams
Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 13.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 20-F of Pearson plc (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2015 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, John Fallon, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify to my knowledge, pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (18 U.S.C. Section 1350), that:

 

  1. The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

  2. The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

Dated: March 23, 2016

 

/s/ John Fallon

John Fallon
Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 13.2

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 20-F of Pearson plc (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2015 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Coram Williams, Chief Financial Officer of the Company, certify to my knowledge, pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (18 U.S.C. Section 1350), that:

 

  1. The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

  2. The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

Dated: March 23, 2016

 

/s/ Coram Williams

Coram Williams
Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 15

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements on Forms S-8 (Nos. 333-173182, 333-66444, 333-45070 and 333-44590) of Pearson plc of our report dated March 23, 2016 relating to the financial statements and effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting of Pearson plc, which appears in this Annual Report on Form 20-F.

 

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
London, England
March 23, 2016